Issuu

GIÁO ÁN CHƯƠNG TRÌNH MỚI MÔN TIẾNG ANH

vectorstock.com/31086119

Ths Nguyễn Thanh Tú eBook Collection DẠY KÈM QUY NHƠN LESSON PLAN PHÁT TRIỂN NỘI DUNG

GIÁO ÁN CẢ NĂM CHƯƠNG TRÌNH MỚI Môn Tiếng Anh 7 GV Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh Năm học 2018-2019 WORD VERSION | 2021 EDITION ORDER NOW / CHUYỂN GIAO QUA EMAIL TAILIEUCHUANTHAMKHAO@GMAIL.COM Tài liệu chuẩn tham khảo Phát triển kênh bởi Ths Nguyễn Thanh Tú Đơn vị tài trợ / phát hành / chia sẻ học thuật : Nguyen Thanh Tu Group Hỗ trợ trực tuyến Fb www.facebook.com/DayKemQuyNhon Mobi/Zalo 0905779594

THE FIRST SEMESTER WEEK: 1

Period 1: REVISION

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to review all the tenses they’ve learnt in grade 6. 2. Skills: Speaking, reading, writing, listening 3. Attitude: Teaching Ss to be interested in doing exercises. 4. Ability needed: - Communication, self study. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbooks, sub-board. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ …. - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ …............................................................................ 7C: ....../ …............................................................................ 2. Oral test - During the lesson 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Chatting: - Teacher asks students some questions about television: - How do you feel on the first day at school? - What did you do last summer vacation? - How did you feel?

KÈ

.........................................

- Collect Ss’ answers then lead into the new lesson. B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

Activity 1: Review the tenses in English 6 - Ask Ss to repeat the tenses I. Tenses that they’ve learnt in grade 1. Present simple: 6. a, Form:(+) S + V (s,es)............... - Ss work in groups and (-) S + don't/ doesn't + V............ discuss about the present (?) Do/ Does + S + V.........? simple tense. b, Signals: - Call on some Ss to give - always, usually, often, generally, frequently, answers. occasionally, sometimes, never, seldom, rarely.... - Ss retell the form and the - once/ twice/ three times.................a day/ a week/ a 1

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

use of the tense. month........ - T remarks and corrects if - every + N any - in the morning/ afternoon/ evening - Ss take note. 2. Present progressive: a, Form: - Ss work in groups and (+) S + am/ is/ are +V-ing............... discuss about the present (-) S + am/ is/ are + not + V-ing............ progressive tense. (?) Am/ is/ are + S + V-ing.........? b, Signals - Call on some Ss to give - at the moment, at present, at this time, at this answers. moment, now, right now - look/ listen/ hurry up/ be careful/ be quiet/ sssh - Ss retell the form and the * Note: Nh÷ng ®éng tõ sau kh«ng thêng dïng ë hiÖn use of the tense. t¹i tiÕp diÔn: - hear, smell, feel, sound, look, taste, see........ - T remarks and corrects if - dislike, fear, hate, like, love, mind,want, wish, prefer, any need, think, recognize, remember, forget, know, - Ss take note. understand, mean 3. Present perfect: - Ss work in groups and a, Form: discuss about the present (+) S + have/ has + PP .......... perfect tense. - Call on some Ss to give (-) S + have/ has + not+ PP ......... (?) Have/ has + S + PP .........? answers. - Ss retell the form and the b. Signals: - since/ for/ just/ already/ recently= lately/ ever/ use of the tense. - T remarks and corrects if never...before/ not...yet/ once/ twice/ three times..../ so far= up to now= up to the present= until now/ first any time/ second time.... - Ss take note. 4. Past simple: a, Form: (+) S + V-ed............... (-) S + did + not + V............... (?) Did + S + V.........? - Ss work in groups and b, Signal: discuss about the past - yesterday, last + N, ago/ then, in + t.gian(qk) simple and future simple 5. Future simple: tenses. - Call on some Ss to give a, Form: (+) S + will + V............... answers. (-) S + won't + V............... - Ss retell the form and the (?) Will + S + V.................? use of the tense. b, Signals: - T remarks and corrects if - tomorrow - next + N any - tonight/ this evening/ this weekend... - Ss take note. - soon/ some day/ one day/ some time - in + a period of time Activity 2: Do exercises 2

II. Exercises Exercise 1: Present simple or present progressive? 1. is sleeping 2. eat 3. is running 4. rises / sets 5. is 6. am doing / think / know 7. buy 8. rains / is raining

FF IC IA L

- T gives out the exercises on the board and asks Ss to do them in pairs. - Ss work in pairs doing the tasks. Exercise 1: Present simple or present progressive? 1. Be quiet! The baby (sleep). 2. We seldom (eat) …..before 6.30. 3. Look! a man (run) after a bus. He (want)…….to catch it. 4. The sun (rise)….. in the east and (set) ……in the west. 5. It (be)…….. often hot in summer. 6. I (do) …….an exercise on present tenses at this moment and I (think)……….that I (know)…….. how to use it now. 7. My mother sometimes (buy) ………..vegetables at this market. 8. It (rain)…… much in summer. It (rain) ……now Exercise 2: Present tenses. 1. Listen! I (think) someone (knock) at the door. 2. Up to the present, we (write)almost every lesson in the book. 3. The earth (circle) the sun once every 365 days. 4. The farmers (work) in the field at the moment. 5. How many time you (see) him since he went to Edinburgh? 6. Do you know that man, who (smoke) there? 7. Mrs Green always (go) to work by bus. 8. We (be) from France. We (be) there for 20 years. - Ask some Ss to write their answers on the board while others correct. - T gives remark and then gives feedback

Exercise 2: Present tenses. 1. think / is knocking 2. have written 3. circles 4. are working 5. have ....seen 6. is smoking 7. goes 8. is / have been

ẠY

KÈ

4. Consolidation - Ask Ss to retell the main grammar they’ve reviewed. 5. Homework - Ask Ss to revise these grammar by heart. - Prepare: Unit 1: GETTING STARTED- Page 6 - Textbook. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Period 2: UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES. Lesson 1: Getting started 3

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to extend and practise vocabulary related to hobbies. - Vocabulary: Know some words related to hobbies: collecting dool, arranging flowers, mountain climbing, cycling, skating, gardening,... - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Review present simple and future simple; verbs of liking + V-ing. 2. Skills: - Listening: Listen to the conversation among Nick, Elena and Mi; listen and repeat some hobbies. - Reading: Read the conversation and then do true/ false exercise and answer the following questions. - Speaking: work in pair to create short role- play with their hobbies. - Writing: Write the hobbies they like. 3. Attitude:To teach Ss to work hard, love their hobbies and know the usefulness of their hobbies. 4. Ability needed: - Communication, self study. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ …. - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ …............................................................................ 7C: ....../ …............................................................................ 2. Oral test - During the lesson 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Brainstorming: - T writes the words hobbies on the board and divides the class into two groups. The two groups use the different chalk - Ask students in each groups take turn to write their hobbies - The group with more and correct words is the winner

readingarranging flowers HOBBIES - Collect Ss’ answers then lead into the new lesson. 4

B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Presentation * Pre-teach vocabulary: expression/ mine/ real I. New words : - upstairs (adv): trên gác object/ translation/ situation. - unusual (adj): khác thường - T: writes new words on the board. - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first then the -a piece of cake (idom) : dễ ợt - skate(v) : trượt pa tanh whole class. - Ss copy all the words. - arrange (v) : sắp xếp - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. - board game (n) trò chơi trên bàn cờ * Checking: rub out and remember. - bird (n): con chim - Whole class play the game. - same (adj): như nhau * Presentation the conversation: - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the questions: + Can you guess who they are? + Where are they? + What can you see on the shelf? What may the Key: - They are Nick, Elena and Mi hobby be? -They are at Nick and Elena's - Ss look at the picture and listen carefully then house answer the questions in turn. - There are a lot of dolls on the - T writes the answers quickly on the board. shelf - T introduces Elena -Nick's sister - T plays the recording Activity 2: Practice - Play the tape and ask students to listen without II-Practice: textbook for the first time, the second time 1. Listen and read. repeating the conversation with book. - Go through the sentences a. Are these sentences true or - T asks Ss to work individually to find out false?Key: which sentences are true/ false 1- T: They go upstairs to her - Ss read the sentences and the dialogue to room. answer True or False individually. 2- T -Ask ss to share their answers 3-F: Mi's hobby is collecting - Some Ss give the answers orally. glass bottles - T corrects and then gives feedback. 4- F: Her parents, aunt and uncle 5- T 1.Transfering the learning task: b. Answer the questions - Set the situation and guide Ss what to do -Go through the questions and ask Ss to work in pair answerthe questions given in part 1b- Page Key: 7. 1. She receives dolls on special 2. Doing the task: occasions - Ss work in pairs to read the text and answer 2. No, they aren't the questions. 3.She keeps them after using them 5

4. No, she doesn't 5. No, she hasn't

FF IC IA L

3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of class. - Some pairs practice aloud while other two Ss write the answer on the boards. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - Give the remarks to students’ activities then conclude the aim of the part. - Feed back. -Play the recording and let Sslisten and repeat the words in part 2/ p7. - Call on some Ss repeat aloud before class - Ssliten to the tape and repeat.

2. Listen and repeat.

ẠY

KÈ

3. Choose the words/ phrases in 2 that match the pictures. Write *Matching - Have Ss work individually to match the words/ them in the spaces. Key: phrases from part 2 with the pictures in part 1. playing boarding games 3/p7. 2. taking photos - Let them compare their answer with a partner 3. bird-watching 4. cycling - Ss do the task individually then share the 5. playing the guitar answerswith a partner. 6. gardening 7. cooking - Call on some Ss to give their own answers 8. arranging flowers then correct. - Get feedback and confirm the correct answers 9. skating 4. Work in pairs and complete - Ss correct their work and copy down. the tables. Key: - Ask Ss to work in pairs to complete the table +Cheap hobbies: gardening, birdwatching, collecting bottles, .... - Ss do the task in pairs. +Expensive hobbies: Taking photos, playing the guitar, arranging flowers - Some Ss give their answers by writing on the +Easy hobbies: gardening, board. collecting bottles, playing board - Correct and give feedback. games, … +Difficult hobbies: playing the guitar, cooking, arranging flowers, skating.....

Activity 3: Production *Game: III. Further practice: - GuideSs how to complete the Game : FIND SOMEONE WHO table, using "Do you like ..?" a, In three-five minutes, ask as many - Ask Ss try to ask as many their classmates as you can about which hobbies classmates asthey can about which they like. hobbies from 3 they like by using Eg: A. Do you like gardening? 6

FF IC IA L

the question: Do you like ….? B. No, I don’t / Yes, I do. - Ss play the game in groups b, Complete the table. - T sets a time 3-5 minutes for Ss to Find someone who …… do this activity cycling Eg: Lan, Nam,… - Ask Ss to complete the table, by arranging flowers writing their classmates’ names taking photos besides the hobbies they like.The student with the most names wins, - skating cooking - He/she has to read aloud the names on the list. playing the guitar

4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson: the conversation; some expressions and review the words about hobbies. - Guide SS to learn new words: learning tip. 5. Homework: - Ask Ss to learn new words by heart. - Read the conversation again. - Do exercises: B1, B2, B3 (page 4,5- workbook)+ Translate the conversation in Getting started into Vietnamese. - Prepare: A closer look 1/ Page 8- textbook.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Period 3: UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES. Lesson 2: A closer look 1

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to practise vocabulary related to hobbies. - Vocabulary: Know some words related to hobbies: horse -riding gymnastic, headphone, melody, plant, creative, ... - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the sounds /ə/ and /ɜ:/ andfind out the words with the sounds /ə/ and /ɜ:/ - Grammar: Review present simple and future simple; verbs of liking + V-ing. 2. Skills: - Listening: Listen and repeat the words and sounds, underline the sounds /ə/ and /ɜ:/ they hear. - Writing: use the verbs and words given to make phrases, use the words given to complete the sentences. 3. Attitude: To teach SS to work hard, love their hobbies and know the usefulness of their hobbies 4. Ability needed: - Communication, self study. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. 7

FF IC IA L

- Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ …. - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ …............................................................................ 7C: ....../ …............................................................................ 2. Oral test - S1: go to the board to write new words - S2: read the text and answer some questions. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Guessing game: - Ask Ss to guess the hobbies from gesture - T calls one student goes to the board and uses gesture to express his/her hobby. -Other students guess what hobby is - The student with the correct guessing goes to the board to express his/her hobby - Introduce the new lesson B. Presentation:

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary * Pre-teach vocabulary: expression/ mine/ I. Vocabulary - horse -riding (n): môn cưỡi ngựa visual aids/ translation/ situation. - gymnastic(n): môn thể dục - T: writes new words on the board. - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first then - plant (v): trồng cây the whole class. - headphone (n) : tai nghe - Ss copy all the words. - melody(n): : giai điệu - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. - creative(adj): sáng tạo * Checking: rub out and remember. - paint(v) : vẽ - Whole class play the game. Ex1: Match the correct verbs with *Matching. the words or phrases. Some words/ 1.Transfering the learning task: phrases may be used with more - Set the situation and guide Ss what to do than one verb. - Have Ss read the action verbs in column A and match them with suitable words/phrases in column B - A verb can go with more than one Key: word/phrase. 1- i,d,e - Ask Ss to work in pairs 2- g 2. Doing the task: 3- b,c,j - Ss work in pairs to compare their answers 4- f,h before giving teacher the answers. 5- c 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: 6- a - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in 8

FF IC IA L

* Writing down the keywords. ? What is a keyword - T models the way to locate keywords for " listening to music" - Ask Ss to work in group of 4 Ss to do this activity - Call on Ss in different groups to write the anwers on the board - Give feedback -Confirm the correct answers

Ex2: Fill in each blank in the sentences with one hobby or one action verb from the box below. - Work in pairs to complete the sentences Key : 1. swimming/swim 2. listen/ listening to music 3. plant/ gardening 4. catch/ fishing 5. painting/ paints Ex3: Do you know what a key word.... Key: Hobbies Keywords

front of class. - Some pairs practice aloud while other two Ss write the answer on the boards. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - Other Ss check and remark - T corrects the gives feedback * Filling in the blank in the sentences. - Ask Ss to work in pairsto do this activity. - Call 2 students to write their answers on the board - Ss work in pairs to do this activity. - Have Ss read all the sentences carefully to make sure they understand the sentences. - Ss share their answers. - Write the correct answers on the board. - Give feedback - Confirm the correct answers.

fishing painting swimming

Melody, songs, headphones, noise, ... Trees, flowers, garden, … Lake, pond, catch, fish, ... Creative,colours,artist .. Pool, fun, keep fit, swim....

KÈ

Look out! (Page 12): A keyword helps us underderstand a text quikly. * Game: - Ss work in group to play the guessing game. Ex4: Game: THE KEYS TO MY HOBBY! 1. Work in group. 2. Each student thinks of a hobby and Eg: says keywords out loud. A. water, grow, flowers, 3. The rest of the group tries to guess vegetables what the hobby is..? B. Is it gardening? 4. The St with the most points is the A. Yes, it is. winner. - T calls on one student to sit in front of the class and say the keywords out aloud. The others guess and ask him/her questions: Is it ....? - Take turn to take part in the game.

ẠY D

Listening to music gardening

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation - Have some Ss read out the words first II Pronunciation: - Play the recording Ex5: Listen and tick the words you - Ss listen and tick the words they hear. hear. Repeat the words. - Give feedback Key: -Confirm the correct answers away, burn, hurt, birth, answer, - T explains how to pronunce the sound / ə neighbour, heard, common / and / ɜ: / Nguyên âm /ə/ khi phát âm, lưỡi hơi đẩy lên trên và hướng ra phía trước, là nguyên âm rất ngắn. Nguyên âm /ɜ:/ là nguyên âm dài, và khi phát âm lưỡi ở vị trí thấp và miệng mở vừa. - Ask Ss to listen and put the words in the Ex6: Listen again and put the words correct column in the correct column. - Play the recording again Key : - Ss compare their answers with the whole / ə / ; away, answer, neighbour, class. common - Give feedback / ɜ: / : burn, birth, hurt, heard -Confirm the correct answers Ex 7: Listen to the sentences and - Have Ss to work individually tick /ə/ and /ɜ:/. Practise the - Play the recording sentences. - Ss do individually Key : -Compare and check their answers - Say the word that has the sounds: /ə/ and /ə/ /ɜ:/ 1. His hobby is colleting √ /ɜ:/ stamps -Give feedback 2. My sister has a lot of √ -Confirm the correct answers photos. - Ask Ss to practice saying these sentences. - Call on some Ss practice these sentences 3. When I have free time, I usually go surfing. √ aloud. 4. I love the coloursin their √

ẠY

paintings. My friend has an unusual hobby: learning foreign languages.

4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson: new words and phrases. - Ask Ss to do exercise A1(workbook- page 3) Answer keys: /ə/: singer, cupboard, carrot, fisherman /ɜ:/: Thursday, bird, nurse, T-shirt 5. homework: - Ask Ss to learn new words by heart. 10

√

- Practice pronouncing the sounds/ə/and /ɜ:/ and read all exercises in pronunciation in textbook (page 8) again. - Do exercises: B4 (page 5+ 6 - workbook) - Prepare: A closer look 2/ Page 9+ 10- textbook. Ngày tháng năm .

FF IC IA L

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÍ DUYỆT

ẠY

KÈ

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WEEK 2:

Period 4: UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES. Lesson 3: A closer look 2

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to review the present simple and the future simple, know how to use verbs of liking. - Vocabulary: Know some words related to hobbies: result, hate, monopoly, continue, ... - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Review present simple and future simple; verbs of liking + V-ing. 2. Skills: - Writing: write a short report about their hobbies. - Speaking: Talk about types of hobbies. 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, love their hobbies and know the usefulness of their hobbies 4. Ability needed: - Inter social communication. - Talking about hobbies. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ …. - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ …............................................................................ 7C: ....../ …............................................................................ 2. Oral test - S1: Does B4- workbook page 5 - S2: Does B5- workbook page 5 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Chatting: - What do you like doing in your free time? - Do you like collecting dolls? - Do you like collecting glass bottles? - Do you enjoy mountain climbing? -> Introduce the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary 12

FF IC IA L

* Pre-teach vocabulary: expression/ mine/ I. Vocabulary visual aids/ translation/ situation. - result (n): kết quả - T: writes new words on the board. - hate (v) : ghét - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first - monopoly (n): cờ tỉ phú then the whole class. - continue (v): tiếp tục - Ss copy all the words. - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. * Checking: What and Where. - Whole class plays the game. Activity 2: Grammar II. The present simple tense and - Ask Ss to do the exercises 1, 2- P9 using the the future simple tense. presentsimple tense and the future simple tense Ex1: Complete the sentences. Use - T explains: “x 3 per week” means three the present simple or future simple times a week form of the verbs. - Have Ss do Ex 1 individually Key: - Ss do this exercise individually 1. loves; will not/ won't continue - Ask them to compare their answers 2. take - Ss compare their answers. 3. does...do - Ss check the answers and write the correct 4. will enjoy answers on the board. 5. Do... do - T gives feedback 6. Will... play -Confirm the correct answers.

ẠY

KÈ

1.Transfering the learning task: - Ask Ss to look at the table in Ex 2- P9 and make sure that they understand it - T models first - Ask Ss to work in pairs reading the table and then complete Nick’s report using the present simple. 2. Doing the task: - Ss work in pairs doing the task. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Ask Ss to compare their answers with a partner - Ss check the answers with partner then give their own answers before class. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - Other Ss check and remark -Give feedback -Confirm the correct answers - Write the correct answer on the board. * Taking a survey: - T sets the situations: “Think of some activities and make a table like the table in 2. 13

Ex2: The table below shows the results of Nick’s survey on his classmates’ hobbies. Read the table and complete his report using the present simple. Key: 1. likes 2. watch 3. don't love 4. go 5. enjoy 6. play 7. plays 8. doesn't like 9. plays

Ex 3a: Work in groups. Think of some activities and make a table

Example exchange: A: How often do you watch TV? S1: Everyday. S2:Everyday B: How often do you go swimming? S1: I don’t like swimming. S2: Twice a week

Activity S1 S2 Watching everyday everyday TV Going twice a swimming week Playing 3 times sports a week Playing computer games

like the table in 2. One St in the group asks the other group members about the frequency they do these activities while another St in the group records the answers

FF IC IA L

One St in the group asks the other group members about the frequency they do these activities while another St in the group records the answers” - Ask Ss to work in groups of 5. They should draw a table similar to the one in 2. - One group member asks and another records the answers. They may use the question: How often do you ....? Note:“Frequency” means how often someone does something in a given time frame

- Ss work in groups to take a survey - Report the result.

*Writing a short report - Ask Ss to write a short report about what they have found out. Use Nick’s report in 2 as an example. - Each group writes a short report similar to Nick’s report in 2 -Read the comment and votes for the best report.

ẠY

KÈ

Ex3b: Write a short report about what you have found out. Use Nick’s report in 2 as an example. Example: I asked some classmates about their hobbies and I got some interesting results.Everyone likes - Have Ss read the “Look out!”box. watching TV, and they watch it - T explains that some of liking verbs and not everyday. S1 doesn’t like liking such as: swimming, but …… (to) like, love, enjoy, hate (not like) + V-ing - Ss read the “Look out!”box, listen to the T’s III. Verbs of liking + Ving Ex4: Complete the sentences, explanation and then take note. - Ask Ss to work individually to do Ex 4- P10 using the -ing form of the verbs in the box. thenwrite the answers on the board. - Ss do the exercise individually, then compare Key: 1. riding their answers with a classmate 2. watching , going - Some Ss write the answers on the board. 3. talking - T checks and corrects if any. 4. playing - T sets the sence and asksSs to read the 5. eating example then explains the way to do this 6. walking 14

activity. - Ask Ss to work in pairs - Ss write sentences using the pictures as clues in pairs. - Call some Ss to write their sentences on the board. - Check and comment on Ss’ sentences.

FF IC IA L

Ex 5: Look at the pictures and write sentences. Key: 1. He doesn't like eating apples 2. They love playing table tennis 3. She hates playing the piano 4. He enjoys gardening - Have Ss work individually to write sentences 5. She likes dancing about “What each member in his/ her family likes or doesn’t like doing.” Ex 6: What does each member in - Ss do this exercise individually, thencompare your family like or not like doing? their sentences with a classmate. Write the sentences. - Call on some Ss to write their sentences on Example: the board. 1. My father likes... - Ask other Ss for their comments. Correct any 2. My father hates... mistakes. 3. My mother enjoys … 4. My mother doesn’t like… 5. My brother/sister loves … 6. My brother/sister doesn’t like…

4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson: the present simple and the simple future tense. 5. Homework: - Ask Ss to learn new words and grammar by heart. - Do exercises: B 5,6 P6+7- workbook) - Prepare: Communication Page 11- textbook.

Period 5: UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES. Lesson 4: Communication

KÈ

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ẠY

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to know how to give their opinion about somthing using "...find sth/doing sth + adj; think that sth/doing sth is + adj"and thenpractice talking about their own hobbies. - Vocabulary: Know some words related to hobbies: Making pottery, making models, carving wood, unusual, take up st, … - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words/phrases in the lesson. - Grammar: Structures: (to) find sth/doing sth + adj; (to) think that sth/doing sth is + adj. 2. Skills: 15

FF IC IA L

- Speaking: Describe and give opinion about hobbies; interview a classmate about the hobbies. - Writing: write the reasons to explain why you choose your hobbies. 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, love their hobbies and know the usefulness of their hobbies 4. Ability needed: - Inter social communication. - Describing hobbies. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ …. - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ …............................................................................ 7C: ....../ …............................................................................ 2. Oral test - S1: Does C1- workbook page 6. - S2: Does B5- workbook page 5. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: * Matching - Go through the extra vocab with Ss. - Quickly teach them if they do not know any words/ phrases - Ask Ss to work individually to do matching. - Call some Ss to give their ơn answers. - Teacher confirms the correct answers.

ẠY

KÈ

Key: A. carving wood: trạm gỗ B. making models: làm mô hình C. ice-skating: trượt băng D. dancing: khiêu vũ, nhảy, múa E. making pottery: làm đồ gốm -> Introduce the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary 16

I. Vocabulary 1. Extra vocabulary - Making pottery: making pots,dishes…from clay - Making models: making copies of things, usually smaller than the original objects. - Carving wood: making objects, and patterns by cutting away material from wood. - Unusual: different from what is usual or normal. - Take up sth: learn or start to do something, especially for pleasure.

FF IC IA L

* Pre-teach vocabulary: expression/ mine/ visual aids/ translation/ situation. - T: writes new words on the board. - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first then the whole class. - Ss copy all the words. - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. * Checking: What and Where. - Whole class plays the game.

Activity 2: Practice II. Practice 2. What do you think about the hobbies in 1? Part 2-P11: - Ask Ss about what they think about Look at the table below and tick the boxes. the hobbies in part 1 by putting the Then, complete the sentences below by check (√) in the column (one check writing one reason to explain your choice. for each hobby) boring unusual interesting - T models first then let Ss do Making √ themselves on their sheet. pottery - Ss work individually and tick the dancing appropriate boxes in two minutes. Ice-skating - Collect some Ss’ opinionand show Making on the board.

ẠY

KÈ

1.Transfering the learning task: - Have the Ss look at Look out! Box. Write some example sentences on the board and underline the two structures. - Ss look at Look out! Boxand notice on the T’s example then copy down. - Ask Ss To complete the five sentences given by writing one reason to explain their choice. 2. Doing the task: - Sswork individually - Compare their sentences with a partner. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Ask Ss to compare their answers

models Carving wood

√

E.g: + I find dancinginteresting => (to) find + doing + sth + adj. + I think dancingisinteresting =>(to) think (that) + doing sth + is + adj

1. I find making pottery ……….……… Because……………………………..…. 2. I think dancing is…………………… because ………………………….…….. 3. I find ice-skating is……………….… because ……………………………….... 4. I think making models is……………. because ………………………………… 5. I find carving wood is……………..… because …………………………………. 17

FF IC IA L

with a partner then ask some Ss to write their sentences on the board. - Ss check the answers with partner then give their own answers before class. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - Other Ss and T give comments and correct if any. Activity 3: Further practice 3. Now, interview a classmate about Part 3- P11: the hobbies in 1. Take notes and - Set the sence and ask Ss to scan reading present your partner’s answers to the the open- dialogue given in part 3- P11. class. - Ss read in individually. - Ask Ss to interview a classmate about the Example: hobbies in 1 using the table in part 2. You: What do you think about making - Ss work in pairs to complete the pottery?/ How do you find making conversation as an example. pottery? - After that Ss take turns being the person Mai: I think it is……./ I find it………. who asks the questions. This St has to note You: Why? down his/her partner’s answers to report to Mai: Because…………………………. the class You: Will you take up making pottery - Some Ss report the answers to the class in the future? Eg: Lan finds making pottery is boring Mai: Yes, I will/ I’m not sure.

ẠY

KÈ

4. Consolidation: - Recall how to use find sth/doing sth + adj; think that sth/doing sth is + adj 5. Homework: - Learn by heart vocabulary and structures. - Ex C1, C2- P6 + 7 (Workbook) - Write 5 sentences using the structure: find sth/doing sth + adj; think that sth/doing sth is + adj - Prepare: Skill 1/ Page 12- textbook. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Period 6: UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES. Lesson 5: Skills 1

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use lexical items related to hobbies, read for general and specific information about an unusual hobby then talk about their own hobbies base on the given questions. - Vocabulary: Know some words related to hobbies: eggshell, fragile, unique, pieces of art, … - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words/phrases in the lesson. - Grammar: Review present simple and future simple; verbs of liking + V-ing. 2. Skills: - Reading: read specific information about an unusual hobby. - Speaking: talk about their own hobbies base on the given questions. 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, love their hobbies and know the usefulness of their hobbies 4. Ability needed: - Inter social communication. - Talking about their hobbies. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: Does C1- workbook page 6 - S2: Writes new words carving wood dancing 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Brainstorming HOBBIES - Elicit the topic from students - Teacher models ? Work in groups to add as many bobbies as possible. ice- skating - Teacher monitors and gets feedback. ? Read all the words chorally * Suggested answers: - making models - making pottery - dancing - ice-skating - collecting dolls - doing eggshell carving 19

................................... -> Introduce the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary * Pre-teach vocabulary: translation/ I. Vocabulary: example/ pictures. - pieces of art (n): những tác phẩm nghệ - T: writes new words on the board. thuật - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first - eggshell (n) : vỏ trứng then the whole class. - fragile(adj): dễ vỡ - Ss copy all the words. - unique (adj): độc nhất, duy nhất - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. - amazing (adj): tuyệt vời, kinh ngạc * Checking: What and Where. - Whole class plays the game.

Activity 2: Reading * Pre- reading: II. Reading: -Set the scene: You are going to read 1. Work in pairs. Look at the pictures about Nick's father's unusual hobby. and discuss the questions below. ? Look at the pictures in part 1- P12 *Suggested answers ? Run through the questions and discuss. 1. We/ I can see some carved pictures. - Ss work in pairs. They look at the 2. We/ I think they are made of pictures and answer the three questions. eggshells. - Teacher monitors and gets feedback. 3. It is carving eggshells. 2. Read the text and answer the questions.

Key: 1. He thinks his father's hobby is unusual because eggshells are very fragile and his father can make beautiful pieces of art from them. 2. He saw the carved eggshells for the first time in an art gallery in the US. 3. They find it difficult and boring. 4. Yes, he does.

ẠY

KÈ

* While- reading: 1.Transfering the learning task: ? Run through the questions. ? Read the text about Nick's father's unusual hobby then write down the answers. 2. Doing the task: - Ss read the text again and answer the questions individually and then compare their answers with a classmate. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Ask for Ss’ answers and have them explain their answers. - Some Ss give the answers in turn. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - Other Ss check and remark -Give feedback - Confirm the correct answers. * Post- speaking: ? Read the text again then use no more than three words from the text to

3. Read the sentences below and use no more than three words from the text to 20

FF IC IA L

complete the sentences in part 3- P12. complete them. - Ss complete the sentences without Key: reading the text again. Then Ss share their 1. carving eggshells2. the US answers with a partner. 3. the Internet4. time ? Read aloud the correct sentences. 5. gifts - Check and confirm the correct answers. Activity 3: Speaking * Discussion III. Speaking: ? Work in pairs to discuss other uses of 4. Nick says that carved eggshells can carved eggshells. be used as gifts for your family and - Ss work in pairs to discuss other uses friends. In pairs, discuss other uses of of carved eggshells. these pieces of artwork. Share your - Encourage Ss to think creatively. ideas with the class. - Collect some Ss’ ideas then feedback. *Suggested ideas: Decorations at home, sourvenirs, lights * Group work (with bigger eggs).. ? Work in groups and take turns to talk 5. Work in groups. Take turns talking about your hobbies. Use the in part 5about your hobbies. P12 for help. 1. What is the name of your hobby? - Have some students talk about their 2. When did you start your hobby? hobbies. 3. Is your hobby easy or difficult? Why? - Ss work in groups and take turns 4. Is your hobby useful? Why? Why talking about their hobbies. not? - T monitor the conversations and note 5. Do you intend to continue your hobby down common errors. in the future? - T corrects the errors with class. ? Vote for the most exciting hobby. Who do you thinkhas the most exciting - Ss vote for the most exciting hobby. hobby? - Call on some Ss to talk about the most =>I think Hoa has the most exciting exciting hobby of their group. hobby because it’s ………

ẠY

KÈ

4. Consolidation: ? What should you mention when you talk about your hobby? 5. Homework: - Learn by heart vocabulary and practice talking about your hobby. - Ex D1,2,3 P7-8 (Workbook) - Prepare next lesson:Skills/ Page 13- textbook.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WEEK 3:

Period 7: UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES. Lesson 6: Skills 2

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use lexical items related to hobbies,listen to get specific information about a hobby and then write a paragraph about a classmate's hobby. - Vocabulary: Know some words related to hobbies. - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words/phrases in the lesson. - Grammar: Review present simple and future simple. 2. Skills: - Listening: Listen and complete each blank in the word web. - Writing: Write a paragraph about a classmate's hobby 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, love their hobbies and know the usefulness of their hobbies 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about their hobbies. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: Does D1- workbook page 7 - S2: Does D3- workbook page 8 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Chatting ? What should you mention when you talk about your hobby? Suggested answers: - Name of the hobby - Time you started the hobby - Feeling about the hobby - Your future plan about the hobby -> Introduce the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS 22

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Listening Part 1- P13: I. Listening ? Ask Ss if they know anything about 1. Do you know anything about collecting glass bottles and if they think it is collecting glass bottles? Do you useful. think it is a good hobby? Why? Why ? Answer the questions not? 1. Do you know anything about collecting glass bottles? 2. Do you think it is a good hobby? Why/ Why not? - Ss discuss in groups. - Teacher monitors and accept all the answers provided that they make sence Part 2- P13: 2. Listen to an interview about * Pre- listening: hobbies… - Set the sence: You are going to listen to an interview of A 4!Teen reporter about Mi's hobbies. Key: ? Run through all the information in 1-6 and 1. collecting glass bottles. 2. two years ago. guess in groups. 3. mother - Ss read through the word web. Have Ss 4. a, grandmother; guess the word/phrase to fill in each blank b, flower; lamps and write their guesses on the board. c, home * While listening: 5. useful - Play the recording and ask Ss to listen and 6. continue the hobby complete the word web. - Ss work in pairs to compare their answers with each other and with the word/phrase on the board. - Play the recording a second time for pairs to check their answers. - Ask for Ss’ answers and write them on the board next to their guesses. * Post- listening: 3.Work in pairs. Ask and answer Part 3- P13: questions about each other’s hobby. ? Work in pairs and interview each other about a classmate's hobby base on the word Example: Nga's hobby web in 1. Name of the hobby: collecting - Ss work in pairs and interview each other waste paper about their hobby. 2. Started: 3 years ago * Pre- writing: 3. Person who shares he hobby with ? Ask Ss to take notes on each other’s Nga: Her sister answers in the word web. 4. To do this hobby Nga has to: - Ss take note after asking their partner. a. collect paper after use - T models with a student (Nga) b. make flowers, dishes, toys. boxes... 23

c. use it for dwrafing if possible 5. Nga's feeling about the hobby: intersting, useful, save the environment 6. Future: continue the hobby.

FF IC IA L

Activity 2: Writing * While- writing: II. Writing: 4. Now, write a paragraph about your 1.Transfering the learning task: ? Write about your partner's hobby using classmate’s hobby. Use the notes from your word web. 3. Start your paragraph as shown - Allow Ss time to write a paragraph about below. their classmate’s hobby ……… is my classmate. His/her hobby is…………………………………………… 2. Doing the task: - Have Ss write his/ her paragraph. - Ss write the paragraph individually. Example writing: - Teacher monitors and gives help. Nga is my calssmate. Her hobby is 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: -Choose some good writings and read them collecting waste paper. She started aloud in front of the class doing this three years ago. Her sister - Some Ss give comments. shares this hobby with her. They usually collect paper after using at 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the school and at home too. They make task: - Other Ss check and remark some flowers, small dishes and even -T comments and corrects if neccessary. lovely toys from waste paper. Nga * Post- writing: thinks collecting waste paper is - Get some students to read aloud their interesting and useful. In the future she writings. will continue the hobby because it can help save the environment.

KÈ

4. Consolidation: ? Sum up the main content of the lesson. 5. Homework: - Ex E1,2 P9 (Workbook) - Prepare next lesson. Unit 1: Lesson 7: Looking back& Project.

ẠY

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Period 8: UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES. Lesson 7: Looking back + Project

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to recycle the language from the previous sections, consolidate and apply what they have learnt in Unit 1 by doing various activities and exercises. - Vocabulary: Review some words related to hobbies - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words/phrases in the lesson. - Grammar: Review present simple and future simple; verbs of liking + V-ing. 2. Skills: - Reading: Read and complete the sentences with appropriate hobbies. - Speaking: role-play the questions and answer with a partner and talk about their hobbies - Writing: complete the sentences about what you like or dislike doing something. 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, love their hobbies and know the usefulness of their hobbies 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about their hobbies. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: Does D1- workbook page 7 - S2: Does D3- workbook page 8 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Guessing game (Part 1- P14) - Divide the students into two big groups. - Teacher gives the definition of a hobby. (use the information in 1- P14) E.g:1. I have a lot of bottles, dolls or stamps. What is my hobby? ? Listen and say aloud the name of the hobby.=> It’s collecting things - Who has the quicker and correct answer will get one point. - Teacher monitors and gets feedbacck. KEY: 1. Collectingthings 2. bird-watching3. playing board games 25

4. arranging flowers5. making pottery6. dancing -> Introduce the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Revising vocabulary Part 2- P 14: I. Vocabulary ? Run through the verbs in the box. 2. Put one of the verbs from the box in ? Put one of the verbs from the box in each blank. Use the correct form of the each blank. Use the correct form of verb. the verb. ? Work individually then compare Key: with your partner. 1. listens2. Go - Ss do this activity individually then 3. plays4. read compare their answers with a partner. 5. Do6. collect - Have some Ss give their own answers. - Teacher checks and confirms the correct answers. 3. Add hobbies to each of the following lists Suggested answers: Part3- P 14: ? Copy the table ? Work in pairs in 5 minutes to add as Easy Difficult Cheap Expensive many hobbies to the table as possible. hobbies hobbies hobbies hobbies collecting skating collecting collecting - Ss do this activity in pairs.

- Have some students go to the board write down their answers. - Give feedback.

labbels cooking collecting painting leaves playing board games ............

used books collecting leaves painting ..............

cars taking pictures travelling ..............

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 2: Revising grammar Part4- P 14: II. Grammar 1.Transfering the learning task: 4. Use the present simple or future ? What are the differences between the present simple form of each verb to simple and future simple? complete the passage. ? Use the present simple and future simple Key: form of each verb to complete the passage. 1. have 2. likes ? Work individualy then compare the answers 3. plays 4. doesn't like with your partner. 6. walks 5. enjooys 2. Doing the task: 7. will join 8. loves - Ss do this exercise individually then compare 9. don't like 10. will read their answers with a partner. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Call on some students to give the answers. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - Other Ss check and remark -T comments and corrects if neccessary. 26

5. Write true sentences about yourself. => We use “V-ing” after like, enjoy, love, hate..... E.g: 1. I like cooking. 2. I enjoy going to the beach with my family in the summmer.

FF IC IA L

Part5- P 14: ? What form of the verbs can we use after like, enjoy, love, hate....? ? Use these verbs to write true sentences about yourself. - Ss do this exercise individually then compare their sentences with a partner. - Get some students write their sentences on the board. - Some Ss write their sentences on the board. - Give feedback

Activity 4: Comunication Part6- P 14: III. Communication ? Work in pairs in 5' 6. Role- play: - StudentAplays the role of a reporter. Example: Student B is a famous person. Interview the other about his/her hobbies. A: Good moring. Nice to meet you. - Teacher monitors and gives help. B: Good moring. Nice to meet you too. - Ss work in pairs. One St interviews the A: Can I ask you some questions about other about his/her hobbies. your hobbies? - Ask some pairs to act out the interview in B: Yes, of course. front of the class. Vote for the best A: What is your favourite hobby? interview. B: It's painting

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 5: Project IV. Project: Hobby collage - T gives explanation: “Collage is the art of 1.Work in groups of three or four. making apicture by ticking pieces of colourd paper, cloth, or photographs onto 2. Take turn talking about your a surface. It can be also a picture that you hobbies. 3. Work together to cut and glue make by doing this”. - Ask Ss to read the four instructions in the pictures from magazines or draw pictures of your group members’ book hobbies. - Ss work in group to do the project (may 4. Show and describe your collage to be at home). the class.

4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson: vocabulary and grammar in unit 1. 5. Homework: - Learn again the present simple and simple future tense and verbs of liking + V-ing to talk about hobbies. - Prepare: UNIT 2: GETTING STARTED Page 16+17- textbook. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Period 9: UNIT 2: HEALTH. Lesson 1: Getting started

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to understand the dialogue about health in detail. Give advice on healthy living, use “have a/an; feel” to talk about health problems and use the lexical items related to the topic health issuess. - Vocabulary: Know some words related to health: junk food, put on weight, sunburn, spot, allergy, sickness, … - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words/phrases in the lesson. - Grammar: have a/an + N; feel + Adj, imperatives. 2. Skills: - Listening: Listen to the conversation between Nick and Phong about health, some health proplems and match them with the correct pictures. - Reading: Read the conversation between Nick and Phong and do exerxises. - Speaking: Talk about health proplems and advice. 3. Attitude:Work hard, know about health proplems and advices. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Know how to keep fit and stay healthy. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36........................................................................... 2. Oral test - During the lesson 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Brainstorming - Teacher elicits the topic from students. ? Work in two teams and write one by one word from students. - Teacher monitors and gets feedback. * Suggested answers: + sickness + do exercise + have + keep fit + tired ........

-T introduces the new lesson

HEALTH

sick strong B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Presentation * Pre-teach vocabulary: translation/ I. New words: example/ pictures. - T: writes new words on the board. (n): sức khỏe - health - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first (n): đồ ăn nhanh - junk food then the whole class. - put on weight (v): tăng cân - Ss copy all the words. - sunburn (n): cháy nắng - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. (adj): khỏe mạnh - healthy * Checking: Slap the board. - Whole class plays the game. - avoid + N/Ving (v): tránh (n): dị ứng - allergy - T: Asks Ss to open their books to the (n): bệnh tật - sickness picture. T can ask Ss prediction questions (n): lời khuyên - advice about the picture and generally focus Ss (n): mụn nhọt -spot attention on the topic of the lesson. Questions may include: • What can you see in the picture? • What time is it? • What do you think the people in the picture are talking about? • Who do you think is healthier? - Ss answer the question as a class. T then plays the dialogue and has the Ss follow along. Ss may track the dialogue with their fingers as they listen to the recording Activity 2: Practice II-Practice: Part 1a- P16: 1. Listen and read. 1.Transfering the learning task: a. Can you find a word or phrase that - T asks Ss to complete the task mean: individually or in pairs. Key: 1. Zooniverse 2. Doing the task: - Ss read the dialogue and do the task 2. I don’t feel like it. individually. 3. sound down 4. putting on weight 3. Reporting the task result and 5. won’t take no for an answer discuss: - Call on some students to give the answers. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing 29

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

the task: - Other Ss check and remark - T checks answers and asks Ss to use each item in a sentence. Part 1b- P16: b. Read the conversation again. Who - T asks Ss to read the conversation wants to do the following things? again and complete the table. Key: - Ss read the dialogue again then Nick Phong complete the table. 1. stay at home - T may write the table on the board 2. play computer games while Ss are working individually, then 3. go outside correct the exercise as a class by asking 4. go swimming Ss to come to the board and tick the 5. avoid getting sunburnt correct column. 2a. Match the health issuses in the box Part 2a- P17: with the pictures. Then listen and repeat. - T asks Ss to look at the pictures. As a Key: class Ss can call out which word they think matches each picture. 1. e 2. f 3. d - Ss do the matching in pairs. 4. c 5.b 6.a - T asks Ss to write the words below each picture. - T plays the recording and Ss repeat. T corrects the exercise with the whole class. 2b. Which problems do you think are the Part 2b- P17: most common with your classmates? - T asks Ss to write a numbered list in their notebooks from 6 to 1. T then 1- Flu 4- …. asks Ss to rank the health issues from 2- …. 5- …. the most common to the least common 3- ….. 6- …. and share with a partner. T should encourage Ss to give rasons for their rankings. - Ss discuss and do the task in groups. Part 3- P17: 3. These people have the wrong advice. - T asks one S to read though the list of Can you matchthe correct advice with advice aloud. each person. - T asks Ss to do the matching activity Key: individually.- Ss do the task individually then give their own 1. c 2. d 3. e answers in turn. 4.b 5.a - T corrects the activity as a class. Activity 3: Production Part 4- P17: 4. Game - T divides the class into two groups and Exampe: gives one group ‘problem’ cards, and one 30

A: I have spots. B: Oh, I’m sorry. My advice is “Wear a sun hat”/ Yes! My advice is “Wash your face regularly”

FF IC IA L

goup ‘advice’ cards. T instructs Ss to walk around the room and read their cards to each other and stand next to the person who has the matching advice or problem card. T can call on some pairs to read their cards aloud. T can repeat the activity as many times as time permits. - T may also extend the activity by asking Ss to create a dialogue around the problem/advice cards. Ss may do this in class or as homework.

4. Consolidation: -Sum up the main content of the lesson 5. Homework: - Learn new words by heart. - Read the conversation again and translate it into Vietnamese. - Do exercises: B1,2,3, ( page 10,11 – workbook) - Prepare: A closer look 1/ Page 18- textbook.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Ngày tháng năm .

ẠY

KÈ

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÍ DUYỆT

WEEK 4:

Period 10: UNIT 2: HEALTH. Lesson 2: A closer look 1

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to practise vocabulary related to health. issues, know how to pronounce the sounds /f/ and /v/ then find out the words with the sounds /f/ and /v/. - Vocabulary: Know some words related to health: headache, earache, sore throat, weak, temperature, patient, problem,… - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the sounds /f/ and /v/. - Grammar: have a/an + N; feel + Adj, imperatives with more and less. 2. Skills: - Listening: Listen and repeat the words and sounds, underline the sounds /f/ and /v/ they hear. - Writing: Use “have a/an; feel” to talk about health problems - Speaking: Talk to your partner about the last time they had a health proplem 3. Attitude: Work hard, know about health proplems and advices. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Know how to keep fit and stay healthy. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: goes to the board to write new words - S2: goes to the board and write some health proplems. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Giving advice - T calls on one student to the board. He/she uses gesture to express the health problem. - Other Ss ask him/her: + Do you have (a/an)....? + Do you feel....? B. Presentation: 32

MAIN CONTENTS

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

ho cơn đau đầu nhiệt độ cơn đau tai cơn đau họng yếu bệnh nhân vấn đề

+Have a/ an: cough, headache, sorethroat, temprature, an allergy, a spot, (a) sunburn, a sickness,….. +Have: (the) flu, stomachache, toothache, earache, spots,…… +Feel: sick, tired, weak,……

- T writes have a/an, have, feel on the board then asks Ss to read the words from the first column. - Whole class read the words aloud. - T writes the words in a word web around have a/an. T encourages Ss to add more words. T repeats this for the next two columns. - Ss add more words in turn. Part 1- P.18 - T asks Ss to do the exercise individually - Ss do the task individually then check with partner. - Some Ss give the answers orally. - T corrects the exercise as a class

(n/v): (n) (n): (n): (n): (adj): (n): (n):

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary * Pre- teach vocabulary: expression/ I. Vocabulary - cough mine/ visual aids/ translation/ situation - Ss listen and repeat in class then - headache individually. - temperrature - T: writes new words on the board. - earache - Ss copy all the words. - sore throat - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. - weak *Checking: rub out and remember - patient - Whole class plays the game. - problem

1. Look at the pictures. Write the problem below the picture of each patient.

ẠY

KÈ

Part 2- P.18 1.Transfering the learning task: - T explains the task then asks Ss to do the task in pairs. 2. Doing the task: - Ss work in pairsto complete the sentences. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Call on some Ss togive their own answers. - Ss compare the answers with partner then write the answerson the board. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - Other Ss remark. - T remarks and corrects the exercise as a class Part 3- P.18 33

Key: 1. Flu

2. Sunburn

3. Allergy

4. Tired/Weak

2. Now, read the doctor’s notes about his patients and fill in the missing words. Key: 1. (a) sunburn 2. the flu 3. tired, temperature 4. sick, stomachache 5. sore throat

3. Role-play the meeting with the

FF IC IA L

doctor. Example: A: Hi, doctor Thao. T: Hi, Hung A: I was outside all day yesterday. I feel very hot and my face is red. T: I see. I think you have a sunburn.

4. Choose a health problem. Work in groups. Tell your group about the last time you had that problem. E.g: A: I had flu two weeks ago.

- T explains how to do this activity then asks one student to come to the front of the class and models with him/her - One St practices with the T while others listen and follow. - T divides Ss into pairs. T encourages Ss to think about how each person (Doctor and patient) feels and will act. - Ss choose a problem and make a roleplay. They may choose more than one. - T gives Ss about 5 minutes to practice their role-plays. T then asks some pairs to perform their role-plays for the class. -Call on some pairs to practise in front of the class then ask: What was Mai's problem? What advice did Dr Thao have? - Ss practice in pairs before class. Part 4- P.18 - T asks 4 ss to model the example conversation then T divides the class into groups of 4 ss and asks ss to talk about a health problem - T may ask ss to extend the conversation by trying to figure out what the most common health problem in the group and then report back to the class

B: Me too, I felt so weak. C: Oh. I had a sore throat yesterday.

D: I had toothache. I think I ate too many sweets.

áş Y

KĂˆ

Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation Part 5- P.18 II. Pronunciation: - Go through the words in the table 5. Listen and circle the words you hear. - Play the recording and have circle the 1. fat 2. ferry words they hear 3. vas 4. vault Part 6- P.18 6. leave - T asks ss to listen to the sentences once 5. save 6. Listen and circle the words with the and repeat then asks ss to circle the words with /f/ or/v/ /f/ or /v/ sound. Then say the sentences. sounds 1. Fast, food - T has ss listen to the recording again and 2. have, felt gives the 3. fatter correct answers to the entire class 4. having, lifestyle 5. give

4. Consolidation: 34

FF IC IA L

-“Have a/an + N, have + N, feel + adj” to talk about health problems. - How to pronounce the sounds /f/ and /v/ ? Recall some phrases which has the two sounds. 5. Homework: - Learn by heart the new words. - Do ex A1, 2,3 in workbook - Prepare A closer look 2/ Page 19- textbook. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Period 11: UNIT 2: HEALTH.

Lesson 3: A closer look 2

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to understand about imperative with more and less; form compound sentences and use them correctly. - Vocabulary: Know some words related to health tips: imperative, expert, obesity,limit, depression,tip,concentrate,… - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words in the leson. - Grammar: imperatives with more and less, compound sentences. 2. Skills: - Reading, speaking and writing. 3. Attitude: Work hard, know about health proplems and advices. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Know how to keep fit and stay healthy. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: to go to the board to write new words - S2: does A1, 2 in workbook. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Simmon says: - T can give Ss simple classroom commands. Eg: stand up, sit down, raise your hand, open your book, close your book. .... - Ss do the command as the T says it. B. Presentation: 35

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary I. Vocabulary * Pre- teach vocabulary: expression/ - imperative (n): mệnh lệnh mine/ visual aids/ translation/ situation - tip (n) lời khuyên - T says aloud the word by word while - expert (n): Chuyên gia Ss listen and repeat after twice. - stay in shape (v): giữ dáng - T writes new words on the board. - obesity (a) béo phì - Ss listen and repeat the whole - depression (n): sự chán nản classfirst then in individual. - concentrate (v): tập trung - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. - limit (v): hạn chế - compound (n):ghép *Checking: rub out and remember - independent (a): độc lập - Whole class plays the game. - coordinate (v): kết hợp - quote (n): trích dẫn Activity 2: Grammar *Imperatives with more and less II. Imperatives with more and less - Ask Ss to recall about the game Simon Model sentences: says to elicit the imperative - T models sentence on the board then - Do more exercise explains the aims of using the imperative. - Watch less TV - Don't play more games - Ss listen and follow. - T asks Ss to read through the yellow Usage:We can use the imperative for direct commands, order or suggestions box. - Ss read the yellow box individually. 1. Look at the pictures. Which health Part 1- P19 tips from the box above would you give - T asks Ss to look at the pictures and to each of these people? calls on Ss to tell the class what they see. - T asks Ss to work in pairs to practice Suggested answers: and they can give the reasons for the a. sleep more. advice b. spend less time playing computer - Ss work in pairs to givethe advice for games. each person. c. eat less junk food/ Do more exercises. - Call on some pairs to practice. d. sunbathe less. - Ss give their own answers in turn. - T checks and correct if any. 2. Top Health Tips for Teens. Part 2- P19 (Ss’ ideas) - Ask Ss to look at the yellow Grammar Suggested answers: box again then work in groups of 4 Ss 1- spend less time playing computer to choose 6 pieces of advice are most games. important for teens and explain why. 2- eat less junk food. - Let Ss discuss their idea in their groups 3- do more exercises. - Ask some groups present their ideas in 4- watch TV less. front of the class 5- wash your hands more. - Have others comment in class. 6- eat more fruit/vegetables. 36

FF IC IA L

3. Look at the article on the Teen Healthwebsite. Fill in the blanks to complete their top six health tips. Key: 1. Do more exercise! 2. Sleep more! 3. Eat less junk food 4. Wash your hands more. 5. Watch less TV 6. Spend less time playing computer games.

III. Compound sentences

Part 3- P19 1.Transfering the learning task: - T asks Ss to read through the Teen Health websiteindividually and complete the headings. 2. Doing the task: - Ss read the text individually to complete their top six health tips. - T encourages the class and helps if any. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Some Ss give their own answers in turn before class. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T checks and corrects if any then gives feedback. *Compound sentences: - T writes the words: AND, BUT, OR,SO on the board then ask Ss: What these words are called.

ẠY

KÈ

- When we want to join two ideas, we can - Ss give the answer. (maybe in English link two simple sentences to form a compound sentence. or Vietnamese)=>CONJUNCTION -We can do this using acoordinating - T asks Ss to read the first paragraph of conjunction like AND (for addition), OR the Yellow Box and asks: What do we (for choice), BUT (for a contrast),SO ( for call a sentence made by linking two a result) simple sentences? - Notice: There is usually a comma(,) - Ss give the answer “A compound after a first independent clause. sentence.” - T asks Ss to read the second paragraph of the Yellow Box again and asks: What does a coordinating conjunction do? - Ss give the answer “It joins two simple sentences.” * Chain game: - Ask Ss to read through the example in Example: the box- p20 silently. Group 1 says: The Japanese eat a lot of - T divides the class into 3 groups. The rice. first group is Independent Clause 1. The Group 2 says:AND second group is conjunction and the Group 3 says: They eat a lot of fish. third group is Independent Clause 2. - Have the representative from each group read the whole sentences in the example box. - The whole class reads the table aloud. 4. Make compound sentences by joining 37

FF IC IA L

5. Match the beginnings of the sentences with the picture that comlete them. Key: 1. a 2.c 3.a 4.b

6. Now, complete the second part of the compound sentences. Key: 1, … he doesn’t have flu 2, … he doesn’t do exercise 3, … she should try to relax more 4, … she does exercise, too.

Part 5- P20 - T has Ss look at the pictures and go through the beginning of the sentences then work individually to do matching - Ss do the task individually. - Ss give their answers by saying the whole sentences. - T corrects the exercise as a class. Part 6- P20 - Ask Ss to go through the first sentences and work in pairs to complete the sentences. - Ss do the ex in pairs. - Call on some pairsto say aloud their answers. - T corrects and feedback.

the two simple sentences. Use the conjunction given. Remember to add a comma. Key: 1. I want to eat some food, but I have a sore throat. 2. The Japanese eat healthily, so they live for a long time. 3. I feel tired, and I feel weak. 4. You can go and see the doctor, or you can go to bed now and rest.

Part 4- P20 - T asks Ss to complete the exercise individually. - Ss do the ex individually then compare with partner. - Have some Ss to write the answers on the board while others remark. - T corrects the exercise with the class

ẠY

KÈ

4. Consolidation: Futher practice: - Ask Ss to work in groups of 4 Ss to give the situation and give the imperative with less and more. Eg: - Study more. - Eat less sweet. 5. Homework: - Learn by heart the new words - Do ex B3,4,5,6,7 Page 11-12 in worktbook - Prepare UNIT 2:Communication/ P 21- textbook.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Period 12: UNIT 2: HEALTH. Lesson 4:Communication

Eat more fruit

Do more exercises

Sleep more

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to practice talking about some opinions are true and some are false about health, health facts or myths - Vocabulary: Know some words related to health: vitamin, sleeping in, vegetarian, myth, recover,… - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words in the leson. - Grammar: Sentences about health, health facts or myths . 2. Skills: + Speaking: talking about some opinions are true and some are false about health. + Listening: Listening about health facts or myths. 3. Attitude: Work hard, know about health proplems and advices. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Know how to keep fit and stay healthy. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: Does B5- workbook page 12 - S2: writes new words. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Slap the board: - Ask Ss to play a game: “Slap the board” to remember the words in the last lesson.

Sunbathe less

Eat less junk food

Watch less TV

B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS 39

II. Practice 1. Work in pairs. Discuss and write F (fact) or M (myth) for each statement.

Part 1- P21 - Go through the sentences - Ask Ss to work in pairs to decide which sentences are true or false

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary * Pre- teach vocabulary: pictures/ mine/ I. New words translation. - myth (n): huyền thoại, việc hoang - T says aloud the word by word while Ss đường listen and repeat after twice. - sushi (n): su- si - T writes new words on the board for Ss - vitamin (n): Vitamin - sleeping in (n): ngủ nhiều, ngủ nướng copying. - Ss listen and repeat the whole classfirst - vegetarian (n): Người ăn chay then in individual. - fact (n): sự thật - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. - recover (v): hồi phục *Checking: rub out and remember - pick up st: nhặt cái gì - Whole class plays the game. - drop (v): làm rơi Activity 2: Practice

HEALTH FACTS OR MYTHS?

ẠY

KÈ

1, People who smile more are happier, and they live longer. - T gives the Ss 2-3 minutes to 2, Sleepingin at the weekend helps you complete the exercise. recover from a busy week. - Ss discuss in pairs and then give 3, Eat more fresh fish, like sushi, and you their own ideas. will be healthier. - T collects Ss' ideas 4, Sitting too close to the TV hurts your eyes. 5, Pick up food you drop quickly, and it’s safe to eat. 6, Vegetarians don’t get enough vitamins in Part 2- P21 their food. - First, T asks Ss to close their 2. Listen to the radio show about “health books, listen, and take notes. facts or myth’s and check your answers in 1. - Ss listen and take notes. - T plays the recording again. Ss then open their books to listen and check then correct their answers Key: using their notes. 1. F 2.M 3.F - T collects Ss’ answersand checks 4.F 5.M 6.M - Give feedback - T confirms the correct answers Part 3- P21 3. Discuss the following in groups. - T has Ss work in groups to do this 1. Which sentence are you most surprised activity. by? Why? - Ss discuss the two questions in 2. Do you know any health facts or myths groups. about health in Viet Nam? - T goes around and gives help if any. - T calls on some groups to 40

FF IC IA L

represent their ideas - Some Ss represent in front of class Activity 3: Production 4. Work in groups. Think of some ideas about Part 4- P21 health that are true. Then think of some that 1.Transfering the learning task: are false. - T sets the time about 6 minutes Suggested answers : for Ss to work in groups of 4 Ss to True: - We shouldn't quit our break fast do the task. because it is very important. - You can avoid some disease by keeping 2. Doing the task: - Ss work in groups of 4 to think of yourself clean. some ideas about health that are False: - Women after bearing don't take a true and some that are false. bath for along time. - You will turn orange if you eat a lot of 3. Reporting the task result and oranges discuss: - Some Ss give their own answers in turn before class. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T checks and corrects if any. Part 5- P21 5. Test another group to see how many of - T asks Ss to choose one your health myths they can spot spokesperson in each group to consult other group

KÈ

4. Consolidation: - T reminds Ss some sentences about health are true which Ss should follow and some sentences are not true and Ss should avoid. 5. Homework: - Learn by heart new words - Do exercises: C1,2,3 page 13- workbook - Prepare: UNIT 2: SKILLS 1/ Page 22- textbook. Ngày tháng

năm .

ẠY

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÍ DUYỆT

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WEEK 5:

Period 13: UNIT 2: HEALTH. Lesson 5:Skills1

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use lexical items related to health, read for general and specific information about the calories for our health. Talk about activity and calories - Vocabulary: Know some words related to health: calorie, amount, energy,chart, … - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words in the leson. - Grammar: Sentences about health and lifestyle. 2. Skills: - Reading: read the text to get general and specific information about the calories for our health and do exercises. - Speaking: talk about activity and calories you use per hour 3. Attitude: Work hard, know about health proplems and advices. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Know how to keep fit and stay healthy. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, extra board. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: Does B5- workbook page 12 - S2: writes new words. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Chatting: - T asks Ss some questions about Ss’ health 1, What do you do every day? 2, Do you take part in any sport activities? 3, What do you often have for meals? 4, Is your diet balanced? - Ss try to answer the questions in turn B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS 42

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary * Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/ I. Vocabulary example/ pictures - T says aloud the word by word while - calorie (n) ca lo - amount Ss listen and repeat after twice. (a) lượng - T writes new words on the board for Ss - energy (a) năng lượng - chart (n) bảng biểu copying. - Ss listen and repeat the whole classfirst - diet expert (n) chuyên gia ăn kiêng then in individual. - tip (n) bí quyết - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. *Checking: rub out and remember - Whole class plays the game. Activity 2: Reading *Pre- reading II. Reading Set the scene: You are going to read 1. Quickly read the text. Match the correct headings with the paragraphs. the text about the calories. ? What do we get calories from? - T collects the answers Key: 1. b Part 1- P22 - Ask Ss to quickly read the text to 2. a match the correct headings with the 3. c paragraphs. - Ss do the task in groups then give their own answers aloud. - T collects Ss’ answers then corrects if any. 2. Find the following words/ phrases in *While- reading the text. Discuss the meaning of each Part 2- P22 word/ phrase with a partner. Then check - T asks Ss to read the text again then the meaning. work in pairs to do this exercise. Ss Key: Diet (n):the food that you eat on a daily may use their dictionaries - Ss work in pairs, read the text and basis. find out these words/ phrases then Expert (n):someone who has studied a discuss the meaning of each. lotabout a subject or topic - Collect Ss’ answers then check andunderstands it well. - Ss correct their work if any Tip (n): an advice on how to do something quickly and successfully, usually from one’s own experience. Junk food (n): usually convenient food like Mc Donald, KFC… Stay in shape (v):be fit and healthy. *Post reading. 3. Now answer the following questions. Part 3- P22 1.Transfering the learning task: - Ask Ss to work in dividually to Key: answer the questions 1. A calorie is energy that helps us do our 43

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

everyday activities. 2. Doing the task: - Ss answer the questions individually. 2. If we eat too many calories we get fat. - Let them share their answer with 3. To stay healthy you need between 1,600 partner and 2,500 calories. 4. Sports activities and running use a lot of 3. Reporting the task result and calories. discuss: - Call on 2 Ss to write the answers on 5. People listen to his advice because he is the board an expert. - Two Ss give the answerson the board 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T checks and corrects if any. - T confirms the correct answers Activity 3: Speaking Part 4- P22 III. Speaking - T draws Ss attention to the table and 4. Look at the table and discuss the explains that the activities are listed following questions. next to the number of calories used in one hour. 1. Why do you think some activities use - T may ask comprehension question more calories than others? such as “If I do aerobics for 3 hours, 2. Which activity uses more calories: how many calories will I use?” gardening or walking? 3. How many calories do you use doing - T puts Ss in groups of three or four aerobics for 2 hours? and asks them to discuss the questions. 4. What do you think happens when we have too few calories, but too many - Ss do the task in groups - T walks around the room monitoring. calories? When Ss have finished discussing the questions, T asks them to move on to exercise 5. 5. Choose two or three activities you like Part 5- P22 to do. Complete the chart about those - T asks Ss to complete the table and activities. think about how many calories each Example activity will take. If the activity they like to do is not on the table Ss can Activity Number of Total guess the number of calories by hours number of (per day) carlories comparing with the table 4. gardening 1 275 - Ss share their table with groups. Watching TV

Part 6- P22 - Call on some good Ss to present their 6. Present your chart to the class chart to the class while the rest listens Ss’ performances. and follows. - T follows and helps if necessary

4. Consolidation: - T aks Ss to recall about activity and calories 44

150

5. Homework: - Ask Ss to learn new words by heart. - Do exercise D1,2, 3 / P14- workbook - Prepare: UNIT 2: Skill 2/ Page 23- textbook. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

FF IC IA L

Pre: 17/ 09/ 2018 Te: ...../ 09/ 2018

Period 14: UNIT 2: HEALTH. Lesson 6:Skills2

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use lexical items related to health then listen to an interview to get specific information about sport and health and write the reply for the health problem. - Vocabulary: Know some words related to health: triathlon, maintain, pattern, count… - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Sentences about health and lifestyle. 2. Skills: -Listening: Listen to the interview with an ironman and do exercises. - Writing: Write a reply giving advice to someone with a health proplem. 3. Attitude: Work hard, know about health proplems and advices. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Know how to keep fit and stay healthy. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, extra board. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: Does D1- workbook page 14 - S2: Does D3-A- workbook page 15 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Brainstorming - Elicit the topic from students - Teacher models Which sports 45

do you like?

Eg: I like playing volleyball - Ss add as many activities as possible. - Teacher monitors and gets feedback. - T introduces the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary * Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/ I. New words example/ pictures - triathlon (n) môn thể thao thi đấu - T says aloud the word by word while 3 môn phối hợp Ss listen and repeat after twice. - maintain (v) duy trì - T writes new words on the board for Ss - count (v) tính toán - pattern (n) mẫu copying. - Ss listen and repeat the whole classfirst then in individual. - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. *Checking: rub out and remember - Whole class plays the game. Activity 2: Listening *Pre- listening II. Listening Part 1- P.23:Discuss the questions 1. Look at the picture below. Discuss the - Go through the questions following questions with a partner. - T asks Ss to work in pairs to discuss 1. What sports do people do in the them Olympics? 2. The Olympic sport below is sometimes called “the Ironman event, Why?” *While- listening Part 2- P.23: 2. Listen to the interview. Which - Go through the questions problems did he have as a child? - Play the recording twice and ask Ss to Key: circle the problems they hear - Sick - Ask Ss to compare the answers with a - allergy partner. - Ss listen and do the task individually - Give feedback and confirm the correct answer Part 3- P.23: 3. Listen to the interview again. What - Go through the phrases in the box advice does he give about preparing for - Ask Ss to listen to the recording the event? again and choose the right response Key: - Ask Ss to compare the answers with - Do more exercises a partner - Sleep more - Give feedback and confirm the correct - Eat more fruit/ vegetables answer Part 4- P.23: 4. Are the following sentences true (T) or - Go through 5 sentences false (F) 46

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- Ask to listen to the recording then Key: choose the true/ false sentences 1- T 2- F 3- F 4- F 5- T - Ask Ss to compare the answers with a partner - Ask one st to write his/he answer on the board. - Confirm the correct answer. *Post- listening Part 5- P.23: Discuss in groups 5. Now discuss the following in groups. - Go through the questions. Key: - T divides the class in to groups and 1. Why is the triathlon a difficult event? give them 5 minutes to do it 2. Can you think of other Olympic sports - Ss work in groups of five to do the task that are harder/ easier? - T goes around and gives help if 3. Would you like to try the triathlon one necessary day? Why? Why not? Activity 3: Writing Part 6- P.23: III. Writing - Asks if Ss remember who Dr. Dan is 6. a)Look at Dr. Dan’s advice page. Can (He is a diet expert) you match the problems with the - Then T asks Ss to read the questions answers? and advice then do the matching. Key: 1- c 2- b 3- a 1.Transfering the learning task: 6. b)Underline the ways Dr. Dan gives - T asks Ss to read Dr. Law’s advice again to underline the different ways Dr. advice. Dan gives advice. Key: 2. Doing the task: • You should… - Ss do the task in groups and check • You can… their answers with a partner. • It will be good if you… 3. Reporting the task result and • Do something more/ less… discuss: - When the majority of the class has finished, T can check the answers then discuss different ways to give advice. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T correct Ss’ answers then gives remarks. 7. Work in pairs. Choose one of the Part 7- P.23: problems. Student A to write the problem, - T divides Ss into A and B then put and student B writes the reply. them in pairs. T asks one student A to write a health problem on a piece of paper (using the prompts from the book) Eg: A(Anna): I played outside all day. I have - Then T asks student A to pass the sunburn and I have a temperature. paper to student B and student B can B: You should drink orange juice and put write the reply. 47

- Share their questions and replies with the class.

yoghurt on your face. You can take medicine to relieve the temperature

FF IC IA L

4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson: How towrite a reply advice to someone with a health proplem 5. Homework: - Learn new words by heart - Do exercises: E1,2,3/ page 16- workbook. - Complete the writing. - Prepare: UNIT 2:Looking back + project/ Page 24+25- textbook. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 19/ 09/ 2018 Te: ...../ 09/ 2018

Period 15: UNIT 2: HEALTH. Lesson 7:Looking back & Project

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to recycle the language, consolidate and apply what they have learnt in Unit 2 by doing various activities and exercises. - Vocabulary: Review the words related to health problems. - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Imperatives with more and less, compound sentences. 2. Skills: - Speaking: Talk about health proplems people often have. - Writing: complete the sentences with coordinating conjunction. 3. Attitude: Work hard, know about health proplems and advices. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Know how to keep fit and stay healthy. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36...........................................................................

2. Oral test - S1: Does exercise E1 in workbook. 48

- S2: Reads his/her writing. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Net works headache sunburn

toothache Health problems

sore throat

allergy

FF IC IA L

earache flu

stomachache - T introduces the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Vocabulary Part 1- P24 I. Vocabulary - T divides the students into two teams 1. What the health problems do you - Ss can complete this task in teams. Ss think each of these people has? should be encouraged to write down their answers. Key: - Call on one student to come to the front of a. sunburn the class read sentence by sentence in 1 and b. spot c. put on weight use gesture to express in 5 minutes. - The members in two teams must go to the d. stomacheache e. flu board and write the health problems. - T remarks and corrects if any. Part 2- P24 2. Look at the pictures above. Write 1.Transfering the learning task: - T asks what they see in each picture. After the health problem below each a brief discussion time, ask Ss to complete person. the exercise individually. Key: 2. Doing the task: - Ss look at the pictures. Write the health 1. spots problem below each person. 2. put on weight 3. sunburn 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Call on some Ss to give answers on the 4. stomachache/ sick board. 5. flu 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T correct Ss’ answers then gives remarks. Activity 2: Grammar Part 3- P24 II. Grammar - T lets Ss recall about imperative with 3. Complete the health tips below. Key: less and more. - Ask them to do the exercise 1. less 2. more 3. more individually. 4. Go outside… - Give feedback and confirm the correct 5. Watch less TV… 49

6. Do more exercise

Part 4- P24 - T has ss recall about the coumpound sentences - Ask Ss to do this activity individually - Ask some Ss to read aloud the compound sentences. - Ss do the exercise individually then compare with partner. - Some Ss give the answer aloud. - T confirms the correct answers

4. Draw a line to link the sentences, and a coordinator to form meaning sentences. Suggested answers: 1. I want to eat some junk food, but I am putting on weight. 2. I don’t want to be tired tomorrow, so I should go to bed early. 3. I have a temperature, and I feel tired. 4. I can exercise every morning, or I can cycle to school.

FF IC IA L

answers

Example: A: Hi, doctor. I feel weak and sick. B: Did you have enough calories? You should eat more, and I think you should get more exercise too. A: OK. Thank you doctor

ẠY

KÈ

You can....... It will be good if you......... Do something more/less....... - Ask one pair to come up and role-play the example in the book. T then asks the Ss to create their own role-plays from the sample problems in the book. - Ss do the task in pairs. - T can choose a pair or two to do their role-plays in front of the class. - T and others Ss comment and give remark Part 6- P24 - T makes sure that Ss know how to do this activity - Go through the example Note: To express your reponse about one opinion, you can use: Yes, I agree/ No, I disagree/ I don't think it is...... - T asks Ss to work in pairs and discuss - Call on some pairs to practice before class.

Activity 3: Communication Part 5- P24 III. Communication - Go through the phrases in the box and 5. Choose one of the following health problems. Role-play a discussion. the example interview - Reminds Ss to use language for advice: Student A is the patient. Student B is the doctor. You should........

6. Discuss the following sentences about health with a partner. Do you think they are facts or myths? Example: When you have a headache, you should rub an egg on your head. A: I don’t think this is true. It’s a myths. B: Yes, I agree/ No, I disagree

4. Consolidation: Project: Health survey 50

Ngày 24 tháng 9 năm 2018.

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÍ DUYỆT

FF IC IA L

This project can be done as homework. 1. T divides the class into groups and each group comes up with questions to find out more about health and health habits of the people around them. Ss can ask other groups in class or ask people outside of the class (other students/teachers in school, family members, friends) When done at home, some Ss can make a brief report about the health problems they discovered and tell their groups/the class about what they found. 5. Homework: - Learn by heart vocabulary and structures. - Complete the project of Unit 2 - Prepare: UNIT 3: GETTING STARTED Page 26+27- textbook.

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

ẠY

KÈ

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WEEK 6: Pre: 24/ 09/ 2018 51

Te: ...../ 10/ 2018

Period 16: UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE.

Lesson 1:Getting started

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the lexical items to community service and volunteer work, listen and read a conversation about community service in detail. - Vocabulary: community service and volunteer words: community service,elderly people,donate, non- profit, volunteer... - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Imperatives with more and less, compound sentences. 2. Skills: - Listening: Listen to the conversation between the reporter and Mai and get the main information. - Reading: Read the conversation and then complete the exercises. - Speaking: Talk about some volunteer work. 3. Attitude:To teach Ss to work hard, know about community servive and volunteer work. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Know how to contribute to community activities. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36........................................................................... 2. Oral test - During the lesson 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Guessing game: -To start the lesson, T writes ‘Green Summer Campaign’, ‘working for the community’ and ‘having a beach holiday’ on the board. Ask Ss to guess which two phrases connect to each other. Once Ss have found the answer, follow-up by asking them why they think ‘green summer’ relates to ‘working for the community’, and what activities a person can do. If T has some volunteer experience, he/she can share with the class. 52

- T introduces the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary *Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/ I. New words: situation. - community service(n): công việc vì lợi - T says aloud the word by word while ích cộng đồng Ss listen and repeat after twice. - donate (v): hiến tặng, đóng góp - T writes new words on the board for Ss - elderly people (n) : người cao tuồi copying. - make a difference (v) : làm cho thay đổi - Ss listen and repeat the whole classfirst - non- profit (n) : tổ chức phi lợi nhuận then in individual. - street children (n) trẻ em lang thang - volunteer (n, v): người tình nguyện, đi - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. *Checking: rub out and remember tình nguyện - Whole class plays the game. -encourage (v): khuyến khích - benefit (n): lợi ích, lợi nhuận

ẠY

KÈ

*Global Citizen is...........(the name of the radio program) * Hai Ba Trung School is..........(the school where Mai and Phuc go to) * Be a Buddy is........(the organization that Mai is from) * Go Green is..........(the organization that Phuc is from) Activity 2: Practice - T asks Ss to look at the picture on II-Practice: page 16 and answer the questions: 1. Listen and read. What can you see in the picture? Who do you think they are? What are they talking about? - T plays the recording and has Ss follow along. After listening, T asks Ss to recall information from the listening a. Read the conversation again and tick T Part 1a- P27 (true) or F (False). a. True or false statements - Go through the sentences Key: - T asks Ss to work individually to find 1.T 2. T out which sentences are true/ false 3. T 4. F 5. T -Ask Ss to share their answers - Give feedback b. Read the conversation again. Answer Part 1b- P27 1.Transfering the learning task: the following questions -Go through the questions - Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and Key: answer the questions 1. Make a difference: not the same 53

FF IC IA L

2. It plants trees... 3. It’s a non-profit organization

2. Look at the words in the box. Can you put them in the right groups? Nouns Verbs Adjectives donate help benefit volunteer recycle plant provide clean encourage

help benefit volunteer plant

clean environmental

2. Doing the task: - Ss read the conversation again then answer the questions in 1b- P27 in pairs. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Call on some pairs to practice -Somepairspracticeaskingand answering while other two Ss write the answers on the board. - Call two Ss to write the answer on the boards 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T correct Ss’ answers then gives remarks. Part 2- P26 - T tells Ss they can put some more words in more than one column. - T writes correct answers on the board

ẠY

KÈ

Look out! There are many words that are both verbs and nouns, e.g. volunteer, plant, Part 3- P26 help, benefit… - Have Ss work individually to fill in 3. Fill the gaps with the words in the box. the gaps... Key: - Ss do the task individually 1. volunteer - Let them compare their answers 2. homeless people with a partner then give the answers 3. donates aloud. 4. community service - Get feedback and confirm the correct 5. make a difference answer

Activity 3: Production Part 4- P26 III. Further practice: - Ask Ss to work in pairs to describe 4.Describe the pictures with the verbs in 2. the pictures. Key: - Ss work in pairs to do the task. 1. donate 2. plant - Some Ss give their own answers 3. help 4. clean aloud. 5. recycle 54

FF IC IA L

5. Create word webs. Donate: books, blood, money, clothes, toys, etc. Help: children, street people, old people, the poor, etc. Clean: streets, lakes, rivers, beaches, etc. Provide: food, attention, life skills, education, houses, help, books, etc.

6. Game: Vocabulary Ping Pong Example exchange: A: provide B: food A: homeless people B: help

- Give feedback Part 5- P26 - T draws the word webs on the board, have Ss work in groups to complete the word webs - Ss work in groups and complete the word webs. - Have Ss from the groups write the answers on the board. - T checks and corrects if any. Part 6- P26 - T guides Ss the way to play the game. - Model with game with a Ss first, then have the class play the game as instructed - Let Ss work in pairs palying the game. - T goes around and helps if necessary. - Call on some good pairs to practice before class.

4. Consolidation: - Sum up the main content of the lesson 5. Homework: - Learn new words by heart. - Read the conversation again and translate it into Vietnamese. - Do exercises: B1- B2 (page 18- workbook) - Prepare: UNIT 3:A closer look 1/ Page 28- textbook.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

KÈ

Pre: 25/ 09/ 2018 Te: ...../ 10/ 2018

Period 17: UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE.

ẠY

Lesson 2:A closer look 1

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to practise vocabulary related to community service. Know how to pronounce the sounds /g/and /k/ then find out the words with these sounds. - Vocabulary: community service and volunteer words: flooded area, disabled people, advertisement, graffiti, public transport… - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the sounds /g/and /k/. - Grammar: Past simple and present perfect. 55

KÈ

FF IC IA L

2. Skills: - Listening: Listen and repeat the words and sounds, underline the sounds /g/ and /k/ they hear. - Speaking: Describing each person in the pictures and talk about what to do to help them. - Writing: Write about the proplems each community have to face. 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, know about community servive and volunteer work. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talk about community service and volunteer work and know how to contribute to community activities. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: goes to the board to write new words - S2: reads the dialouge and then answer some questions. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Guessing game - Guessing community service from gesture - T calls one student goes to the board and uses gesture to express community service - Other students guess what community service is - The student with the correct guessing goes to the board to express community service - T introduces the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary *Pre- teach vocabulary: visual aids/ I. Vocabulary translation/ pictures. - flooded area (n): vùng lũ - T says aloud the word by word while - disabled people (n): người khuyết tật Ss listen and repeat after twice. - advertisement (v): quảng cáo - T writes new words on the board for Ss - graffiti (n) : hình hoặc chữ vẽ trên tường copying. công cộng - Ss listen and repeat the whole classfirst - public transport(n): phương tiện giao then in individual. thông công cộng - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. 56

FF IC IA L

1. Choose the phrases that match the pictures. Key: 1- disabled people 2- elderly people 3- homeless people 4- sick children 5- people in a flooded area

2. In pairs, take turn describing the people above. Example: A: They’re not feeling well. They can’t go and play outside. They have to stay in the hospital all day. B: Are they sick children? A: Yes! How do you think we can help them? B: We can donate some toys, and we can go to visit them.

*Checking: rub out and remember - Whole class plays the game. Part 1- P 28. 1.Transfering the learning task: - Have Ss read the phrases in the box and match them with suitable pictures in pairs. 2. Doing the task: - Ss work in pairs to do the task. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Some Ss write their own answers on the board. - Give feedback 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - Confirm the correct answers and remarks Part 2- P 28. - Ask Ss about how the people in each of the situation in 1 can be help. - Divide Ss into pairs to do the task. - Ss describe the people in 1 in pairs - Once Ss have finished, elicit ideas from the whole class. - T remarks and corrects if any.

ẠY

KÈ

Part 3a- P 28 - Ask Ss to look at the pictures carefully. - Tell Ss the provide words include solutions as well. - Ask Ss to work individually to complete the task. - Ss lookat the picture and try to do the task individually. - Call on some Ss to give the answers aloud. - T remarks and corrects if any. Part 3b- P 29 - Ask Ss to work in pairs to work out some solutions for the problems in a - Ask Ss to work in pairs to do this activity - Pairwork to do the task. - Call on students in different groups to practice on the board

3 a. Look at the photos. Which proplems does each community have to face with? Key: - a: rubbish, dirty beaches. - b: too many advertisements, graffiti. - c: traffic jams, no trees.

3b. In pairs, talk about the problems in and possible solutions. Example: A: Traffic jams are a big problem for our community. B: What can we do to reduce traffic jams? A: We can help by using public transport.

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- Some pairs practice before class. - Give feedback - Confirm the correct answers. Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation Part 4- P 29 II. Pronunciation: /g/ and /k/ -T explains how to pronounce the sound /g/ and 4. Listen and repeat community go colour /k/ - Play the recording and ask Ss to repeat. green gardenclean - Pause the recording to drill difficult items. glass give clothes - Ss listen and repeat follow three times in choral then in turn. - Have some Ss read out the words. 5. Listen and circle the words you - Give feedback hear. Part 5- P 29 - Play the recording and instruct Ss to circle the Key: 1. cold 2. green3. clothes words that they hear. 4. girl 5. goal - Ask Ss to listen and circle the words they hear - Ss listen and circle the word they hear. 6. Listen and repeat - Play the recording again 1. Go Green protects the - Give feedback environment. -Confirm the correct answers 2. The girl with the curls is so cute. Part 6- P 29 3. Last year we started a community -Play the recordingand ask Ss to repeat the garden project. sentences. 4. He’s collected clothes for street - Ss listen and repeat follow twice. kids for two years. -Give feedback 5. She likes the colour gold. - Ask some ss to read again Part 7- P 29: 7. Game: STAND UP, SIT DOWN - Model the game with 2 students first before dividing Ss into groups. - Ask Ss to think of other minimal pairs as in the table in 5. - Have the class play the game as instructed. - Call on 1/2 groups to act before class if any. - T remarks and corrects mistakes if possible.

4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson: the sounds /b/ and /p/ in isolation and in context; the vocabulary 5. Homework: - Learn by heart the new words - Do Ex A1, 2,3; B1, B4/ page 17- workbook - Prepare UNIT 3: A CLOSER LOOK 2- page 29, 30 textbook ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 28/ 09/ 2018 Te: ...../ 10/ 2018 58

Period 18: UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE.

Lesson 3:A closer look 2

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to review the past simple and the present perfect tense, know how to use adverbs: ever, never, so far, several times. - Vocabulary:the lexical items related to community service and volunteer work: - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Past simple and present perfect. 2. Skills: - Speaking: Using simple past to talk about activities in some community services. - Writing: Writing about yourself in the simple past or present perfect. 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, know about community servive and volunteer work. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talk about community service and volunteer work and know how to contribute to community activities. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: goes to the board to write new words - S2: does A1- page 17 in workbook 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Slap the board: advertisement

flooded area

disabled people public transport

graffiti - T introduces the new lesson B. Presentation: 59

MAIN CONTENTS

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Presentation Part 1a- P29 I. Grammar. - Ask Ss to listen again to part of 1. Past simple and Present perfect the conversation and underline the a. Listen. Then underline the past simple or past simple or the present perfect the present perfect. - Ss listen then underline the past *Answers: simple sentences or the present - Have you ever … perfect sentences - Last year we provided evening … - Collect the answers from Ss then - What else have you done? feedback - We’ve asked people to … - Give feedback -Confirm the correct answers. b. When do we use the past simple? When do Part 1b- P29 - Have Ss discuss the questionsin we use the present perfect? Can you think of the rule? part 1b- p29 in groups. - Ask them to give their answers *Note: - Draw their attention to the 1- We use the past simple for an action that differences between the past started and finished in the past. Eg: Last year, we provided evening classes for simple and the present perfect fifty children - Ss listen and take note. - We often use specific time expressions, (eg:yesterday, last, ago…) with the past simple 2- We use the present perfect for an action that happened some time before now. The exact timeis not important. Eg: We’ve asked people to donate books and clothes to the children. - We often use:ever, never, so far= recently= lately, several times, for a long time, for ages, for, since, before, yet…with the present perfect.

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 2: Practice Part 2- P30 2. Put the verbs in brackets into 1.Transfering the learning task: the correct tense. - Ask Ss to do the exercise individually 2. Doing the task: Key: - Ss do the task individually then compare with 1. cleaned a partner. 2. have collected 3. collected 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Some Ss write their own answers on the 4. has flown, went board. 5 Have you ever seen/ saw - Give feedback 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - Confirm the correct answers and remarks Part 3- P30 - T give out the task on the board and ask the 3. Choose the best answer 60

Key: 1. b 2. b 3. a 4. a5. c 6. b

4. Write the sentences about yourself in the simple past andthe present perfect.

FF IC IA L

whole class to do it orally - Some Ss give the answers in turn -Give feedback -Confirm the correct answers Part 4- P30 - Ask Ss to write sentences about themselves using the simple past and the present perfect, then share them with a partner - Ss do the task individually then compare with partner. -Ask Ss to work individually then write the answers on the board - T corrects and remarks if any.

Example: - I visited my grandmother last December. - I haven’t done my homework yet.

Activity 3: Production Part 5- P30 5. Ask and answer questions about - Tell Ss they will need to use the Past simple the facts sheet to complete the and the present perfect to complete this task. information. - Remind Ss of what they learnt in Getting started about “be a Buddy” and “Go Green” Example: - Divide Ss into pairs to complete the task A. What happened in 2011? - Ss do the task in pairs. B. Be a Buddy as estabished in - Go around, monitor to ensure they not just 2011. What did Be a Buddy look at the fact sheet and say out the phrases do in 2012? for each other to copy down. A. In 2012... - Some pairs practice before class. - Take notes of any common errors and correct them as a class later.

KÈ

4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson: the differences between the simple past and the present perfect tense. 5. Homework: - Do ex B3,4,5, 6/ page 18, 19- workbook - Prepare UNIT 3: COMMUNICATION/ page 31- textbook

ẠY

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Ngày 01 tháng 10 năm 2018.

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÍ DUYỆT

Trần Thị Thanh Trà WEEK 7 Pre: 01/ 10/ 2018 61

Te: ...../ 10/ 2018

Period 19: UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE.

Lesson 4:Communication

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to know the activities that teenagers in the USA and in Viet Nam have done to help the community. - Vocabulary:the lexical items related to community service and volunteer work: - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Past simple and present perfect. 2. Skills: - Reading: Read about the volunteer activities for teenagers in the United States and in Viet Nam. - Speaking: Talk about the benifits each activity bring to the community 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, know about community servive and volunteer work. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talk about community service and volunteer work and know how to contribute to community activities. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: Does B3- workbook page 19 - S2: Does B6- workbook page 19 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Free talk - Elicit different volunteer activities from Ss - Ask them to think of the activities both in the local community/ city/ VN, and from other places that they may have read about, or seen in books, or on TV, or the Internet.... - Refer to any words in the Extra Vocabulary box that ss do not yet know and ask them to try to guess what the meaning are, and how that they ralate to community service and volunteer work 62

- T introduces the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary *Pre- teach vocabulary: pictures/ I. Vocabulary: translation/ examples. - tutor (v) (n): dạy kèm, gia sư - T says aloud word by word while Ss - nursing home (n): nhà dưỡng lão listen and repeat after twice. - blanket (n): chăn - T writes new words on the board for Ss - shelter (n): nhà tình thương copying. - Ss listen and repeat the whole classfirst - mural (n): tranh khổ lớn vẽ lên tường - sort (n)= kind = type (v): loại then in individual. - graffiti (n): hình vẽ lên tường - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. *Checking: rub out and remember - Whole class plays the game.

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 2: Speaking Part 1- p31 II. Speaking: - Ask Ss to work in group to lookat the 1. Look at the photos and read photos and describe what they see. about the following volunteer - Ss work in group, look at the pictures and activities for teenagers in the United call the activity in each picture States. - Tell them to compare their ideas with the the text in 1- p31. - T checks Ss’ answers then explains if any. Part 2- p31 2. Look at the photos about - Tell Ss now they will learn about volunteer community service in Viet Nam. activities in Viet Nam. Ask Ss what they Key: 1. b think the volunteers in the photos are doing. 2. c - Ask Ss to do the matching task. 3. e - Ss do the task individually - Ask Ss if they know any other actual 4. a 5. d information about these volunteer activities, or if they know any other similar activities that take place in Viet Nam. - Ss give their own answers. - T corrects then gives feedback. Part 3- p31 3.Work in groups. Discuss the benefits each activity may bring to 1.Transfering the learning task: - Ask Ss to work in groups, discuss the the community. benefits each activitymay bring to the Suggested answers: community. Then share their answers with a, Help people to find the correct other groups bus, train and get to the place they want to go to. 2. Doing the task: - Ss work in groups to discuss. b, Help them have a good meal. c, Help them not be cold in the 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: 63

winter and not have a flu. d, Help them have a good meal. e, Help them have the good knowledge to get a good job and life.

- Ask each group to choose one person from each group to report back to the class. - Some representatives from the groups report back to the class. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T remarks and correct if any. Part 4- p31 - Ask Ss to work in pairs. Ask them take notes of their partner’s answers so that they can share the most interesting answers with the class later. - Ss work in pairs talking about the three activities that they want to try and explain the reasons why. - Ask Ss to choose the activities they want to do and practice asking and answering. - T and other Ss remark and correct if any

FF IC IA L

4. Ask each other:

4. Consolidation: ? Recall what they can do to help the community 5. Homework: - Learn by heart new words - Prepare: UNIT 3: SKILLS 1/ Page 32- textbook.

- Have you ever done any of these activities? - Choose three activities that you want to try. - Why do you want them?

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 01/ 10/ 2018 Te: ...../ 10/ 2018

Period 20: UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE.

Lesson 5:Skills 1

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to read a passage about community service and volunteer work then talk about community service and volunteer work. - Vocabulary:the lexical items related to community service and volunteer work: - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Past simple and present perfect. 2. Skills: - Reading: Read for specific information about young people doing community service - Speaking: Talk about community service and volunteer work. 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, know about community servive and volunteer work. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Know how to contribute to community activities. 64

FF IC IA L

II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36........................................................................... 2. Oral test - During the lesson 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Brainstorming - Elicit the topic from students - Teacher model ? Work in groups to add as many community service and volunteer work as possible. - Teacher monitors and gets feedback. ? Read all the words chorally * Suggested answers: recycling +helping street children +helping elderly people Community +cleaning streets service and +planting trees volunteer work +clean up beaches +recycling ................................... - T introduces the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary * Teach vocabulary: translation/ example/ I. Vocabulary pictures - government (n): chính phủ - T: writes new words on the board. - mentor (n): thầy hướng dẫn - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first then - to be forced (v); bi ép buộc - to be paid (v): được trả lương the whole class. - to raise money for: quyên góp - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. *Checking: slap the board. tiền cho - labour (n): lao động Activity 2: Reading Part 1- p32 II. Reading: * Set the scene: You are going to read 1.Read the text about volunteer work in about volunteer work in the United the United States Sates. 65

FF IC IA L

3. Which of the activities below are traditional volunteer activities in the United States? Key: 1. providing care for animals

2. raising money

Part 3- p32 1.Transfering the learning task: - Ask Ss to read the text again and answer the question in task 3. 2. Doing the task: - Ss read the text again then do task 3 in groups. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Have some Ss give the answers 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T remarks and correct if any.

2. Decide if the following statements are true or false. Key: 1. T 2. T 3. F 4. F (3. The text says Americans have had the tradition of volunteering since the early days of the country. The USA was born or declared its independence in 1776) (4. Americans volunteer because thay enjoy it, and not because they are forced or paid to do it)

- Ask Ss to read the text silently - Ss read the text individually. Part 2- p32 - Remind Ss of some the American volunteer activities they learnt in Communication - Call on Ss to read the statements from Ex 2 aloud. Ask Ss to guess if the statements are true or false. - Ss read the statements in 2 then decide if it is true or false. - T corrects Ss’ answers if any then asks them to correct the false statements. - Feedback.

3. cooking meals 4. donating blood 5. cleaning streets 6. teaching young children

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 2: Speaking Part 4- p32 III. Speaking - Work individually to fill in the table with 4. Fill in the table with your ideas their own ideas for volunteer activities for volunteer activities. - Encourage them to think of all the activities - individual work to complete the they have learnt so far in this unit, and other table with their own ideas activities that they know. - tell ss they only need to write in note form and not in full sentences Part 5- p32 5. Work in groups. Share the ideas - Work in groups and take turns to talk about in your idea bank with your group community service and volunteer work members. Example: - Have some students talk about community A. We could make postcards and service and volunteer work sell them to raise money. - Teacher monitors and give delayed B. What types of poscards? correction. A. Where should we sell them? ? Vote for the most exciting conversation 66

FF IC IA L

4. Consolidation: - What should you mention when you talk about community service and volunteer work? 5. Homework: - Ask Ss to learn new words by heart. - Do exercise C1, 2 D1/ P20, 21- workbook. - Prepare: UNIT 3: Skill 2/ Page 33- textbook. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 03/ 10/ 2018 Te: ...../ 10/ 2018

Period 21: UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE.

Lesson 6:Skills 2

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use lexical items related to community service and volunteer work. Listen to get specific information about community service and volunteer workthen write a paragraph about a volunteer work. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to community service and volunteer work: - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Past simple and present perfect, use “because” for giving reasons. 2. Skills: - Listening: Listen for specific about community services and volunteer work. - Writing: write a paragraph about volunteer work. 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, know about community servive and volunteer work. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Know how to contribute to community activities. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: Does C1- workbook page 20 - S2: Does D1- workbook page 20 3. New lesson 67

A. Warm- up: *Chatting ? What should you mention when you talk about community service and volunteer work? - T introduces the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Part 2- p33 * Set the sence: Remind Ss of the interview between the Global Citizen reporter and the two Ss who do volunteer work with B a Buddy and Go Green. Recall what happen in the first part of the interview. Ask them if they can guess what Mai and Phuc will talk about in the second part of the interview - Play the recording and elicit from Ss the gist of this recording - Play the recording twice and have Ss answer the questions. - T remarks then corrects Ss’ answers if any.

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Listening Part 1- p33 I. Listening - Ask Ss to discuss the questions in exercise 1. 1. Discuss the following questions - Ss discuss the questions in groups then • Who do you think benefits form volunteer work? some Ss from the groups present their own • How do people benefits form ideas. volunteer work? - Give feedback.

ẠY

KÈ

2. Listen to the recording and answer the questions. Key: 1. Phuc does volunteer work because he thinks it makes a difference in the community 2. Phuc feels more self- confident because he has made many new friends 3. The reporter thinks that Phuc is confident because he has answered the interview questions very well 4. Mai thinks volunteering is special because she can help others, and because she can see how happy the Part 3- p33 street children are when they learn 1.Transfering the learning task: - Play the recording again and let Ss fill in the 3. Listen again and fill in the blanks. blanks. Key: 2. Doing the task: 1. volunteer - Ss listen again to fill in the blanks 2. feel individually and compare their answers with 3. because their partners 4.because, children 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Have some Ss give the answers - Ss do the task individually then give their answers. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - Confirm and correct their answers. Activity 3: Writing Part 4- p33 II. Writing: Study skills- Giving reasons - Go through the Study skills – 4. Combine the two sentences using because. 68

FF IC IA L

Key: 1. Because he didn’t wear enough warm clothes, he’s had a cold for two days. 2. I stayed home because it rained. 3. Because the lake is full of rubbish, they’ve decided to clean it up. 4. Because she works in that small town, she has lived there for three years. 5. They think they should move there because the neighbourhood is nice and quiet 5. Look at the volunteer idear in Speaking 4. Choose one idea and write a short paragraphabout it.

Giving reasons box with the class. Explain that “because” is used to introduce the reason for something. - Ask Ss to do exercise 4 in pairs. - Ss do the task in pairs to combine te two sentences using “because” - Ask Ss to give their answers. - Confirm and correct their answers. Part 5- p33 - Tell Ss now they will write a paragraph using the ideas they generated in Speaking 4 - Ask Ss to make notes in class then develop the notes into a paragraph as homework. - Ss do task individually. - T collects some Ss’ writing to comment and correct if necessary.

4. Consolidation: - Get some students to read aloud their paragraph. ? Sum up the main content of the lesson 5. Homework: - Learn new words by heart - Do exercises: D2,3; E1,2,3/ page 21,22,23- workbook. - Complete the writing: Write a paragraph about a volunteer work. - Prepare: UNIT 3:Looking back + project - Page 34+35- textbook.

KÈ

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Ngày 08 tháng 10 năm 2018.

ẠY

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÍ DUYỆT

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

WEEK 8 Pre: 08/ 10/ 2018 Te: ...../ 10/ 2018 69

Period 22: UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE.

Lesson 7:Looking back & Project

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to recycle the language from the previous sections.Consolidate and apply what they have learnt in Unit 3 by doing various activities and exercises. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to community service and volunteer work: - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Past simple and present perfect, use “because” for giving reasons. 2. Skills: + Speaking: Report the experiences about how to take part in the volunteer activities. + Writing: complete the sentences using simple past and present perfect. 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, know about community servive and volunteer work. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Know how to contribute to community activities. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: Does E1- workbook page 20 + 21 - S2: writes new words. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Guessing game - Divide the students into two big groups. - Teacher gives the definition of a community service or volunteer work. ? Listen and say aloud the name of the community service or volunteer work - Who has the quicker and correct answer will get one point. - Teacher monitors and gets feedback B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

Part 1- P34

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Revising vocabulary I. Vocabulary 70

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

? Run through the verbs in the box. 1. Match the verbs in blue with the ? Put one of the verbs/ phrases from the box. correct words in the box. Match the verbs in blue with the correct Key: words in the box. 1. donate: food, books, clothing, - Tell Ss that some words in the box can be blood. matched with more than one verb in blue. 2. provide: evening lasses, food, care, - Ss work individually then compare with books, education, clothing, attention. their partner. 3. help: the community, homeless - Teacher checks and confirms the correct people, the elderly, the disabled answers. Activity 2: Revising grammar Part 2- P34 II. Grammar ?What are the differences between the past simple 2. Circle the best answer: and present perfect? Key: ?Choose the best option to complete the passage. 1. never 2. last week - Ss work individualy then compare the answers 3. already 4. yet with their partner. 5. yesterday - Call on some students to give the answers. - Teacher checks and confirms the correct answers. Part 3- P34 3. Put the verbs in the past - Ask Ss to complete this exercise individually. simple and present perfect Then share their answers with a partner. Key: - Before giving correction, ask Ss to explain the 1. has ever met differences between sentences 2 and 3, and 4 and 2. visited 5. 3. has visited - Quickly review the past simple and the present 4. did Shakespeare write perfect. 5. has she written - Get some students write their answers on the board. - Give feedback 4. Finish the sentences below: Part 4- P34 Key: 1.Transfering the learning task: 1, ... the engine is very good - Have Ss do this exercise in pairs. 2, ... it is going to be cold this 2. Doing the task: evening - Ss do the task in pairs. 3, ... she’s kind - Ask Ss to swap their writings with each other for 4, ... they are not as lucky as we peer correction. are 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: 5, ... she works very hard to - Ask Ss to work in pairs to read aloud their improve her teaching sentences. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T remarks and corrects if any. Activity 3: Speaking Part 5- P34 III. Communication - Divide Ss into pairs. 5. Role play. Student A is reporter and - Tell Ss to read their role cards and ask Student B is a volunteer. Student A 71

FF IC IA L

and answer questions with each other. asks questions and Student B answers. - Have them role play the interview for the Using the questions below: class. 1. When did you start working for - Student A plays the role of a reporter. your organization? StudentB talks about her/ his volunteer 2. Why did you decide to volunteer? work. Interview the other about his/her 3. What have you done so far with? hobbies. 4. Was there anything that made you - Teacher monitors and gives help. happy with your work last month? - Ask some pairs to act out the interview. - T remarks and corrects if any then asks the whole class to vote for the best interview.

4. Consolidation: ? Sum up the main content of the lesson 5. Homework: - Learn by heart vocabulary and structures. - Complete the project of Unit 3 - Prepare: REVIEW 1/ Page 36+37- textbook.

Activity 4: Production - Ss propose their own volunteer project. IV. Project - Give Ss several days to complete the project, and ask them to present their project Your volunteer work in the form of a poster. If the project is useful and practical, T can even help, or ask the school to help, to realize the proposal!

Pre: 09/ 10/ 2018 Te: ...../ 10/ 2018

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Period 23: Review 1

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to revise pronunciation, vocabulary, grammar, everyday English about hobbies, health and community service. - Vocabulary: Words expressing hobbies, health issues, community service and volunteer. - Phonetics: Practice pronouncing the sounds: /f/ and /v/, /g/ and /k/, /ə/ and /ɜ:/. - Grammar: Present simple and simple future, Past simple and present perfect, imprerative with more/less, coordinating conjuntions: and, or, but, so; and “because” for giving reasons. 2. Skills:Speaking, listening, and writing skills 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, know the importance of revision and need to study harder. 4. Ability needed: 72

FF IC IA L

- Communicative approach. - Do exercises on pronunciation, vocabulary, grammar and everyday English. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36........................................................................... 2. Oral test -During the lesson. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Questions and answers drill: - T asks Ss some questions about the topics they’ve learnt. 1, Do you wash your hands before and after the meals? 2, Have you ever been to Da Nang? 3, What did you do last weekend? 4, How do you say to your friend when he/she is putting on weight? - Teacher monitors and gets feedback B. Presentation: MAIN CONTENTS.

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Language I. Pronunciation. Ex 1- P36 1. Listen and tick ( ) the word if it is the -T asks Ss to pronounce these words same as what you hear and cross (X) if it first and correct Ss’ mistakes. is different. - T plays the recording as many times as Key: x 7. cream x needed for Ss listening and tick ( ) the 1. lock word if it is the same as what you hear 2. community 8. grocer x and cross (x) if it is different. 3. kind x 9. vampire - Ss do Ex 1 individually. 4. cracker x 10. bread - Collect Ss’ answers then correctif any 5. flavour 11. fruit 6. fear 12. vary x Ex2- P36 - Ss have to pronounce the words correctly themselves to do the task. - T lets Ss do it in pairs and encourage them to read the words out loud among themselves. -T checks and corrects their

2. Choose the word in which the underlined sound is pronounced differently. Key: 1. A 2. C 3. C 4. B 5. B

II. Vocabulary 3. Put the phrases below into the correct categories and tick the activity/ activities you do yourself. Key:

FF IC IA L

Activities to help… yourself Your community - washing your - helping the old hands before - raising money for meals the poor - tidying up your - collecting rubbish room in your area - gardening - opening classes - eating a lot of for street children fruit

4. How much can you remember? Choose one of the words/ phrases below to match the description. The first one is an example. Key: 1. obeysity 2. cleaning the street 3. calories 4. staying in shape 5. donating 6. hobby

ẠY

KÈ

mistakesthen give feedback. Ex3- P36 1.Transfering the learning task: - T checks them as a class and encourages Ss to repeat the words in the first three units. - T gives Ss about 10 minutes to read and write down the phrases into the correct columns and tick their activities. 2. Doing the task: - Ss do the task in groups. - T can ask them to add more activities into the columns. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Have some Ss from the groups write their answers on the board. - Some Ss write their answers on the board. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T checks and corrects if any. Ex4- P36 - Show Ss the way to do the task. - Have Ss do individually. - T helps by making suggestions or giving the first letter of the word. - Ss do the task individually then compare with partner. - Some Ss give their own answers. - T checks and writes the correct answers on board. Ex5- P36 - This is a revision of the use of simple present, simple past and present perfect and the time signals that go with each. - Have Ss do the task individually. - T checks Ss’ answers and gives the remark. - Feedback. Ex6- P36 - T may let Ss read the beginnings and the endings for a few minutes, then match in pairs. - Ss dothe task in pairs. - T calls on some Ss read their answers.

III. Grammar 5. Choose the best answer A, B, or C to complete the sentences. Key: 1. A 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. C 6. B

6. Match the beginnings in A with the endings in B. Key: 1. d 2. e 3. a 4. c 5. b IV. Everyday English 74

7. Work in pairs. Ask your partner the questions to find out if your partner has good eating habbit. If you answer “Yes” to all the questions, you do have very healthy eating habits. If your score is under four, change your habits!

4. Consolidation: - Correct the ex if necessary. 5. Homework. - Do exercise 1,2,3,4 P.24-25 in workbook. - Prepare for the next lesson: SKILLS/ P37 in textbook.

FF IC IA L

- T corrects Ss’ answers then feedback. Ex7- P36 - Suggest Ss how to do the task. - Ss work in pairs to ask and answer to find out if they have good eating habits or not. - Check and give comments

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 12/ 10/ 2018 Te: ...../ 10/ 2018

Period 24: Review 1 (Cont)

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to revise the languages Ss have learnt and the skills they have practised from unit 1 to unit 3, then do some exercises about four skills. - Vocabulary: Words expressing hobbies, health issues, community service and volunteer. - Phonetics: Practice pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Present simple and simple future, Past simple and present perfect, imprerative with more/less, coordinating conjuntions: and, or, but, so; and “because” for giving reasons. 2. Skills: - Speaking: Ask and answer questions to know “you are a community person” - Writing: Make up sentences following the given words. - Listening: Listen to 2 conversations and choose the correct answer. - Reading: Read the passage and know how to live to be happy. 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, know the importance of revision and need to study harder. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Do exercises on reading, speaking, listening and writing skills. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: CD player. 75

FF IC IA L

MAIN CONTENTS.

Activity 2: Skills I- Reading: LIVE TO BE HAPPY Ex1- P37 1. Read the passage, then choose the - T asks Ss to read the questions first and most appropriate answer A, B or C to identify the keywords in each question. each question. -Ss then read the text and choose the Key: answers. 1. A 2. B 3. C 4. B - Give feedback and correct. II- Speaking:

ARE YOU A COMMUNITY PERSON?

Ex2- P37 - T lets Ss read the questions individually first. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to interview each other. - Ss ask and answer the questions in pairs, then they can exchange their results and take turns to report it to class. - Ask some Ss to report the answers to the class. - T checks and gives comments whether they are community people or not.

2. Work in pairs. Interview each other to answer the questions. Then report the results to your class. Yes No

ẠY

KÈ

1. Do you know of community activities in your area? 2. Have you ever taken part in a community activity? 3. Are the community authorities the only one to solve the problems in the area? 4. Should everybody take part in solving the problems in the area? 5. Would youlove to make a big contribution to your community?

Ex3- P37 - Let Ss discuss the questions and guess the answers. - Let Ss listen to the tape then do the exercise individually. - Ss do the task individuallythen compare their answers with partner.

III- Listening: 3. Listen to two friends talking about different sistuations and tick the correct answer to each question. Key: 76

Conversation1: 1. A 2. B Conversation2: 1. B 2. C IV- Writing: 4. Make complete sentences from the prompts below and put them under the correct pictures.

FF IC IA L

Key: Picture 1: 5. This activity is often done in spring. 6. They dig a hole to put the young tree in. 1. They water and take great care of the trees during the first month. Picture 2: 2. They carry recycle bags to put the rubbish in 4. They walk along the beach and collect all the rubbish. 3. The community organizes this activity once a month.

- T helps if necessary - Ask some Ss to give their answers. - Check and correct. Ex4- P37 1.Transfering the learning task: - Ask Ss to underline the subject and the verb of the sentence to see if it is a simple or a compound sentence. Make sure they understand the meaning of the sentence. - Ask Ss to complete sentences from the prompts and put them under the correct pictures. 2. Doing the task: - Ss do the task individually then they can compare with partner. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Ask Ss to give their answers on the board. - Some Ss write their answers on the board. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T checks and gives comments.

4. Consolidation: - Correct the ex. if necessary. 5. Homework. - Do Ex 5,6,7,8/ P 25,26,27 in workbook. - Prepare carefully for the first written test. Ngày 15 tháng 10 năm 2018.

ẠY

KÈ

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÍ DUYỆT

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WEEK 9: Pre: 15/ 10/ 2018 77

Te: ...../ 10/ 2018 Period 25: WRITTEN TEST 1

A- MATRIX:

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I. Objectives. 1. Knowledge: - To test Ss’knowledge in the first three units to know how progressive the Ss are and find out their strength and weakness of learning English so that teacher can give them more suitable method of teaching. - Vocabulary: related to the theme “Our Communities” - Phonetics: The sounds: /f/, /v/, /g/, /k/, /ə/ and /ɜ:/. - Grammar: + Present simple and simple future + Past simple and present perfect + Imprerative with more/less + Coordinating conjuntions: and, or, but, so +“Because” for giving reasons. 2. Skills: - To check Ss’ listening, reading and writing skills. 3. Attitude: - Teach Ss tobe strict and honest. 4. Ability needed: - Being able todo the exercises well. II. Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work, situations, translation, discussion, and examples. III. Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: test papers. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: No. IV. Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence: .......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 34........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 36........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Check the preparation of Ss. 3. New lesson

B- QUESTIONS:

NO 1: 78

A. LISTENING ( 2,0 pts)

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I. Listen and choose the words to complete the passage. (2,0 pts) Minh’s hobby is singing. She (1) ……… singing very much. When her brother (2) ……… a karaoke set (3) ……… month, Minh was so glad that she (4) ……… every day after dinner. She likes to sing only (5) ………… songs. In fact, she has already sung all the songs found (6) ……… the karaoke discs. Minh is singing in the karaoke (7) ……… organized by the RC Center this Saturday. Her (8) …… is going there to support her. 1. A. wants B. enjoys C. thinks D. hates 2. A. invented B. discovered C. bought D. made 3. A. smart B. fast C. start D. last 4. A. sings B. sang C. sung D. singing 5. A. English B. England C. America D. American 6. A. of B. about C. under D. on 7. A. competition B. battle C. company D. institution 8. A. farm B. family C. relative D. company B. LANGUAGE FOCUS (4,0pts) I.Choose the word which has underlined part pronounced differently from others.(0,75pt) B. surf C. picture D. return 1. A. nurse 2 A. general B. garden C. go D. get 3 A. calorie B. carve C. collage D. centre II. Choose the best option to complete these sentences. (2,0pt) 1. ……….. too much TV is not good for you and your eyes. A.watch B.to watch C.watching D. to watching 2. It’s a pity that I ………………….. “Green Summer” programme last year. A. don’t join B. didn’t join C. won’t join D. haven’t joined 3. We’ve decided to clean up the lake ………..it is full of rubbish. A. so B. therefore C. but D. because 4. …………………..the elderly people in the nursing home so far, Julia? A. Have you visited B. Did you visit C. Do you visit D. Are you visiting 5. Our class …………………..away warm clothes to street children two days ago. A. give B. gave C. have given D. will give 6. I was 40 kilos last month. Now I’m 42. I ……………… weight. A. put B. get C. am putting on D. getting on 7. Eat ……………., exercise regularly, then you’ll be fit and healthy. A. well B. good C. fine D. careful 8. If you enjoy moving your body to music, your hobby is …………….. A. collecting things B. bird watching C. skating D. dancing III. Give the correct form of the verb in bracket. (1,25pt) 1. My brother usually (go) ……………… fishing in his free time. 2. We find (arrange) …………… flowers interesting because it helps us relax. 79

FF IC IA L

3. My father (start) …………… the hobby ten years ago after a trip to Ha Long Bay. 4. They (not arrive) ………………….yet, but they should be here soon. 5. You ever (do) ………………….volunteer work? C. READING.(2,5pts) I. Read the following passage and answer True (T) orFalse (F)(1,25pts) One of the best things you can do for your body is exercise. But how much is enough? Not everyone agrees on exactly how much people should exercise each day. Some people think that doing simple things like cleaning the house are helpful. Other people do heavy exercise everyday such as running or swimming. One thing experts do agree on is that any kind of exercise is good for you. Along with exercise, having a healthy diet can help promote good health. Foods like vegetables and fruits should be eaten several times each day. It is also important to eat foods high in fiber such as beans, grains, fruit and vegetables. Fiber helps your body to digest the food you eat. It also helps your body in other ways such as decreasing the chance of getting some cancers, heart disease and diabetes. Avoiding foods with a lot of sugar, salt and fat is a good idea. Eating these kinds of foods can lead to a variety of health problems. The main one being obesity. Obesity means having so much fat on your body that you are risking your health.

ẠY

KÈ

…… 1, One of the best things you can do for your body is exercise. …… 2, Having a healthy diet can help promote good health …… 3, Fiber doesn’t help your body to digest the food you eat. …… 4, Fiber causes cancers, heart disease and diabetes. …… 5, Eating sugar, salt and fat can lead to a variety of health problems. II. Read this passage again and then answer the questions. (1,25 pts) 1.What is the best thing you can do for your boddy? ->……………………………………………………………………………………… 2.What can help promote good health? ->……………………………………………………………………………………… 3.Should vegetables and fruit be eaten several times each day? ->……………………………………………………………………………………… 4.How does fiber help your hobby? ->……………………………………………………………………………………… 5.What does obesity mean? ->……………………………………………………………………………………… D. WRITING. (1,5pts) I. Rewrite the sentence using the given words that unchange its meaning (1,0pt). 1. This is the first time I’ve ever painted a mural over graffiti. ->I have never ………………………………………………………………………. 2. Mr. Binh started recycling rubbish two years ago. ->Mr. Binh has ……………………………………………………………………… 3. David failed the exam because of his laziness. ->Because David …………………………………………………………………… 4.We have donated books and clothes for ten years. 80

->We began………………………………………………………………………… II. Reorder the given words to make sentences. (0,5pt)

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

1. Ha Noi/ homeless/ give/ in/ clothes/ away/ they/ warm/ to/people. ->……………………………………………………………………..………………. 2. you/ have/ finished/ homework/ your/yet? ->……………………………………………………………………..………………. NO 2: A. LISTENING ( 2,0 pts) I. Listen and choose the words to complete the passage. (2,0 pts) Minh’s hobby is singing. She (1) ……… singing very much. When her brother (2) ……… a karaoke set (3) ……… month, Minh was so glad that she (4) ……… every day after dinner. She likes to sing only (5) ………… songs. In fact, she has already sung all the songs found (6) ……… the karaoke discs. Minh is singing in the karaoke (7) ……… organized by the RC Center this Saturday. Her (8) …… is going there to support her. 1. A. wants B. enjoys C. thinks D. hates 2. A. invented B. discovered C. bought D. made 3. A. smart B. fast C. start D. last 4. A. sings B. sang C. sung D. singing 5. A. English B. England C. America D. American 6. A. of B. about C. under D. on 7. A. competition B. battle C. company D. institution 8. A. farm B. family C. relative D. company B. LANGUAGE FOCUS (4,0pts) I. Choose the word which has underlined part pronounced differently from others.(0,75pt) 1. A. general B. garden C. go D. get 2. A. picture B. surf C. nurse D. return 3. A. calorie B. carve C. collage D. centre II. Choose the best option to complete these sentences. (2,0pt) 1. …………………..the elderly people in the nursing home so far, Julia? A. Have you visited B. Did you visit C. Do you visit D. Are you visiting 2. ……….. too much TV is not good for you and your eyes. A.watch B.to watch C.watching D. to watching 3. Eat ……………., exercise regularly, then you’ll be fit and healthy. A. well B. good C. fine D. careful 4. If you enjoy moving your body to music, your hobby is …………….. A. collecting things B. bird watching C. skating D. dancing 5. It’s a pity that I ………………….. “Green Summer” programme last year. A. didn’t join B. don’t join C. won’t join D. haven’t joined 6. We’ve decided to clean up the lake ………..it is full of rubbish. A. so B. therefore C. but D. because 81

FF IC IA L

7. Our class …………………..away warm clothes to street children two days ago. A. give B. gave C. have given D. will give 8. I was 40 kilos last month. Now I’m 42. I ……………… weight. A. put B. am putting on C. get D. getting on III. Give the correct form of the verb in bracket. (1,25pt) 1. They (not arrive) ………………….yet, but they should be here soon. 2. My brother usually (go) ……………… fishing in his free time. 3. You ever (do) ………………….volunteer work? 4. We find (arrange) …………… flowers interesting because it helps us relax. 5. My father (start) …………… the hobby ten years ago after a trip to Ha Long Bay. C. READING.(2,5pts) I. Read the following passage and answer True (T) orFalse (F)(1,25pts) One of the best things you can do for your body is exercise. But how much is enough? Not everyone agrees on exactly how much people should exercise each day. Some people think that doing simple things like cleaning the house are helpful. Other people do heavy exercise everyday such as running or swimming. One thing experts do agree on is that any kind of exercise is good for you. Along with exercise, having a healthy diet can help promote good health. Foods like vegetables and fruits should be eaten several times each day. It is also important to eat foods high in fiber such as beans, grains, fruit and vegetables. Fiber helps your body to digest the food you eat. It also helps your body in other ways such as decreasing the chance of getting some cancers, heart disease and diabetes. Avoiding foods with a lot of sugar, salt and fat is a good idea. Eating these kinds of foods can lead to a variety of health problems. The main one being obesity. Obesity means having so much fat on your body that you are risking your health.

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I. Rewrite the sentence using the given words that unchange its meaning (1,0pt). 1. This is the first time I’ve ever painted a mural over graffiti. ->I have never ………………………………………………………………………. 2. Mr. Binh started recycling rubbish two years ago. ->Mr. Binh has ……………………………………………………………………… 3. David failed the exam because of his laziness. ->Because David …………………………………………………………………… 4.We have donated books and clothes for ten years. ->We began………………………………………………………………………… II. Reorder the given words to make sentences. (0,5pt) 1. you/ have/ finished/ homework/ your/yet? ->……………………………………………………………………..……………….

2. Ha Noi/ homeless/ give/ in/ clothes/ away/ they/ warm/ to/people. ->……………………………………………………………………..……………….

C- ANSWERS AND MARK:

A. LISTENING ( 2,0 pts)

ẠY

KÈ

I. Listen and choose the words to complete the passage. (2,0 pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 8 = 2,0 ®iÓm 1- B 2- C 3- D 4- B 5- A 6- D 7- A 8- B Tapescript: Minh’s hobby is singing. She (1) enjoys singing very much. When her brother (2) bought a karaoke set (3) last month, Minh was so glad that she (4) sang every day after dinner. She likes to sing only (5) English songs. In fact, she has already sung all the songs found (6) on the karaoke discs. Minh is singing in the karaoke (7) competition organized by the RC Center this Saturday. Her (8) family is going there to support her. B. LANGUAGE FOCUS (4,0pts) I. Choose the word which has underlined part pronounced differently from others.(0,75pt)Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 3 = 0,75 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- C 2- A 3- D NO 2: 1- A 2- A3- D II.Choose the best answer. (2,0 pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 8 = 2,0 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- C 2- B 3- D 4- A 5- B 6- C 7- A 8- D NO 2: 1- A 2- C3- B 4- D 5- A 6- D 7- B 8- B III. Give the correct form of the verb in bracket. (1,25pt) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1,25 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- goes 2- arranging 3- started 83

FF IC IA L

4- haven’t arrived 5- Have (you ever) done NO 2: 1- haven’t arrived2- goes 3- Have (you ever) done 4- arranging 5- started C. READING.(2,5pts) I. Read the following passage and answer True (T) orFalse (F)(1,25pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1,25 ®iÓm 1- T 2- T 3- F 4- F 5- T II. Read the paragraph again and then answer the questions. (1,25 pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1,25 ®iÓm 1, The best thingyou can do for your body/ It is exercise. 2, Having a healthy diet can help promote good health. 3, Yes, they should. 4, Fiber helps your body to digest the food you eat. 5, Obesity means having so much fat on your body that you are risking your health. D. WRITING. (1,5pts) I. Rewrite the sentence use the given words that unchange its meaning (1,0pt). Mçi câu ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 4 = 1,0 ®iÓm 1. I have never painted a mural over graffiti before. 2. Mr. Binh has recycled rubbish for two years. 3. Because David was lazy, he failed the exam. 4. We began to donate books and clothes ten years ago. II. Reorder the given words to make sentences. (0,5pt) Mçi câu ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 2 = 0,5 ®iÓm NO 1:1. They give warm clothes to homeless people in Ha Noi. 2. Have you finished your homework yet? NO 2:2. Have you finished your homework yet? 1. They give warm clothes to homeless people in Ha Noi.

KÈ

4. Consolidation. - Collect Ss’ papers and remark if any. 5. Homework. - Prepare for next period: Unit 4- Getting started & Listen and read.

ẠY

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 18/ 10/ 2018 84

Period 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32: TOPIC: UNIT 4: MUSIC AND ARTS

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives After the topic, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary: use the lexical items related to the topic ‘Music and Art. - Pronunciation: pronounce the sounds /ȓ/ and /ʒ/ correctly in isolation and in context. - Grammar: + Use comparisions: (not) as …. as; the same as; different from. + Express agreement using too and either. + Use some combinations: draw/paint a picture, play the guitar, … 2. Skills: - Reading: read for specific information about traditional arts. - Speaking: talk/ sing or do other activitiesrelated to music and art. - Listening: listen to get specific information about an artist. - Writing: write an informal letter of invitation. 3. Attitude:To help Ss know the value of traditional music and arts and try their best to preserve them. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach - Talking about different types of music and arts in VN. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - Visual aids - Repetition - Substitution - Questions and answers - Individual work - Pairwork - Group work - Brainstorming III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: - Materials: + Textbook, workbook, visual aids. + Pictures of some musical instruments, art forms. + Pictures of some Dong Ho paintings, pieces of art. + Pictures about some kinds of traditional Vietnamese performance. - Equipment: Cassette player, CD English 7 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Warm- up: * Class organization. Lesson Teaching Attendance date 7A 7B 7C …/10/2018 …/ 37 …/ 34 …/ 35 1 2

…/10/2018 …/ 37

…/ 34

…/ 35

…/11/2018 …/ 37

…/ 34

…/ 35

…/11/2018 …/ 37

…/ 34

…/ 35

…/11/2018 …/ 37

…/ 34

…/ 35

…/11/2018 …/ 37

…/ 34

…/ 35

…/11/2018 …/ 37

…/ 34

…/ 35

FF IC IA L

*Chatting - Ask students some questions related to music and arts. ? Do you like music? ? What kinds of music do you like best? ? Have you ever been to a music live show? ? What about art? Can you name some famous artists in Viet Nam or other countries? ? Have you ever been to an art gallery? - T shows some pictures related to music and arts then introduces the topic to Ss and leadsthem to the new lesson. 2. Form new knowledge:

I- GETTING STARTED

*The aims: - After the lesson students will be able to: + Understand the dialogue in getting started and know the words about music and arts. + Listen to the conversation between Nick and Duong about making plans for the weekend. + Read the conversation and do the tasks and role play with the expressions. + Listening: listen and write the words.

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Presentation * Pre- teach vocabulary: real object/ I. Vocabulary + art gallery (n ): phòng trưng bày NT translation/ situation/ map - Teacher use different techniques to teach + photograhpy (n): nhiếp ảnh vocabulary (situation, realia, examples) + portrait (n): chân dung, hình tượng - Follow the seven steps of teaching vocab. + dedicated ( adj): chuyên dụng, tận * Checking vocab: matching tụy + live (adj) : tại chỗ, trực tiếp (T.hình) * Presentation the conversation: Set the scene: Ex: There is a football match live on TV tonight. 1. Transferring the learning task. - Ask Ss to look at the picture on page 38 and answer the questions: • Model sentences Who are Duong and Nick? The blue bag is as cheap as the red one What are they going to do? Form:S1+ be (not ) as+ adj + as + S2 2. Doing the task. - Ss work in groups and try to guess the answers. - T gives Ss help if necessary. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. 86

- Call some Ss to give answers aloud. - Quickly write Ss’ answers on the board. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T remarks then plays the tape for Ss listening the dialogue on p38. II. Practice 1. Listen and read

a, Are these sentences true (T) or false (F) Key: 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. F b, Finish the following sentences by writing one word/ phrase from the conversation. Key: 1. as good as 2. loud 3. fantastic 4. in person 5. cinema c, Find these expressions in the conversation. Check what they mean. Key: 1. Let me see: used when you are thinking what to say or reply. 2. Come on: to show that you don’t agree with what Sb has said. 3. It isn’t my thing to show that you don’t like something. d, Work in pairs. Make short role-plays with the expressions above. Then practise them. Example: 1. A: We’ll go to the theatre next Sunday. Can you go, too? B:Let me see. I’ll have to ask my parents first 2. A: I think dancing is very interesting. I enjoy moving my body with music B: I don’t like it. Music really isn’t my thing 3. A: I like watching football match on TV. B: Oh, come on! It’s more exciting to watch it at the stadium. 2. Write the correct word/ phrase under

ẠY

KÈ

1. Transfering the learning task. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Dung and Nick then do the tasks - Help Ss know the ways to do the tasks 2. Doing the task. Part 1a- (P39) - Ss read the conversation and do task a): True(T) or False (F). - Ss do the task in groups. Part 1b- (P39) - Ss finish the sentences in task b) individually. Part 1c- (P39) - Ss work individually to do task c) and check the meaning of the expressions. Part 1d- (P39) - Ss work in pairs to do task d) Part 2- (P39) - Ss look at the 10 pictures and tell T what they can see in each picture, then write the correct words/phrases under the pictures - Ss work individually then compare their answers with a classmate. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Ask Ss to give the answers and correct. - Ss gie the answers for the tasks after finishing each. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to remark then T gives feedback

FF IC IA L

Activity 2: Practice

FF IC IA L

each of the pictures. Then listen and repeat. Key: 1. microphone 2. camera 3. painting 4. musical instrument 5. Portrait 6. art gallery 7. crayons 8. museum 9. opera 10. painbrush Activity 3: Production

III. Further practice 3. Complete these sentences with words from 2. Key: 1. art gallery 2. paintings 3. museum 4. camera 5. opera

Part 3- (P49) 1. Transferring the learning task. - Guide Ss how to do the task then ask Ss to work in groups of four - Asks Ss to write the correct words in the spaces. 2. Doing the task. - Ss read the sentences given in task 3 then complete them with the words from 2. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - After 4 minutes Ss go to the board to write the answers. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - The class gives comments, and T gives correction.

KÈ

* Free-practice: A portrait : a painting , drawing or photopgraph of a person , especially of the head and shoulders A painting: A picture that ha sbeen made using paint A museum: a building in which objects of artistic, cultural, historical or sscientific interest are kept and shown to the public. Artwork at artwork galleries is often for *Free-practice: sale while at museums therer is nothing for - Help sts to differentiate between a sale portrait and a painting , a museum and an An art gallery: A building where paintings art gallery and other works of art are shown to the public for sale. II-A CLOSER LOOK 1

ẠY

*The aims: - After the lesson students will be able to: + Know some new words relating to musical instruments. Learn to pronounce the

sounds /ȓ/ and /ʒ/ correctly in isolation and in context. + Listen and put the words into the correct columns; Listen and repeat the words and sounds /ȓ/ and /ʒ/ + Write the words under the pictures; put the correct word in each blank and use some verbs phrases to talk about music and arts. T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS 88

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

*Teaching new vocabulary: I. Vocabulary - Teacher uses different techniques to teach + actor # actress (n) : nam diễn viên/ vocabulary (situation, realia, examples) nữ diễn viên - Follow the seven steps of teaching vocab. + cello (n) : đàn vi- ô- lông- xen *Checking vocab: WHAT AND WHERE + saxophone (n): kèn xắc- xô + puppet (n) : con rối 1. Transferring the learning task. - Have Ss read the words in the tasks then T + perform (v) : biểu diễn guides Ss how to do them + performer (n): người biểu diễn + performance (n) : buổi biểu diễn 2. Doing the task. Part 1- (P40) - Play the recording and let Ss listen. Play it 1. Listen and repeat these words. again with pauses for them to repeat each painter artist actress musician word. Corrects their pronunciation. puppet dancer singer song writer Part 2- (P40) 2. Match a word in A with a phrase - Have Ss work individually to match the in B words with the phrases. Key: -Call one or two Ss to write the 1. e 2. b 3. a 4. d 5. c combinations on the board. Then checks the answers. 3a.Put these letters in order to make Part 3a- (P40) musical instruments. - Let Ss work in groups and put the letters in Key: 2. piano 3. cello order to form the correct words. Then check 1. drum their answers.(can be omitted) 4. guitar 5. violin 6. saxophone. Part 3a- (P40) - Let Ss work in pairs. Check their answers. 3b.Write the type of musical Have them read the words instrument in the box under each Part 4- (P40) picture. - Give Ss enough time to do the task Key: individually. Ask them to write the answers 1. a guitar 2. a drum on the board. Correct the answer as class. 3. Dan Bau (one string guitar) Call some Ss to read the sentences. 4. a violin 5. a cello 6. a piano7. a saxophone 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Check and write the correct answers. 4. Put one of these words in each - Elicit the answers from Ss. blank to finish the sentences. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the Key: 1. painter 2. Pop 3. singer task. - Ask others to remark then T gives 4. draw 5. puppets 6. instrument feedback. Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation 1. Transferring the learning task. II. Pronunciation: - Help Ss know the ways to do the tasks sounds /ʃ/ and /ʒ/. 2. Doing the task. 5.Listen and repeat. Pay attention to Part 5- (P40) the sounds /ȓ/ and /ʒ/. - Play the recording for Ss to listen to the - /ȓ/: condition ocean shy sugar song. machine 89

/ʒ/: measure pleasure usual vision decision

-Play the recording again for Ss to sing along. - Ask some Ss to sing the song.

* How to pronounce the sounds:/ȓ/ and 6. Listen to the words and put them /ʒ/. - Teacher explains how to pronounce the into two groups. /ʒ/

/ȓ/

closure occasion leisure version

FF IC IA L

anxious musician dishwasher rubbish

7.Listen and repeat the sentences.

Underline the words with the sound/ ȓ / one and the sound/ ʒ / twice Key: 1. Can you show me the new machine 2. They sing the song “ Auld Lang Syne” on some occasions 3. The musician is very anxious about the next performance. 4. She wanted to share her pleasurewith other people. 5. The new cinema is opposite the bus station. 6. Are you sure this is a modern version of “Romeo and Juliet?” * Free-practice: - Refers to the following

* Sound / ȓ / can be presented by sh, ch, s, t, c : she, watch , machine, sugar, sure,station , special * Sound / ʒ / can be represented by s: television, usually

ẠY

KÈ

sounds /ȓ/ and /ʒ/. Part 6- (P40) - Have Ss to read aloud the words first. Then play the recording for them to listen and repeat the words. Part 7- (P40) - Play the recording again. Ask Ss to put the words in the correct column while they listen. - Ss compare their answers in pairs before T checks the answers with the whole class. Part 7- (P40) - Play the recording and pause after each word which has the underlined a for Ss to check their answers. - Play the recording again for Ss to repeat each line of the conversation. - Ss work in pairs to practice the conversation. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Ask Ss to give the answers and correct - Elicit the answers from Ss. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to remark then T gives feedback. * Free-practice: - Ask Ss to distinguish and how to know the sounds: /ʃ/ and /ʒ/. - Asks Ss to give more words having two sounds.

III- A CLOSER LOOK 2

*The aims: - After the lesson students will be able to: 90

+ Revise comparisons and express agreement using too, either. + use “(not ) as…as, the sames as, different from” to make comparisons, and “too , so” to express agreement. -Reading: Read the passage and put the words in the gaps to complete it. -Writing: complete the sentences using as/ from; too/ either. T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

FF IC IA L

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary *Pre- teach vocabulary: expression/ I. Vocabulary synonym- antonym/ translation/ situation -nightingale (n): chim sơn ca. - T says aloud word by word while Ss listen - agreement (n): sự đồng tình -similar (a): giống and repeat after twice. - T writes new words on the board for Ss - Be similar to= be the same as: giống nhau >< be diferent from : khác nhau copying. - Ss listen and repeat the whole classfirst - bee (n): con ong then in individual. - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. *Checking: rub out and remember - Whole class plays the game. Activity 2: Presentation 1. Transferring the learning task. II Grammar: - T writes the examples on the board 1. Comparisons: and asks Ss to read noticing the italic Example: words/ phrases to find out the - Classical music is not as exciting as rock grammar rules. and roll - The price of food is the same as it was last 2. Doing the task. - Ss read the examples in pairs and year. pay attention to the comparisions, - City life is quite different from life in the too and either. country. *as + adjective + as to show that two things 3. Reporting the task result and are similar. discuss. - Elicit the form from Ss. *not as + adjective + as to mean something - Ss have a closer look at the is more or less than something else. Grammar boxes p41, 42. *the same as… to show the similarity. - Give more examples with the *different from to show that two or more comparisions, too and either things are different. sentences. 2. Too & Either 4. Giving the remarks to their doing Ex: A: I like pop music. B: I like it ,too. the task. - T remarks and explains the uses of A : My mum doesn’t like rock and roll. B: My mum doesn’t like it,either. +Comparisons: (not) as……..as / * too: used to express agreement with a the same as / different from. positive statement. +Express agreement using too & * either: used to express agreement with a either. negative statement. - Have Ss copy down. 91

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 3: Practice 1. Transferring the learning task. III. Practice - T gives the aims of each task and explains how to do them. 1.Putas or from in the gaps. 2. Doing the task. *Key: - Ss do the tasks individually, in pairs and 1. as 2. as 3. as groups. 4. from 5. as 6. as 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Some Ss give the answers for the tasks orally and write on the board. Part 1- (P41) -Let Ss work by themselves and write down the missing words. Corrects Ss’ mistakes. - Ask some Ss to read the sentences. 2. Put a suitable word in each gap in Part 2- (P41) the following passage. - Let Ss do the task individually. First Ss *Key: read the text by themselves, then put a 1. the same as 2. as quiet as suitable word in each gap, and compare their 3. different from 4. as narrow as answers with a classmate. 5. friendly as 6. the same as -Correct Ss’ answers. May call some Ss to read out their answers separately. Explain if necessary. -Let Ss read in chorus. Correct their pronunciation. 3. Work in pairs. Compare the two Part 3- (P42) music clubs in the town. Young -Let Ss work in pairs. Helps them interpret talent and Nightingale. the table first. E.g: Young talent is more friendly -Give them instructions on how to do the than Nightingale. task. Nightingale is not as friendly as -Encourage Ss to talk as much as possible Young Talent, but it is safer. with fluency and accuracy. Part 4- (P42) 4. Complete the following sentences -Ss work independently, writing down the with “too” or “either” answers. Then let them work in groups to *Key: check and read out the sentences. 1. too 2. either 3. either -T goes round and corrects mistakes or gives 4. too 5. too help when and where necessary. Part 5- (P42) - Ask Ss work independently, writing down 5. What music and arts are you their sentences to make a list of the likes and interested, or not interested in? Make a list by completing the sentences dislikes. They have their choices, so long as below. (You can use the words given their sentences are correct grammatically. or your own ideas.) -Encourages them to give their own ideas. E.g: I’m very interested in pop music. 92

FF IC IA L

4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to remark then T gives feedback. Activity 4: Production Part 6- (P52) IV. Further practice 1. Transferring the learning task. 6. Work in pairs. Share your list - T gives the aims of the task and explains with your partner. Then, report to how to do it. the class using too/ either. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to share their lists of ideas. Example: - Nam is interested in drawing and I 2. Doing the task. - Ss do the task in pairs. am too. - Phong doesn’t like folk music and I 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Ask some more Ss ro report their results to don’t either. the class. - Some Ss report to the class. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to remark then T checks.

IV- COMMUNICATION

*The aims: - After the lesson students will be able to: + Know some famous musicians, bands in Viet Nam and around the world as well as the famous songs and types of music. + To discuss about the value of music and arts in other areas of school and life - Reading: Read the passage and discuss the questions. - Writing: Make list from the most useful to the least useful subjects. - Speaking: ask and answer. MAIN CONTENTS

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Presentation * Teaching vocab: I. New words - Teacher use different techniques to +composer (n):người soạn, người sáng tác teach vocabulary (situation, realia, (nhạc) examples) +originate (v) = start (v): bắt đầu/ khởi đầu - Follow the seven steps of teaching +anthem (n) : bài quốc ca/ bài thánh ca vocab. +curriculum (n) : chương trình giảng dạy * Checking vocab: WHAT AND +academic( adj) : có tính chất học thuật/ trừu WHERE tượng +compulsory (adj): bắt buộc +unimportant (adj)>< important: ko quan trọng>< quan trọng Activity 2: Practice

1. Transferring the learning task.

II-Practice: 93

FF IC IA L

1. Music Quiz: What do you know? Work in groups and answer the questions. 1. B 2. C 3. A Key: 4. C 5. B 6. B 2.Read the following pasage. In groups, discuss the questions below. ? Do you think music and the arts should be compulsory subjects at schools in Viet Nam? Why or Why not? Suggested answers Agree: + Ss who are good at music arts can do better in more academic subjects like math and science + A good knowledge of music and arts is a necessity for any one who wants to be educated + Music helps Ss to relax their mind Disagree: + They aretalented subjects. Only some of Ss are good at them. + Music and arts don’t prepare Ss for a life of work. 3. Look at the different subjects below. In groups, make a list from the most useful to the least useful in the space below. How can the top three subjects on your list help you in other areas of school and life? - Music - Dancing - Singing - Painting - Photography.

ẠY

KÈ

- T gives the aims of each task and explains how to do them. 2. Doing the task. - Ss do the tasks individually, in pairs and groups. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Some Ss give the answers for the tasks orally and write on the board. Part 1- (P43) - Ask Ss to work in groups and find answers. Then gives the correct answers. - Let them listen to the songs: my heart will go on. Part 2- (P43) -Give Ss plenty of time to work independently, read the text, and understand the main ideas. Then divides the class into groups to discuss the questions. - Go round the class to give support if necessary. - Give comments on their clarity, language and fluently, but not on their positive or negative ideas. Part 3- (P43) - Ask Ss to work in groups to make a list from the most useful to least useful subjects given. How can the top three subjects on the list help them in other areas of school and life? After the discussion, each group presents their list, and gives a talk to the class. - Give comments. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to remark then T gives feedback.

Activity 3: Production

1. Transferring the learning task. - T gives the aims of the task and explains how to do it. 2. Doing the task. - Ss work in groups and talk about the best musician, musicband or artwork in Vietnam and around the world they know well. - Give each group a large piece of paper. 94

III. Further practice: *Talk about the best musician, musicband or artwork in Vietnam and around the world

FF IC IA L

- Ss write two more questions on this paper. (in 3 minutes) 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - When the time is up, ask Ss to talk about the best musician, musicband or artwork in Vietnam and around the world they know well. - Some Ss from the groups talk aloud before class. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to comment then T remarks anf corrects Ss’ mistakes if any. V- skills 1

*The aims: - After the lesson students will be able to: +To read for specific information about a type of traditional art: water puppetry + To know some types of music + To use their knowledge of music and arts to play game: TIC TAC TOE -Reading: Read the passage and answer the questions. -Speaking: practice speaking skill by playing game:TIC TAC TOE T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

KÈ

Activity 1: Reading * Teaching vocab: I. Vocabulary water puppet (n): múa rối nước -Teach some vocabularies: (using puppeteer (n): người điều khiển rối techniques in teaching vocabulary) emotional( a): xúc động/ dễ cảm động ( teaches word by word, explains the meaning ,guides Ss to read ….and then show (v,n): biểu diễn/ buổi biểu diễn checks Ss’ understanding) * Checking vocab: ROR Part 1,2- (P44) II. Reading 1. Transferring the learning task. 1. Find the words in the text which - T gives the aims of the task and explains mean how to do it. Key: - Ask Ss to skim the text and try to know 1. Unique 2. Began 3. Performed what the words in part 1 mean then answer 4. Rural 5. Festivals. the questions in part 2. 2. Doing the task. - Ss read the text quickly and underline the 2. Answer the questions below: words in the passage then they read the text Key: about water puppet again andanswer the 1/Water puppet began in the 11th questions century. - Ss work in pairs in 4 minutes and answer 2/A water puppet show takes place in the questions a pool. 3/The puppets are controlled by 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Ask for Ss’ answers. puppeteers. - Some Ss give the answers for the tasks 4/The puppets are made of wood and

ẠY D

MAIN CONTENTS

FF IC IA L

orally and write on the board. painted. - Ask Ss give some examples with the words 5/Water puppet shows are about rural life: rice farming, fishing, Vietnamese or phrases. - Call some pairs ask and answer the village festivals questions 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to remark then T checks. - Confirm the correct answer. - Give feedback. Activity 2: Speaking Part 3- (P44) III. Speaking. 1. Transferring the learning task. 3. Match the types of music in A with -Tell students to do the task independently the adjectives to describe them in B first. A B -Have Ss to tell the reasons why they a. old, emotional 1. pop match in 5 minutes. b. Finely, exciting 2. folk music 2. Doing the task. c. Quick - Ss do the task individualy to do matching 3. Rock and roll d. Sad, melodic 4. Hip-hop/ rap 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. e. Popular, 5. blues -Call some students to match on the board pleasant 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the Suggested answers : task. 1. e 2. a 3. b 4. c 5. d -Check the answers and feedback.

ẠY

KÈ

Part 4- (P44) 1. Transferring the learning task. - Explain the rules and guide Ss how to play the game (write numbers from 1 to 9 in the boxes. You can put the numbers anywhere you like, you will answer the question in the number you choose) What does he/ she often draw? Ss work in pairs. Decide which partner is X , which is O and who will go first. The first player chooses a box and calls out a number. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer questions 2. Doing the task. - Ss do the task in pairs to play the game 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. -Call some pairs to perform before class 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. -Check the answers, remarkand feedback. 96

4. Game: TIC TAC TOE 1. Give the names of two Vietnamese musical instruments. 2. Sing a song in English. 3. Who is your favourite singer? Why? 4. Talk for 30 seconds about what you see when you visit an art gallery. 5. How often do you go to a concert? Tell your partner about the last concert you went to. 6. Who is your favourite Vietnamese musician? Why? 7. Talk about 30 seconds about your favourite instrument. 8. Name one of your favourite painters. 9. Who can draw the best in your class?

VI- skills 2

FF IC IA L

*The aims: - After the lesson students will be able to: + To get the vocabulary relating to the biography of an artist . + To write a paragraph about biography of an artist- Picasso -Listening: Listen for specific information to biography of an artist and complete the task about Picasso. - Writing: Write an informal letter. T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Listening translation/ I. New words +) Pre- teach vocabulary: examples/ synonym + Sculpture (n) : bức tượng/ tác phẩm - T: writes new words on the board. điêu khắc. - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first + training (n) = education then the whole class. + produce (v) = make - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. + complain (v): phàn nàn +) Checking: rub out and remember. + enormous (adj ) = a lot of +) Before listening: Listening tip: When you listen, it is - Explains Listening Tip to Ss, telling them very useful to take notes. Try to note if they are going to apply the listening tip, down the keywords (important words). then they must be given time to take notes. This helps you to remember the main ideas. 1. Transferring the learning task. - T gives the aims of each task and II. Listening explains how to do them. 1. Listen to the passage about Picasso 2. Doing the task. and circle the words you hear. - Ss do the tasks individually, in pairs and * Key: groups. 1. artists 2. training 4. portrait 6. paintings. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Some Ss give the answers for the tasks orally and write on the board 2. Listen to the passage again and choose the correct answers. Part 1- (P45) - Play the recording and ask Ss to listen * Key: and check their answers. 1. A 2. B 3. A 4. C -Ss work in pairs to compare their answers before T play the recording the second 3. Listen to the passage one more time for pairs to check their answers. time. As a class, discuss how the -Feedback listening is organized ( according to a Part 2- (P45) timeline, the order of important - Ss give the answers for the questions events, or another way) inpart 2. - According to a timeline -Ss compare their answers in pairs before Suggested ideas giving T the answers. - T writes Ss’ answers on the board. Picasso’s biography : -Play the recording once last time to + 1881: was born in Malaga , Spain 97

confirm the answers for both exercises 1 & 2. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to remark then T checks. - Give feedback.

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

+ 1888 : received formal artistic training from his father + 1894: was admitted to ma School of Fine Art in Barcelona + 1896: completed “ Portrait of Aunt Pepa “ + 1973 : died in Mougins , France Activity 2: Writing 1. Transferring the learning task. III. Writing - T gives the aims of each task and explains 4. Read the following letter and how to do them. choose the correct answer. 2. Doing the task. * Key: - Ss do the tasks individually, in pairs and 1. A 2. B groups. * Writing tip:Informal letter of invitation : 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Some Ss give the answers for the tasks Invitation : - Would you like + to……? orally and write on the board - How about + V-ing - Ask Ss to read the Study Skills box. ………………? -T may explain the use of connectors to show - Time: sequence by referring to the listening. - Place : Part 4- (P45) - Place to meet - Have Ss read the sample letter carefully, - Time to meet : and note down the useful expressions (cues) for writing an informal letter of invitation. 4. Now write a letter to invite a -Ss work in pairs to read the letter friend to an art exhibition, using - Write them on the board. Tells Ss to choose the following. the correct answers. - Event: Exhibition of Modern Art. Part 4- (P55) - Time: 9 o’clock, Saturday morning - Ask What would you say to invite your - Place: Arts centre friend to see a movie with you to night? - Ask Ss read the cues carefully, then practise - Time to meet: 8.15 writing the letter. - Tell Ss to pay special attention to spelling and punctuation. -Collects some Ss’ writing papers and mark them, then give comments to the class. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to remark then T checks. - Give feedback.

VII- Looking back & project

*The aims: After the lesson students will be able to: 98

- Ss will be able to revise all vocabulary and grammar that appear in unit 11 by completing the exercises then they can make something new from used things. T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Vocabulary 1. Transferring the learning task. I. Vocabulary - T gives the aims of each task and Task 1: Add more words to the word explains how to do them. webs below. Reduce: electricity, paper, water, 2. Doing the task. - Ss do the tasks individually, in pairs and rubbish, gas, …. groups. Reuse: plastic bag, bottle, can, light 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. bulb, envelope, … - Some Ss give the answers for the tasks Recycle: book, plastic box, plastic bag, newspaper, can,… orally and write on the board Part 1- (P56) - Tells Ss to do the task individually then Task 2: In pairs, ask and answer compare their answers with a partner. questions about the 3 Rs. - Ask 3 Ss to go to the board, each writes E.g: A: Can we reduce water? a word web on the board. - Elicit other words from Ss to add to the B: Yes, we can. A: How? webs. B: Don’t take a bath. Part 2- (P56) - Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions about the 3Rs. Task 3: a. Complete the words or - Call on some pairs to practice in front of phrases. Key: the rest. 1. Deforestation Part 3- (P56) - Tells Ss to do the task individually then 2. Air pollution compare their answers with a partner. 3. Water pollution - Ss write the complete sentences in their 4. Noise pollution notebooks. b. Match each word or phrase from 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the awith an effect below to make a task. sentence. - Ask others to remark then T checks. Key: - Give feedback. 1.b ; 2.e ; 3.a ; 4.c ; 5.d Activity 2: Grammar 1. Transferring the learning task. II. Grammar - T gives the aims of each task and explains Task 4: Write the correct form of how to do them. verb in brackets. Key: 2. Doing the task. - Ss do the tasks individually, in pairs and 1.is; will rise groups. 2. rises , will disappear 3. reduce, will have 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Some Ss give the answers for the tasks 4. don’t have, will be orally and write on the board 5. are, will be Part 4- (P56) Task 5: Combine each pair of 99

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- Ask Ss to do the exercises individually first. sentences below to make a Then, they can check their answers with a conditional sentence type 1. partner before discussing them as a class. Key: - Ss write the answers on the board. 1. If students recycle and use - Give feedback. recycled materials, they will save energy. Part 5- (P56) - Ask Ss to do the exercises individually first. 2. If we use the car all the time, we Then, they can check their answers with a will make the air dirty. 3. You will save electricity if you partner before discussing them as a class. turn off your computer when you - Ss write the answers on the board. don’t use it. - Give feedback. 4. People will stop using so much - Tell Ss keep a record of their original energy if they want to save the answers so they can use that information in environment. their Now you can… statement. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. 5. If you see a used can on the road, what will you do? - Ask others to remark then T checks. - Give feedback. Activity 3: Communication 1. Transferring the learning task. III. Communication. - T gives the aims of the task and explains how to do it. Task 6: Work in groups. 2. Doing the task. Interview three - Ss do the task individually the in pairs. classmates and note 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. down their answers. - Some Ss give the answers for the tasks orally and write Share their answer with on the board the class. Part 6- (P56) - Ss work in groups of 4. One St interviews the other three group members and take notes down their answers. - Some Ss repot the results to the class. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to remark then T checks. - Give feedback. Activity 4: Production 1. Transferring the learning task. - T gives the aims of the task and explains how to * Finished! Now you can… do it. 1. Use words related to the - Ask Ss to complete the self-assessment. environment. 2. Name environmental 2. Doing the task. - Ss do the task in groups. problems and their effects. 3. Talk about possibilities, 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Some Ss give the answers for the tasks orally and using conditional sentenceswrite on the board type 1. 4.Talk about ways to ‘go green’ 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to remark then T checks. - Give feedback.

3. Practice: 100

FF IC IA L

- Designed right after each activity 4. Application: - Talking about “Music and Arts”. 5. Knowledge widening: - Applying knowledge to talk about “Dong Ho paintings” by doing project on p47. V. Consolidation and homework: - Free practice: about “Music and Arts” (pairs, groups…) Pre: 20/ 10/ 2018 Te: ..../ 11/ 2018

Period 33: TEST CORRECTION

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives. 1. Knowledge: - After the lesson, Ss will be able toread the test again and find out their mistakes and correct themselves and T can evaluate Ss’ knowledge. - Vocabulary: Related to the theme: Our communities. - Phonetics: Check the souds: /əʊ/, /ʌ/, /z/, /iz/, and /s/. - Grammar: Present simple, present continuous, “Be”and “have” for description. 2. Skills: - Ss’ listening, reading and writing skills. 3. Attitude: - Educate Ss to learn hard and honestly. 4. Ability needed: - Communication, self study. II/ Preparations. Material: textbook, paper tests. Equipment: sub - board III/ Teaching process. 1- Class Organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence: .......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33 ........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2- Oral test - S1 writes new words - S2 does exercise B4- P3 in workbook 3- New lesson A.Warm- up: Different from Difficult *Slap the board

Either

Similar to B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

* Give the paper test back 1. Test correction A. LISTENING ( 2,0 pts) and correct the test. 101

FF IC IA L

I. Listen and choose the words to complete the passage. (2,0 pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 8 = 2,0 ®iÓm - T plays the tape and ask Ss to check their listening 1- B 2- C 3- D 4- B task. 5- A 6- D 7- A 8- B Tapescript: Minh’s hobby is singing. She (1) enjoys singing very much. When her brother (2) bought a karaoke set (3) lastmonth, Minh was so glad that she (4) sang every day after dinner. She likes to sing only (5) English songs. In fact, she has already sung all the songs found (6) on the karaoke discs. Minh is singing in the karaoke (7) competition organized by the RC Center this Saturday. Her (8) family is going there to - Ask Ss to give the answers support her. for the questions. B. LANGUAGE FOCUS (4,0pts)

- Ss give the answers in turn.

I. Choose the word which has underlined part pronounced differently from others.(0,75pt)Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 3 = 0,75 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- C 2- A 3- D NO 2: 1- A 2- A3- D II.Choose the best answer. (2,0 pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 8 = 2,0 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- C 2- B 3- D4- A 5- B6- C 7- A 8- D NO 2: 1- A2- C3- B4- D 5- A 6- D7- B8- B III. Give the correct form of the verb in bracket. (1,25pt) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1,25 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- goes2- arranging3- started 4- haven’t arrived 5- Have (you ever) done NO 2: 1- haven’t arrived 2- goes 3Have (you ever) done 4- arranging 5- started

ẠY

KÈ

- T: explains if it is necessary.

C. READING. (2,5pts)

- Ask Ss to give the answers I. Read the following passage and answer True (T) orFalse (F)(1,25pts) for the questions. Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1,25 ®iÓm 1- T 2- T 3- F 4- F 5- T II. Read the paragraph again and then answer the - Ss give the answers in questions. (1,25 pts) turn. Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1,25 ®iÓm 102

Ngày 22 tháng 10 năm 2018.

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

1, The best thingyou can do for your body/ It is exercise. - T: explains if it is 2, Having a healthy diet can help promote good health. necessary. 3, Yes, they should. 4, Fiber helps your body to digest the food you eat. 5, Obesity means having so much fat on your body - Ask Ss to give the answers that you are risking your health. D. WRITING. (1,5pts) for the questions. I. Rewrite the sentence use the given words that unchange its meaning (1,0pt). Mçi câu ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 4 = 1,0 ®iÓm - Ss write the answers on 1. I have never painted a mural over graffiti before. the board in turn. 2. Mr. Binh has recycled rubbish for two years. 3. Because David was lazy, he failed the exam. 4. We began to donate books and clothes ten years ago. - T: explains if it is II. Reorder the given words to make sentences.(0,5pt) necessary. Mçi câu ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 2 = 0,5 ®iÓm NO 1:1. They give warm clothes to homeless people in Ha Noi. * Give the general 2. Have you finished your homework yet? remarks -T gives general remarks of NO 2:2. Have you finished your homework yet? 1. They give warm clothes to homeless people good and bad points. in Ha Noi. - T give compliments to the 2. Remark excellent students and *The result. points out the limits of - Class 7A:…./ 37 from 5 some week SS. 7B:…./ 33 - T collects Ss’ marks 7C:…./ 35 4. Consolidation - Retell the main content of the lesson: new words and grammar from unit 1 to unit 3 5. Homework - Review all grammar and new words - Prepare: Communication Page 43 - textbook.

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÍ DUYỆT

Trần Thị Thanh Trà WEEK 12 Pre: 06/ 11/ 2018 Te: ...../ 11/ 2018 103

Period 34: UNIT 5: VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK.

Lesson 1:Getting started

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to get the lexical items related to the topic “Food and Drink”, understand the content of the dialogue. Then ask and answer about different traditional food. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to Vietnamese food and drink: tofu, noodles, mineral water, omelette, turmeric, eel, shrimp, … - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: countable and uncountable nouns, the quanlities: a/an/some / any. 2. Skills: - Practice all the exercises in book correctly to drill speaking, reading and writing skills. 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to love traditional food and drinks. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Asking and answering questions about Vietnamese food and drinks. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Some Ss talk about Dong Ho paintings. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Picture drill: Ask Ss about the picture: - Where are Phong and his Mum? - What might be happening to them? - What are they doing? - What is there in the fridge? B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation *Pre- teach vocabulary: pictures, I. Vocabulary realias, situations. + tofu (n): tàu hũ/ đậu phụ 104

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- T says aloud word by word while Ss + noodles(n): mì listen and repeat after twice. + mineral water(n) : nước khoáng - T writes new words on the board for + omelette (n): trứng tráng Ss copying. + turmeric(n): nghệ/ củ nghệ - Ss listen and repeat the whole + eel (n): con lươn + shrimp (n): con tôm classfirst then in individual. + warm something up (v): hâm nóng lại - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. *Checking: matching - Whole class plays the game. Activity 2: Practice Part 1a- P48 II. Practice 1. Transferring the learning task. 1/Listen and read -Play the recording twice for Ss a) Read the conversation and answer the listening and then Ss read it silently. questions: - Ask Ss to read the dialogue in pairs Key: and answer the questions in ex 1a- P49 1. Because his parents are going to the opera tonight and they won’t be home until 2. Doing the task. - Ss work in pairs to do the task. 9 pm. - Allow Ss to share their answers 2. There’s some rice left from lunch. before discussing as a class 3. Phong should warm it up. 4. She’ll buy some milk tomorrow. 3. Reporting the task result and 5. He can have some orange juice instead discuss. - Some Ss give the answers orally. of milk. - Have other Ss remark and correct if possible. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T checks and corrects if any. - Give feedback. b) Find the words about food and drink in the conversation and put them in the Part 1b- P49 - Ask Ss not to look at the book and try correct column. to remember which foods and drinks. Key: - Ss do the task in groups. Food Drink - Some Ss write their answers on the meat milk board. tofu Juice - T checks then corrects. fried vegetables mineral water - Give feedback. bread orange juice noodles rice Part 2- P49 2/ Match the food and drink with the -Have Ss quickly match each word/ pictures. phrase with its picture. Key: - Ask Ss to repeat the words chorally and individually. Corrrects their 1- J, 2 - F, 3 - A, 4- B, 5 - D, pronunciation. 6 - I, 7- G, 8 - H, 9- E, 10 - C. - Ask for translation to check if they 105

KÈ

FF IC IA L

understand Part 3- P49 3/Think about their favorite foods and - Let Ss think of their favourite food drinks. and drink and what questions they can ask about their partner’s favourite food Example: and drink A: What’s your favorite food? - Model this activity with a more able B: It’s pho bo - beef noodle soup. student A: When do you usually eat it? - Ask Ss to work in pairs B: In the morning. - Go around to help - Call some pairs to practisre in front of class 4. Listen and repeat the adjectives. Part 4- P49 Key: - HaveSs listen and repeat the 1. bitter 5. salty adjectives. 2. delicious 6. spicy -Ask for translation to check if they 3. tasty 7. fragrant understand the meanings (matching) 4. sweet 8. sour - Ask Ss to use the adjectives they have Ex: learnt to talk about the food and drink -Green tea is bitter. in 2 - lemonade is sour. - Give some more examples to - Beef noodles soup is very delicious. illustrate before allowing Ss to practise Examples: acrid , fatty, limber, tough, in pairs crispy ,…. - Ask Ss to add more adjectives Activity 3: Production Part 5- P49 III. Further practice - Demonstrate the game to the class. 5. Game : What’s your favorite food - Describe one or two favourite foods or and drink? drinks and asks more able students to Example: guess their names A: It’s my favourite drink. It’s a bit sour, -Ss work in groups. One student describes but It’s also sweet. his favourite food or drink. The rest of the B: Is it lemonade? group tries to guess which food or drink it A: Yes, it is / No, try again. is.

ẠY

4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson: 5. Homework: - Learn new words by heart. - Read the conversation again. - Do exercises: B1,B2, B3 (page 36, 37- workbook).Translate the conversation in Getting started into Vietnamese. - Prepare: UNIT 5:A closer look 1/ Page 50 - textbook. Pre: 06/ 11/ 2018 Te: ...../ 11/ 2018

Period 35: UNIT 5: VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK.

Lesson 2:A closer look 1 106

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to get some new words relating to ingredients to make some dishes, then use some verbs to make the pancake with some vegetables. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to Vietnamese food and drink: heat, pour, fold, beat, serve, pepper… - Phonetics: To pronounce sounds /ɒ/ and /ɔː/correctly in isolation and in context. - Grammar: Imperatives, nouns (countable/ uncountable), the quanlities: a/an/some/any. 2. Skills: - Listening: Listen and repeat the words and sounds, underline the sounds /ɒ/ and /ɔː/ they hear. - Writing: use the verbs and words given to make phrases, use the words given to complete the sentences. 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, love their food and drinks and know the usefulness of food and drinks. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about Vietnamese food and drinks. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: goes to the board to write new words - S2+ 3: practice the conversation between Phong and his Mum then answer the questions in texbook part a/ page 49. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: * Chatting: - Ask Ss to name the food and drinks they’ve learnt Suggested answers: Noodles, beef noodles, shrimp, fish, chicken, eel soup, sweet soup, omelette, freen tea, lemonade, … B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary 107

FF IC IA L

I. Vocabulary * New words - heat (v): làm nóng - pour (v): rót/ đổ/ trút - fold (v): cuốn/ gấp - beat (v) : đập - serve (v): dọn ăn/ dọn bàn - pepper (n) : hạt tiêu - mix (v) – mixture (n): trộn; hỗn hợp

1.Look at the pictures and complete the instructions with the verbs in the box. Key: 1. Beat 2. Heat 3. Pour 4. Fold 5. Serve

2.Put the words in the correct order to make sentences. Key: 1. Beat the eggs together with sugar, flour, and milk. 2. Pour ¼ cup of the mixture into the pan at a time. 3. Heat the oil over a medium heat in a frying pan. 4. Cook until golden. 5. Serve the pancake with some vegetables. Reordering: 1-3-2-4-5

ẠY

KÈ

*Pre- teach vocabulary: pictures, realias, explanation. - T says aloud word by word while Ss listen and repeat after twice. - T writes new words on the board for Ss copying. - Ss listen and repeat the whole classfirst then in individual. - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. *Checking: rub out and remember - Whole class plays the game. Part 1- P50: - Have Ss complete the instructions with the verbs in the box. Reminds them to pay attention to the pictures. - Some students present their work on the boad and others provide comments - Correct Ss’ answers Part 2- P50: 1. Transferring the learning task. - Guide Ss how to do the exercise then ask them to do the exercise individually. 2. Doing the task. - Ss do the task individually. - Allow Ss to share their answers before discussing as a class 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Some Ss give the answers orally. - Have other Ss remark and correct if possible. - Help them to refer to 1 to make the meanings of the verbs clearer. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T checks and corrects if any. - Give feedback. Part 3- P50: - Check Ss’ understanding of the meanings on the nouns given. - Explain the meanings by using pictures, example. - Have Ss put nouns in the correct columns. - Remind Ss that some nouns may fit in both columns.

108

3.Put the nouns in the correctcolumns.

Key: Dishes pancake, beef noodle soup, spring rolls, noodles, pork,

Ingredients salt, cooking oil, flour, pork, turmeric, pepper, noodles.

FF IC IA L

- Ss do the task in pairs then two Ss write omelette, the answers on the board. sandwich. - T checks and correct if any. * Free-practice: - Ask Ss to add some more dishes and ingredients to the table. Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation - Model the sounds /ɒ/ and /ɔ:/ first and II. Pronunciation: sounds /ɒ/ and /ɔ:/ let Ss see how the sounds are formed. - Ss listen and repeat. 4. Listen and repeat the words. Pay attention to the sounds /ɒ/ and /ɔ:/ Part 4- P50: - Play the recording and asks Ss to listen - /ɒ/: soft, hot, bottle, pot, rod. and repeat. Correct their pronunciation. - /ɔ:/: pork, salt, fork, sport, sauce. -Ask Ss to practice the sounds together - Ask Ss to put the words in the correct column while they listen. - Let Ss compare their answer in pairs before checking as a class 5. Listen to the sentences and circle the Part 5- P50: - Ask Ss to listen while T plays the correct words you hear. recording. Play the recording again and Key: ask Ss to circle the words they hear. 1. cod 2. port 3. sports - Ask Ss to check their answers. 4. fox 5. short - Ss listen again and check.

KÈ

4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson: the sounds /ɒ/ and /ɔ:/ in isolation and in context; the vocabulary related to arts and music.. 5. Homework: - Learn by heart the new words - Do ex A1, A2, B4/ page 36, 37- workbook - Prepare UNIT 5: A CLOSER LOOK 2/ page 51+ 52 - textbook

ẠY

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 08/ 11/ 2018 Te: ...../ 11/ 2018

Period 36: UNIT 5: VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK.

Lesson 3:A closer look 2 109

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to learn countable and uncountable nouns, the quanlities: a/an/some/any; the questions with How many / How much and distinguish countable nouns and uncountable nouns. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to Vietnamese food and drink: - Phonetics: To pronounce sounds /ɒ/ and /ɔː/correctly in isolation and in context. - Grammar: Imperatives, nouns (countable/ uncountable), the quanlities: a/ an/ some/ anyand the questions with: How much/ How many. 2. Skills: - Writing: write countable and uncountable noun, complete the sentences with a/ an/ some/ any. - Speaking: Talk about the questions with How many / How much. 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, love their food and drinks and know the usefulness of food and drinks. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about Vietnamese food and drinks. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: goes to the board to write new words - S2: Complete the instructions then reorder the sentences on how to make omelette 1. ……….the egg mixture into the pan 2………….with some vegetables 3…………the eggs together with salt and pepper 4…………...the frying pan over a high heat and add cooking oil 5…………..the omelette in half *Key: 1. pour 2. serve 3. beat 4. heat 5. fold Reorder: 3-4-1-5-2 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Brainstorming: - Two Ss go to the board and write the adjs about food and drink they’velearnt.(in 3minutes). - The person who writes more words is winner. 110

B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Presentation I Grammar: - Ask Ss to study the Grammar Box. 1. Countable and uncountable nouns -Draw Ss’ attention to the difference - Countable nouns : singular and plural form between countable nouns and Ex: a banana – two bananas uncountable nouns and the use of An apple – a kilo of apples measurement phrases by analysing - Uncountable nouns : only in singular form the examples in the Grammar Box. Ex: water, milk, salt, pepper, cooking oil, - Ask Ss give more examples about beef,… the things around them. * For uncountable nouns we can use phrases like : a bottle of, a piece of , a bar of, a - Ss listen carefully and take note packet of, a glass of , a kilo of , a bag of , a then give the examples. cup of , a can of ,… Ex: a bottle of water - two bottles of water 2. The quanlities: a/an/some/any - Draw Ss’ attention to the use of a, Countable nouns an, some and any by analyzing the Singular Plural instruction and example in the Affirmative There is an egg There are Grammar box. some eggs There isn’t an egg There aren’t any eggs Interrogative Is there an egg ? Are there any eggs?

Negative

- Ss listen and read the grammar box Individually. - Ss take note.

Uncountable nouns Affirmative

There is some milk Negative There isn’t any milk Interrogative Is there any milk ?

ẠY

KÈ

*Notes:We can use “some” in an offer or a request Ex: Would you like a glass of orange juice? Can I have some more apples, please? - Ask Ss to study the Grammar box. 3. The questions about quanlity: How Help them to distinguish the use of many/ How much How many and How much by - How many + plural countable nouns analyzing the instruction and - How much + uncountable nouns examples in the Grammar Box. - Ss study the grammar box in pairs Ex: How many eggs do you need ? How much milk do you need ? then take note.

Activity 2: Practice Part 1- P51 II. Practice -Ask Ss to do the grammar exercise 1. Which of the following nouns are countable and which are uncountable? 111

FF IC IA L

Key: Countable: banana, apple Uncountable: bread, beef, pepper, pork, turmeric, spinach.

3. Fill the blanks with a/ an / some or any in the following conversation. Key: 3. some 1. any 2. some 4. any 5. a 6. an

4. Fill each blank with How many or How much. Key: 1. How many 2. How much 3. How many4. How many 5. How much

individually. Remind them to refer to the Grammar Box. - Ask Ss to compare their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. - Ss do the task individually then compare with partner. - Some Ss give their own answers on the board then correct their work. - Let Ss add more words. Part 3- P52 - Tell Ss what they are supposed to do. Then ask them to work individually to do the task. - Ss do the task individually then share the answers with their partner before checking with the whole class. - Ss give the answers orally. - Check their answers as a class. Part 4- P52 - Ask Ss to do the task individually. - Ss do the task individually then compare with partner. - Some Ss give the answers aloud. - T checks and corrects if any.

5. Use the suggested words to makequestions with How much/ How many, the interview your partner. Key: 1.How much milk do you drink every morning? - two glasses/ 2 liters/ ,…… 2. How much rice do you eat for dinner? - two bowls/ some 3. How many vegetables do you eat every day? - some/ a lot of/ a few/ ,….. 4. How many apples do you eat everyday? - some/ an apple/ don’t eat any apples

ẠY

KÈ

Part 5- P52 1. Transferring the learning task. - Ask Ss to work in pairs, ask and answer the questions with How many and How much. - T models with a good St then ask Ss to practice in pairs. 2. Doing the task. - Ss do the task in pairs. - T goes around to help weaker students. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Call on some Ss to practice before class and give comment. - Some pairs practice aloud before class. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T checks and corrects if any. - Give feedback. Activity 3: Production Part 2- P52 III. Further practice - Demonstrates the game to the class 2. Game: Give me an egg! 112

first. Then when Ss know exactly what to do. Ask them to play the game in groups.

One team says words related to food or drink. The other team adds some /a/ an. Example: Team 1: egg Team 2: an egg

Ngày 12 tháng 11 năm 2018.

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÍ DUYỆT

FF IC IA L

4. Consolidation: - Ask Ss to retell the comparative adjectives 5. Homework: - Learn by heart the form of comparative adjectives. - Do ex B5, B6, B7- page 38 in workbook - Prepare UNIT 5: COMMUNICATION/ page 53- textbook

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

ẠY

KÈ

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WEEK 13: Pre: 12/ 11/ 2018 Te: ...../ 11/ 2018

Period 37: UNIT 5: VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK.

Lesson 4:Communication 113

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to get the lexical items related to the topic “Food and Drink” -To talk about different types of Vietnamese food, drink and recipes. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to Vietnamese food and drink. - Phonetics: To pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Nouns (countable/ uncountable), Wh- questions. 2. Skills: - Writing: write countable and uncountable nouns. - Speaking: Talk about the questions with Wh-questions. 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, love their food and drinks and know the usefulness of food and drinks. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about their favourite food and drink. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Ask Ss tochoose the best answer: 1. I haven’t got (some / no /any) bread left for breakfast any 2. There (are some / are any / is some) bottles of water in the fridge are some 3. She has (some / a lot/ a) nice photos of our classmates some 4. This morning, I didn’t have (some / no / a) cup of coffee a 5. (How many / How much / Is there) bananas do you eat everyday? How many - Give remarks and marks 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Brainstorming: -Ask Ss to name the food and drink. noodles omelette Food and drink 114

B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Presentation *Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/ I. New words: situation/ pictures - sticky rice (n): cơm nếp - T says aloud word by word while Ss - sauce (n) : nước chấm/ nước sốt listen and repeat after twice. - sausage (n): xúc xích; dồi; lạp xưởng - T writes new words on the board for - yoghurt (n) : sữa chua Ss copying. - tuna (n): cá ngừ - Ss listen and repeat the whole - ham (n): thịt dăm bông classfirst then in individual. - celebrity (n): nổi tiếng/ có danh tiếng - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. - chef (n): đầu bếp *Checking: rub out and remember - Whole class plays the game. Activity 2: Practice Part 1- P53 II-Practice: 1. Transferring the learning task. 1. Listen to a celebrity chef, Austin -Ask Ss to look at the picture of the chef and Nguyen talking about his favorite predict which food or dishes he might like. food. Which food in Extra - Play the recording and lets Ss check their vocabulary does he talk about? predictions - Play the recording again and ask Ss to tick Key: the food the chef mentions from the Extra sticky rice, sausage , yoghurt, tuna vocabulary box. 2. Doing the task. - Ss listen and do thetask individually. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Have Ss give their own answers. - Ss give their own answers in turn. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T corrects and gives feedback. Part 2- P53 2. What are your favorite foods and 1. Transferring the learning task. - Have Ss read the questions in the table drinks? Write your answers in the carefully and ask them to note their answers. table below. Questions Your - Ss do the task individually. answers - Ask Ss to share their answers in pairs to 1/What’s your favourite find out what they have in common with food? their partners. 2/How does it taste? 2. Doing the task. 3/What’s your favourite - Ss read the questions given and note their drink? answers individually. 4/When do you often drink 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. it? - Ss share their answers with a partner then 5/What foreign food / drink 115

Part 3- P53 1. Transferring the learning task. - Ask Ss to move around and ask different classmates every question in the table. 2. Doing the task. - Ss do the task in pairs. - Remind Ss to write the names of the people they interview and note the answers in the table.

do you like? 6/What new food do you want to try? 7/What food do you hate? 8/What food can you cook?

Example: My favorite food is spring roll. It tastes delicious. 3.Interview three students about their favorite foods and drinks. Example exchange:

FF IC IA L

compare. - Some Ss give their own answers in turn. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T corrects and gives feedback.

A: What’s your favourite food? B: My favorite food is spring roll. A: How does it taste? B: It tastes delicious. A: What’s your favourite drink? ………………………………… Activity 3: Production Part 4- P53 III. Further practice: 3. Reporting the task result and 4.Report your results to the class Example: discuss. - Call on some Ss to report the results - Lan’s favorite food is spring roll. It tastes of their interviews before the whole delicious. class. - Some pairs practice aloud before class - Invite some comments from other Ss. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Correct the common errors and gives remark.

ẠY

KÈ

4. Practice and consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson: 5. Subsequent activities: - Do C1 + C2 page 39 in the work book. - Prepare: UNIT 5: SKILL 1/ Page 54- textbook. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 14/ 11/ 2018 Te: ...../ 11/ 2018

Period 38: UNIT 5: VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK.

Lesson 5:Skills 1

116

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to get the main ideas of a text about a popular dish in Ha Noi- Pho, ask and answer questions about the ingredients for an omelette. Talk about different types of Vietnamese food, drink and recipes. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to Vietnamese food and drink: stew, slice,bone, teaspoon,… - Phonetics: To pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Nouns (countable/ uncountable), a/ an, some, any, How much/ many…? 2. Skills: - Reading: Reading about popular dish in Ha Noi- Pho. - Speaking: Talk about the ingredients for an omelette. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to work hard, love their food and drinks and know the usefulness of food and drinks. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about Vietnamese food and drink. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Ask Ss to talk about their favourite food/ drink by answering the questions: a. What is your favourite food / drink? b. How does it taste? c. How often do you eat / drink it? d. Can you cook / make it? - Give remarks and marks 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Questions and answers drill: - Ask Ss to look at the picture of a bowl of Pho and answer some questions: 1- What dish do you think it is? 2- Which place is famous for this dish? 3- What are the ingredients for it? 4- When do people often have it? 5- Do you like to have it? Why or Why not? - Introduces the new lesson 117

B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Reading Part 1- P54 I. Reading - Ask Ss to scan the passage to find 1. Read Phong’s blog. Find the words where the words: stewing, bones, broth, from the box below in the text an boneless and slices are in the passage. underline them. Use the words around - Ss read the text and do the task in pairs. each underlined word to help you - T may help Ss use the context of the understand the meaning. passage to work out the meaning of these Key: words or T may ask for translation to - stewing : hầm/ ninh check if Ss understand. - bones : xương - Some Ss give their own answers then T - boneless : kkông có xương checks and corrects if any. - broth : nước xuýt - slices : lát mỏng Part 2- P54 2. Read Phong’s blog again and answer 1. Transferring the learning task. the questions. - Ask Ss to scan the passage to answer the questions. Key: -Ask Ss to note where they found the 1.We can enjoy pho all kinds of meals information that help them to answer the during a day, from breakfast to dinner questions. and even for a late night snack. 2. Doing the task. 2.They are made from the best variety of - Ss read the text again and answer the rice. question in pairs. 3.The broth for ph obo is made by 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. stewing the bones of cows for a long - Have Ss compare answers before time in a large pot. The broth for pho ga discussing them as a class. is made by stewing chicken bones. - Have Ss give their own answers. 4.It is boneless and cut into thin slices. - Ss give their own answers in turn. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T corrects and gives feedback. - Give the key and Ss check.

ẠY

Activity 2: Speaking Part 3- P54 II. Speaking - Remind Ss of the form and use of a/an/ 3. Look at the list of ingredients some /anyand phrases of quantity used with below. Work in pairs. Ask and answer uncountable nouns. questions about the ingredients for an - Ask Ss work in pairs, asking and omelette. answering questions about the ingredients Example: for an omelette. A: I want to cook an omelette. What - Ss may refer to the Grammar Boxes in ingredients do I need? A Closer Look 2 B: You need…. - T models with one St then helps Ss A: How much/ How many....? practice in pairs. 118

- T may go around to help weaker Ss. - Call on some pairs to practice before class.

5. Work in pairs. Practicing giving instructions on how to make a dish or drink. Eg: cook the rice , boil vegatables., make a glass of lemonade Example: A: Can you tell me how to cook the rice, please? What should I do first? B: First, put some water in a pot and heat it until it boils A: and then? B: ………………………

- Give Ss time to think about some food and drink and how to make them. - Ask Ss to make notes about the steps to make their food and drink. - Have Ss work in pairs. - Some pairs practice aloud. - T corrects and remarks.

FF IC IA L

Part 5- P55

4. Look at the picture of how to cook an omelette.(homework) Key: 1. d 2. e 3.a 4.b5.c

- First, remind Ss of the words and phrases about ooking, food and drink. - Ask Ss to refer to the words and phrases about ooking, food and drink in the parts: Getting started, A Closer Look 1, and Communication. - Ask Ss to work individually, using the phrases in the box to complete the instructions on how to cook an omelette. - Have Ss share their answers with their partner.

Part 4- P55

KÈ

4. Consolidation: - Teacher summarizes the lesson. 5. Homework: - Ask Ss to learn new words by heart. - Do exercise D1+ D2 (P 40+ 41- workbook). - Prepare: UNIT 5: Skill 2/ Page 55- textbook.

ẠY

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 14/ 11/ 2018 Te: ...../ 11/ 2018

Period 39: UNIT 5: VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK.

Lesson 6:Skills 2 119

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to get the main ideas of the listening by matching the places with the places and ticking the ingredients for each dish. Make notes and write a paragraph about some popular foods and drinks in their neighborhood. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to Vietnamese food and drink. - Phonetics: To pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Nouns (countable/ uncountable), a/ an, some, any, How much/ many…? 2. Skills: - Listening: listening to the tradition dishes and find the ingredients. - Writing: write about their favourite food and drinks in their neighbourhood. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to work hard, love their food and drinks and know the usefulness of food and drinks. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about Vietnamese food and drink. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Ask Ss to talk about Pho bo (Beef noodles soup) or Pho ga (Chicken noodles soup) - Give remarks and marks 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Chatting: - Ask Ss to talk about traditonal food or drink where they live: 1. What are the traditional food or drink in your village? 2. Which one is the most popular? 3. What are the ingredients for it? - Lead to the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Listening Part 1- P55 I. Listening - Ask Ss to read the instruction 1. Listen to three people talking about carefully and remind them to traditional dishes where they live. Match the 120

3. c

FF IC IA L

places with the dishes. Key: 1. b 2. a

2. Listen again. Tick the ingredients for each dish. Some ingredients are in more than one dish. Key: bánh tôm: shrimp súp lươn : eel, pepper, turmeric, mỳ quảng: rice noodles, shrimp, pork

remember the names of the three places and three dishes mentioned in the conversation they are going to listen. - Have Ss guess the answer for exercise 1. -Play the recording for Ss to check their predictions - Ask Ss to write their answers on the board Part 2- P55 1. Transferring the learning task. -Ask Ss to read the rubric and study the table carefully. - Play the recording and have Ss tick the correct items as they listen. 2. Doing the task. - Ss listen and dothe task individually. - Play the recording again. Pause only the sentences that include the informationst need for their answers. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Have Ss compare answers before discussing them as a class. - Have Ss give their own answers. - Ss give their own answers in turn. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T corrects and gives feedback.

ẠY

KÈ

Part 3- P55 - Ask Ss to make notes about some popular foods or drinks where they live. - Remind the Ss that they do not have to write full sentences and they can use abbreviations. - Read out the notes from some more able Ss to the whole class. - T gives out the model for Ss checking.

Activity 2: Writing II. Writing 3. Make notes about some popular food or drinks in your neighbourhood. Eg: Fried rice, orange juice Name of Ingredients food or drinks Fried rice -1-2 onions - 2 eggs - rice - salt, pepper - soy sauce - cooking oil 121

How to make them - Beat the eggs with salt, pepper, onion. - Heat the pan and add cooking oil. When the oil is hot, pour the mixture into the pan.

FF IC IA L

4.Write a paragraph about popular foods or drinks in your neighborhood. Choose one or more. Use the information in 3, and Phong’s blog, as a model.

Part 4- P55 -Set up the writing activity. -Brainstorm with Ss for the language that is necessary for writing - Ask Ss to write a draft first. Then has them write their final version in class or at home (if there is not enough time )

- When it is hot, take it out and clean out the pan. - Add more oil, then add rice. Stir- fry for a few minutes. Stir in the soy sauce. - When the rice is heated through, add the mixture back into the pan. - Serve hot.

4. Consolidation: - Ask some Ss to read aloud their writing. Teacher and other students listen and give remarks. 5. Homework: - Do exercises: E1+ E2 – page 42 - workbook. - Complete the writing on the notebook. - Prepare: UNIT 5:Looking back + project/ Page 56-57- textbook.

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÍ DUYỆT

Ngày 19 tháng 11 năm 2018.

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

ẠY

KÈ

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WEEK 14: Pre: 22/ 11/ 2017 Te: ...../ 11/ 2017

Period 40: UNIT 5: VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK.

Lesson 7:Looking back & Project 122

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to get new words related to food and drink (measurement phrases), and review vocabulary and structures in unit 5. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to Vietnamese food and drink. - Phonetics: To pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Nouns (countable/ uncountable), a/ an, some, any, How much/ many…? 2. Skills: - Speaking: Ask and answer questions about how to cook rice. - Writing: Complete the sentences, using a, an, some, any, How many, How much… 3. Attitude: - Build positive attitude towards food and drink. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about Vietnamese food and drink. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Ask Ss to put the words into meaningful sentences: a. Among many /in Ha Noi, pho /special dishes/ is the most popular. b. The rice noodles /the best variety/ are made from. of rice / 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Chatting: ? What topic we are working on? => “Vietnamese food and drink” - Ask Ss to tell some vocabularies related to the topic food and drink, and the verbs of cooking. - Lead to the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Vocabulary Part 1- P56 I.Vocabulary 1. Transferring the learning task. 1. Add the words/ phrases youhave - Tell Ss to find as many words or learnt to the columns. phrases as possible to add to the Suggested key: columns individually. 123

Dishes

Ingredients

omelette, pancake beef noodle soup chicken noodle soup rice, pork, noodles, sandwich, meat, tofu, bread, spring rolls...

shrimp salt cooking oil flour pork, turmeric pepper noodle vegetable egg meat tofu,...

Measurement Phrases a slice a can, a bottle a kilo a bar a glass a bag a teaspoon a tablespoon ...

FF IC IA L

2. Doing the task. - Ss do the task individually. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Have Ss compare answers before discussing them as a class. - Have Ss give their own answers. - Ss give their own answers aloud. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T corrects and gives feedback. - Ask them to compare with their partners to find out who has more words.

ẠY

KÈ

Part 2- P56 - Ask Ss to read the sentences carefully 2. Fill in the gapsmwith a verb from the and complete them with the verbs from box. the box. Remind Ss that the words, Key: phrases, and sentences around the blanks 1. fold 2. pour 3. beat will provide the context for them to 4. heat 5. serve choose the correct verbs. Activity 2: Grammar - Let Ss review:a/ an/ some/ any/ How II. Grammar much/ How many. 3. Choose a/ an/ or some for the Part 3- P56 following words. - Ask Ss to do the task individually first. Key: Then they can check their answers with 1. a 2. some 3. some 4. some a partner before discussing the answers 5. some 6. some 7. an 8. some as a class. - Call on some Ss to give their answers. - Correct and give feedback. Part 4 P56 4. Complete the sentences with some and - Ask Ss to do the task individually to any. complete the sentences with SOME and Key: ANY first. Then they can check their 1. any 2. some 3. any answers with a partner before discussing 4. some-any 5. any-some the answers as a class. - Correct their answers. 5. Make questions with How many/ How Part 5- P56 much for the underlined words. - Ask Ss to make question with How Key: many/ How much for underlined words 1. How much milk is there in the bottle? in pairs. 2. How many cans of lemonade do you - Ask them to write the answers in the need? board. 3. How many apples has Peter got in his - Invite some comment from other Ss. bag? - Give feedback. 4. How much rice is (there) left in the 124

FF IC IA L

electric cooker? Activity 3: Communication Part 6- P56 III. Communication - Ask Ss to do the task in pairs to 6. Choose sentences (A-D) to complete complete the conversation. the following conversation. Then - Have them to practice the conversation practice with a partner. with their partner. Key: - Correct and then give feedback. 1. D 2. B 3.A 4.C Activity 4: Production - Asks Ss to read the recipe for the IV. Project 1.Read this page from a cook book on pancake. Point out the instructions on how to make the perfect cake. how to make a pancake and the 2.Choose one of your favourite dishes and ingredients needed for it. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to discuss one write a recipe for it. 3.Combine your recipes into a class cook of their favorite food and recipe for it. - Ask Ss to use the ideas from their notes book. to write a recipe for one of their favorite food.

4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson. 5. Homework: - Redo all the exercises above and do exercises in the workbook. - Prepare for the next lesson:Written test 2.

Pre: 22/ 11/ 2017 Te: ...../ 11/ 2017

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Period 41: WRITTEN TEST 2

ẠY

KÈ

I. Objectives. 1. Knowledge: - To test Ss’knowledge in the units 4, 5 to know how progressive the Ss are and find out their strength and weakness of learning English so that teacher can give them more suitable method of teaching. - Vocabulary: The lexical items related to the two topics: Music and arts, Vietnamese food and drink. - Phonetics: The sounds: /ȓ/, /ʒ/, /ɒ/and/ɔː/. - Grammar: + Comparisions: (not) as …. as; the same as; different from. + Express agreement using too and either. + Nouns (countable/ uncountable). + The quanlities: a/ an/ some/ any + The questions with: How much/ How many 2. Skills: - To check Ss’ listening, reading and writing skills. 125

ẠY

KÈ

A- MATRIX:

FF IC IA L

3. Attitude: - Teach Ss tobe strict and honest. 4. Ability needed: - Being able todo the exercises well. II. Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work, situations, translation, discussion, and examples. III. Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: test papers. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: No. IV. Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence: .......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33 ........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Check the preparation of Ss. 3. New lesson

B- QUESTIONS:

NO 1:

A. LISTENING ( 2,0 pts)

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

fresh and tasty. For dessert I had (6)…….. It’s usually delicious but this time it was too much (7)…….. sweet. I couldn’t eat much because I am on a (8)………..I had a cup of tea to drink. Oh, it was delicious. 1, A.omelette B. chicken C. seafood D. eel soup 2, A. salad B. juice C. soup D. noodles 3, A. chip B. beef C.eel D. fish 4, A. drink B. vegetables C. fruit D. meat 5, A. fresh B.tasty C. dish D. delisious 6, A.steam B. taste C. cream D. ice-cream 7, A. sweet B. salty C. sour D. spicy 8, A. favourite B. enjoy C. diet D. mixture B. LANGUAGE FOCUS (4,0pts) I. Choose the word which has underlined part pronounced differently from others.(0,75pt) 1. A. usually B. sister C. season D. sometimes B. essential C. addition D. picture 2. A. traditional 3. A. hot B. pot C. bottle D. sport II. Choose the best option to complete these sentences. (2,0pt) 1. …………….milk a day does her baby drink? A. How much B. How many C. How often D. How long 2. Would you like……………….orange juice? A. some B. a C. any D. an 3. Hoang is very interested in folk music and his classmates are……………….. A. either B. neither C. so D. too 4. The film is not …………… long as the film I watched last week. A. but B. same C. either D. as 5. He is a famous …………….His paintings are well-known all over the world A. poet B. singer C. painter D. musician 6. Her hobbies are …………photos and collecting toys A. collecting B. taking C. playing D. writing 7. There isn’t ……….water in the bottle. A. a B. an C. some D. any 8. Orange juice is my favourite …………… A. food B. drink C. dish D. recipe III. Find and circle a mistake in each sentence below. (1,25pts) 1.How many rice do you need? – Two kilosof rice A B C D 2. My sister’s appearance is very different withmine A B C D 3. Mr. Lam doesn’t likedrinking green tea and I don’t like,too A B C D 4. Could I have any more salad? It is so tasty. A B C D 5. You should to use the microwave to warm the food up. A B C D C. READING.(2,5pts) 127

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I. Read the passage about Charlie Chaplin and choose the best answer.(1,25pts) Charlie Chaplin was an English actor, director, producer, and composer. He is known as the most creative person of the silent –film era. Charlie Chaplin’s portrayal of the tramp won the hearts of people all over the world. Chaplin was born in Londonon the 16thof April,1889.He spent his childhood in poverty and hardship. In 1910, he began to perform pantomime in the United States. He first appeared on screen in 1914. He created his world-famous character, the Tramp, and he played this classic role in more than 70 films during his career. He also composed background music for most of his films. In 1972 Chaplin received an Honorary Academy Award for the “the incalculable effect he has had in making motion pictures the art form of this century. Chaplin died on the 25th of December, 1977, at his home in Switzerland. 1.What did Charlie Chaplin work as? A. an actor B. a director C. a composer D. all are correct 2. When was he born? A. the sixteenth of April,1889 B. April 16th, 1910 th C. the 16 of April,1914 D. December 25th,1977 3. In about how many films did he play the Tramp? A. seventeen B. seventy C. twenty five D. sixteen 4. When did he die? A. the 25th of December, 1910 B. the 25th of December, 1972 th C. the 25 of December, 1914 D. the 25th of December, 1977 5. Which of the following is NOT TRUE? A. He started appearing in films in 1914 B. He was famous for his character “the tramp” C. He was a famous artist D. He died in Switzerland II. Read this passage again and then answer True (T) orFalse (F). (1,25pts) ….... 1, Charlie Chaplin was an English actor, director, producer, and artist. ….... 2, He spent his childhood in poverty and hardship ….... 3, He began to perform pantomime in the United States in 1914. ….... 4, He composed background music for most of his films. ….... 5, Chaplin received an Honorary Academy Award in 1962. D. WRITING. (1,5pts) I. Rewrite the sentence using the given words that unchange its meaning (1,0pt). 1. This painting is more expensive than that one (not as……….as) That painting……………………………………………………………………..……... 2. I enjoy listening to pop music best. (favourite) Pop music is my ……………………………………………………….……………….. 3. Her taste in art is not the same as my taste (different) Her taste ………………………………………………………………………………..… 4. Your hat is different from mine. (not the same) Your hat ………………………………………………………………………………….. II. Reorder the given words to make sentences. (0,5pt) 1. two/ of/ I / everyday./ water / bottles/ drink / 2. Can / to cook / please? / the / rice, / tell / how/ me/ you / 128

NO 2: A. LISTENING ( 2,0 pts)

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I. Listen and choose the words to complete the passage. (2,0pts) Last weekend I went to a (1) ……. restaurant on Main Street. It’s great. To begin I had a (2)……..It was fresh with a great house dressing. My main dish was (3)….….. I really enjoyed the spices it was cooked in. The (4)……were very good, very (5)….. fresh and tasty. For dessert I had (6)…….. It’s usually delicious but this time it was too much (7)…….. sweet. I couldn’t eat much because I am on a (8)………..I had a cup of tea to drink. Oh, it was delicious. 1, A. omelette B. chicken C. seafood D. eel soup 2, A. salad B. juice C. soup D. noodles 3, A. chip B. beef C. eel D. fish 4, A. drink B. vegetables C. fruit D. meat 5, A. fresh B. tasty C. dish D. delisious 6, A.steam B. taste C. cream D. ice-cream 7, A. sweet B. salty C. sour D. spicy 8, A. favourite B. enjoy C. diet D. mixture B. LANGUAGE FOCUS (4,0pts) I. Choose the word which has underlined part pronounced differently from others.(1,0pt) 1. A. soft B. hot C. sport D. bottle 2. A. usually B. composer C. version D. leisure B. essential C. addition D. picture 3. A. traditional II. Choose the best option to complete these sentences. (2,0pt) 1. The film is not …………… long as the film I watched last week. A. but B. same C. either D. as 2. My sister’s taste in art is quite different ……………… mine. A. either B. too C. from D. as 3. Chicken noodles soup is my favourite …………… A. food B. drink C. juice D. recipe 4.I like beef noodle soup and my friends do ,……….. A. too B. so C. either D. neither 5. ……………. water should I put into the glass? A. How many B. How long C. How much D. How 6. There isn’t …………… for dinner, so I have to go the market. A. any left B. some leaving C. some left D. some 7. Did you buy ………………. bottle of cooking oil yesterday? A. some B. an C. a D. any 8. I never watch ballet, and my brother doesn’t ………………….. A. too B. either C. so D. however III. Find and circle a mistake in each sentence below. (1,25pt) 1. You should to use the microwave to warm the food up. A B C D 2.How muchkilos of rice do you need? – Two kilosof rice 129

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

A B C D 3. Can I have any more milk? It is so tasty. A B C D 4. Hersister’s appearance is very different withhers A B C D 5. Mrs. Lien doesn’t likedrinkingiced tea and I don’t like,too A B C D C. READING.(2,5pts) I. Read the passage about Charlie Chaplin and choose the best answer.(1,25pts) Charlie Chaplin was an English actor, director, producer, and composer. He is known as the most creative person of the silent –film era. Charlie Chaplin’s portrayal of the tramp won the hearts of people all over the world. Chaplin was born in Londonon the 16thof April,1889.He spent his childhood in poverty and hardship. In 1910, he began to perform pantomime in the United States. He first appeared on screen in 1914. He created his world-famous character, the Tramp, and he played this classic role in more than 70 films during his career. He also composed background music for most of his films. In 1972 Chaplin received an Honorary Academy Award for the “the incalculable effect he has had in making motion pictures the art form of this century. Chaplin died on the 25th of December, 1977, at his home in Switzerland. 1.What did Charlie Chaplin work as? A. an actor B. a director C. a composer D. all are correct 2. When was he born? A. the sixteenth of April,1889 B. April 16th, 1910 C. the 16th of April,1914 D. December 25th,1977 3. In about how many films did he play the Tramp? A. seventeen B. seventy C. twenty five D. sixteen 4. When did he die? A. the 25th of December, 1910 B. the 25th of December, 1972 C. the 25th of December, 1914 D. the 25th of December, 1977 5. Which of the following is NOT TRUE? A. He started appearing in films in 1914 B. He was famous for his character “the tramp” C. He was a famous artist D. He died in Switzerland II. Read this passage again and then answer True (T) orFalse (F). (1,25pts) ….... 1, Charlie Chaplin was an English actor, director, producer, and artist. ….... 2, He spent his childhood in poverty and hardship ….... 3, He began to perform pantomime in the United States in 1914. ….... 4, He composed background music for most of his films. ….... 5, Chaplin received an Honorary Academy Award in 1962. D. WRITING. (1,5pts) I. Rewrite the sentence using the given words that unchange its meaning (1,0pt). 1. This painting is more expensive than that one (not as……….as) That painting……………………………………………………………………..……... 2. I enjoy listening to pop music best. (favourite) 130

C- ANSWERS AND MARK: A. LISTENING ( 2,0 pts)

FF IC IA L

Pop music is my ……………………………………………………….……………….. 3. Her taste in art is not the same as my taste (different) Her taste ………………………………………………………………………………..… 4. Your hat is different from mine. (not the same) Your hat ………………………………………………………………………………….. II. Reorder the given words to make sentences. (0,5pt) 1. two/ of/ I / everyday./ water / bottles/ drink / 2. Can / to cook / please? / the / rice, / tell / how/ me/ you /

ẠY

KÈ

I. Listen and choose the words to complete the passage. (2,0 pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 8 = 2,0 ®iÓm 1- C 2- A 3- D 4- B 5- A 6- D 7- A 8- C Tapescript: Last weekend I went to a (1) seafood restaurant on Main Street. It’s great . To begin I had a (2) salad. It was fresh with a great house dressing. My main dish was (3) fish. I really enjoyed the spices it was cooked in. The (4) vegetables were very good, very (5) fresh and tasty. For dessert I had (6) ice cream. It’s usually delicious but this time it was too much (7) sweet. I couldn’t eat much because I am on a (8) diet. I had a cup of tea to drink. Oh, it was delicious. B. LANGUAGE FOCUS (4,0pts) I. Choose the word which has underlined part pronounced differently from others.(0,75pt)Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 3 = 0,75 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- A 2- D 3- D NO 2: 1- C 2- B3- D II.Choose the best answer. (2,0 pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 8 = 2,0 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- A 2- A3- D 4- D 5- C 6- B 7- D 8- B NO 2: 1- D 2- C3- A 4- A 5- C 6- A 7- C 8- B III. Find and circle a mistake in each sentence below. (1,25pt) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1,25 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- A 2- C 3- D 4- B 5-A NO 2: 1- A 2- A3- B4- C 5-D C. READING.(2,5pts) I. Read the passage about Charlie Chaplin and choose the best answer.(1,25pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1,25 ®iÓm 1- D 2- A 3- B 4- D 5-C II. Read this passage again and then answer True (T) orFalse (F). (1,25pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1,25 ®iÓm 1- F 2- T 3- F 4- T 5- F D. WRITING. (1,5pts) I. Rewrite the sentence using the given words that unchange its meaning (1,0pt). 131

FF IC IA L

Mçi câu ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 4 = 1,0 ®iÓm 1, That painting is not as expensive as this painting. 2, Pop music is my favourite music. 3, Her taste in art is different from my taste. 4, Your hat is not the same as mine. II. Reorder the given words to make sentences. (0,5pt) Mçi câu ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 2 = 0,5 ®iÓm 1, I drink two bottles of water every day. 2, Can you tell me how to cook the rice, please? 4. Consolidation. - Collect Ss’ papers and remark if any. 5. Homework. - Prepare for next period: Unit 6- Getting started & Listen and read.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 22/ 11/ 2018 Te: ...../ 12/ 2018

Period 42: UNIT 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM

Lesson 1:Getting started

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to get the lexical items related to the topic historic places: The Temple of Literature- the Imperial Academy and things to take on a trip. Understand the content of the dialogue, then ask and answer the questions. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to historic places and things to take on a trip: Imperial Academy, historic, cultural, surround,… - Phonetics: To pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Passive voice 2. Skills: + Listening: listening to the dialogue and complete the tasks + Speaking: work in pair to talk about things to take for the trip and make arrangements for the trip. 3. Attitude: - Make Ss be proud of their country. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Making arrangements for a trip to the Temperature of Literature. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. 132

FF IC IA L

IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - During the lesson. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Questions and answers drill: -Introduce something about the Temple of Literature and the Imperial Academy and asks Ss some questions about the pictures in text book: 1.Who are they? 2.What are they doing? 3.What are they talking about? 4. What things will Mai going to ? - Lead to the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Presentation * Teaching vocabulary:Elicit some I.Vocabulary - Imperial Academy (n): Quốc Tử Giám new words (realias, situations, - historic (adj): có thật trong lịch sử synonym ….) -T: reads new words. - cultural ( adj): thuộc văn hóa - T: writes new words on the board. - surround (v): bao quanh - Ss: listen and repeat in individual - definitely (adv): = completely first then the whole class. - contain (v): bao gồm - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. - Had better = should *Checings vocab: matching Ex: You had better do your homework carefully. Activity 2: Practice - Play the recording. Ss listen and II. Practice read the dialogue in silent. 1/Listen and read Part 1a- p59 a) Read the conversation again and answer 1. Transferring the learning task. the questions: - Ask Ss to read the conversation in Key: pairs and answer the questions. 1. She is going to visit the Temple of Literature - the Imperial Academy. 2. Doing the task. - Ss read the dialogue again and 2. It’s the first university in Viet Nam. answer the question in pairs. 3. About one thousand years ago. / in the 11 century. 3. Reporting the task result and 4. In the center of Ha Noi. discuss. - Have Ss compare answers before 5. Because It will be cold discussing them as a class. - Have Ss give their own answers. 133

- Ss give their own answers in turn. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T corrects and gives feedback. - Give the key and Ss check. Part 1b- p59 - Ask Ss to read the conversation again and underline the things Mai needs to take and why. - Ss do the task individually. - Some Ss give the answers in turn. - T remarks and corrects if any.

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

b)Read the conversation again. Complete the table. Key: Things Mai needs to take and why: - Warm clothes - will be cold - camera - take photos of interesting things Things Mai doesn’t need to take and why not: - an umbrella - cold (winter) and not much sunlight and rain. Part 2- p59 2/Imagine that you are going to take a - Let Ss look at the table and tick the trip to a temple or a pagoda. items they would like to take with a) Look at the table and tick the items you them. would like to take with you. - Ask Ss to tell their partner three b) Work in pairs. items they would like to take and give Example: reason why. Havess use the structure I’ll take warm clothes because it’ll be cold. or the example given. c) Give advice to your partners. + You’d better take………..because ……… - Have Ss to work in pairs. Reminds + It’s a good idea to take the structures they can use to give …………because……….. advice. + You won’t need …………….becasue - Ss do the task individually and in ………… pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice before + It is not necessary to take ……….because ……….. class. Examples: Partner A: I want to take a trip to Sapa. Partner B: You’d better take warm clothes because it’s cold. 3/ Imagine that your class is planing atrip Part 3- p59 -Ask Ss to work in groups about how to Huong Pagoda. Work in groups. Ask to plan a trip a a place. and answer questions for the trip. Then - Ask Ss to write the information in fill in the table. the table. - Ask Ss to ask and answer the Where to go Huong pagoda questions in groups about how to plan …………………………… When to go a trip to a place. …………………………… Who to go with - Some pairs present their work and How to get there …………………………… others provide comments …………………………… What to take - T remarks and corrects if any. …………………………… What to do - Example: 134

FF IC IA L

A: Where will you go? B: We’ll go to Huong Pagoda. A: When will you go? B: ….. Activity 3: Production -Have Ss to make a plan for a trip to III. Further practice Hung King Temples this Sunday. 4/ Free-practice: - T gives Ss some word cues to help Ss Make a plan for a trip to Hung King prepare their talking. Temples this Sunday.

4. Consolidation: - Let Ss talk about the Temple of Literature – the Imperial Academy. 5. Homework: - Learn new words by heart. - Read the conversation again. - Do exercises: B1-B2 (page 43-44- workbook)+ Translate the conversation in Getting started into Vietnamese. - Prepare: UNIT 6:A closer look 1/ Page 60 - textbook.

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÍ DUYỆT

Ngày 26 tháng 11 năm 2018.

ẠY

KÈ

Trần Thị Thanh Trà --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WEEK 15: Pre: 26/ 11/ 2018 Te: ...../ 12/ 2018

Period 43: UNIT 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM

Lesson 2:A closer look 1 135

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to get some new words relating to the Temple of Literature – the Impreial Academy. Pronounce sounds /tʃ/and/dʒ/ correctly in isolation and in context and know how to use the prepositions to describe the layout of to the Temple of Literature – the Impreial Academy. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to historic places:stone tablet, pavilion,well,heritage,… - Phonetics: To pronounce the sounds /tʃ/and/dʒ/ correctly in isolation and in context. - Grammar: Passive voice 2. Skills: - Listening: listen to the tape and complete the layout; listen and pronounce the words. 3. Attitude: - To help Ss know the value of the Temple of Literature – the Impreial Academy. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Making arrangements for a trip to the Temperature of Literature. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: goes to the board to write new words - S2: answers the questions about the Temple of Literature – the Impreial Academy 1. Where is it? 2. When was it founded? 3. What is the Imperial Academy consisdered? 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Matching: - T asks Ss to match the words with the pictures in activity 1/ page 60- textbook. 2.c 3.e 4.b 5.a Key: 1.d B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary * Teaching vocabulary:Elicit some new I. Vocabulary words (realias, situations, synonym ….) 1. New words -T: reads new words. - well (n) : giếng - T: writes new words on the board. - stone tablet (n): bia đá 136

- pavilion (n): đình, tạ - heritage (n) di sản - architectural (adj) thuộc kiến trúc

FF IC IA L

2. Read the names in 1 again and listen to the recording. Complete the layout of the Temple of Literature.

Key: 1. Van Mieu Gate 2. Khue Van Pavilion 3. Thien Quang Tinh Well 4. Doctor’s stone tablets 5. The Temple of Literature

- Ss: listen and repeat in individual first then the whole class. - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. * Checings vocab: rub out and remember Part 2- P60: 1. Transferring the learning task. - Have Ss look at the map in part 2- P60 carefully. - Ask Ss to listen and complete the layout of the Temple of Literature. 2. Doing the task. - Play the recording twice. Ss listen and write the names of five sections (1-5) in the layout. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Some students present their work on the boad and others provide comments 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T corrects and gives feedback. - Give the key and Ss check. Part 3- P60: -Have Ss describe the layout using the prepositions suggested. T may ask some to write the sentences on the board. - Ss practicein pairs. -Ask some Ss to give the descriptions of the layout for the class. - Some Ss practice saying aloud in front of the class.

3. With a partner, use the prepositions in the box below to describe the layout of the Temple of Literature. Example: Thien Quang Tinh Well is in the middle of the Temple of Literature…………

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation - Models the sounds /tʃ/ and /dʒ/ first and II. Pronunciation: sounds/tʃ/ and /dʒ/ then play the recording. Part 4- P60: 4. Listen and write the words in the - Play the recording and ask sts to listen correct columns. Pay attention to the sounds /tʃ/ and /dʒ/. and repeat. Correct their pronunciation. -Ask Ss to practice the sounds together. Key: - Ask Ss to put the words in the correct /tʃ/: children, chair, architectural, column while they listen. cultural, watch, teach, question. - Let Ss compare their answer in pairs - /dʒ/: job, jeans, engineer, heritage, before checking as a class village. Part 5 - P60: 5. Listen and repeat the chant. - Play the recording twice. First ask SS to listen and repeat the chant sentence by sentence. Ask them to observe the T’s lip position for the two sounds /tʃ / and /dʒ/. 137

6.Write the words from 5 with the sounds / tʃ / and /dʒ/ Key: /tʃ /: chicken, chop, cherry, chip, cheap, cheaper, which, lunch. /dʒ/: orange, jam, juice, Jill, John

FF IC IA L

Then ask them to sing the chants in pairs or groups. Part 6- P60: - Ask Ss to write the words from 5 with the sounds /tʃ / and /dʒ/ - Ss write the words with the sounds /tʃ/ and /dʒ/ in the correct columns. - Ask Ss to give more words having two sounds. 4. Consolidation:

- Retell the main content of the lesson: the sounds /tȓȓ/ and /dȢ Ȣ /in isolation and in context; the vocabulary related to arts and music. 5. Homework: - Learn by heart the new words - Do Ex A1, A2/ page 43- workbook - Prepare UNIT 6: A CLOSER LOOK 2/ page 61+ 62 - textbook

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 27/ 11/ 2018 Te: ...../ 12/ 2018

Period 44: UNIT 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM

Lesson 3:A closer look 2

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to learn passive voice of the present simple and

past simple tenses, get more information about The Temple of Literature – The Imperial Academy using passive sentences. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to historic places: regard, construct, Emperor, relic, …

ẠY

KÈ

- Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Passive voice 2. Skills: - Writing: using the passive voice to make sentences. 3. Attitude: - To make them try their best to study to be brilliant students. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about the history of the Temple of Literature. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: No. 138

N Ơ

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

Past Participle Sell sold grow grown speak spoken buy bought build built see seen B. Presentation:

FF IC IA L

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary * Pre- teach vocabulary: expression/ I. Vocabulary relic (n) : di tích pictures translation/ situation regard (v) : coi -T: reads new words. construct (v) = build - T: writes new words on the board. - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first Emperor (n): hoàng đế scholar (n) :người có học thức then the whole class. erect (v): xây dựng - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. * Checings vocab: rub out and rememb

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 2: Presentation -Teaches the structures: Asks Ss to II Grammar: The passive voice look at the table and explain how 1/ The present simple passive. the present simple passive is used: - Form : We use the present simple passive (+) S+ is / am/are + p.p……………. to emphasise the action done at (-) S+ is/am/ are + not + p.p…………. present (? ) Is/am /Are + S+ p.p…………….? Ex: The Temple of Luiterature is located in the - Has Ss read the sentence in the centre of Hanoi Look out to have a better 2. The past simple passive. understanding of the passive voice Form (+ ) S + was/ were+ V-ed/ p2 + (by sb). (-) S + wasn’t/ weren’t + V-ed/ p2 + (by sb). In the passive voice the person /thing doing the 139

action is usually placed at the end The passive voice is more common in writing than speaking Ex : The Temple of Literature is visited by thousands of people

áş Y

KĂˆ

FF IC IA L

Activity 3: Practice Part 1- P61 III. Practice 1. Complete the sentences with the past Ask Ss to complete the exercise participle form. individually Key: + First read the passage and guess 1. considered, stated the approriate word can be put in 2. named each gap 3. spoken + Then have to change the verbs 4. located given into p.p 5. recognized + Finally, write the p.p of the verbs in the correct gaps - Correct the answer with the class 2. Using the verbs in brackets, write the Part2- P61 sentences in the present simple passive 1. Transferring the learning task. - Have Ss study the example to know Key: 1. Many precious relics are displayed in the how to write the sentences. Temple of Literature. - Ask Ss to write sentences 2. Many old trees and beautiful flowers are individually. taken care of by the gardeners. 2. Doing the task. - Ss work individually.Checks their 3. Lots of souvenirs are sold inside the Temple of Literature. answers as a class. 4. Khue Van pavilion is regarded as the 3. Reporting the task result and symbol of Ha Noi. discuss. 5. The Temple of Literature is considered as - Some Ss give the answers ten one of the most important cultural and others remark 4. Giving the remarks to their doing historical places in Viet Nam. the task. - T corrects and gives feedback. - Give the key and Ss check. 3. Using the words in the box to make Part3- P61 sentences. - Ask Ss to do the task individually - Ss work individually.Checks their Eg: The Temple of Literature is surrounded by brick walls. answers as a class. 4. Complete the sentences with the words - T remarks and corrects if any. from the box Part4- P62 Key: - Ask Ss to work individually. 2. constructed 3. were 4. - Ss work individually.Checks their 1. was regarded 5. renamed answers as a class. 5. Put the parts of the passage below in the - T remarks and corrects if any. correct order. Then circle the examples of Part5- P62 140

- Ask Ss to read and put the passage in the correct order. - Ss do the task in pairs - Some Ss gve the answers aloud - T corrects and gives feedback.

the past simple passive in the text. Key: D-C- A -B Was built , were selected , were carefully prepared , was used

FF IC IA L

Activity 4: Production Part6- P62 IV. Further practice 6. Can you make sentences in the - Ask Ss to make as many sentences as present and past passive voice about possible about the given topics, using the the places below? present or past simple passive voice. Example: - Ss do the task in groups - Have some Ss from the groups give the The One Pillar Pagoda is located in the center of Ha Noi. answers. The One Pillar Pagoda was built in - T checks and remarks 1049.

ẠY

KÈ

4. Consolidation: - Ask Ss to do exercise 5 in review two to summarize the lesson 1. The song Auld Lang Syne is sung on some occasions. 2. Vetnam’s anthem Tien quan Ca was composed by Van Cao. 3. Water puppetry is performed in a pool. 4. A lot of meat was bought by his mother yesterday. 5. Rice noodles are made from the best variety of rice. 5. Homework: + Learn by heart the structures + new words + Redo all exercises into notebooks + Prepare UNIT 6: COMMUNICATION/ page 63- textbook -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 28/ 11/ 2018 Te: ..../ 12/ 2018

Period 45: TEST CORRECTION I/ Objectives. 1. Knowledge: 141

FF IC IA L

- After the lesson, Ss will be able toread the test again and find out their mistakes and correct themselves and T can evaluate Ss’ knowledge. - Vocabulary: Related to the topics:Music and arts, Vietnamese food and drink. - Phonetics: Check the souds: /ȓ/, /ʒ/, /ɒ/and/ɔː/. - Grammar: + Comparisions: (not) as …. as; the same as; different from. + Express agreement using too and either. + Nouns (countable/ uncountable). + The quanlities: a/ an/ some/ any + The questions with: How much/ How many 2. Skills: - Ss’ listening, reading and writing skills. 3. Attitude: - Educate Ss to learn hard and honestly. 4. Ability needed: - Communication, self study. II/ Preparations. Material: textbook, paper tests. Equipment: sub - board III/ Teaching process. 1- Class Organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence: .......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33 ........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2- Oral test - S1 writes new words - S2 does exercise B4- P44 in workbook 3- New lesson A.Warm- up: Different from Difficult *Slap the board Similar to

Either

B. Presentation:

MAIN CONTENTS

KÈ

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

* Give the paper test back and correct the test.

ẠY

1. Test correction A. LISTENING ( 2,0 pts) I. Listen and choose the words to complete the passage. (2,0 pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 8 = 2,0 ®iÓm - T plays the tape and asks Ss 1- C 2- A 3- D 4- B to check their listening task. 5- A 6- D 7- A 8- C Tapescript: Last weekend I went to a (1) seafood restaurant on Main Street. It’s great . To begin I had a (2) salad. It was fresh with a great house dressing. My main dish was (3) fish. I really enjoyed the spices it was cooked 142

- Ss give the answers in turn.

- T: explains if it is necessary.

- Ss give the answers in turn.

- Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

- T: explains if it is necessary.

FF IC IA L

- Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

in. The (4) vegetables were very good, very (5) fresh and tasty. For dessert I had (6) ice cream. It’s usually delicious but this time it was too much (7) sweet. I couldn’t eat much because I am on a (8) diet. I had a cup of tea to drink. Oh, it was delicious. B. LANGUAGE FOCUS (4,0pts) I. Choose the word which has underlined part pronounced differently from others.(0,75pt)Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 3 = 0,75 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- A 2- D 3- D 2- B3- D NO 2: 1- C II.Choose the best answer. (2,0 pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 8 = 2,0 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- A 2- A 3- D 4- D 5- C 6- B 7- D 8- B NO 2: 1- D 2- C 3- A 4- A 5- C 6- A 7- C 8- B III. Find and circle a mistake in each sentence below. (1,25pt) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1,25 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- A 2- C 3- D 4- B 5-A NO 2: 1- A 2- A 3- B 4- C 5-D C. READING.(2,5pts) I. Read the passage about Charlie Chaplin and choose the best answer.(1,25pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1,25 ®iÓm 5-C 1- D 2- A 3- B 4- D II. Read this passage again and then answer True (T) orFalse (F). (1,25pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1,25 ®iÓm 1- F 2- T 3- F 4- T 5- F D. WRITING. (1,5pts) I. Rewrite the sentence using the given words that unchange its meaning (1,0pt). Mçi câu ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 4 = 1,0 ®iÓm 1, That painting is not as expensive as this painting. 2, Pop music is my favourite music. 3, Her taste in art is different from my taste. 4, Your hat is not the same as mine. II. Reorder the given words to make sentences. (0,5pt) Mçi câu ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 2 = 0,5 ®iÓm 1, I drink two bottles of water every day. 2, Can you tell me how to cook the rice, please?

KÈ

- Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

ẠY

- Ss write the answers on the board in turn. - T: explains if it is necessary.

143

2. Remark *The result. - Class 7A:…./ 37 from 5 7B:…./ 33 7C:…./ 35

FF IC IA L

* Give the general remarks -T gives general remarks of good and bad points. - T give compliments to the excellent students and points out the limits of some week SS. - T collects Ss’ marks

4. Consolidation - Retell the main content of the lesson: new words and grammar in units4, 5. 5. Homework - Review all grammar and new words - Prepare: Communication/ Page 63 - textbook.

Ngày 03 tháng 12 năm 2018.

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÍ DUYỆT

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

ẠY

KÈ

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WEEK 16 Pre: 04/ 12/ 2018 Te: ...../ 12/ 2018

Period 46: UNIT 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM

Lesson 4:Communication

144

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to revise the passive voice of the present simple, past simle tences and give tips for trips, to talk about what they should do and shouldn’t do while taking tourist trips. - Vocabulary: words about historic places and things to take on a trip. - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Passive voice 2. Skills: - Speaking: giving advice for the trip; practice speaking skill by using passive voice. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to be careful for their trips. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Making arrangements for a trip to the Temperature of Literature. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Ask Ss to rewrite the sentences 1. People speak English in many countries - English is ……………………………………………………………….……. 2. Emperor Ly Nhan Tong built The Imperial Academy in 1076 - The Imperial Academy was………………………………………………….. 3. She gave me a new bike on my last birthday -I…………………………………………………………………………………. 4. Peole don’t sell food and drink inside the Temple of Literature - Food and drink are ……………………………………..……………………… Keys: 1. English is spoken in many countries 2. The Imperial Academy was built in 1076 by Emperor Ly Nhan Tong 3. I was give a new bike on my last birthday 4. Food and drink are not sold inside the Temple of Literature - Gives remarks and marks 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: Part 1a- P.63: Imagine some oversea friends are planing a trip to Hanoi. Advise them what they should and shouldn’t do. Write do/don’t in each box. 145

-Give Ss some minutes to individually read and write do/don’t in the boxes - Get feedback 1. Do 2. Do 3. Don’t 4. Don’t 5. Do 6. Don’t 7. Don’t 8. Do 9. Don’t 10. Do B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Presentation - Reminds Ss of the structures: Giving I. Giving advice +You’d better…..because… advice: - Have Ss understand the meaning of them. +It’s a good idea to ….. because… +I think you should…… - Make example with these structures +You’d better…..so (that)….. Activity 2: Practice

II-Practice: 1b. Work in pairs. Practise giving advice to your partner. Example: You’d better book a hotel in advance so that you are sure you have a room. ……………………….

ẠY

KÈ

Part 1b – P.63 1. Transferring the learning task. - Let Ss have time to think about their advice. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to give adivice to their partner. 2. Doing the task. - Ss work in pairs and do the task. - T goes around and helps if any. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Some Ss talk aloud before class. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T corrects and gives feedback. - Give the key and Ss check. Part 2- P.63 a. Preparation: Gives Ss five pieces of paper on which the phrases are written : speak EL, grow flowers and trees, visit the Temple of Literature , sell tickets, buy souvernirs b. Instructions: - Let Ss play the game in 2groups. Each Ss in the first group chooses one card at random. He/she shows the card and makes a sentence with the phrase written on it usingthe present simple active voice. One student from the second group changes the sentence into the present simple passive voice. - The groups that make the correct sentence will get two points and the one that makes an incorrect sentence will have two points subtracted. - Ss play the games in 2 groups. - Have some Ss practice talking in front of the class. - T remarks and correct if any. 146

2. Game cards: Example: S1: They grow a lot of trees and flowers in the Temple of Literature. S2: A lot of trees and flowers are grown in the Temple of Literature.……………

FF IC IA L

Activity 3: Production - Have sts make their own sentences to continue III. Further practice: the game. (with pthe spast simple tense) Ex: Nam bought a new book yesterday. ->A new book was bought by Nam yesterday.

4. Consolidation: - Ask Ss to give the tips for a trip to Viet Tri in summer: + use motorbike to travel to some ethenic villages + enjoy special food here such as thit cho, ca anh vu ,….. + go hiking - not swim in rivers/ streams 5. Homework: - Do C1 + C2 page in the workbook. - Prepare: UNIT 6: SKILL 1/ Page 64- textbook.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 04/ 12/ 2018 Te: ...../ 12/ 2018

Period 47: UNIT 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM

Lesson 5:Skills 1

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to getinformation about the history of the Temple of Literarute- The Impreial Academy. To get information about the famous people in the Temple of Literarute- The Impreial Academy and to know about some famous scholars and Emperors in Viet Nam. - Vocabulary: words about historic places and things to take on a trip: recognize , statue, reconstruct, … - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Passive voice 2. Skills: - Reading for specific information about the history of the Temple of Literarute and The Impreial Academy - Speaking about the famous people in the Temple of Literarute and The Impreial Academy 3. Attitude: - To help Ss be proud of our country. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about the history of the Tempel of Literature. 147

FF IC IA L

II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Ask Ss to rewrite the sentences into passive: 1. We grow a lot of trees and flowers in the school yard 2. People speak English in the world 3. She bought the souvernirs at the shop near the Temple - Give remarks and marks. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: * Picture drill: (Exercise 1): ask Ss to look at the pictures and discuss the questions. ? Do you think the Temple of Literature- the Imperial Academy is a good English name for Van Mieu - Quoc Giam? ? Why do many Ss pay a visit to the Temple of Literature - the Imperial Academy before their exam? ? What do you think will happen to this historic place in the future? B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Reading translation/ I. Reading * Pre- teach vocabulary: situation/ pictures; pictures 1. New words - T: writes new words on the board. statue (n): bức tượng - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first then recognize (v) :công nhận the whole class. recognition (n) : sự công nhận - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. reconstruct (v) = rebuild * Checking: rub out and remember Part 2- P63 2. Read the passage and answer the 1. Transferring the learning task. - Ss read the questions from exercise 2 first. questions. Ask Ss to pay attention to the keywords they Key: will need to understand the meaning of the 1. in 1076 passage. 2. Because thousands of Vietnamese -Ask Ss to scan the passage to answer the scholars graduated from it. questions. 3. Chu Van An was. 4. It is considered the first university 2. Doing the task. - Ss read the text carefully and answer the in Viet Nam. 148

FF IC IA L

questions in pairs. - T goes around and gives help if any. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Some Ss talk aloud before class. - Give the feedback. - Discuss any unfamiliar words from the passage when necessary. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T corrects and gives feedback. - Give the key and then have Ss check. Part 3- P63 3. Read the passage again and match -Ask Ss to note where they found the the time in A with the events in B. information that help them to match. Key: - Retell the main content of the reading. 1- D 2- A 3- B 4- C

Activity 2: Speaking Part 42- P63 II. Speaking. - Ask Ss to do exercise 4 in 4. Look at the four statues and talk about groups. And ask some Ss to give them. You can use the information in 2 or 3 answers in front of the class. The and the other parts of the unit to help you. rest of the class listens and gives Key: comments. Emperor Ly Thanh Tong is considered the -Give the key and Ss check founder of the Temple of Literature. - Let Ss talk about the Temple of Emperor Ly Nhan Tong is regarded as the literature and the Imperial builder of the Imperial Academy. Academy using their own words. The erection of the first doctors’ stone table was ordered by King Le Thanh Tong.

KÈ

4. Consolidation: - Teacher summarizes the lesson. 5. Homework: - Ask Ss to learn new words by heart. - Do exercises in workbook. - Prepare: UNIT 6: Skill 2 Page 65- textbook.

ẠY

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 05/ 12/ 2018 Te: ...../ 12/ 2018

Period 48: UNIT 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM

Lesson 6:Skills 2

149

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to now about the biography of a most famous teacher – Chu Van An, and then write a postcard from a trip to Temple of Literature and The Imperial Academy - Vocabulary: words about historic places and famous people: District, doctoral, royal, regional,… - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Passive voice 2. Skills: - Listening: listen for specific information about a famous person. - Writing: write a short passage about a historic place. 3. Attitude: - To make Ss try their best to be good students. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about the history of the Tempel of Literature and famous people. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Ask Ss to talk about The Imperial Academy - Give remarks and marks. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: * Chain game: - T asks two groups of 5 students to take part in the game and gives some rules of the game. Eg: Literature…….. B. Presentation: MAIN CONTENTS

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

Activity 1: Listening *Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/ situation/ I. New words pictures; District (n): huyện - T: writes new words on the board. doctoral (aj): thuộc tiến sỹ - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first then regional (aj): thuộc vùng royal (aj): thuộc hoàng gia the whole class. 150

- Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. *Checking: rub out and remember Part 1- P65 - First, have Ss read each sentence and discuss the option (A, B, C) that is most appropriate to complete the sentence. -Play the recording to check. Part 2- P65 -Play the recording again. -Call on some Ss to write their answers on the board. - Let Ss talk about the biography of Chu Van An

career (n): sự nghiệp II. Listening 1. Listen to the recording and circle the appropriate answer (A, B, or C). Key: 1. C 2. B 3. B 4. A

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

2. Listen to the passage again and write short answers to the questions below. Key: 1. in 1292 2. He was an honest man. 3. He continued his career and wrote books. 4. 78 Activity 2: Writing Part 3- P65 III. Writing 1. Transferring the learning task. 3. Discuss the table in groups. Complete the - Ask Ss to look at the table in part table about the Temple of Literature- the 3-P65 and read ie quickly to get the Imperial Academy. information. -Ask Ss to discuss in groups to find the missing information to complete the table. 2. Doing the task. - Ss work in groups and complete the Key: task. 1070 - Emperor Ly Thanh Tong - T goes around and gives help if 1076 - First university in Viet Nam any. 1484 - King Le Thanh Tong 2003 - Founders and developers of the 3. Reporting the task result and Temple of Literature. discuss. - Some Ss talk aloud before class. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T corrects and gives feedback. - Give the key and then have Ss check. Part 4- P65 - Tell Ss to write a short passage about the history of the Temple of Literature - the Imperial Academy using the information in 3. (If there is not enough time, assign it as homework)

4. Write a passage about the history of the Temple of Literature - the Imperial Academy. Sample writing: Emperor Ly Thanh Tong founded The Temple of Literature in 1070. Now it is considered as one of the historic and cultural 151

sites of Viet Nam. Then in 1076 Emperor Ly Nhan Tong built ThE Imperial Academy as the first university of Viet Nam. In 1484, Emperor LeThanh Tong built the first doctor’s stone tablet there to memorize the devotion of Doctors. Nowit is regconized as the World heritageby UNESCO. In 2003, the Ha Noi People Committee built four statues of Emperor Ly Thanh Tong, Emperor Ly Nhan Tong, King Le Thanh Tong and Chu Van An who founded and developed The Temple of Literature - Imperial Academy

FF IC IA L

- Ask Ss to read aloud their writing.

4. Consolidation: - Ask some Ss to read aloud their writing. Teacher and other students listen and give remarks. 5. Homework: - Do exercises: E1+ E2 workbook. - Complete the writing on the notebook. - Prepare:UNIT 6:Looking back + project - Page 66-67 in textbook. Ngày 10tháng 12 năm 2018.

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÍ DUYỆT

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

ẠY

KÈ

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WEEK 17 Pre: 12/ 12/ 2018 Te: ...../ 12/ 2018

Period 49: UNIT 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM

Lesson 7:Looking back & Project 152

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to cover the whole unit and do exercises to review vocabulary and structures in unit 6. Understand the form of the present simple and past passive to do exercises - Vocabulary: words about historic places and things, things to take on a trip. - Phonetics: Know how to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Passive voice 2. Skills: - Speaking: talk about the Temple of Literature- the Imperial Acedamy - Writing: complete the sentences. 3. Attitude: - To make Ss try their best to be good students. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about the history of the Tempel of Literature and famous people. - The love for the country, for the family, being human, honest, self- educated, problem solving, being creative, self- management, communicating, co- working… II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, sub-board. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Ask Ss to talk about the history of the Temple of Literature - the Imperial Academy. - Give remarks and marks 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Revision: - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write the past participle of the following verbs.

Ex 1: Write the past participle of the following verbs.

Key:

Base Form Sell grow speak buy build

Past Participle sold grown spoken bought built

Base Form Consisder Name Visit Locate Recognise 153

Past Participle Consisdered Named Visited Located Recognised

see B. Presentation:

seen

start

started

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

AIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Vocabulary Part 2- P66 I.Vocabulary - Ask Ss to complete the exercise 2. Complete the sentences with the past individually. participle form. - Ss do the task individually then Key: some Ss give the answers aloud. 1. considered, stated2. named - T checks and correct then gives 3. spoken4. located feedback. 5. recognized Activity 2: Grammar - Let Ss review the passive form of II. Grammar the present simple and past simple a. The present simple passive tense. (+) S+ is / am/are + p.p……………. (-) S+ is/am/ are + not + p.p…………. - Ask Ss to give the examples (? ) Is/am /Are + S+ p.p…………….? Ex: The Temple of Literature is located in the centre of Hanoi b. The past simple passive. (+ ) S + was/ were+ Ved/ p2 + (by sb). (-) S + wasn’t/ weren’t + Ved/ p2 + (by sb). (? ) Was/were +S + p.p…..? Part 3- P66 1. Transferring the learning task. 3. Change the sentences from the present - Ask Ss to do the task individually simple active into the simple present first. Then they can check their passive. answers with a partner before Key: 1. Tickets are sold at the gate of the tourist discussing the answers as a class. site. 2. Doing the task. - Ss work individually and do the task 2. A lot of flowers are grown in Da Lat 3. The Hung King’s Temple is visited by then check with a partner.. - T goes around and gives help if any. thousands of people every day. 4. Many beautiful Cham Towers can be seen 3. Reporting the task result and by tourists in Binh Duong province. discuss. - Some Ss talk aloud before class. 5. Many kinds of goods can be bought by - Call on some Ss to write the answers tourists in Ben Thanh Market. on the board. - Ss go to the board and write. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T checks and corrects - Give the key and then have Ss check. 4. Change the sentences from the past simple passive into the past simple active. Part 4- P66 - Ask Ss to do them individually first. Key: Then they can check their answers 1. Emperor Ly Thai Tong founded One Pillar Pagoda. with a partner before discussing the 154

answers as a class.

KÈ

FF IC IA L

2. Emperor Ly Nhan Tong constructed the Imperial Academy. - Call on some Ss to write the answers 3. King Le Thanh Tong ordered the erection on the board. of the first Doctor’s stone tablet. - Ss go to the board and write. 4. They built Tan Ky House in Hoi An two - T checks and corrects centuries ago. 5. They completed the construction of Tu Duc Tomb in 1876. Activity 3: Communication Part 5- P66 III. Communication - Have Ss work in pairs ask and answer 5. Ask and answer questions about questions about the Temperature of Literature- the Temple of Literature- the the Imperial Acedamy, using the information Imperial Academy in the table. Eg: - Ss practice in pairs talking about the A: Where is the Temple of Temperature of Literature-the Imperial Literature? Acedamy with the prompt given in the table – B: It’s located in the centre of Ha p66. Noi. - Some pairs practice aloud before class. ….. - T remarks and corrects if any. Activity 4: Production Part 2- P66 6. Report your discussions, using - Have Ss work in groups then report their the information in 5. results of their discussion to the class. Example: The Temple of Literature is located -T and Ss read the brochure and answer some in the centre of Ha Noi. questions: What is the title of the brochure? How many parts/sections/pages does the *Make a brochure about one of the brochure consist of? What are the sub-titles most famous tourist sites in their of the parts/sections/pages of the brochure? province What can you see in each part/ section/page? Ex: Quang Trung Museum -Ask Ss to make a brochure about Hung IV. Project King’s Temples.

ẠY

4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson. 5. Homework: - Redo all the exercises above and do exercises in the workbook. - Prepare: REVIEW 2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 13/ 12/ 2018 Te: ...../ 12/ 2018

Period 50: Review 2 I/ Objectives 155

KÈ

FF IC IA L

1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to revise pronunciation, vocabulary, grammar, everyday English about music and arts, Vietnamese food and drink, the first university. - Vocabulary: Words related to music and arts, Vietnamese food and drink, the first university. - Phonetics: Practice pronouncing the sounds: / ȓ/, /ʒ/, /Ǣ/, /Ǥə/,/ ʧ/, /ʤ /. - Grammar: comparisons, express agreement TOO/ EITHER, use countable nouns, uncountable nouns, passive voice. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, and writing skills 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, know the importance of revision and need to study harder. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Do exercises on pronunciation, vocabulary, grammar and everyday English. - The love for the country, for the family, being human, honest, self- educated, problem solving, being creative, self- management, communicating, … II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - During the lesson. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: * Free talk - Teacher monitors and gets feedback B. Presentation:

ẠY

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

Part 1- P68: 1. Transferring the learning task. - Ask Ss to do the task individually first. Then they can share their answers with a partner. -Ss do the exercise individually, and then share their answers. 2. Doing the task. - Ss work individually and then

MAIN CONTENTS. I/ LANGUAGE:

1. Pronunciation. Ex1: Circle the word in which the underlined sound is pronounced differently. Listen, check and repeat the words. Key: 1. sure 2. cinema 3. compose 156

4. architect 5. question

FF IC IA L

2.Vocabulary Ex 2: Do the crossword puzzle and complete the sentences. Key: 1. music2. food 3. art4. drink 5. university6. Temple 3.Grammar Ex 3: Complete the following two passages about camping. Use the words or phrases in the boxes. Key: 1. How many 2. How much 3. How much4. How many 5.a 6. much 7. some 8. many Ex 4: Write the sentences using the suggested words or phrases. Key: 1. I think classical music is as exciting as country music. 2. These clothes are not as expensive as I thought. 3. My taste in art is the same as hers ( her taste) 4. The price of foods in HaNoi is not the same as it is in Hai Phong. 5. Life in Viet Nam is different from life in England. Ex 5: Rewrite the sentences in the passive. Key: 1. The song Auld Lang Syne is sung on some occasions. 2. Vietnam’s anthem Tien Quan Ca was composed by Van Cao. 3. Water puppetry is ferformed in a pool. 4. A lot of meat was bought (by his mother) yesterday. 5. The rice noodles are made from the best

share their answers with a partner. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Ss go to the board and write. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T checks and corrects -T writes the correct answers on the board. Part 2- P68: - Ss do the exercise individually, then T writes the correct answers on the board.

Part 3- P68: - After Ss have done this exercise individually, T quickly checks Ss’ answers.

KÈ

Part 4- P68: - T checks the answers with the whole class.

ẠY

Part 5- P68: - Ask Ss to write his/her answers on the board. -T checks with the whole class.

157

FF IC IA L

variety of rice. 4. Everyday English Part 6- P69: Ex 6: Complete the conversations with the -T calls a pair of Ss to do the questions in the box. Act them out with exercises in front of the class. Check your partner. Ss’ answers. Key: -Ask them for explaination if 1. C 2. E 3. A 4. B 5. D necessary. 4. Consolidation: - Correct the ex. if necessary. 5. Homework: - Prepare part SKILLSfor the next lesson. - Do exercise 1,2,3,4 P.50- 51 in workbook.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 13/ 12/ 2018 Te: ...../ 12/ 2018

Period 51: Review 2(Cont)

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to revise the languages Ss have learnt and the skills they have practised since Unit 4. Do some exercises about four skills. - Vocabulary: Words related to music and arts, Vietnamese food and drink, the first university.

ẠY

KÈ

- Phonetics: Practice pronouncing the sounds: / ȓ/, /ʒ/, /Ǣ/, /Ǥə/,/ ʧ/, /ʤ /. - Grammar: comparisons, express agreement TOO/ EITHER, use countable nouns, uncountable nouns, passive voice. 2. Skills: Speaking, listening, reading and writing skills 3. Attitude: To teach Ss to work hard, know the importance of revision and need to study harder. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Using English well in four skills: listening, speaking, reading and writing. - The love for the country, for the family, being human, honest, self- educated, problem solving, being creative, self- management, communicating, … II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids, pictures. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 158

FF IC IA L

7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - During the lesson. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Chatting: - Tell me the good way to learn newwords. - Teacher monitors and gets feedback B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS.

ẠY

KÈ

II/ Skills Part 1- P69: 1. Reading 1. Transferring the learning task. Ex 1: Read their descriptions and tick - For exercise 1, ask Ss to complete the the boxes. answers individually. Key: -Ss do the exercise individually, and then - Gone with the Wind: 3,5 share their answers. - A Space Odyssey: 1,2, 4 2. Doing the task. - Ss work individually and then share their answers with a partner. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Ss give the answers aloud. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T checks and corrects - T gives the correct answers. 2. Speaking Ex 2: Work in pairs. Plan a trip to a Part 2- P69: - Have Ss work in pairs, asking and place… answering question with the suggestions. - Where and when you go - Who you go with - T may go around to help weaker Ss. - How you travel - What you bring - What you do Ex 3: Work in groups. Take turns Part 3- P69: -Have Ss work in groups taking turns to talking about the arrangements fro the talk about arrangements for the trip. trip. -Then ask each group to choose the St who does the task best to talk in front of the class. -Ask some Ss give comments. 3. Listening Part 4- P69: Ex 4:Listen to a man talking about his -Have Ss look at the adjectives which the meal in a restaurant and tick the man uses to describe his meal in a adjectives you hear. restaurant. Key: -Play the the recording once for Ss to 1. great 3. fresh 4. delicious 159

listen and tick their answers.

5. sweet 6. tasty 8. good Ex 5: Listen again and complete the menu. Key: Menu Appetizer Salad Main dish Fish, vegetables Dessert An ice cream Drink A cup of tea

FF IC IA L

Part 5- P69: - Have Ss look at the menu. Play the recording again for Ss to complete the menu.

4. Writing Ex 6:Look at the pictures below. Write Part 6- P69: the instructions of how to cook a -Set up the writing activity. mushroom omelette. -T reminds Ss that the first and most important thing is always to think about Key: First, slice the mushrooms. what they are going to write. -In this case, Ss may use the sequence of Then, beat the eggs in a bowl activities ( first, then, next, after that, and Next, add salt to the egg mixture. After that, pour the eggs into a frying finally) pan. Add the mushrooms and cook. Finally, fold the omelette in half.

4. Consolidation: - Correct the ex. if necessary. 5. Homework: - Do exercises 5,6,7,8 P. 52,53 in workbook. - Prepare carefully for the next lesson: Revision.

Ngày 17tháng 12 năm 2018.

KÈ

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÍ DUYỆT

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

ẠY

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WEEK 18 Pre: 18/ 12/ 2018 Te: ...../ 12/ 2018

Period 52: REVISION

160

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - After the lesson students will be able to revise some main grammatical structures that they’ve learnt in six units: from Unit 1 to Unit 6. - Vocabulary: Words related to the themes: Our Communities and Our Heritage. - Phonetics: The ways to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: + Present simple and simple future, Past simple and present perfect, imprerative with more/less, coordinating conjuntions: and, or, but, so; and “because” for giving reasons. + Comparisons, express agreement TOO/ EITHER, use countable nouns, uncountable nouns, passive voice. 2. Skills: - To drill Ss’ 4 skills in learning English. 3. Attitude: - Ss know how to help others in the class. - Ss participate actively in the lesson. 4. Ability needed: - Inter social communication. - Give opinions. - Ss love the subject and be aware of revision to prepare well for the first test term. II. Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work, situations, translation, discussion, and examples. III. Preparation 1. Teacher’s: - Materials: books, worksheet. - Equipment: No. 2. Students’: text books, note books. IV. Teaching procedure 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37- Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - During the lesson 3. New lesson

ẠY

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

- Ask Ss to repeat the grammar they have learn in the first semester

MAIN CONTENTS

A. Grammar 1- Tenses revision a. Present simple: Form: S + V (s/es)............... S + don't/ doesn't + V............ Do/ Does + S + V.........? b. Present progressive: Form:S + am/ is/ are +V-ing............... S + am/ is/ are + not + V-ing............ Am/ is/ are + S + V-ing.........? 161

KÈ

- Collect Ss’ answers then feedback.

FF IC IA L

- Ss repeat these grammar points

*Note: Nh÷ng ®éng tõ sau kh«ng dïng ë HTTD: - hear, smell, feel, sound, look, taste, see........ - dislike, fear, hate, like, love, mind,want, wish, prefer, need, think, recognize, remember, forget, know, understand, mean c. Present perfect: Form: S + have/ has + P II............... S + have/ has + not+ P II............... Have/ has + S + P II.........? d. Past simple: Form:S + V-ed............... S + did + not+ V............... Did + S + V.........? e. Future simple: Form:S + will + V............... S + won't + V............... Will + S + V.................? 2. Verbs of liking + V-ing (to) like, love, enjoy, hate (not like) + V-ing 3. Comparisons: * as + adjective + as * not as + adjective + as * the same as… * different from 4. The quanlities: a/an/some/any +) A/An + N (An- đi với N bắt đầu bằng một trong 5 nguyên âm: a, e, i, o, u hoặc phụ âm “h” câm) +) Some/Any + Ns/Nkđđ (Some: dùng trong câu khẳng định; Any dùng trong câu phủ định và nghi vấn) *Notes:We can use “some” in an offer or a request Ex: Would you like a glass of orange juice? Can I have some more apples, please? 5. The questions about quanlity: How many/ How much - How many + plural countable nouns(Ns) - How much + uncountable nouns(Nkđđ) 6. The passive voice a/ The present simple passive. - Form : (+) S+ is / am/are + p.p……………. (-) S+ is/am/are + not + p.p…………. (? ) Is/Am/Are + S+ p.p…………….? Ex: The Temple of Luiterature is located in the centre of Hanoi b/ The past simple passive.

ẠY

- Ss listen and copy down

162

2. Doing the task:

FF IC IA L

1.Transfering the learning task: - Ask Ss to use these grammar points to do the exercises given on the board.

Form (+ ) S + was/ were+ V-ed/ p2 + (by sb). (-) S + wasn’t/ weren’t + V-ed/ p2 + (by sb). In the passive voice the person /thing doing the action is usually placed at the end The passive voice is more common in writing than speaking B. Practice: Ex 1: Choose the best answer. 1. Classical is not as………..as rock and roll A. excited B. exciting C. interested D. interesting 2. Which of the following is sung in the film TiTanic A. Quesera B. My heart will go on C. yesterday once more D. Happy new year 3.Dong Ho paitings are made in Dong Ho village, …..province A. Bac Ninh B. Quang Ninh C. Quang Binh D. Thanh Hoa 4. I never watch horror films and my sister doesn’t ….. A. either B. too C. so D. also 5. Find the words in the text which mean: special or dirrerent A. unique B. unusual C. strange D. well-done 6.The music festival this year is as good ……it was last year. A. or B. so C. as D. also 7. Mozart was one of the most famous…….of classical music A. actors B. composers C. artists D. makers 8. I don’t sing as…..as my sister. She is the best singer in her class A. beautifully B. beautiful C. good D. badly 9. Nam is interested in drawing and I am……… A.either B. too C. neither D. also

ẠY

KÈ

- Ss do the questions in turn and in pairs.

Ex 2: Give the correct form of the verbs. 1. She (not brush) ….. her shoes 5 days ago. 2. You (do) …… your homework yesterday evening? 3. They (study) ….. hard when they (be) ….. young. 4. We (drink)……… too much last night. 5. She (buy)……… a very nice dress last week. 6. I really enjoy (eat)…… in restaurants. – So (do)….. my brother. He (not like)……. (cook)…... 7. My aunt (raise)…… hens, pigs and cows on the farm two years ago. 8. The children (be)……… here ten minutes ago, but at the moment, they (play)……. in the yard. 163

FF IC IA L

O 4- A 9- B

Ex 1:Choose the best answer 1- A 2- B 3- A 6- C 7- B 8- A

3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Call on some Ss to write their own answer on the board. - Some Ss give the answer on the board

Ex 3: Read the situations and complete the sentences. 1. Hoa and Tim are both 13 years old. (the same…..as) ->Tim is......................................... 2. She speaks English very well, and her sister speaks well too.(as……..as) ->She speaks................................... 3. Her old house is bigger than her new one. ->Her new house....................................... 4. No one in my class is taller than Peter. ->Peter ............................................... 5. The black dress is more expensive than the white one ->The white dress ......................................... 6. This is the first time I have ever met such a pretty girl ->She is ..................................................... C. Answer keys: 5- A

Ex 2: Give the correct form of the verbs. 1. didn’t brush 2. Did....do? 3. studied/were 4. drank 5. bought 6. eating/does/doesn’t like /cooking 7. raised 8. were/ are playing Ex 3:Read the situations and complete the sentences. 4. Giving the remarks to 1. Tim is the same age as Hoa. their doing the task: 2. She speaks English as well as her sister does. - T corrects and remarks 3. Her new house is smaller than her old one. then gives feedback. 4. Peter is the tallest in my class. - Ss copy the right answers 5.The white dress is cheaper than the black one. 6. She is the prettiest girl I have ever met.

ẠY

KÈ

4. Consolidation - Repeat the main point of the lesson. 5. Homework - Revise these grammar points carefully - Prepare for the next lesson: Test for the first term. Pre: 27/ 12/ 2018 Te:27 / 12/ 2018

P53rd: Test for the first term I. Objectives: 164

FF IC IA L

1. Knowledge: - After the lesson, students will be able to check their knowledge by doing exercise and use language in situation correctly and fluently. - Teacher will be able to test students’ knowledge in language and language skills and then draw out the most suitable method for teaching and learning. 2. Skills: - To drill Ss’ skills in doing the written test. 3. Attitude: - To encourage Ss to learn heartily. 4. Ability needed: - Doing the written test - Ss love the subject and be aware of revision to do well for the first test term. II. Teaching methods and techniques. - Checking Ss’ understanding. III. Preparation 1. Teacher’s: - Materials: Paper tests. - Equipment: No. 2. Students’: No. IV. Teaching procedure 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37- Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - During the lesson 3. New lesson

A- QUESTIONS:

KÈ

(Đề kiểm tra của Phòng giáo dục)

ẠY

4. Consolidation. - Collect Ss’ papers and remark if any. 5. Homework. - Redo these questions at home.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WEEK 19 Pre: 27 / 12 / 2018. Te: ....../ 12 / 2018.

Period 54th:Test correction

165

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives. 1. Knowledge: - After the lesson, Ss will be able toread the test again and find out their mistakes and correct themselves and T can evaluate Ss’ knowledge. - Vocabulary: Words related to the themes: Our Communities and Our Heritage. - Phonetics: The ways to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: + Present simple and simple future, Past simple and present perfect, imprerative with more/less, coordinating conjuntions: and, or, but, so; and “because” for giving reasons. + Comparisons, express agreement TOO/ EITHER, use countable nouns, uncountable nouns, passive voice. 2. Skills: - To check Ss’ language focus, reading and writing skills. 3. Attitude: - Teach Ss to be strict and honest. 4. Ability needed: - Being able todo the exercises well. - Ss love the subject and be aware of the mistakes they made then correct them and study harder. II/ Preparations. 1. Teacher’s: - Materials: Paper tests. - Equipment: sub - board. 2. Students’: No. III/ Teaching process. 1- Class Organization

KÈ

-Attendance: 7A: ...../ 37 - Absence: ............................................................................... 7B: ...../ 33 …........................................................................... 7C: ...../ 35…........................................................................... 2- Oral test - During the lesson. 3- New lesson A. Warm- up:*Chatting: - How is your test? - Did you do it well? B. Presentation:

ẠY

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

* Give the paper test back and correct the test.

- Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

MAIN CONTENTS

1. Test correction ĐỀ CHẴN

I. Chọn từ có phần gạch chân khác với các từ còn lại. (1.0 pt – 0.25 for each correct answer) 1. C 2. C 3. B 4. D II. Chọn A, B, C hoặc D để hoàn thành các câu sau. (2.5 pts - 0.25 for each correct answer) 1.C

2. B 166

3. B

4. A

5. B

6. C 7. D 8. C 9. C 10. A III. Tìm lỗi sai trong số A, B, C hoặc D. (1.0 pt- 0.25 for each correct answer) 1. B 2. B 3. D 4. C IV. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc. (1.0 pt- 0.25 for each correct answer) 1. have not finished/haven’t finished 2. was completed 3. collecting 4. will not play/ won’t play V. Cho dạng đúng của từ in hoa để hoàn thành câu (0.5 pt- 0.25 for each correct answer) 1. homeless2. invitation VI. Đọc đoạn văn và trả lời câu hỏi. (2.0 pts - 0.5 for each correct answer) 1. They usually have a bowl of pho or eel soup with some slices of toast (for breakfast). 2. (They usually have luch) at about 11.30. 3. It’s dinner. 4. Yes, they do VII. Viết lại các câu sau sao cho nghĩa của câu không đổi.(2.0 pts - 0.5 for each correct answer) 1. ->That girl enjoys painting in her free time. 2. ->They have lived here since Christmas. 3. ->I find learning English important. 4. ->The Temple of Literature is surrounded by four busy streets.

FF IC IA L

- Ss give the answers in turn.

- T: explains if it is necessary. - Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

- Ss give the answers in turn.

- T: explains if it is necessary.

- Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

ĐỀ LẺ

- Ss write the answers on the board in turn.

ẠY

KÈ

- T: explains if it is necessary.

- Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

- Ss give the answers in turn. - T: explains if it is

I. Chọn từ có phần gạch chân khác với các từ còn lại. (1.0 pt – 0.25 for each correct answer) 1. C 2. C 3. D 4. B II. Chọn A, B, C hoặc D để hoàn thành các câu sau. (2.5 pts - 0.25 for each correct answer) 1.A 2. B 3. B 4. A 5. D 6. C 7. D 8. C 9. C 10. A III. Tìm lỗi sai trong số A, B, C hoặc D. (1.0 pt- 0.25 for each correct answer) 1. A 2. C3. D 4. B IV. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc. (1.0 pt- 0.25 for each correct answer) 1.is spoken 2. have offered 3. arranging 4. collecting V. Cho dạng đúng của từ in hoa để hoàn thành câu (0.5 pt- 0.25 for each correct answer) 1. beautiful2. imagination VI. Đọc đoạn văn và trả lời câu hỏi. (2.0 pts - 0.5 for 167

- Ss give the answers in turn. - T: explains if it is necessary.

2. Remark * Give the general *The result. remarks - Class 7A:…./ 37from 5 -T gives general remarks 7B:…./ 33 of good and bad points. 7C:…./ 35 - T gives compliments to the excellent students and points out the limits of some week Ss. - T collects Ss’ marks

FF IC IA L

- Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

each correct answer) 1. They usually have a bowl of pho or eel soup with some slices of toast (for breakfast). 2. (They usually have luch) at about 11.30. 3. It’s dinner. 4. Yes, they do VII. Viết lại các câu sau sao cho nghĩa của câu không đổi.(2.0 pts - 0.5 for each correct answer) 1. ->You’d better revise the lesson carefully for the next exam. 2. ->He enjoys listening to music. 3. ->They have studied English since 2004. 5. ->The Temple of Literature is surrounded by four busy streets.

necessary.

4. Consolidation - Retell the main content of the test: vocabulary and grammar. 5. Homework - Review all grammar and vocabulary. - Prepare: Unit 7- Getting started/ Page 6- textbook (part 2). Ngày …… tháng 12 năm 2018.

ẠY

KÈ

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÍ DUYỆT

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ĐỀ CHẴN 168

FF IC IA L

I. Choose the word having the underlined part pronounced differently in each line (1.0 pt) 1. A. display B. unusual C. occasion D. measure 2. A.robot B. photo C. object D. postcard 3. A. exciting B. fragile C. twice D. continent 4. A. fever B. of C. soft D. chef 1.............................. 2.............................. 3.............................. 4............................

II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to finish the sentences (2.5 pts) 1. You can volunteer by …………. children from poor families in your community. A. talking B. singing C. encouraging D. tutoring 2. Our class ………….. away warm clothes to streets children two days ago. A. give B. gave C. have given D. will give 3. The laboratory is ……… to the main building.. A. next B. near C. in front D. between 4. You’d better …….. an umbrella because it’s rainy. A. taking B. to take C. will take D. take ’ 5. We must be quick. There s …………. time left. A. little B. few C. much D. more 6. Luckily I ………….. few mistakes in my last exam. A. make B. made C. have made D. am making 7. I am not ready yet and …………………... A. she is too B. she is not C. so is she D. she isn’t either 8. My sister likes beef. It’s her favourite …………………. A. meat B. drink C. vegetable D. fruit 9. ………………. kilos of chicken do you want? . A. How much B. How many C. How any D. How often 10. You look very …………….... I’m sure you play sports regularly A. thin B. fat C. fit D. well 1……………. 2………… 3………… 4…………… 5…………… 6……………. 7………… 8………… 9…………… 10……………

ẠY

KÈ

III. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets (1.0 pt) 1. She (1. start) ………. doing the gardening an hour ago, and she (2.not finish) …….. it yet. 2. Eating fruit and vegetables every day (3. be) …………………. very healthy. 3. A lot of trees (4. plant)……………. ……….around the school at the moment. 1........................ 2.................... 3................... 4....................... IV. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentences (0.5 pt) 1. Model making is a ………………….. way of spending time. WONDER 2. Trà Giang is one of the most famous ………… of Vietnam. Many people love her. ACT 1.............................. 2.............................. V. Read the following passage and choose the best answer for each blank(1.0 pt) 169

FF IC IA L

Almost all people have a fear of examinations. Examinations, however, are a part of our lives and all schools in Vietnam have examinations. Examinations were first (1)……….. in China about three thousand years ago. Scholars had to memorise long passages taken from several books. Those who did well in the examinations (2) ……. to enter the government service. Nowadays, the main (3) ………. of the examinations is to test how well a person understands the subjects which have been taught. They are also used to find how well students perform (4)…………….. pressure. 1. A. played B. made C. held D. gained 2. A. allowed B. were allowed C. have allowed D. allowing 3. A. part B. idea C. content D. purpose 4. A. under B. above C. within D. inside

ẠY

KÈ

1................ 2...................... 3...................... 4.......................... 5………….. VI. Read the passage and answer the following questions (2.0 pts) The first reason why many families do volunteer work is that they feel satisfied and proud. The feeling of fulfillment comes from helping the community and other people. In addition, volunteering is a great way for families to have fun and closer. But many people say they don’t have time to volunteer because they have to work and take care of their families. If that’s the case, try rethinking some of your free time as a family. You could select just one or two projects a year and make them a family tradition. Your family can make and donate gift blankets for the old homeless people on holidays. Your family can also spend only one Saturday morning a month collecting rubbish in your neighborhood. 1. How do people often feel when they volunteer? ………………………………………………………………………………………… 2. Why don’t some people have time to volunteer? ………………………………………………………………………………………… 3. How can your family help the old homeless people? ………………………………………………………………………………………… 4. How many projects could you select a year? ………………………………………………………………………………………… VII. Rewrite the following sentences in such a way that they mean the same as the original sentence (1.0 pts) 1. It’s a good idea to eat a lot of fruit and vegetables every day We should ………………………………………………………………… 2. Linh finds playing board games boring. Linh doesn’t like ………………………………………………………………. 3. We have donated books and clothes for ten years. We began ………………………………………………………………….. 4. Both students and teachers can borrow books from the library The librarry............................................................................................................. ĐỀ LẺ

170

FF IC IA L

I. Choose the word having the underlined part pronounced differently in each line (1.0 pt) 1. A. question B. tradition C. exhibition D. action 2. A. musician B. official C. ocean D.concerto 3. A. machine B. chef C. chorus D. brochure 4. A. shop B. hot C. coffee D. bone 1......................... 2............................ 3.............................. 4............................

II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to finish the sentences (2.5 pts) 1. You can volunteer by …………. children from poor families in your community. A. talking B. singing C. encouraging D. tutoring 2. Our class ………….. away warm clothes to streets children two days ago. A. give B. gave C. have given D. will give 3. The laboratory is ……… to the main building.. A. next B. near C. in front D. between ’ ’ 4. You d better …….. an umbrella because it s rainy. A. taking B. to take C. will take D. take 5. We must be quick. There’s …………. time left. A. little B. few C. much D. more 6. Luckily I ………….. few mistakes in my last exam. A. make B. made C. have made D. am making 7. I am not ready yet and …………………... A. she is too B. she is not C. so is she D. she isn’t either 8. My sister likes beef. It’s her favourite …………………. A. meat B. drink C. vegetable D. fruit 9. ………………. kilos of chicken do you want? . A. How much B. How many C. How any D. How often 10. You look very …………….... I’m sure you play sports regularly A. thin B. fat C. fit D. well 1……………. 2………… 3………… 4…………… 5…………… 6……………. 7………… 8………… 9…………… 10……………

ẠY

KÈ

III. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets (1.0 pt) 1. Eating fruit and vegetables every day (1. be) …………………. very healthy. 2. Mr and Mrs Phuong (2. offer) ………… free meals for the poor in Ha Noi so far. 3. A lot of trees (3. plant)……………. ……….around the school at the moment. 4. We (4. clean)…….. up the dirty streets in our area last Sunday. 1................... 2.................... 3................... 4....................... IV. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentences (0.5 pt) 1. Many people were made …………. …..after the flood. HOME 2. Trần Văn Cẩn is my favourite ………. He is famous for the painting “Little sister Thuy” ART 1.............................. 2.............................. V. Read the following passage and choose the best answer for each blank(1.0 pt) Almost all people have a fear of examinations. Examinations, however, are a part of our lives and all schools in Vietnam have examinations. 171

FF IC IA L

Examinations were first (1)……….. in China about three thousand years ago. Scholars had to memorise long passages taken from several books. Those who did well in the examinations (2) ……. to enter the government service. Nowadays, the main (3) ………. of the examinations is to test how well a person understands the subjects which have been taught. They are also used to find how well students perform (4)…………….. pressure. 1. A. played B. made C. held D. gained 2. A. allowed B. were allowed C. have allowed D. allowing 3. A. part B. idea C. content D. purpose 4. A. under B. above C. within D. inside

ẠY

KÈ

1.................. 2................. 3...................... 4.................. 5………….. VI. Read the passage and answer the following questions (2.0 pts) The first reason why many families do volunteer work is that they feel satisfied and proud. The feeling of fulfillment comes from helping the community and other people. In addition, volunteering is a great way for families to have fun and closer. But many people say they don’t have time to volunteer because they have to work and take care of their families. If that’s the case, try rethinking some of your free time as a family. You could select just one or two projects a year and make them a family tradition. Your family can make and donate gift blankets for the old homeless people on holidays. Your family can also spend only one Saturday morning a month collecting rubbish in your neighborhood. 1. How do people often feel when they volunteer? ………………………………………………………………………………………… 2. Why don’t some people have time to volunteer? ………………………………………………………………………………………… 3. How can your family help the old homeless people? ………………………………………………………………………………………… 4. How many projects could you select a year? ………………………………………………………………………………………… VII. Rewrite the following sentences in such a way that they mean the same as the original sentence (1.0 pts) 1. Both students and teachers can borrow books from the library The librarry..................................................................................................... 2. Linh finds playing board games boring. Linh doesn’t like ……………………………………………………………. 3. It’s a good idea to eat a lot of fruit and vegetables every day We should …………………………………………………………… 4. We have donated books and clothes for ten years. We began …………………………………………………………….. C- Answers and mark:

ĐỀ CHẴN

I. Choose the word having the underlined part pronounced differently in each line (1.0 pt – 0.25 for each correct answer) 172

1. A 2. C 3. D 4. B II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to finish the sentences (2.5 pts - 0.25 for each correct answer) 1.D 6. B

2. B 7. D

3. A 8. A

4. D 9. B

5. A 10. C

KÈ

ĐỀ LẺ

FF IC IA L

III. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets (1.0 pt- 0.25 for each correct answer) 1. started 2. has not finished/hasn’t finished 3. is 4. are being planted IV. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentences (0.5 pt- 0.25 for each correct answer) 1. wonderful 2. actress V. Read the following passage and choose the best answer for each blank(1.0 pt0.25 for each correct answer) 1. C 2. B 3. D 4. A VI. Read the passage and answer the following questions (2.0 pts - 0.5 for each correct answer) 1. They feel satisfied and proud. 2. Many people say they don’t have time to volunteer because they have to work and take care of their families./ Because they have to work and take care of their families 3. Your family can make and donate gift blankets for the old homeless people on hoildays./ Your family can make and donate gift blankets. 4. You could select just one or two projects a year/ One or two projects a year. VII. Rewrite the following sentences in such a way that they mean the same as the original sentence (2.0 pts - 0.5 for each correct answer) 1. We should eat a lot of fruit and vegetables every day 2. Linh doesn’t like playing board games. 3. We began donating/ to donate books and clothes ten years ago. 4. The library lends books to both students and teachers.

ẠY

I. Choose the word having the underlined part pronounced differently in each line (1.0 pt – 0.25 for each correct answer) 1. A 2. D 3. C 4. D II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to finish the sentences (2.5 pts - 0.25 for each correct answer) 1.D 6. B

2. B 7. D

3. A 8. A

4. D 9. B

5. A 10. C

III. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets (1.0 pt- 0.25 for each correct answer) 1. is 2. have offered 3. are being planted 4. cleaned IV. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentences (0.5 pt- 0.25 for each correct answer) 173

Ơ H

4. Consolidation. - Collect Ss’ papers and remark if any. 5. Homework. - Redo these questions at home.

FF IC IA L

1. homeless 2. artist V. Read the following passage and choose the best answer for each blank(1.0 pt0.25 for each correct answer) 1. C 2. B 3. D 4. A VI. Read the passage and answer the following questions (2.0 pts - 0.5 for each correct answer) 1. They feel satisfied and proud. 2. Many people say they don’t have time to volunteer because they have to work and take care of their families./ Because they have to work and take care of their families 3. Your family can make and donate gift blankets for the old homeless people on hoildays./ Your family can make and donate gift blankets. 4. You could select just one or two projects a year/ One or two projects a year. VII. Rewrite the following sentences in such a way that they mean the same as the original sentence (2.0 pts - 0.5 for each correct answer) 1. The library lends books to both students and teachers. 2. Linh doesn’t like playing board games. 3. We should eat a lot of fruit and vegetables every day 4. We began donating/ to donate books and clothes ten years ago.

WEEK 19 Pre: 27 / 12 / 2018. Te: ....../ 12 / 2018.

Period 54:Test correction

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives. 1. Knowledge: - After the lesson, Ss will be able toread the test again and find out their mistakes and correct themselves and T can evaluate Ss’ knowledge. - Vocabulary: Words related to the themes: Our Communities and Our Heritage. - Phonetics: The ways to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: + Present simple and simple future, Past simple and present perfect, imprerative with more/less, coordinating conjuntions: and, or, but, so; and “because” for giving reasons. + Comparisons, express agreement TOO/ EITHER, use countable nouns, uncountable nouns, passive voice. 2. Skills: - To check Ss’ language focus, reading and writing skills. 3. Attitude: - Teach Ss to be strict and honest. 174

FF IC IA L

4. Ability needed: - Being able todo the exercises well. - Ss love the subject and be aware of the mistakes they made then correct them and study harder. II/ Preparations. 1. Teacher’s: - Materials: Paper tests. - Equipment: sub - board. 2. Students’: No. III/ Teaching process. 1- Class Organization

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

KÈ

M D

ẠY

- Ss give the answers in turn.

- T: explains if it is necessary. - Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

I. Choose the word having the underlined part pronounced differently in each line (1.0 pt – 0.25 for each correct answer) 1. A 2. C 3. D 4. B II. Choose the correct answer A, B, C or D to finish the sentences (2.5 pts - 0.25 for each correct answer)

- Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

ĐỀ CHẴN

* Give the paper test back and correct the test.

1. Test correction

1.D 2. B 3. A 4. D 5. A 6. B 7. D 8. A 9. B 10. C III. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets (1.0 pt- 0.25 for each correct answer) 1. started 2. has not finished/hasn’t finished 3. is 4. are being planted IV. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentences (0.5 pt- 0.25 for each correct answer) 1. wonderful 2. actress V. Read the following passage and choose the best answer for each blank(1.0 pt- 0.25 for each correct answer) 1. C 2. B 3. D 4. A 175

- T: explains if it is necessary. - Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

- Ss write the answers on the board in turn.

VI. Read the passage and answer the following questions (2.0 pts - 0.5 for each correct answer) 1. They feel satisfied and proud. 2. Many people say they don’t have time to volunteer because they have to work and take care of their families./ Because they have to work and take care of their families 3. Your family can make and donate gift blankets for the old homeless people on hoildays./ Your family can make and donate gift blankets. 4. You could select just one or two projects a year/ One or two projects a year. VII. Rewrite the following sentences in such a way that they mean the same as the original sentence (2.0 pts - 0.5 for each correct answer) 1. We should eat a lot of fruit and vegetables every day 2. Linh doesn’t like playing board games. 3. We began donating/ to donate books and clothes ten years ago. 4. The library lends books to both students and teachers.

FF IC IA L

- Ss give the answers in turn.

- T: explains if it is necessary.

ĐỀ LẺ

ẠY

KÈ

- T: explains if it is necessary.

- Ss give the answers in turn.

- Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

1.D 2. B 3. A 4. D 5. A 6. B 7. D 8. A 9. B 10. C III. Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets (1.0 pt- 0.25 for each correct answer) 1. is 2. have offered 3. are being planted 4. cleaned IV. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentences (0.5 pt- 0.25 for each correct answer) 1. homeless 2. artist V. Read the following passage and choose the best answer for each blank(1.0 pt- 0.25 for each correct answer) 1. C 2. B 3. D 4. A VI. Read the passage and answer the following questions (2.0 pts - 0.5 for each correct answer) 1. They feel satisfied and proud. 176

2. Many people say they don’t have time to volunteer because they have to work and take care of their families./ Because they have to work and take care of their families 3. Your family can make and donate gift blankets for the old homeless people on hoildays./ Your family can make and donate gift blankets. 4. You could select just one or two projects a year/ One or two projects a year. VII. Rewrite the following sentences in such a way that they mean the same as the original sentence (2.0 pts - 0.5 for each correct answer) 1. The library lends books to both students and teachers. 2. Linh doesn’t like playing board games. 3. We should eat a lot of fruit and vegetables every day 4. We began donating/ to donate books and clothes ten years ago.

- Ss give the answers in turn.

2. Remark *The result. - Class 7A:…./ 37from 5 7B:…./ 33 7C:…./ 35

* Give the general remarks -T gives general remarks of good and bad points. - T gives compliments to the excellent students and points out the limits of some week Ss. - T collects Ss’ marks

FF IC IA L

- T: explains if it is necessary.

KÈ

4. Consolidation - Retell the main content of the lesson: new words and grammar from unit 1 to unit 6 5. Homework - Review all grammar and new words. - Prepare: Unit 7- Getting started/ Page 6 – textbook (part 2). Ngày …tháng 12 năm 2018.

ẠY

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÍ DUYỆT

Trần Thị Thanh Trà --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

177

FF IC IA L O N Ơ H N Y

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Preparation day: 1/12/2016

Teaching day

Attendance

Absence

Class 7E

KÈ

THEME 3: COMMUNITY Lesson 54 : TEST CORRECTION

ẠY

I- Objectives: - Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, help students understand clearly about the written test show the students’ mistakes and explain to them. - Skills developed: speaking, reading and writing. - Attitude: Study harder. - Competences : To develop evaluation capacity and self-evaluation and problemsolving capacity. II- Preparation: Materials: Answer keys. Equipment: III- Teaching process: Class organization 178

FF IC IA L

1. Warm- up: (5 minutes) Answer the questions. 2. New lesson: (30 minutes) - T gives a common observation about the students’ work. - Use the poster or ask the best student to write the key on the board. - Ss look through all of them. - Ss ask for explanation if they don’t understand. - T gives the explanation for those ones. - Ss copy the answer key. 3. Practice and consolidation: (3 minutes) - T. summarizes the content of the test. 4. Subsequent activities: (5 minutes) Prepare for the next lessonUnit 7 5. Intended test and evaluation. ( 2 minutes)

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------TỔ TRƯỞNG DUYỆT GIÁO ÁN Việt Trì, ngày .... tháng ...... năm .........

Cao Thị Bích Liên

Lesson 25:Written test 1

I. Objectives: I. Choose the best answer(s)- 3pts 1, My brother loves detective novels, and he says he ……. this hobby in the future. A. will continue B. continue C continues D. continuing

2, Eating heathy food like fruits and vegetables …….you to avoid obesity.

ẠY

KÈ

A.help B. is helping C. to help D. helps 3, My mother finds cooking meals for homeless chidren ……….. . A. interesting B. interested C. bored D. excited 4, I always take a lot of ……. when I go on holidays. A. pictures B. paintings C. photos D. bottles 5, To prevent ………. you should eat a lot of garlic and keep your body warm. A. temperatureB. earache C. allergy D. flu 6, It’s good to ………… blood because you can save people’s lives . A. voluteer B. donate C. help D. rebuild 7, Ba is putting on weight. A. getting thinner B. getting fatter C. becoming taller D. becoming shorter 8, She loves sweet melodies. ………....... is her hobby. A. Listening to music B. Painting C. Gardening D. Fishing 9, Hoa is my best friends. We ……… each other for 20 years. A. know B. knew C. are knowing D. have known * Odd one out: 10, A. dirty B. answer C. heard D. burn 11, A. tough B. cough C. rough D. of * Which word has different stress pattern? 179

12,

A. graffiti

B. obesity

C. arrange

D. mentor

II. Give the correct form of the verbs.- 1pt 1, I played tennis yesterday, but I (not win ).

1/ …………………………

2, Your sister (do ) morning exercise every day ?

2/ …………………………

3, My hobby is drawing and I (draw) nearly 50 pictures.

3/ …………………………

4, I think carving eggshells (be) an unusual hobby.

4/ …………………………

FF IC IA L

III. Correct mistakes. 1pt 1, Don’t hate people because it can make you tiring.

1/ ……………………

2, In my opinion, more people played monopoly in the future.

2/ ……………………

3, Her father finds make pottery difficult.

3/ ……………………

4, He took up this hobby when he comes back home from the US.

4/ ……………………

IV. Give the correct word form. 1pt 1, Many people were made (home) after the flood.

1/ ………………………

2, We’ve (donate) books and clothes to the poor children.

2/ ………………………

3, I think collecting old boots is a very ( bore ) hobby.

3/ ………………………

4,You can use carved eggshells as (decorate) in your house. 4/ ……………………… V. Rewrite these sentences- 1.5 pts 1. It’s a good idea to go jogging every day. → We should ........................................................................................................................ 2.She got sunburnt. She didn’t wear a sun hat. → Because.............................................................................................................. 3, She eats more fruit and vegetables. She wants to keep fit and stay healthy.(so) →......................................................................................................................... 4, It’s three years since I last ate fast food. → I have................................................................................................................. 5, I find collecting stamps interesting. (hobby) → I have.................................................................................................................

ẠY

KÈ

VI. Read the passage, then answer the questions below- 1pt The first reason why many families do volunteer work is that they feel satisfied and proud. The feeling of fulfillment comes from helping the community and other people. In addition, volunteering is a great way for families to have fun and feel closer. But many people say they don’t have time to volunteer because they have to work and take care of their families. If that’s the case, try rethinking some of your free time as a family. You could select just one or two projects a year and make them a family tradition. For instance, your family can make and donate gift baskets for the old homeless people on holidays.Your family can also spend only one Saturday morning a month collecting rubbish in your neighborhood. Questions:

1, How do people often feel when they do volunteer work? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 2, Is volunteering a great way for families to have money and feel closer? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 3, Why do many people say that they don’t have time to volunteer? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 180

4, What can our family do to help the old homeless people on their holidays? ……………………………………………………………………………………… ………… ………… ………… ………… …………

FF IC IA L

VII. Listen to the tape. Then do the exercise True (T) or False(F)- 1.5 pts 1/ He was strong when he was small. 2/ It was difficult for him to do exercise at first. 3/ He wanted to do exercise like his brother. 4/ To do triathlons, he has to run, ride a bike and climb the mountains. 5/ He has to do more exercise, sleep more and eat more healthy food to get ready for the event.

1B I. Choose the best answer(s)- 3pts 1, Collecting dolls is a piece of cake. A. hard B. interesting C. easy D. deliciouss 2, He ………a lot of old toys ands books for street children so far . A. collected B. collect C. has collected D. have collected 3, Many people find carving eggshells ……….. because eggshells are fragile. A. easy B. difficult C.boring D. interesting 4, At Tet, our classmates often go to the hospital to ……… cakes, sweets and toys to sick children there . A. draw B. provide C. sell D. donate 5, Sleep ………, but try to wake up at the usual time, even at the weekend . A. less B. more C. many D. lot 6, Mai plays computer games and watches TV a lot, so her eyes are often ……… . A. wet B. cold C. good D. dry 7, Lan always buys flowers and puts them in a vase to display in her house. Her hobby is …… A. collecting flowers B. arranging flowers C. growing flowers D. selling flowers. 8, I think 10 years from now, more people ……….. living in the countryside. A. love B. will love C. are loving D. have loved 9,Every year, my mother …….. me to Da Nang to visit our grandparents. A. take B. is taking C. will take D. takes * Odd one out: 10, A. laugh B. profit C. ferry D. high 11, A. common B. bird C. shelter D. neighbour * Which word has different stress pattern? 12, A. community B. fragile C. diet D. melody

KÈ

II. Give the correct form of the verbs.- 1pt 1/ ………………………

2, Last week, Ba and Nam went to the cinema, but they (not enjoy) the film much.

2/ ………………………

3, In the future, my father (teac ) me how to do eggshell carving

3/ ………………………

4, I think climbing mountains and racing cars (be) challenging.

4/ ………………………

ẠY

1, Hang wants to raise funds for street children, so she (make) hundreds of postcards to sell them so far.

III. Correct mistakes. 1pt

1,I have collected stamps when I was a little girl. It’s my hobby.

1/ ………………………

2,Why don’t you want to donate blood ? Because I’m scaring.

2/ ………………………

3, My mum finds ice- skate difficult.

3/ ………………………

4, Obese is a disease from eating too much.

4/ ……………………… 181

IV. Give the correct word form. 1pt 1, We’ve worked together for several months to provide good facilities for (able ) people.

1/ ………………………

2, The children volunteered to clean up their (neighbor).

2/ ………………………

3, Go Green is a non- profit (organise) that protects the environment.

3/ ………………………

FF IC IA L

4, We talked and sang for the (old) people at a nursing home. 4/ ……………………… V. Rewrite these sentences- 1.5 pts 1, It’s not a good idea to eat junk food. → We should ................................................................................................................ 2, Lan finds watching the gold fish in the tank interesting. (hobby) → ................................................................................................................ 3, He missed the bus because he got up late. (so) → …................................................................................................... 4, It rained heavily outside. We stayed at home and watched TV. → Because ........................................................................................................ 5, He started doing volunteer work in 2013. → He has ........................................................................................................

VI. Read the passage, then answer the questions below- 1pt The first reason why many families do volunteer work is that they feel satisfied and proud. The feeling of fulfillment comes from helping the community and other people. In addition, volunteering is a great way for families to have fun and feel closer. But many people say they don’t have time to volunteer because they have to work and take care of their families. If that’s the case, try rethinking some of your free time as a family. You could select just one or two projects a year and make them a family tradition. For instance, your family can make and donate gift baskets for the old homeless people on holidays. Your family can also spend only one Saturday morning a month collecting rubbish in your neighborhood. Questions: 1, What is the first reason why many families volunteer?

………………………………………………………………………………………….

2, What can doing volunteer work benefit your family? ………………………………………………………………………………………….

3, Why do some people lack time?

…………………………………………………………………….…………………….

KÈ

4, Is collecting rubbish in the neighborhood an example of volunteer work? …………………………………………………………………….…………………....

ẠY

VII. Listen to the tape. Then do the exercise True (T) or False(F)- 1.5 pts

1/ He usually had allergies when he was small. 2/ He felt worse after doing exercise for a few months. 3/ Triathlon competition is very difficult. 4/ He uses less than 6000 calories in one event. 5/ To get ready for the competition, you have to do four important things. THE END

4. Practice and consolidation: - T. collects the test papers and remarks the lesson 5. Subsequent activities: 182

………… ………… ………… ………… …………

- Prepare the next lesson: UNIT 4: GETTING STARTED

FF IC IA L

2A I. Choose the best answer(s)- 3pts 1, The music festival this year is as good ……it was last year. A. or B. so C. as D. also 2. Are you sure this is an…………………..television programme A. boring B. interested C. interesting D. bored 3. Many tourists to Viet Nam come to see the water…..show A. pop B. puppet C. painting D. drum 4.. Glastonbury is the ………….performing atrs festival in the world A. smallest B. nicest C. best D. largest 5. You can have ………orange juice instead A. any B. some C. few D . a few 6.In Viet Nam, The dan bau is a traditional musical………….. A.instrument B. means C. thing D. toy 7.Teenagers in Viet Nam like K- Pop and they like Korean films……. A. so B. too C. either D. neither 8. Who is composer of Viet Nam’s national anthem Tien Quan Ca A. Pham Tuyen B. Van Cao C. Huy Thuc D. Phong Nha 9. My mother doesn’t enjoy horror films, and my sister doesn’t…….. A.either B. too C. so D. also * Odd one out: 10. A.usual B. design C. version D. pleasure 11, .A. guess B. big C. sign D. again * Which word has different stress pattern? 12, A. leisure B. pleasure C. treasure D. museum

II. Give the correct form of the verbs.- 1pt

1/ ………………………

2, Look! The teacher (look)…………… at you

2/ ………………………

3, I (collect)………. a lot of stamps from foreign countries so far.

3/ ………………………

4. How many hours (you/ sleep) ………………every night?

4/ ………………………

1, I (go) ……….. to school by bike some years ago.

1/ ………………………

2, How much books do you need?

2/ ………………………

3, Mai doesn’t drink some milk in the mornings.

3/ ………………………

4, He has never been to America, and I haven’t, too..

4/ ………………………

ẠY

1, We will have a holiday in December every year..

KÈ

III. Correct mistakes. 1pt

IV. Give the correct word form. 1pt 1, In Viet Nam the Dan Bauia a traditional (music) instrument.

1/ …………………………

2, Are you sure this is an (interest) television programme?

2/ …………………………

3, ( Hot ) the frying pan over a high heat and add cooking oil.

3/ …………………………

4, (Lemon) is my favourite drink. 4/ ………………………… V. Rewrite these sentences,using the given words in brackets - 1.5 pts 1. This painting is more expensive than that one (not as……….as) That painting……………………………………………………………………………. 2. Her taste in art is not the same as my taste ( different ) Her taste …………………………………………………………………………. 183

3. I don’t like the new live show on VTV6 now. My mother doesn’t like the new live show on VTV6 I …………………………………………………………………………. ……………………(either) 4. My friends enjoy the Children’s Painting Exhibition. I enjoy the Children’s Painting Exhibition. (too) My friends …………………………………………………………………………. ( the same as )

5.The picture in our room is not different from this picture.

FF IC IA L

The picture ………………………………………………………………………….

VI. Read the passage, then answer the questions below- 1pt Vietnamese people of have three meals a day – breakfast , lunch and dinner. People in the countryside

usually have rice with meat or fish and vegetables for breakfast but people in the cities often

have light breakfast with a bowl of Pho or instant noodles or sticky rice berofe going to work .

For lunch , they often have rice, meat , fish and vegetables. People in the countryside often have

lunch at home but people in the cities often have lunch at the canteens or at the food stalls.

Most people prepare their dinner at home . They eat many kinds of meat , seafood,fish, fresh vegetables and rice. Many people say dinner is the main and the best meal of the day.

Questions:

1, What do people in the countryside often have for breakfast?

……………………………………………………………………………………… 2, Do people in the cities often have big breakfast before going to work?

……………………………….....................................................................................

3, Where do people in the countryside often have lunch? ………………………………………………………………………………………

4.Is dinner the best meal of the day? ……………………………… VII. Listen to the tape. Then do the exercise True (T) or False(F)- 1.5 pts

KÈ

1/ Picasso is one of the greatest artists of the 20th Century 2/ Picasso was born in 1881 3/ Picasso received artistic training from his father at seven 4/ Picasso produced 1,885 works of art. 5/ Picasso died in Mougins.

ẠY

2B I. Choose the best answer(s)- 3pts 1. Classical is not as……………..as rock and roll A. excited B. exciting C. interested D. interesting 2. Which of the following is sung in the film TiTanic A. Que sera B. My heart will go on C. yesterday once more D. Happy new year 3.Dong Ho paitings are made in Dong Ho village, …..province A. Bac Ninh B. Quang Ninh C. Quang Binh D. Thanh Hoa 4. I never watch horror films and my sister doesn’t ____. A.either B. too C. so D. also 5. Fin the words in the text which mean: special or dirrerent 184

………… ………… ………… ………… …………

11, A. traditional

B . essential

C. audition

* Which word has different stress pattern? 12,.A. discussion B. tradition C. atmosphere

FF IC IA L

A. unique B. unusual C. strange D. well - done 6.The music festival this year is as good ……it was last year. A. or B. so C. as D. also 7. Mozart was one of the most famous……….of classical music A. actors B. Composers C. artists D. makers 8. I don’t sing as………..as my sister. She is the best singer in her class A. beautifully B. beautiful C. good D. badly 9. Nam is interested in drawing and I am……… A.either B. too C. neither D. also * Odd one out: B. composer C. leisure D. version 10, A. usually

D. picture

D. decision

2, Don’t make noise. The baby (sleep) …………. next door.

II. Give the correct form of the verbs.- 1pt 1, I (be) ……….. to Ha Long several times.

1/ ……………………… 2/ ………………………

3/ ………………………

4, Hoa enjoys (play) ………………the piano..

4/ ………………………

3, I hope Julie ........................................ (pass) the exam

1/ ………………………

2, How many rice do you eat every day?

2/ ………………………

III. Correct mistakes. 1pt 1, He don’t have a holiday in December next year..

3, Does her brother drink some lemon juice in the mornings/?

4, Nam has ever been to America, and his parents have either.

IV. Give the correct word form. 1pt 1, Bui Xuan Phai is my favourite (art).

3/ ……………………… 4/ ……………………… 1/ ………………………

2, Pop music is not as (excite) as rock and roll?

2/ ………………………

3, ( Hot ) the food for five minutes.

3/ ………………………

4, (Fruit) is my favourite drink.

4/ ………………………

ẠY

KÈ

V. Rewrite these sentences- 1.5 pts 1.The painting is bigger than the photograph.( not as……as) The photograph…………………………………………………………………………. 2.This picture is the same as the picture in our room. ( not different from) …………………………………………………………………………. 3. He can’t play the piano. His sister can’t play the piano. He …………………………………………………………………………. ……………………(either) 4. Lan hates listening to classical music. I hate listening to classical music. (too) Lan …………………………………………………………………………. ( not the same as)

5.Paintings are different from drawings.

Paintings …………………………………………………………………………. VI. Read the passage, then answer the questions below- 1pt Vietnamese people of have three meals a day – breakfast , lunch and dinner. People in the countryside usually have rice with meat or fish and vegetables for breakfast but people in 185

the cities often have light breakfast with a bowl of Pho or instant noodles or sticky rice berofe going to work . For lunch , they often have rice, meat , fish and vegetables. People in the countryside often have lunch at home but people in the cities often have lunch at the canteens or at the food stalls. Most people prepare their dinner at home . They eat many kinds of meat, seafood,fish, fresh vegetables and rice. Many people say dinner is the main and the best meal

FF IC IA L

of the day. Questions: 1.What do people in the cities usually have for breakfast?

………………………………………..................................................................................... 2,Do people in the country often have rice with meat andvegetables for breakfast?

……………………………….................................................................................................. 3.Where do people in the cities often have lunch?

………………………………………………………………………………....................... 4. Do most people prepare their dinner at home? ………………………………………………………………………………......................... VII. Listen to the tape. Then do the exercise True (T) or False(F)- 1.5 pts 1/ Picasso is one of the greatest artists of the 19th Century ………… 2/ Picasso was born in 1891 ………… 3/ Picasso received artistic training from his father at thirteen ………… 4/ Picasso produced 50,000 works of art. ………… 5/ Picasso died in Malaga.

4. Practice and consolidation: - T. collects the test papers and remarks the lesson 5. Subsequent activities: - Prepare the next lesson: UNIT 6: GETTING STARTED

____________________________________________________________________________

Attendance

ẠY

KÈ

Preparation day: 12/ 11/ 2016 Class Teaching day 7E

186

Absence

THE SECOND SEMESTER WEEK 20 + 21: Pre: 09/ 01/ 2019 Period 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61: TOPIC: TRAFFIC

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives After the topic, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary: Get the lexical items related to the topic “Traffic”; Get some new words relating to distance and means of transport; Know the meaning of some road signs and some traffic rules/laws; Talk about obeying traffic rules/laws, and how to use the road safely; Make notes and write a paragraph about some traffic problems in big cities. - Pronunciation:pronounce sounds /e/ and /ei/ correctly in isolation and in context. - Grammar: The ways to use “used to” 2. Skills: - Listening: Listen to get information about traffic problems in big cities. - Speaking: Talking about obeying traffic rules/laws, and how to use the road safely - Writing: writing a paragraph about some traffic problems in a city/ an area - Reading: reading for specific informationabout traffic rules/laws. 3. Attitude: - To help Ss willingly take part in the lesson, actively do the tasks, confidently perform or show their answers and give their friends comments or remarks honestly. - Ss are more aware of traffic. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about means of transport, road signs, traffic rules and traffic problems. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about traffic. Have civic duty to reduce traffic problems. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - Visual aids - Repetition - Substitution - Questions and answers - Individual work - Pairwork - Group work - Brainstorming III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: - Materials: + Textbook, workbook, visual aids. + Pictures/road signs(Page 6, 7, 8 , 9, 10, 11, 13, 15/ textbook) - Equipment: Cassette player, CD English 7 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Warm- up: * Class organization. Lesson Teaching Attendance 187

date 7A …/01/2019 …/ 37

…/ 33

7B …/ 35

…/01/2019 …/ 37

…/ 33

…/ 35

…/01/2019 …/ 37

…/ 33

…/ 35

…/01/2019 …/ 37

…/ 33

…/ 35

…/01/2019 …/ 37

…/ 33

…/ 35

…/01/2019 …/ 37

…/ 33

…/01/2019 …/ 37

…/ 33

FF IC IA L

…/ 35 …/ 35

*Chatting - T introduces the topic “Traffic” by asking Ss some questions How/ By what means do you go to school every day? On foot? By bicycle? By bus? On your parents’ motorbike… What means of transport is faster? What mean is safer? What means do you like most? Why? What can you see on the way to school every day? - ThenT introduces the topic to Ss and leadsthem to the new lesson. 2. Form new knowledge: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

I- GETTING STARTED

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Presentation *Set the scene: 1. Listen and read 1. Transferring the learning task. - Ask Ss to look at the picture on page 6 and Questions 1-Who are Mai and Oanh? answer the questions: 2- What might they talk 2. Doing the task. - Ss work in groups and try to guess the answers. about? - T gives Ss help if necessary. Suggested answers: 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Call some Ss to give answers aloud. 1-They are students - Quickly write Ss’ answers on the board. 2- They might talk about means of transport they use 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T remarks then plays the tape for Ss listening the and the distance dialogue on p6. Activity 2: Practice

1. Transferring the learning task. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue between Mai and Oanh then do the tasks - Help Ss know the ways to do the tasks 2. Doing the task.

a. Choose the correct answer. Key: 1. B 2. A 3. B 4. C b. Answer the following questions. Key: 1. She played with her brother/ stayed at 188

FF IC IA L

home. 2. It’s about 2 kilometers. 3. She usually goes to school with her dad. 4. Because sometimes there are traffic jams 5. She goes to school by bike. c. Can you find the following expressions in the conversation? Do you know what they mean? Key: 1. to have someone’s attention. 2. when you strongly support or agree with something. 3. very excited and keen to do something. d. Work in pairs. Make short role-plays with the expressions above. Then practice them. Example: - How about cycling to school with me tomorrow? - Great idea! 2. Means of transport. Write the words using the first letter given. Key: 1. bike/ bicycle2. bus 3. plane4. boat 5. ship6. train 7. motorbike8. car 3. Match a verb on the left with a means of transport on the right. There may be more than one correct answer. Key: 1. ride a bike 2. drive a car 3. fly by plane 4. sail on/ in a boat 5. get on/ get off a bus/ a train/ a bike/ a motorbike.

ẠY

KÈ

Part 1a- (P7) - Ss read the conversation and do task a): Choose the correct answers. - Ss do the task in groups. Part 1b- (P7) - Ss answer the questions in task b) individually. Part 1c- (P7) - Ss work individually to do task c) and check the meaning of the expressions. Part 1d- (P7) - Ss work in pairs to do task d) Part 2- (P7) - Ss look at the 10 pictures and tell T what they can see in each picture, then write the correct words/phrases under the pictures - Ss work individually then compare their answers with a classmate. Part 3- (P7) - Ss match the verbs on the left withthe correct means of transport on the right and write out the phrases. - Ss work individually then compare their answers with a classmate. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Ask Ss to give the answers and correct. - Ss give the answers for the tasks after finishing each. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to remark then T gives feedback

Activity 3: Production

Part 4- (P7) 1. Transferring the learning task. - Guide Ss how to do the task then ask Ss to work in groups of four - Asks Ss to find someone in their class who never does these things. 2. Doing the task. - Ss read the sentences given in task 3 then 189

4. Find someone in your class who never. 1. walks to school 2. goes to school by bus 3. cycles for exercise 4. takes a train 5. sails in/on a boat 6. flies by plane

*Free-practice: - Help Ss to differentiate between a portrait and a painting , a museum and an art gallery

Example exchange: - How often do you walk to school/ go to school by bus…? - Do you (often walk to school/ go to school by bus?

II-A CLOSER LOOK 1

FF IC IA L

complete them with the words from 2. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - After 4 minutes Ss go to the board to write the answers. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - The class gives comments, and T gives correction.

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary

I- Vocabulary

ROAD SIGNS

1. Have you seen these road signs? Talk about the meaning of the signs below with a partner. 2. Label the signs in 1 with the words/ phrases below. Key: 1. trafic lights. 2. no parking 3. no right turn 4. hospital ahead 5. parking 6. cycle lane 7. school ahead 8. no cycling Look out! - A sign within a red triangle will warn you of something. - Signs with red circle are mostly prohibitive- that means you can’t do something. - Signs in blue are usually to give information.

ẠY

KÈ

1. Transferring the learning task. - Help Ss know the ways to do the task 1, 2 - Ask Ss to read the requirement of the task to understand and do the task in pairs or individually. 2. Doing the task. Part 1- P8. - Ss work in pairs to talk about the meaning of the road signs, then say out their answers. Part 2- P8 - Ss work individually to label the road signs in 1 with the words/ phrases. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Check and write the correct answers. - Elicit the answers from Ss. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to remark then T gives feedback. - T helps Ss to understands the kinds of road signs. Look out: There are usually three kinds of signs: informative, prohibitive, and warning. Part 3- P8 1.Transfering the learning task: - Let Ss work in pairs and talk about the traffic signs they see on the way to school. 2. Doing the task: - Ss work in pairs to talk about the traffic signs they see on the way to school. - Go around and give assistance if necessary. 190

3. Work in pairs. Discuss which of the signs you see on the way to school.

Example: A: On the way to school, I can see a “no left turn” sign.

B: On my way to school there is a hospital, so I can see a “hospital ahead” sign.

FF IC IA L

3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Call some pairs to practice aloud before class. - Some pairs practice talking aloud. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T checksSs’ answers and remarks the results of the learning task.

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation 1. Transferring the learning task. II- Pronunciation: /e/ and /ei/ - Help Ss know the ways to do the tasks 4. Listen and repeat. Pay attention to Part 4- P9 sounds /e/ and /ei/. - First, T gives examples of the sounds /e/, - /e/: left, ahead, present, helicopter, /ei/. Let Ss practice the sounds together. centre, never, seatbelt Ask Ss to observe the T’s mouth and listen - /ei/: plane, way, station, train, to the teacher for these two sounds indicate, mistake, pavement, break. carefully. Play the recording and let Ss listen and repeat as many times as required. 5. Listen to these sentences carefully. - Correct their pronunciation. Single-underline the words with sound /e/, and double-underline the 2. Doing the task. words with sound /ei/. Part 5- P9 - Play the recording and Ss repeat, pay Key: attention to the sounds /e/ and /ei/. Help /e/ /ei/ them with their pronunciation. 1.ever break, way. - Play the recording twice. Ask them to do 2. very railway, station. the task individually. 3. 0 always, obey, safety. 4. left, when UK. Part 6- P9 5. next They, waiting, train. - Refer back to the page 8. Ask Ss to find all the words having the sounds /e/ and /ei/ 6. Find the words containing sound /e/ and the words containing sound in section 1-3. - Correct their mistakes. Let them practice /ei/ in 1-3 on page 8. Then read a loud. saying these words together. Key: 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Ask Ss to give the answers and correct /ei/ /e/ - Elicit the answers from Ss. ahead phrases 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the red lane, way task. left information - Ask others to remark then T gives feedback.

III- A CLOSER LOOK 2

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation 1. Transferring the learning task. I Grammar: 191

FF IC IA L

1. “It” indicating distance - We can use “It” in the position of the subject to indicate distance Example: - It is about 300 meters from my house to the bus stop. 2. Used to - We use “used to” to describe an action or a state that happened regularly in the past but does not happen at present. Example: There used to be many trees on the street, but now there are only shops. Form: (+) S + used to + V (-) S + didn’t use to + V (?) Did + S + use to Watch out: In questions and negative sentences, the final “d” in used is dropped.

- T writes the examples on the board and asks Ss to read them to find out the the ways to use “It” in distance and “used to”. 2. Doing the task. - Ss read the examples in pairs and pay attention to “It” and “used to”. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Elicit the form from Ss. - Ss have a closer look at the Grammar boxes p9, 10. - Give more examples with “It” in distance and “used to” 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T explains to Ss how to use “it”, and “used to”. - Ss listen and take note. - Have Ss make examples.

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 3: Practice Part 1- P9 II. Practice 1.Transfering the learning task: 1. Write sentences with it. Use these - Let Ss work by themselves and write down cues. the sentences. Key: 1. It is about 700 meters from my 2. Doing the task: - Ss do the task individually. house to Youth Club - T observes and helps when and where 2. It is about 5 km from my home necessary. village to the nearest town. 3. It is about 120 km from Ho Chi 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Ask some Ss to read their sentences. Minh to Vung Tau. - Some Ss read their sentences aloud. 4. It is about 384,400 km from the Earth to the Moon. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the 5. It is not very far from HaNoi to task: NoiBaiAirport. - T corrects Ss’ mistakes and remarks the results of the learning task. 2. Work in pairs. Ask and answer questions about distances in your 1. Transferring the learning task. - T gives the aims of each task and explains neighbourhood. Example: how to do task 3, 4. A: How far is it from your house to 2. Doing the task. school? - Ss do the tasks individually, in pairs and B: It’s about a kilometre. groups. 3. Complete the sentences with used Part 2- P9 - Ss ask and answer about distances in their to or use to and the verbs in the box neighborhood, following the example. below. 192

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- Encourage them to talk as much as Key: possible. 1. used to ride - T goes around and helps Ss correct their 2. used to be pronunciation and intonation. 3. used to go 4. Did…use to play Part 3- P10 5. did…..not use to feel - Ss work independently, writing down the answers. Then let them work in groups to 4. Rewrite the sentences using used check and say out the sentences. T goes to. round giving help when and where Key: 1. My mum used to live in a small necessary. village when she was a girl. Part 4- P10 - Let Ss work individually to rewrite the 2. There did not use to be (as) many sentences in their notebooks. vehicles on the road. While Ss do their task, T goes round to 3. We used to cycle to school two years ago. monitor the whole class. 4. Now there are more traffic 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. accidents that there used to be. - Some Ss give the answers for the tasks 5. My uncle used to be a bus driver orally and write on the board. some year ago, but now he has a 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the desk job. task. - Ask others to remark then T gives feedback. Activity 4: Production Part 6- (P52) III. Further practice 1. Transferring the learning task. 5. Work in groups. Did you use to - T gives the aims of the task and explains do those things? Ask and answer. how to do it. Example: - Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions in A: Did you use to play marbles? groups B: Yes, I did ………… 2. Doing the task. - Ss work in groups. They take turns to ask and answer questions. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Ask some more Ss to report their results to the class. - Some Ss report to the class. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. -T remarks and corrects if any. IV- COMMUNICATION

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation * Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/ I. Vocabulary: situation - roof (n): - T: writes new words on the board. - illegal (adj) : 193

nóc, mái nhà bất hợp pháp, trái luật

- Ss: listen and repeat in individual first - laws (n): luật, phép tắc - to reverse (n): đảo, nghịch, lùi xe then the whole class. - right-handed (adj) thuận tay phải - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. * Checking: rub out and remember Activity 2: Practice

FF IC IA L

II-Practice: 1. Look at the flags of some countries. Give the names of these countries. Key: 1. The UK 2. Australia 3. India 4. Thailand 5. Malaysia

Part 1- P11: 1.Transfering the learning task: - Introduce the rules of keeping to the left-hand side of the road. - Have Ss work in groups to name the country which each flag belong to. Check the answers together. 2. Doing the task: - Ss work in groups and give the names of the five countries. - T observes and helps when and where necessary. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Ask some Ss to give their answers. - Some Ss the answers aloud. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - Teacher monitors and gets feedback

ẠY

KÈ

1. Transferring the learning task. - T gives the aims of each task and explains how to do task 2, 3. 2. Doing the task. - Ss do the tasks individually, in pairs and groups. Part 2- P11: - Explain to Ss that the countries in 1 drive on the left-hand side of the road. Listen the recording to find out why this happened, and complete the reasons in 2. - T plays the recording. Ss listen carefully and check their answer to 1. Then T gives the correct answers - Play the recording again. Let Ss complete the table by themselves, then share their answer with a partner. Part 3- P11: ? Run through all the strange driving laws in 3 P11 ? Which one do you think seems most unreasonable? ? Work in pairs, discussing to find one false 194

2. Now listen and check your answers. Complete the blanks. Share your answer with a partner. Key: Reasons why this happened: 1. Some countries used the same system as UK. 2. Many people are righthanded (so on the left-hand side, it is easier for them to use a sword or something when they are on horseback – in the past) 3. Look at the strange driving laws below. Five of them are true, but one is false. In pairs, can you find the false driving law? Key: - “In France, you can only reverse your car on Sundays”. This

Activity 3: Production

III. Further practice: 4. Now, work in groups. Discuss the laws and put them in order from the strangest (No1) to the least strange (No5) The groups may have different results

ẠY

KÈ

1. Transferring the learning task. - T gives the aims of the task and explains how to do it. ? Work in groups and discuss the laws in B and put them in order from the strangest (No1) to the least strange (No5) ? Can you explain why? 2. Doing the task. - Ss do the task in groups to put them in order from the strangest (No1) to the least strange (No5) 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Have some groups report their results and explanation. - Some Ss from the groups report before class. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to comment then T remarks and corrects Ss’ mistakes if any. Find strange rules in Viet Nam ? Work in groups and find if there are any strange traffic rules in Viet Nam - Teacher monitors and gets feedback

FF IC IA L

driving law. sentence is false! - Ss work in pairs, discussing which one they think is the false driving law. - Teacher observes and helps when and where necessary. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Some Ss give the answers for the tasks orally and write on the board. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to remark then T gives feedback.

V- skills 1

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Reading 1. Transferring the learning task. I. Reading: - Ask Ss to look at picture in 1 carefully to 1. Look at the picture. Can you see find out the dangerous things then match the anything that is dangerous? words in 2 to make common expressions. Example: After that answer the question “When you - It is dangerous to ride a motorbike are a road user, what should you Not do?” on the pavement. 2. Doing the task. 195

FF IC IA L

2. Now match these words to make common expressions. Key: 1. g 5. a 2. d 6. h 3. b 7. f 4. c 8. e Things we can see in the picture: road users, means of transport. *New words: - zebra crossing (n):

(n): (n):

(n): (v): (n): (n):

- speed limit - driving licence - pedestrian - fasten - handle bar - passenger

vạch qua đường tốc độ giới hạn giấy phép lái xe, bằng lái khách bộ hành buộc, thắt tay lái hành khách

Part 1- P12: - T tells Ss to look at the picture and say why it is dangerous. - Ss look at the pictures and give their own ideas. Part 2- P12: - Have Ss work in pairs to do the matching. - Ss work in pairs to do the matching. - Then T asks Ss which they can see in the picture in 1. ? Which can you see in the picture in 1? Part 3- P12: - Ss work in group and answer the question: When you are a road user, what should you NOT do? - Ask them to make a list to compare with other groups - Ss make a list to compare with other groups. - T may give some cues: not pay attention, not look around, go in red light,…. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Ask for Ss’ answers. - Some Ss give the answers for the tasks orally and write on the board. - Ask Ss give some examples with the words or phrases. - Call some pairs ask and answer the questions 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to remark then T checks. - Give feedback. Part 4- P12 1. Transferring the learning task. - Tell Ss to read the text then answer the questions. Set a strict time limit to ensure Ss - T may ask questions to see if Ss understand the text. 2. Doing the task. - Ss may read the passage more than one time. - T explain the new words and clarify anything difficult. - Ss work with a partner to answer the questions.

ẠY

KÈ

3. Answer the following question. Key: - not pay attention - not look around - not go in red light,..

196

4. Read the following text and answer the questions below. Key: 1. We should cross the street at the zebra crossing. 2. He/ She must always fasten the seatbelt. 3. No, he/ she shouldn’t. Because it is dangerous.(He/ She may cause an accident.) 4. We must give a signal. 5. Because the other road users can see them clearly and avoid crashing into them.

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- Teacher observes and helps when and where necessary. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Ask for Ss’ answers. - Some pairs of Ss practice asking and answering the answers. - Others remark 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Tremarks and corrects Ss’ mistakes if any. - Give feedback. Activity 2: Speaking Part 5- P12 II. Speaking: 1. Transferring the learning task. 5. Class survey. Ask your - Have Ss do the class survey. classmates the question. ? Ask your classmates the question How do you go to school every "How do you go to school every day? day? ? Make a list of the means of transport that is + Make a list of the means of used the most, and used the least. transport that is used the most, and use the least. 2. Doing the task. - Ss do the class survey in groups 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Get some Ss to report to the class. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. -Check the answers and feedback. 6. Read the following sentences. Part 6- P12: In groups, discuss who is using the road safely, and who is acting 1.Transfering the learning task: - Ask Ss to work in groups to discuss who is dangerously. Give reasons. using the road safely, and who is acting 1. safely 2. dangerously ( because he is dangerously, give reasons. likely to have an accident) 2. Doing the task: 3. safely - Ss discuss in groups. 4. dangerously ( it is difficult for - Teacher monitors and gets feedback him to see the road properly, and 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: to ride) - Ask Ss to present their opinions. - Some Ss from the groups present their ideas 5. dangerously ( a car or motorbike may crash into him) aloud before class. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: 6. dangerously (She may have an accident if something happens - T corrects Ss’ mistakes and remarks the unexpectedly.) results of the learning task.

VI- skills 2 T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Listening 197

I. New words - suffer (from) - rush hour - poor-quality - respect - bumpy - congestion

(v): (n): (a): (v): (a): (n):

chịu, bị giờ cao điểm chất lượng kém tôn trọng, kính trọng gập ghềnh sự hỗn độn tắc nghẽn

FF IC IA L

+) Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/ examples/ synonym - T: writes new words on the board. - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first then the whole class. - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. +) Checking: rub out and remember.

ẠY

KÈ

1. Transferring the learning task. - T gives the aims of each task and II. Listening explains how to do task 1, 2, 3. TRAFFIC PROBLEMS IN BIG CITIES 2. Doing the task. - Ss do the tasks individually, in pairs 1. Work in groups. Where do you think this picture was taken? Why is it special? and groups. Suggested ideas: Part 1- P13: - In a big city….. - Ss work in groups. They study the picture and answer the two questions. - too crowded and long traffic jams Where do you think this picture was 2. Look at the following headline and taken? check your answers. Why is it special? Part 2- P13: RECORD BREAKING JAM! - Tell Ss to look at the newspaper Key: headline and check their answers. - In Brazil - Ss look at the headline and check - long traffic jam (very long line of their answers. vehicles). Part 3- P13: - Ask Ss to read the questions and 3. Now listen to the passage and choose guess the answers. Then play the the correct answer. recording one or two times. - Ask Ss to listen carefully and circle Key: the correct answers. 2. C 3. A 4. C - Ss read the questions and guess then 1. B listen and correct their answers 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Some Ss give the answers for the tasks orally and write on the board 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to remark then T checks. - Give feedback. Activity 2: Writing Part 4- P13: III. Writing ? What you think the traffic problems in big cities 4. Tick the traffic problems in in Viet Nam are. big cities in Viet Nam. - Have Ss look at the pictures, read the phrases Suggested answers: 198

Picture: 1,2,3,4,6

FF IC IA L

Write these above in full sentences Suggested writing: - There are too many vehicles (on the road). - Many roads are narrow and bumpy - There are traffic accidents every day. - Many young children ride their bikes dangerously.

5. Write a paragraph about the traffic problems where you live, or in a town, or a city you know well. Use the cues above, and the following outline. Introduction: Problem1: Problem 2: Problem 3: Conclusion: (Reason or advice/ suggestion)

ẠY

KÈ

and tick the traffic problems. - Ss do the task in pairs. - Some Ss give out their own answers. - T gives remark and feedback. 1.Transfering the learning task: - Ask Ss to write full sentences. 2. Doing the task: - Ss work in pairs and write the full sentences. - Teacher monitors and gets feedback 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Call on some students to write them on the board. - Some Ss write the answers on the board - Ask other Ss to give comments. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T remarks then gives the correct answers. Part 5- P13: 1. Transferring the learning task. - T gives the aims of the task and asks Ss to study the sentences they have written in 4. Then practice writing the paragraphindividually. - Tell Ss to use proper connectors: first/ firstly, second/ secondly… and pay attention to spelling punctuation. 2. Doing the task. - Ss study the sentences they have written in 4. Then practice writing the paragraphindividually. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Have some students read their writing - Others remark 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Teacher monitors and gives help if necessary.

VII- Looking back & project

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Vocabulary Part 1- (P13) I. Vocabulary 1. Transferring the learning task. 1. What do these signs mean? ? Study the picture in 1-P13 Write the meaning below each ? Write the meaning below each sign sign. Then put them into the individually. correct box. ? Work in groups and put the signs into correct Key: boxes. 1. Traffic lights 2. School ahead 3. Hospital ahead 4. Cycle lane 2. Doing the task. - Ss work in groups and put the signs into 5. Parking 6. No parking 199

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

correct boxes 7. Left turn only 8. No cycling 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Have some Ss give their own answers while Prohibition signs: 6,8 others remark. Warning signs:1,2,7 Information signs:3,4,5 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to remark then T checks. - Give feedback. Part 2- (P13) 1. Transferring the learning task. 2. Write the names of means of - Ask Ss to write the names of means of transport in the word web below. transport in the word web then draw lines Then draw lines joining the joining the correct verbs to the transport. correct verbs to the transport. - Tells Ss to do the task in pairs then compare their answers with others. Suggestion answers: bicycle, motorbike, car, bus, taxi, 2. Doing the task. - Ss do the task in pairs then compare their train, plane, boat, ship - Ride a bicycle/ a motorbike answers with others - Drive a car 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Ask 3 Ss to go to the board, each writes a - Fly by a plane word web on the board. - Sail on/in a boat - Elicit other words from Ss to add to the webs - Get on/ get off a bus/ a train/ a then match the verbs given with the transport. bike/ a motorbike... 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Teacher monitors and gets feedback Activity 2: Grammar II. Grammar - Ask Ss to revise the ways to use “Used to” *Used to - Write the form of "used to" in (+/ -/ ?) - We use "used to" to describe an action or a state that happened sentences. - Ss give the answer then listen and copy regularly in the past but does not happen at present. down. (+)S + used to + V-inf.......... Part 3- P14: (-) S + didn't use to + V-inf........... 1.Transfering the learning task: - Ask Ss to change the sentences according to (?) Did + S + use to + V-inf.....? the prompts in brackets. 3. Change the sentences according to the prompts in 2. Doing the task: - Ss work in pairs and write their answers in brackets. their notebooks. Key: - Teacher monitors and gets feedback 1. Did you use to go to school on foot? 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Have some students write the answers on the 2. Mr. Van didn’t use to ride his board. motorbike dangerously. - Some Ss write the answers on the board 3. Did the streets use to be cleaner - Ask other Ss to give comments. and more peaceful? 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: 4. I used to go out on Sundays. - T checks Ss’ answers then givesthe 5. They didn’t use go to on 200

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

corrections holiday together. Part 4- P14: 4. Write sentences using these 1.Transfering the learning task: cues. - Ask Ss to work individually first to write the Key: sentences. 1. It is over 100 km from my - Then have Ss work in pairs to swap their home-town to HCM city. sentences. 2. It is about 25 km to my grandparents’ house. 2. Doing the task: - Ss work individually first to write the 3. I used to ride a small bike in the sentences. Then they work in pairs to swap yard before my flat. their sentences. 4. There used to be a bus station in the city centre, but it was/ has 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Have some Ss write their sentences on the been moved to the suburbs. board. 5. Children must learn about road 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: safety before they are allowed to - T gives correction and calls some Ss to read ride a bike on the road. the sentences aloud. Activity 3: Communication 1. Transferring the learning task. III. Communication - T gives the aims of the task and explains how to do it. 5. Match the questions - Ask Ss to match the questions with the correct answers. 1-6 with the answers a2. Doing the task. f - Ss do the task individually then in pairs. Key: 1. b 2. a 3. e 4. d 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Some Ss give the answers for the tasks orally and write 5. f 6. c on the board 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to remark then T checks. - Give feedback. Activity 4: Production 1. Transferring the learning task. - T gives the aims of the task and explains how to do it. Finish! Now I can… - Ask Ss to complete the self-assessment. - Talk about road signs and means of transport. 2. Doing the task. - Ss do the task in groups. - Use it to talk about distance 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Some Ss give the answers for the tasks orally and write - Use used to talk about a on the board past habit - Write a paragraph 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Ask others to remark then T checks. about traffic problems. - Give feedback.

3. Practice: - Designed right after each activity 4. Application: - Talking about “Music and Arts”. 5. Knowledge widening: 201

- Applying knowledge to talk about “Dong Ho paintings” by doing project on p15. * PROJECT

Road signs display

FF IC IA L

1/ Ss work in groups. Give Ss about five minutes to think of some traffic signs to display around their school. 2/ Ss work independently. Encourage them to use imagination and make their own traffic signs with the materials available. Tell them to be creative. 3 / Let them talk about signsamong the group or class members. Example S1: This is speed limit 50’sign. It tells people not to drive more then 50km an hour. S2: Well, this is school ahead sign. It warns people about children crossing the road. 4/ Present their traffic signs in front of the class.

- T summarizes all the tasks done in the topic. - T reminds Ss to do further practice. - Do all the exercises in workbook.

Ngày 21 tháng 01 năm 2019

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÝ DUYỆT

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

KÈ

Pre: 22/ 01/ 2019 Te: ...../ 01/ 2019

Period 62: UNIT 8: FILMS. Lesson 1: Getting started

ẠY

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to extend and practise vocabulary related to the topic “Films”. Listen and read a conversation between Mai and Duong about films then use language to ask and answer about films. - Vocabulary: The lexical items related to the topic “Films” - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:Connectors: Although, despite/ in spite of, however, and nevertheless. 2. Skills: - Speaking: Interview each other and try to get the film. 202

FF IC IA L

- Listening: Listen to the conversations between Mai and Duong and get the main information. - Writing: Write some information about a film. - Reading: Read the conversation and complete the exercise. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to work hard, like watching films. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about films. - Ss love the subject and love films, know what kinds of film they should see. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 33 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Ask Ss to do exercise E1/ page 32- workbook. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Brainstorming: - Elicit any information Ss know about films by asking about types of film they know, the latest films they have seen, their favorite films and film stars - Use the pictures in textbook to introduce the new lesson. B. Presentation: MAIN CONTENTS

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Presentation I. New words: Show some kind of films. - horror film(n): phim kinh dị * Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/ - frightening(adj): khủng khiếp situation - comedy (n): hài kịch - T: writes new words on the board. - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first then - critic (n): nhà phê bình - thriller (n): phim ly kỳ, giật gân the whole class. - documentary (n): phim tài liệu - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. animation (n): phim hoạt hình *Checking: rub out and remember - plot (n): cốt truyện - review (v):ôn tập -stunt(n): trò nguy hiểm - to star: đóng vai chính Activity 2: Practice 203

II- Getting started 1. Listen and read

FF IC IA L

a. Read the conversation again and answer the questions. Key: 1. b 2. a 3.a 4. c 5. b

b. Find the questions in the conversation that ask about Coconut Crazy. Then listen, check and repeat the question. Key: a. What kind of film is it? b. Who does it star? c. What is it about? d. What do critics say about it?

- T uses the pictures in the textbook to set the scene and asks some questions: Where are Phong and his sister Mai? What are they talking about? - Ask Ss to listen and read the conversation. - Ask Ss to read the conversation aloud in pairs. Part 1a- P17: 1.Transfering the learning task: - Ask Ss to work individually to choose the correct answer to the questions. 2. Doing the task: - Ss do the task individually. - Teacher monitors and gets feedback 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Ask Ss to read aloud the answers. - Some Ss say aloud the answers. - Ask other Ss to give comments. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T confirms the correct answers Part 1b- P17: -Run through the phrases - Ask Ss to work in pairs to look at the conversation and find the questions. - Ss do the task in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read aloud and some Ss to write on the board. -Ask Ss to listen, check and repeat the questions.

ẠY

KÈ

Part 2- P17: - Run through the phrases and sentences - Ask Ss to work individually to match the types of films with their definitions. - Play the recording for Ss to check their answers then ask them to repeat. - Ss listen and check the answers individually. - Correct their pronunciation if necessary - Help Ss translate them into Vietnamese Part 3a- P17: - Have Ss work independently, filling in the blanks with information of the film they have seen recently. Remind them to use the words and phrases they have learnt in 2 and from the conversation in 1. - Ss work independently todo the task. - Call on some Ss to give the answers. - T remarks and gives feedback. Part 3b- P17: 204

2. Match the types of films with their definitions. Then listen, check and repeat. Key: 1. d 2. f 3. a 4. c 5. b 6. e 7. h 8.g

3a. Think of a film. Fill in the blank below. Type of film………………. Actors/ stars………………. The plot…………………… Reviews…………………… 3b. In pairs, interview each other and try to guess the

film. Example: A: What kind of film is it? B: It’s an action film A: Who does it star? B: It stars Daniel Craig. A: What is it about? B: It’s about a spy called 007. A: Is it Skyfall? B: Yes!

FF IC IA L

-Ask Ss to study the example. - T models with a good student. -Ask Ss to work in pairs. - Ss work in pairs to do the task. - Go around to help weak students - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Some pairs practice before class. - T remarks and corrects if any.

4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson 5. Homework: - Learn new words by heart. - Read the conversation again. - Do exercises: B1-B2- B3 (page 33, 34- workbook); Translate the conversation in Getting started into Vietnamese. - Prepare: UNIT 5:A closer look 1/ Page 50- textbook. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Period 63: UNIT 8: FILMS. Lesson 2: A closer look 1

KÈ

Pre: 22/ 01/ 2019 Te: ...../ 01/ 2019

ẠY

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the lexical items related to the topic “Films”. Know the meaning and how to use “-ed” and “-ing” adjectives. Pronounce correctly the “-ed” ending in verbs. - Vocabulary: The lexical items related to the topic “Films” - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the “ed” ending in verbs. - Grammar:Connectors: Although, despite/ in spite of, however, and nevertheless. 2. Skills: - Listening: Listen and repeat the words and sounds, underline the sounds /t/, /d/ and /id/ they hear. 205

FF IC IA L

- Writing: Complete the sentences using “-ed” and “-ing” adjectives; know some adjectives used to describe films. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to work hard and love films. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Knowing the adjectives to describe films - Ss love the subject and love films, know what kinds of film they should see. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: goes to the board to write new words - S2: Reads the conversation and translate from the beginning to …thank you (Nick) 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Guessing game: - Organize the game Guessing - Ask Ss to write the name of the film they like on a piece of paper and keep secret. - T calls one student to stand in front of the class and ask him/her to give some clues. Others ask “Yes- No questions” to ask and guess the name of the film. - Take turn to play the game - Introduce the new lesson B. Presentation: MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary

ẠY

KÈ

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

206

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I. Vocabulary - hilarious (adj): vui nhộn, hài hước * Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/ -gripping (adj): thú vị situation - scary (adj): sợ hãi - T: writes new words on the board. - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first - moving(adj): xúc động - violent (adj): có nhiều cảnh bạo lực then the whole class. - entertaining (adj): thú vị, làm hài - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. lòng *Checking: rub out and remember - disappointed (adj) : thất vọng - terrified (adj) : cảm thấy khiếp sợ Part 1- P18: 1. The following are adjectives which - Run through the adjectives that are often are often used to describe films. Can used to describe films. you add some more? - Ask Ss to work in pairs to add some Key: more. 1. hilarious 2. moving - Ask Ss to work independently to 3. boring 4. gripping complete the sentences 5. shocking 6. scary - Call on some Ss to write the answers on the 7. violent 8. entertaining board. - Confirm the correct answers *Remember * Remember: -ed and -ing -Ask Ss to study the Remember box. Draw adjectives Ss' attention to the difference in use and - We use -ed adjectives to describe meaning between -ed and -ing adjectives someone's feelings and -ing by analyzing the examples in the adjectives to describe something or Remember box. Then ask Ss to give people (that cause the feelings) examples. - Remind Ss that they should use a good dictionary to check their meaning and use 2. Complete the table with the -ed Part 2- P18: and -ing forms of the adjectives. 1.Transfering the learning task: Key: - Ask Ss to work individually to complete 1. interested the table. 2. embarrassing 2. Doing the task: 3. exciting - Ss do the task individually. 4. disappointed - Teacher monitors and gets feedback 5. exhausted 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: 6. surprising - Let Ss read aloud and some Ss write on 7. confused the board. 8. frightening - Some Ss say aloud the answers and others write the answers on the board. - Ask other Ss to give comments. - Translate each pair of adjectives to check Ss' understanding 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: 207

3. Choose the correct adjectives. Key: 1. moving 2. frightened 3. disappointed 4. amazed 5. terrified

FF IC IA L

4a. Work in pairs. Look at the questions below. Tell your partner how you felt, using –ed adjectives. Example: I felt terrified before my last Math test. 4b. Now use –ing adjectives to describe these things and experiences in your life. Example: The last film I saw was called Norwegian Wood. It was really moving.

- T remarks and confirms the correct answers Part 3- P18: - Ask Ss to do the exercise individually and check with the whole class. - When checking, ask Ss to refer to the Remember Box to make the meanings of the adjectives clearer to them Part 4a- P18: - Run through the questions - Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer. - Call on come pairs to practise. - Confirm the correct answers Part 4b- P18: - Run through the questions - Ask Ss to work in pairs to ask and answer. - Call on come pairs to practise. - Confirm the correct answers.

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation - Practise the sounds together /t/, /d/ and II. Pronunciation: /id/ together. sounds /t/, /d/ and /id/ Part 5- P18: 5. Listen and repeat the verbs. Pay -T models the sounds/t/, /d/, and /id/ in attention to the sounds /t/, /d/, and /id/ at the end of each verb. different words with the ending-ed. Key: - Play the recording and ask Ss to listen /t/ /d/ /id/ and repeat the words, pay attention to the sounds/t/, /d/, /id/ at the end of each word. watched waited played danced needed bored - Play the recording and ask Ss to put hated closed thewords in the correct columns they walked * Remember: listen. • /t/: after an unvoiced consonant(k,f,p, s, /ʃ/,/tʃ/ • /d/: after a voiced vowel or voiced consonant • /id/: after the sound /t/ and/d/ Part 6- P18: 6. Work in pairs. Ask and answer - Let Ss study the example, the pictures questions about the pictures. Then and cues. listen to the recording. - T models this activity with a good student. 208

-Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer. - Call some pairs to practise in front of the class. - Play the recording - Ask Ss to write the answers on the board - T confirms the correct answers.

FF IC IA L

Example: cry a lot/ laugh a lot A: He cried a lot, didn’t he? B: No, he didn’t. He laughed a lot

4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson: sounds /t/, /d/ and /id/ in isolation and in context; use the lexical items related to the topic “Films” and know the meaning and how to use –ed and –ing adjectives. 5. Homework: - Learn by heart the new words - Do exercises A1, A2, B1,2,3/ page 10, 11- workbook - Prepare UNIT 8: A CLOSER LOOK 2/ page 19, 20- textbook.

Ngày 28 tháng 01 năm 2019

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÝ DUYỆT

ẠY

KÈ

Trần Thị Thanh Trà --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WEEK 23: Pre: 28/ 01/ 2019 Te: ...../ 02/ 2019

Period 64: UNIT 8: FILMS. 209

Lesson 3: A closer look 2

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the lexical items related to the topic "Films". Understand and use: although, despite, in spite of to express contrast between two piece of information in the same sentence; However, nevertheless to express contrast between two sentences. - Vocabulary: The lexical items related to the topic “Films” - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:Connectors: Although, despite/ in spite of, however, and nevertheless. 2. Skills: + Writing: Use although, despite, in spite of, however, nevertheless to complete the exercises. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to work hard and love films. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Making up sentences with connectors:although, despite, in spite of, however, nevertheless. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: goes to the board to write new words - S2: does A2/ page 33- workbook 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Calling friends' names -Organize the gameto ask Ss to call aloud the adjectives to describe films * Possible answers: boring, hilarious, violent, scary, gripping.............. - Introduce the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary *Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/ situation I. Vocabulary - T: writes new words on the board. - to perform: biểu diển 210

- Ss: listen and repeat in individual first then the whole class. - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. - Ss copy the new words in their notebooks. *Checking: rub out and remember

- disaster (n): thảm họa - although/ despite/ in spite of: mặc dù - however/ nevertheless: tuy nhiên

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 2: Although, despite/ in spite of * Presentation II. Grammar 1. Although, despite/ and in spite of - Ask Ss to study the Grammar Box. Draw - We use although, despite/ in spite Ss’ attention to the meaning and use of of to express contrast between two although, despite, and in spite of by analysing the examples in the grammar Box. pieces of information in the same sentence. Then ask some more able Ss to give some - We use although before a clause more examples. and despite/ in spite of before a - Ask Ss to take note - Ss study the Grammar Box then listen and noun or a phrase. Example: take note +) Although he is so young, he performs excellently. +) Despite/ In spite of being so * Practice young, he performs excellently. Ex1- page 19: Ex1. Complete the sentences. Use 1.Transfering the learning task: although+ a clause from the box. -Explain how to do the exercise Key: - Ask Ss to do exercise 1 individually 1…..although few people came to - Let Ss work by themselves and complete see it the sentences. 2. Although they spent a lot of 2. Doing the task: money on the film - Observe and help when necessary. 3. Although the acting is excellent. - Ask Ss to compare their answers with 4. ….although it was a comedy their partners 5. …although it is set in modern 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: times. - Ask some Ss to write the sentences on the board 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T corrects the sentences with class then remarks. Ex2. Complete the sentences, using Ex 2- page 19: although, despite/ in spite of. -Explain how to do the exercise Sometimes, two answers are - Ask Ss to do exercise 2 individually possible. - Ask Ss to compare their answers with Key: their partners 1. Although -Ask some Ss to write the sentences on the 2. despite/ in spite of 3. although 211

board - T corrects the sentences with class

4. Despite/ In spite of 5. Although

FF IC IA L

Ex 3- page 20: - Explain how to do the exercise - Ask Ss to do exercise in pairs then read aloud the sentences - Ss work in pairs, rewrite the sentences -Ask some Ss to write the sentences on the board - T corrects the sentences with class

Ex3. Rewrite these sentences using the words in the brackets. Change other words in the sentence if necessary. Key: 1. I don’t think Stallone is a very good actor although he was very good in the Rocky films. 2. Although many European film directors have gone to Hollywood to make films, few have had as much success as Milos Forman. 3. Despite having to work the next day, they watched films on DVD all night. 4. Although he has performed excellently in many films, he has never won an Oscar for Best Actor.

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 3. However and nevertheless *Presentation 2. However and nevertheless. - Ask Ss to study the Grammar Box. Draw Ss’ attention to the meaning and - We also use however and nevertheless use of however and nevertheless by to express contrast between two analysing the instruction and examples sentences. We usually use a comma in the Grammar Box. after them. - Ask some more able Ss to give some Example: more examples. - He is so young. However/ Nevertheless, he performs excellently. *Practice Ex 4. Complete the sentences using Ex 4- page 20: although, despite/ in spite of, however, - Ask Ss to work individually or nevertheless. - Ss work independently to rewrite the Key: sentences in their notebooks. 1. However/ Nevertheless - Call on some Ss to read out their 2. Despite/ In spite of sentences. 3. However/ Nevertheless - Let other Ss give comments. 4. Although - T confirms the corrects sentences 5. Although Ex 5- page 20: Ex 5. Use your own ideas… - Have Ss to work individually Ss’ ideas - Ss do the task individually, using their own ideas to write sentences. Then work in pairs, comparing their sentences. 212

- Ask some Ss to write the sentences on the board and ask others give comments - T corrects and gives feedback.

FF IC IA L

4. Consolidation: -Ask Ss to make their own sentences, using: although, despite, in spite of, however, nevertheless. 5. Homework: - Learn by heart the form of comparatives and superlatives adjectives; must/ mustn’t - Do ex B4,5/ page 11, 12- workbook - Prepare UNIT 8: COMMUNICATION/ page 21- textbook ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pre: 29/ 01/ 2019 Te: ...../ 02/ 2019

Period 65: UNIT 8: FILMS. Lesson 4: Communication

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able todo a survey on favourite actors/ films … then report their results to those group members. - Vocabulary: The lexical items related to the topic “Films” - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:Connectors: Although, despite/ in spite of, however, and nevertheless. 2. Skills: + Listening: Listen to the conversation and complete the missing words. + Speaking: Ask and answer questions about film stars, the best film, action films and cartoons. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to work hard and enjoy films. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talk about favorite actor, the best film, action movie or cartoon. - Ss love the subject and love films, know what kinds of film they should see. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 213

MAIN CONTENTS

cứ tự nhiên (n): diễn viên nữ/ nam (v/n): điều tra (n): phim hoạt hình (n) có nhiều cảnh bạo lực (adj)

Activity 1: Presentation I. New words : *Teaching new vocabulary: - Teacher use different techniques - go ahead to teach vocab (situation, realia, - actress/ actor explanation) - survey - Follow the seven steps of - cartoon teaching vocab. *Checking vocab: Slap the board - violence violent

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

FF IC IA L

7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: Does B4- workbook page 11 - S2: Does B5- workbook page 12 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Chatting: - What kind of films you like to see? - Who are your favourite actors/ actresses? - Today, we are going to do an interview with your classmate about films. Please think of the questions you may ask your friends in your interview with them. - Introduce the new lesson B. Presentation:

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 2: Practice Ex 1- P21: II-Practice 1.Transfering the learning task: Ex 1. Listen to the conversation and - Use the pictures to introduce the situation fill in the blanks with the words you - Ask Ss to look at the dialogue between hear. Nick and Duong and guess the missing Key: words 1. survey - Ask Ss to listen to the recording and fill 2. actor in the blanks with the information. 3. Tom Cruise 4. actress 2. Doing the task: - Ss listen and fill the blanks. 5. Angelina Jolie 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Have some Ss to give the answers aloud - Some Ss give their own answers orally 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T checks and corrects Ss’ mistakes if any. Ex 2. Work in groups of six or eight. Ex 2- P21: - Run through all the sets of survey and the Each of students chooses one of the questions following sets of survey questions. - Guide Ss how to complete the table - Survey on favourite actors. - Survey on the best films. below 214

- Model with some good students - Survey on action films. - Ask Ss to work in groups of 6Ss to - Survey on cartoons. survey and take note A SURVEY ABOUT ……….…….. - Ss work in groups of six and do the Name Question 1 Question 2 survey. - Teacher observes and helps if necessary.

FF IC IA L

Activity 3: Production Ex 3- P21: III. Further practice: - Have Ss make notes of their survey Ex3. Make notes of your results. results, using the suggestions in the Key: Student’s book. - Most people I have surveyed…. - Ss make notes of their survey results in - About half of the people I have groups. surveyed - Have them practice reporting the results - Almost no one I have surveyed…. of their surveys in pairs.

Ex 4- P21: Ex 4. Join another group. Report your - Ask Ss to join another group, reporting results to those group members. the result of their survey to the new members. -Call on some Ss to report their result of their interviews before the whole class - Ask Ss to give comments for each report.

ẠY

KÈ

4. Consolidation: - Ask Ss to write down their results. 5. Homework: - Do exercises B6, 7 page 12, 13- workbook - Prepare: UNIT 8: SKILL 1/Page 22- textbook. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 29/ 01/ 2019 Te: ...../ 02/ 2019

Period 66: UNIT 8: FILMS. Lesson 5: Skills 1

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: 215

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to read a review of the film Titanic on a blog, then talk about a film (its plot, main character, cast…) - Vocabulary: The lexical items related to the topic “Films” - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:Connectors: Although, despite/ in spite of, however, and nevertheless. 2. Skills: + Speaking: Ask and answer questions about the films. + Reading: Read the text and complete the reading tasks. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to work hard and enjoy films. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talk about the film they would like/ wouldn’t like to see. - Ss love the subject and love films, know what kinds of film they should see. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Ask some questions about films. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Picture drill: - Ask Ss to look at the picture of the film Titanic. Ask them some questions. + Have you ever seen this film? + Do you know who actor and actress in the picture are? + Do you like him/her? Why/ Why not? - Introduce the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Reading *Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/ I. Vocabulary: situation/ antonym. - romantic(adj): lãng mạn - T: writes new words on the board. - direct (v): làm đạo diễn - Ss: listen and repeat in individual - voyage (n): chuyến đi bằng tàu thuỷ first then the whole class. - character (n): nhân vật - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. - social class: tầng lớp xã hội *Checking: rub out and remember. - incredible(adj): không thể tin được 216

- pirate: cướp biển - sci-fi (science fiction): phim khoa học viễn tưởng II. Reading: Ex1: Read Nick’s review of the film Titanic on his blog. Then find and underline the words from the box below. What do they mean? - sinking: (sự) chìm, sự đánh chìm - must-see: bộ phim hấp dẫn đáng xem - special effects: kỹ xảo đặc biệt, hiệu ứng đặc biệt - visuals: thị giác, nhìn

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Part 1- P22 - Run through the words in the box. -Ask Ss to read the passage, find out whether Nick likes the films or not thenfind the words given and their meaning. - Ss read the passage individually to find out whether Nick likes the films or not then Ss find out where the words sinking, must-see, special effects, and visuals are in the passage. - Get feedback Ex2: Read Nick’s blog again and answer Part 2- P22 the questions. Key: 1.Transfering the learning task: - Run through the questions. 1. It is a romantic film. - Have Ss work in pairs to ask and 2. It stars Leonardo DiCaprio and Kate answer the questions Winslet. - Ask them to compare with their 3. It is about the sinking of the ship Titanic partner on its first voyage. 4. The main characters are Jack Dawson 2. Doing the task: - Ss ask and answer the questions in and Rose DeWitt Bukater. Jack saves Rose pairs. from killing herself by jumping from the - Ss can compare with others before ship. Although they are from different practicing. social class and Rose is already engaged, the two fall in love. 3. Reporting the task result and 5. The ending of Titanic is very sad. discuss: - T call on some pairs to practise 6. They say it is a must-see in the 20th asking and answering while some Ss century. write the answers on the board 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T remarks and corrects if any. - Give feedback. Activity 2: Speaking Part 3- P22 III. Speaking - Have Ss read 3 posters then work Ex3: Look at the film posters below. Work in pairs to talk about the films they in pairs. Talk about the films you would/ would/ wouldn't like to see. wouldn’t like to see. - Ss read every film poster. Then Example: talk about the films they would/ A: Look at the second poster wouldn’t like to see in pairs. B: What's the name of the film? -T goes around to help weak Ss A: Big Ben Down, an action film - Call on some pairs to practise in B:Oh, I like action films 217

A: Me, too. They are really interesting B. Who does it star? ...................................

front of the class - Ask Ss to give comment Part 4- P23 -Ask Ss to study the example - Have them work in pairs to ask and answering - Call on some pairs to practise in front of the class

FF IC IA L

Ex4: Now, ask and answer questions about the films. Example: A: I want to see War of the Worlds. B: What kind of film is it? A: It’s a science fiction B: What is it about? A: It’s about…. Part 5- P23 Ex5: In groups, choose a student to play the - Ask Ss to work in groups. Each group chooses a student to be in the role of a character in any of the film above. Brainstorm questions you’d like to ask. hot seat, playing the role of a character in any of the films in the Then interview the student. Example questions: posters. The other members • Can you describe your new film in brainstorm the questions they three words? would like to ask. Then, they in • Did you enjoy making film? turns interview the student in the • Why should we watch this film? hot seat.

4. Consolidation: - Let Ss refer the words, phrases to talk about films 5. Homework: - Ask Ss to learn new words by heart. - Do exercise C1, 2, D1 (P 13,14- workbook). - Prepare: UNIT 8: Skills 2 Page 23- textbook.

Ngày 11 tháng 02 năm 2019

KÈ

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÝ DUYỆT

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

ẠY

WEEK 24: Pre: 11/ 02/ 2019 Te: ...../ 02/ 2019

Period 67: UNIT 8: FILMS. Lesson 6: Skills 2

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge:

218

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use lexical items related to films. Listen for specific information about someone's favorite film star then write a review of a film - Vocabulary: The lexical items related to the topic “Films” - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:Connectors: Although, despite/ in spite of, however, and nevertheless. 2. Skills: + Listening: Listen to the conversation between Nick and his father about Tom Hanks, a Hollywood film star and complete the exercises. + Writing: Write a review of their favorite film. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to work hard and love watching film. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Getting information about Tom Hanks and then writing a review film. - Ss love the subject and love films, know what kinds of film they should see. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: Does C1- workbook page 13 - S2: writes new words 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Chatting - Teacher asks Ss to tell about their favorite actors/ actresses ? Who is your favorite actor/actress? ? What does she/ he look like? ? What are his/ her successful films? ? What do critics say about him/her? - Introduce the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Listening *Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/ situation I. New words - T: writes new words on the board. - aspect(n): phương diện - SS: listen and repeat in individual first then the -effect(n): ảnh hưởng 219

-overall(adj) : toàn diện - recommend(v) : giới thiệu

FF IC IA L

II. Listening 1. Nick and his father are talking about Tom Hanks, a Hollywood film star. Listen to their conversation and correct the following statements. Key:

1. Tom Hanks is Nick’s father’s favorite film star. 2. Tom Hanks isn’t a handsome actor. 3. Tom Hanks has won two Oscars. 2. Listen again. Answer the questions below.

whole class. - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. *Checking: rub out and remember. Part 1- P23: -Introduce the situation of the dialogue - Have Ss look at 3 sentences in text book (part 1- page 23). -Have Ss listen to the recording and check their prediction - Have Ss compare the answers with their partners - Get feedback - Play the recording once to check - Ask 2 Ss to write the answers on the board - Confirm the correct answers

ẠY

KÈ

Part 2- P23: 1.Transfering the learning task: - Ask Ss to read the rubric and study the Key: questions carefully. 1. He has won the Oscar for - Play the recording again and have Ss answer Best Actor twice. the questions as they listen. 2. They say he is one of the 2. Doing the task: best actors in Hollywood. - Ss listen again and answer the questions in 3. He plays the role of a pairs. soldier in Saving Private - Ask Ss to share the answer with their partners Ryan. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: 4. Because it is one of the best - Call on some Ss to write the answers on the comedies in the 1990s. board - Play the recording again to check - Have Ss work in groups of 4 Ss to sum up about Tom Hanks 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T remarks and corrects if any. - Give feedback. Activity 2: Writing Part 3- P23: II. Writing - Have Ss to work individually to 3. Make notes about one of your make notes about one of their favorite favorite films. films - Name of the film, type of film, and - Remind Ss that they do not have to actors or director. write full sentences, they can use - The plot: What happens in the film? abbreviations. How is the film? ( gripping/ moving/ - Let Ss share their notes with their hilarious) What about the ending? partners - Other aspects of the film, the acting, the - Ask some Ss to read aloud their music, the special effects, the visuals, 220

FF IC IA L

Part 4- P23: - T reminds about the language necessary and information for writing - Run through the parts of the review Introduction ( paragraph 1) Body Paragraph 2 The plot: What happens in the film? How is the film?(gripping/ moving/ hilarious) what about the ending? Paragraph 3: Other aspects of the film: the acting, the music, the special effects, the visuals, etc... Conclusion (Paragraph 4) Critics’ reviews, your overall opinion (Why you recommend the film to everyone) - Ask Ss to work in groups of 4 Ss to write on posters then ask some groups to show their poster. Other gives comments.

etc… - Critics’ reviews, your overall opinion. 4. Write a review of your favorite film… Example I like watching films in my free time and one of my favourite films is Taken 2. It’s an action film but it is moving, too. It stars Liam Neesonand Maggie Grace. The film is about Bryan Mills. He works for CIA. One day, he and his family travel to Turkey. He doesn't know that some criminals want to take revenge his family. He fights the criminals and does his best to save his wife and daughter. The plot makes people so thrill and the acting is so wonderful. Critics say that it is a must-see, especially for people who like action film. I like this film because it combines an action film and moving film. Go and see it if you can.

notes to the whole class

KÈ

4. Consolidation: - Ask some Ss to read aloud their writing. Teacher and other students listen and give remarks. 5. Homework: - Do exercises: D2,3 - E1,2/ page 15, 16 - workbook. - Complete the writing on the notebook. - Prepare: UNIT 8:Looking back + project/ Page 24, 25- textbook. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ẠY

Pre: 12/ 02/ 2019 Te: ...../ 02/ 2019

Period 68: UNIT 8: FILMS. Lesson 7: Looking back & project

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to recycle the language from the previous lessons in Unit 8 and link it with unit topics. Consolidate and apply what they have learnt in Unit 8 through various activities and exercises. 221

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- Vocabulary: Revise the lexical items related to the topic “Films” - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:Connectors: Although, despite/ in spite of, however, and nevertheless. 2. Skills: + Speaking: Ask and answer about films. + Writing: Complete the sentences with connectors: although, despite, in spite of, however, and nevertheless; distinguish the uses of -ed/ -ing adjectives 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to work hard and love watching film. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about favorite film. - Ss love the subject and love films, know what kinds of film they should see. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test -Check Ss’ writing, give marks and remarks. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Game Ex 1- page 24: Think of an example of every type of film in the box - T explains the require for the class - T divides class into 2 teams. - Each team writes sentences on the board - The team with more and correct sentences is the winner Example: - Mr. Bean is a comedy - “Big Ben Down” is an action film ............................. B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Vocabulary Ex 2- P24: I. Vocabulary - Run through the sentences Ex 2: Read the sentences. What types - Ask Ss work individually then call out of films are people talking about? some Ss to read aloud their sentences Key: while some write sentences on the board 1. It’s a comedy. 222

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- Ss read the sentences carefully and 2. It’s a horror film decide which type of films the people are 3. It’s a documentary. talking about. 4. It’s a romantic comedy. - Call on some Ss to give the answers 5. It’s a Sci-fi film. aloud. - T confirms the correct answers Ex 3- P24: Ex 3: Fill in the blanks with -ed or - Ask Ss to work individually to do the -ing adjectives that are formed from task. the verbs in brackets. - Ss do the task independently. Key: - Ask some Ss to read their own answers 1. terrified 2. disappointing aloud. 3. annoying 4. satisfied - Check their answers. 5. shocking - T confirms the correct answers. Ex 4- P24: Ex 4: Complete the second sentences in each pair, using the word in 1.Transfering the learning task: - Ask Ss to work individually first to brackets.The meaning of both complete the second sentences then have sentences should be the same. Sswork in pairs to swap their sentences. Key: 2. Doing the task: 1. They were excited about the film. - Ss work individually first then compare 2. The film was boring so they left with partner. halfway through it. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: 3. We were moved at the ending of - Ask some Ss to read aloud their own the film. sentences. 4. You’ll be surprised at his new film. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the 5. Lots of people find the way he task: behaves/ his behavior confusing. - Teacher gives correction and calls on some Ss to read the sentences aloud. - Give feedback. Activity 2: Grammar II. Grammar Ex 5- P24: - Ask Ss to remind about connectors: Connectors: Although, Despite, In Although, Despite, In spite of spite of - Ask Ss to do the exercise individually Ex5: Match the first half in A with then share the answers with their partners the suitable half in B. before discussing - Ss work individually then in pairs. Key: - Ask Ss to read aloud full sentences and 1. d 2. e 3. a 4. b 5. c confirms the correct sentences. - Some Ss give their answers aloud. Activity 3: Communication Ex 6- P24: III. Communication - Ask Ss to work in pairs to number the lines Ex6: Number the lines of the of the dialogue. Then ask them to check their dialogue in the correct order. 223

answers with the whole class. - Call some Ss to read their answers, other give comments - T corrects - Ask Ss to practise the dialogue in pairs. After finishing, ask Ss to practice saying the dialogue with their partners.

FF IC IA L

Key: 1. E 2. I 3. A 4. D 5. F 6. B 7. G 8. C 9. H

Activity 4: Production 1. Look at the film poster. Think IV. Project about the following questions 1. Look at the film below. Think about - Ask Ss to work in groups to the following questions. discuss the questions - What is the purpose of a film poster? E.g: To give information of a film. 2. Choose one of your favourite films and design a poster for it - Ask Ss to work in groups to 2. Choose one of your favourite films and make posters design a poster for it. 3. Organise an exhibition of film poster in your class - Ask Ss to stick the posters on the 3. Then organise an exhibition of film wall and Ss go around to see and posters in your class make notes comments

KÈ

4. Consolidation: - Ask students to complete the self-assessment. - Identify any difficulties and weak are and provide further practice if need be. - Sum up the main content of the lesson 5. Homework: - Redo all the exercises above and do exercises in the workbook. - Prepare: Unit 9: Getting started- Page 26-27- textbook. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 13/ 02/ 2019 Te: ...../ 02/ 2019

ẠY

Period 69: UNIT 9: FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD. Lesson 1: Getting started

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the lexical items related to the topic “Festivals around the world".Understand the dialogue between Nick and his teacher - Vocabulary: The lexical items related to the topic “Festivals around the world” - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:Connectors: Although, despite/ in spite of, however, and nevertheless. 224

FF IC IA L

2. Skills: + Writing: Write the festivals to the appropriate pictures. + Listening: Listen to the conversation between Phong, Nick, Mai, Mi and their teacher about festivals. + Reading: Read the conversation and do some exercises. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to work hard and love festivals around the world. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about some festivals around the world. - Ss love the subject and love the festivals. Have the responsibility for community to protect our country’s Festivals. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test -Check Ss’ writing, give marks and remarks. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: * Brainstorming: Christmas Moon festival

KÈ

FESTIVALS

ẠY

- Write the word festival on the board. ? Give any words you know relating to the topic. - T may allow Ss to give Vietnamese word and ask other Ss in the class if they know the equivalent in English. - Write on the corner of the board a list of the words which Ss cannot translate and ask them to keep a record for later reference when the Unit finishes. - Let Ss open their books and start the lesson... B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS Activity 1: Presentation

225

FF IC IA L

Ex2: Write the festivals in the box under the pictures. Then listen and repeat. Key: 1. Water festival 2. Cannes Film Festival 3. Ghost Day 4. Tet 5. Rock in Rio6. Christmas 7. Halloween 8. Easter

Ex3: Match the festivals below with the reasons they are held. Key: Religious: Halloween, Ghost Day Music /Arts Rock in Rio, Cannes Film Festival Seasonal: Tet, Water Festival Religious: Christmas, Easter

Ex 2– P27: -Go through the words and pictures - Have Ss quickly match each word/with its picture. Then play the recording for Ss to check their answers, pausing after each phrase and asking them to repeat chorally and individually. -Correct their pronunciation Ex 3– P27: Ask Ss if they know the meaning of these words. Seasonal (a) relate to or happening a during a period in the year. Religious (a) connected with religion or with a particular religion. Superstitious (a) based on the belief that particular events happen in a way that cannot be explained by reason or science

I. Vocabulary: - fascinating (aj) hấp dẫn - amazing (aj) đáng ngạc nhiên - religious (aj) thuộc tôn giáo - firework (n) pháo hoa - make a camp (v) cắm trại -to expect: mong đợi - seasonal (adj): theo mùa

*Teaching new vocabulary: - Teacher elicits the words from students. - Follow the seven steps of teaching vocab. *Checking: Matching

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 2: Practice * Set the sence:Ss keep their books close. II-Practice: Write “The Festival Project” on the board 1. Listen and read. and ask the Ss to guess the content of the lesson. After Ss speak out their guess, let them open their books and read the conversation quickly to check their guesses. Ex 1a– P27: a. Answer the following questions. 1.Transfering the learning task: Key: -Run through all the questions 1. No, she didn’t because she said -Play the recording and ask Ss to listen and “Oh really?” to show her surprise. read 2. People light candles and display/ let -Ask Ss to work individually to answer the off fireworks. questions 3. It’s La Tomatina 4. Because to celebrate the festival 2. Doing the task: - Ss do the task individually first then in people go to the desert, make a camp, pairs. and have a party. -Have Ss share their answers 5. They should write up reports and 226

b. Tick (v) T (true) or F (false). Key: 1. T 2. T 3. F 4. T

Ex 1b– P27: - Ss read the conversation again to do this exercise. Ask for Ss' as well as the explanation for their choices. Write the correct answers on the board. - Let Ss open their book to check their answers - Get feedback.

FF IC IA L

hand them in to the teacher. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: -Call on some pairs to ask and answer the questions -Ask 3Ss to write the answers on the board 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - Confirm the correct answers

Activity 3: Production Ex 4– P27: III. Further practice: - Ss work with a classmate and Ex 4: Compare your answers with a compare their answers. Remind them partner. to follow the model conversation in the Example: book. A: I think Rock in Rio and the Cannes - T walks around to observe them Film Festival are music or arts working. festivals. - Ask some pairs to act out the B: I agree. conversation. Write their answers on A: Which do you think are seasonal the board. Confirm the correct answers. festival? B: I think Christmas and Easter. How Ask Ss if they know anything about the about you? festivals. T may share some A: I think Halloween and Ghost day. information with Ss. Ex 5: Can you add more festivals to the groups in 3?

ẠY

KÈ

Ex 5– P27: - Organize a competition game for this activity. Ss work in groups of 5 -6. In five minutes, Ss write down as manyfestivals for each group in 3 as possible. The group with the most festivals is the winner.

4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson: the lexical items related to the topic “Festivals around the world"; the dialogue between Nick and his teacher. 5. Homework: - Learn new words by heart. - Read the conversation again. -Translate the conversation in Getting started into Vietnamese. 227

- Prepare: UNIT 9:A closer look 1- textbook. Ngày 18 tháng 02 năm 2019

FF IC IA L

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÝ DUYỆT

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

KÈ

WEEK 25: Pre: 19/ 02/ 2019 Te: ...../ 02/ 2019

ẠY

Period 70: UNIT 9: FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD. Lesson 2: A closer look 1

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the lexical items related to the topic “Festivals around the world". Pronounce two-syllable words with correct stress in isolation and in context. - Vocabulary: The lexical items related to the topic “Festivals around the world” 228

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson and stress in two-syllable words. - Grammar:H/Wh-questions and adverbial phrases. 2. Skills: + Writing: Write the words with appropriate verbs, nouns and adjectives. + Listening: Listen and repeat the words with correct stress in isolation and in context 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to work hard and love festivals around the world. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about festival activities. - Ss love the subject and have the responsibility for community to protect our country’s Festivals. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: goes to the board to write new words - S2: Reads the conversation and answer some questions 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Chain game: Ex 2: In groups, choose a festival. Take turns to say the festival. Example: A: I am going to Rio Carnival to watch performers dance. B: I am going to Rio Carnival to watch performers dance, and musicians play samba music. … - Let Ss open their books and start the lesson... B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary *Teaching new vocabulary: I. Vocabulary - Teacher use different techniques to teach * New words vocab (situation, explanation, realia) celebratory (adj) mang tính kỷ - Follow the seven steps of teaching vocab. niệm *Checking vocab: Slap the board parade (n) cuộc diễu hành carnival (n) ngày hội 229

joyful (adj) vui mừng adopt (v) kế tục pumpkin (n) quả bí ngô Ex1a: Can you complete the table below with appropriate verbs, nouns and adjectives? Listen and check your answers. Key: 1. celebration2. festive 3. parade4. culture 5. performance Ex 1b: Now complete the following sentences with the words from the table. Key: 1. festival 2. celebrate 3. celebrations4. culture 5. parade 6. performers

FF IC IA L

Ex 1a- P28: - Ss work individually to complete the table and compare their answers with a partner. - T plays the recording for Ss to check their answers.

ẠY

KÈ

Ex 1b- P28: 1.Transfering the learning task: - Have them read all the sentences and guess the part of speech of the word to be filled in each blank. -Ask Ss to work individually to do the task. 2. Doing the task: - Ss do the task individually first then in pairs. -Have Ss share their answers 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: -Call on some Ss to give their own answers aloud 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T comments on and confirms the correct answers. Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation - Explain to them that a syllable is a II. Pronunciation: unit of pronunciation having one Stress in two syllable words vowel sound, with or without Look out! surrounding consonants, forming the In two-syllable words the mark' represents whole or a part of a word. Give some the stress syllable. examples of one-, two- and three- Most nouns and adjs have two syllables: syllable words. Stress falls on the first syllable. - Tell Ss to focus on two- syllable - Most verbs have two syllables: Stress words and their common stress falls on the second syllable. pattern. Exceptions: the sound /ə/, /i/,…. hardly - Have Ss give out some more twofalling on. syllable words. Ex3:Listen and repeat the words Ex 3- P28: Key: -Ask Ss to read the rules in the table. Stress on 1st syllable: gather, picture, Tell them that these are the most artist, common rules. Explain each rule and lovely, famous have Ss give some examples Stress on 2nd syllable: relax, enjoy, hotel, - Have Ss read out the words first. describe, rename. Then play the recording for them to 230

FF IC IA L

Ex4: Circle the word with a different stress pattern from the others. Then listen and check. Key: 1. balloon 2. complete 3. prepare 4. alone 5. tidy Ex 5: Read the following sentences and mark ' the stressed syllable in the underlined words. Key: 1. 'project 2. 'dancers 3. a'ttend 4. 'answer 5. 'music

listen and repeat the words. Play the recording as many times as necessary Ex 4- P28: - Play the recording for Ss to check their answers. - Confirm the correct answers. - Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the words. - Ss practise reading the words. Ex 5- P28: - Play the recording and stop after each underlined word for Ss to check their answers. Play the recording again for Ss to repeat each sentence. - Ss work in pair to practise the sentences. - Call some Ss read the sentences out loud.

4. Consolidation: - Retell the main content of the lesson: Use the lexical items related to the topic “Festivals around the world" and pronounce two-syllable words with correct stress in isolation and in context. 5. Homework: - Learn by heart the new words - Do exercises A1,2 P17 - workbook - Prepare UNIT 9: A CLOSER LOOK 2/ P.29- textbook ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

KÈ

Pre: 19/ 02/ 2019 Te: ...../ 02/ 2019

ẠY

Period 71: UNIT 9: FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD. Lesson 3: A closer look 2

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the lexical items related to the topic 'Festivals around the word'. Use adverbial phrases correctly and appropriately and make and answer H/Wh- question correctly - Vocabulary: The lexical items related to the topic “Festivals around the world” - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:H/Wh-questions and adverbial phrases. 2. Skills: 231

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

+ Speaking: Practice speaking with adverbial phrases. + Writing: Make and answer H/Wh question. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to work hard and love festivals around the world. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach.Expressing concern and giving advice. - Ss love the subject and have the responsibility for community to protect our country’s Festivals. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: goes to the board to write new words - S2: answers some questions 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Chatting: - T chats with Ss about festivals in the pictures. - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and think of the information they want to get about the festival. Suggested ideas: +) Where are these festivals celebrated?/ When? - Let Ss open their books and start the lesson... B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS Activity 1: Teaching adverbial phrases Part 1- P29: I. Grammar: adverbial phrases - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in part 1 Ex 1: Look at the pictures below. What and discuss the question given. information would you like to know - Ss work in groups and discuss. about this festival? - T shows the answers on the table on Look out! P29. An adverbial phrase gives extra - T explains and gives examples: information about the time, place, +Adverbial phrases made with nouns: manner, etc. of an action. Adverbial Eg: every year, every day, last year…. phrases are made with nouns, +Adverbial phrases made with prepositions or infinitives. They can be prepositions: used to answer different questions. Eg: in 2013, in a small town, with Type/ question: beautiful plants. When time 232

Part 2- P29 -Ask Ss to look at the webpage andcomplete the table about festival. Tell Ss that they are going to read information about the Cannes Film Festival and complete the table. - Ss do the task in pairs. - T collects Ss’ answers then gives feedback.

Ex 3: Now think about a festival you know in Viet Nam. Complete the table withinformation about that festival, then tell your partner about it.

Part 3- P29 - Ss work individually and think about a festival they know in Viet Nam then complete the table. - Then ask Ss to tell their partner about it in pairs. - T goes around and gives helps if any. - Have some Ss talk before class.

A film festival By film star, In a city in France May Every year In a very serious way To win the Palme d’Or

What? Who? Where? When? How often? How? Why?

FF IC IA L

Where place How often frequency Why reason How manner What thing Ex 2: Now look at the webpage. Complete the table about the festival. Key:

+Adverbial phrases made with toinfinitive: Eg: to enjoy the party, to have more friends.

What? Who? Where? When? How often? How? Why?

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 2: Review: H/Wh questions Part 4- P29 II. H/Wh questions. - Ss do this exercise individually, and then Ex 4: Join the questions to the compare their answers with a classmate. types of answers. - Check Ss' answers and confirm the correct Key: ones. who person Why reason Which whole sentence …… Part 5- P30 - Ss do this activity in pairs. Check Ss' answers Ex 5: Phuong is doing an and have them role play the conversation. interview for VTV. Can you - Ask some pairs to act out the conversation in match her questions with the front of the whole group. interviewee’s answers? Part 6- P30 1.Transfering the learning task: Ex 6: Now make questions for - Have them read all the sentences and guess the underlined parts. the part of speech of the word to be filled in Key: 233

FF IC IA L

1.Where did you buy this T- shirt? 2. How often do you go to the music festival? 3. Why did your friends save money? 4. When did you go to the Flower Festival in Da Lat?

Ex 7: Games. Example: A: Where is the festival held? B: In the USA and some other countries in the world. C: When do people celebrate it? …………

each blank. -Ask Ss to work individually to do the task. 2. Doing the task: - Ss do this exercise individually, thencompare their answers with a classmate. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Call on some Ss to write their questions on the board. - Other Ss give comments and T gives corrections. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: -T remarks and confirms the correct questions. Part 7- P30 - Ss work in groups. One student thinks of any festival he/she likes. Other Ss ask questions about the festival to find out what festival it is. Remember to use H/Wh-questions and adverbial phrases. - Call on some groups to practice aloud - T remarks then corrects Ss’ mistakes if any.

Pre: 20/ 02/ 2019 Te: ...../ 03/ 2019

4. Consolidation: - Ask Ss to retell the main content of the lesson. 5. Homework: - Do Ex B1,2,3, 4/ P18,19- workbook. - Prepare UNIT 9: COMMUNICATION- textbook -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

KÈ

Period 72: UNIT 9: FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD. Lesson 4: Communication

ẠY

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the lexical items related to the topic "festivals around the world". Ask and answer questions about festivals. - Vocabulary: The lexical items related to the topic “Festivals around the world”: thanksgiving, stuffing, feast, gravy, cranberry, turkey,… - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:H/Wh-questions and adverbial phrases. 2. Skills: + Listening: Listen to the tape and do exercise T or F 234

Christmas

Easter

Festivals

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

+ Speaking: Ask and answer questions about Thanksgiving and Hoi Mua, a harvest festival in Phu Yen. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to work hard and love festivals around the world. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach.Talking about a festival. - Ss love the subject and have the responsibility for community to protect our country’s Festivals. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: Does B2- workbook page 18 - S2: does B4- workbook page 19 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Brainstorming - Teacher elicits the topic from students. ? Brainstorm in groups to give the names of festivals - Teacher models ? Work in groups to add as many dishes as possible. ? Show your list that you have written. - Teacher monitors and gets feedback. - The group has the longest list wins the game

- Lead to the lesson... B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation * Pre- teach vocabulary: translation/ I. New words : situation/ antonym. - thanksgiving (n): lễ tạ ơn chúa - T: writes new words on the board. - stuffing (n): lông vũ, gối ôm 235

- Ss: listen and repeat in individual first - feast (n): bữa tiệc then the whole class. - gravy (n): nước sốt thịt - cranberry (n): quả man việt quất - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. *Checking: rub out and remember. - cornbread(n): bánh bột ngô - turkey(n): gà tây - to take naps: chợp mắt

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 2: Practice Part 1- P31: II-Practice 1.Transfering the learning task: 1. Look at the animal below. Discuss - Ask Ss to look at the animal and the following questions with a partner. discuss the questions given in pairs. a, What animal is it? 2. Doing the task: - Ss look at the picture and discuss the b, Why is it a special animal in some questions in pairs. countries? - T goes around and gives help if c, Do you know any festivals where it is necessary important 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Have Ss share their answers with the whole class. Quickly write their answers on the board. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T remarks and helps Ss correct if any. 2. Now listen and check your answers. Part 2- P31: Key: - Play the recording. a. A turkey - Ss listen carefully and check their b. It’s one of the traditional foods of answer to 1. important festival. - Then T gives the correct answers c. Thanksgiving Part 3- P31: 3. In pairs, write true (T) or false (F) - Ss work in pairs to decide if the for the following sentence. statements are true or false. Key: 1. F ( It’s also held in Canada) - Have some Ss write their answers on 2. F (It’s celebrated on the fourth the board. - Play the recording again for Ss to Thursday of November and in Canada check. If there are any incorrect answers, it’s celebrated on the second Monday of have Ss correct them and explain the October. 3. T reason for their correction. - Call on some Ss to give the answers. 4. F (Children also take part in food - T remarks and give feedback preparation.) 5. T 6. F (Some people like to go for a walk or take naps) 7. T Activity 3: Production Part 4- P31: III. Further practice: 236

4. Work in pairs. Imagine that one of them is a student from the US and the other is from Phu Yen, Viet Nam. Ask and answer about Thanksgiving and Hoi Mua, a harvest festival in Phu Yen. Example: A: This photo is so beautiful. Where did you take it? B. I took it in Hoi Mua festival in my village. Do you have a harvest festival i your country? A. Sure. It’s thanksgiving. When did you celebrate Hoi Mua festival? B. In March. What about Thanksgiving?

FF IC IA L

- Ss work in pairs. Imagine that one of them is a student from the US and the other is from Phu Yen, Viet Nam. - Explain that the only the Ss from Viet Nam read the information on page 35. - T calls some pairs to act out the conversations in class.

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÝ DUYỆT

4. Consolidation: - Ss sum up the way people celebrate some festivals: Thanksgiving and Hoi Mua 5. Homework: - Learn by heart all the new words. - Do exercise B5,6 workbook/ page 19-20 - Prepare UNIT 9: SKILLS 1- textbook Ngày 25 tháng 02 năm 2018

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

WEEK 26: Pre: 25/ 02/ 2019 Te: ...../ 03/ 2019

KÈ

Period 73: UNIT 9: FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD. Lesson 5: Skills 1

ẠY

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use the lexical items related to the topic "festivals around the world".Read for specific information about an unusual festival then discuss about an unusual festival - Vocabulary: The lexical items related to the topic “Festivals around the world”: greasy, pole, cannon, jet, chaos, goggle,… - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:H/Wh-questions and adverbial phrases. 2. Skills: + Speaking: Talk about unusual festivals around the world 237

FF IC IA L

+ Reading: Read for specific information about an unusual festival 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to work hard and love festivals around the world. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about unusual festivals around the world. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: does exercise B5 – workbook page 19 - S2: talks about Thanksgiving festival. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Chatting:(Part 1- P32) - Introduces the new lesson: Tell Ss that they are going to read about an unusual festival in Spain and ask Ss if they can guess anything about this festival from its mane a Tomatina. - Have Ss look at the pictures and put them in the correct order - Lead to the lesson. B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Reading *Teaching vocabulary: translation/ situation/ I. New words: - greasy (a): vấy mỡ, dính mỡ antonym. - pole (n): cái cột - T: writes new words on the board. - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first then - cannon (n): đại bác, súng thần the whole class. công - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. - jet (n): vòi phun nước *Checking: rub out and remember. - chaos (n): cuộc hỗn chiến - goggle (n): kính bảo vệ mắt Part 2- P32 II. Reading: - Ask Ss to read the text quickly then check Ex2. Now quickly read the texts their ordering below and check your answers. - Ss read the texts quickly and check their Key: answers. Have Ss correct their answers on the C – D – A – B board if they are incorrect. - Check Ss' answers and write them on the 238

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

board. Part 3- P32 Ex3. Answer the following 1.Transfering the learning task: questions. - Run through the questions. Key: - Ask Ss to read the text again and answer the 1. It is celebrated on the last questions given in pairs. Wednesday every August. 2. He stayed up late 2. Doing the task: - Ss read the texts again to answer the 3. They placed a ham on top of questions. Ss underline parts of the text that greasy pole. help them with the answers. 4. They had to wear goggles to - Ss compare their answers before giving the protect their eyes. answers to T. 5. It was a jet from water cannon. 6. It was red with rivers of tomato 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Ask Ss to give the answers with their juice. partner - Ask Ss to give evidence when giving the answers. - Call on 2 Ss to write the answers on the board 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - T confirms the correct answers Activity 2: Speaking Part 4- P32 III. Speaking. - Ask Ss to work in groups and read the Ex4. Work in groups.Look at the newspaper headlines. newspaper headlines about two unusual - Ss discuss what is unusual about the festivals around the world. Discuss what festivals. you think is unusual about them. - Have some Ss present their group’s Ex5. Choose one festival to teach your ideas. group about. Suggestion questions: Part 5, 6- P33 1. What do they often do at Season - Tell Ss that the table includes festival? information about the two festivals in 2. Where do they organize activities? 4. - Ss work in groups and prepare a short 3. When does the festival take place? …… presentation about the festival they like. Ex 6. Present your festival to your - Have some Ss give their presentations partner. to the class 4. Consolidation: - Sum up the main content of the lesson 5. Homework: - Ask Ss to learn new words by heart. - Do exercise C1, 2; D1,2/ P21, 22- workbook. - Prepare: UNIT 9: Skill 2 - textbook. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------239

Pre: 25/ 02/ 2019 Te: ...../ 03/ 2019

Period 74: UNIT 9: FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD. Lesson 6: Skills 2

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use lexical items related to festivals around the world. Listen to get specific information about music festival and then write a paragraph about a festival. - Vocabulary: The lexical items related to the topic “Festivals around the world” - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:H/Wh-questions and adverbial phrases. 2. Skills: + Writing: Write a paragraph about a festival + Listening: Listen to get specific information about music festival 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to work hard and love festivals around the world. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach.Writing short paragraph about a festival. - Ss love the subject and have the responsibility for community to protect our country’s Festivals. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: Does C1- workbook page 21 - S2: Does D1 - workbook page 22 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Picture drill(part 1- P33) - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in part 1/ p33 and answer the question: ?What kind of festival do you think it is? - Ss discuss in pairs then share your ideas with others. Suggestions: => It is a music festival. - Lead to the lesson. B. Presentation: 240

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 2: Listening Part 2- P33: I. Listening - Ss read the statements in ex 2 and guess if they Ex2. Listen to Nick talk about are true or false. Write their guesses on the board. a music festival he attended. - Play the recording and ask Ss to listen to check Tick (V) T (true) or F (false). their guesses. Correct the false sentences. - Ss work in pairs to compare their answers before T plays the recording the second time for Key: pairs to check their answers. 1. F (one of the most famous - Ask for Ss' answers and write them on the board festivals) next to their guesses. Don't confirm the correct 2. T answers now. 3. F (They stayed in a tent) - Have Ss listen to the recording and check the 4. F (He’s Nick’s father’s prediction favorite singer) - Have Ss compare the answers with their partners - Get feedback - Play the recording once to check Part 3- P33: Ex3. Now listen and answer 1.Transfering the learning task: - Run through the questions. the questions. - Ask Ss to listen again and answer the questions given in pairs. 2. Doing the task: - Sslisten to the recording again and answer the questions in exercise 3. - Have Ss compare their answers in pairs before Key: giving T the answers. Some Ss write their 1. It takes place every June. answers on the board. Play the recording the last 2. They are music bands. time to confirm the answers 3. He interested the audience - Ask Ss to share the answer with their partners with the hit song. 4. They also went to the 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Call on some Ss to write the answers on the Bohemian Woods. board 5. They enjoyed a mixed of good music from around the 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - Play the recording again to check. world. - T confirms the correct answers. - Have Ss work in group of 5 Ss to talk about the festival they have listened

Activity 2: Writing Part 4- P33: II. Writing - Ss think of a festival they attended and make Ex4. Think about a festival you notes about it. attended. Make notes about it + What was the festival? + Who celebrated it? below. + Where was it held? + When was it held? Suggestion writing: 241

It was a cock fighting festival. It was held in the common house’s yard in my village. It was held on January 15th (Lunar New Year) ……

FF IC IA L

Ex5. Write a paragraph about the festival you attended use the notes above. Ss can start like this. Last week I attended a festival. It was called “Harvest festival” It was held by farmers in my village. ….

+ How was it held? + Why was it held? - Ss can share their note with a classmate after finishing. - Have some Ss share their notes with the whole class. - T can make any necessary comments. Part 5- P33: - Ss write their paragraph individually based on the notes they have made. - Ask one or two Ss to write the paragraph on the board. - Other Ss and T comment on the paragraph(s) on the board. - Display some of the writings on the board and other Ss give comments - T collects some Ss' writing to give feedback at home.

4. Consolidation: -Have some Ss read aloud their writing. 5. Homework: - Do exercises: D3,E1, 4/ page 23, 24- workbook. - Complete the writing on the notebook. - Prepare: UNIT 9:Looking back + project - textbook. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pre: 26/ 02/ 2019 Te: ...../ 03/ 2019

Period 75: UNIT 9: FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD. Lesson 7: Looking back & Project

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to recycle the language from the previous sections.Consolidate and apply what they have learnt in Unit 9 by doing various activities and exercises. - Vocabulary: The lexical items related to the topic “Festivals around the world” - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:H/Wh-questions and adverbial phrases. 2. Skills: + Writing: Use H/Wh questions and adverbial phrases to ask and answer questions. + Speaking: Ask and answer about festivals around the world. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to work hard and love festivals around the world. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about a festival they attended 242

FF IC IA L

- Ss love the subject and have the responsibility for community to protect our country’s Festivals. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test -S1: Does D3-b- workbook page 23 -S2: Does E1- workbook page 24 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Chatting - Ask Ss some questions about festivals + Can you name some Vietnamese festivals and festivals around the word. + Which festival do you like most? + Have you ever taken part in any festival? - Lead to the lesson. B. Presentation:

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

KÈ

Activity 1: Vocabulary I. Vocabulary Part 1- P34 Ex1. Rearrange the letters to 1.Transfering the learning task: make reasons for holding - Ask Ss to rearrange the letters to make reasons festivals. Then match them to for holding festivals then look at the picture given the pictures of the festivals. and match the words with the right pictures. Key: 2. Doing the task: - Ss do this activity individually then compare 1. religious ( Christmas) their answers with a partner. 2. music ( Glastonbury) 3. superstitious ( Day of the 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - Ask Ss to go to the board and write their Dead) 4. seasonal ( Thanksgiving) answers. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: - Check Ss' answers. May ask if Ss know the name of the festivals in the pictures. - Give feedback. Ex2. Complete the sentences Part 2- P34 - Run through the verbs with the correct form of the - Ask Ss to do task 2 individually. words in brackets.

ẠY D

AIN CONTENTS

243

Key: 1. cultural2. parade 3. celebratory4. festive 5. performance6. celebration

- Work individually to complete the sentences then compare with their partners. - Have some Ss give their own answers - Get feedback

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 2: Grammar Part 3- P34 II. Grammar - Have Ss work individually Ex3. Complete each question - Ss do this task individually then compare with a suitable H/Wh- question their answers with a partner. word. More than one question - Ask Ss to read aloud the full sentences to word may be accepted. check Key: - T checks and confirm the correct answers 1. What2. Where 3. How4. Which 5. Where/ When / How / Why 6. When Part 4- P34 - Ss make up their own sentences with the Ex4. Make your own sentences adverbial phrases in the box. with the adverbial phrases from - Have two Ss write their sentences on the the box. board. While Ss do this activity, T goes around Example: to observeand takes notes of Ss' mistakes. 1. My father went to Ho Chi Minh - Other Ss comment on the sentences on the citylast week. board. If time allows, ask some other Ss to ……. read aloud their sentences. - Have Ss work individually - Ask Ss to read aloud the full sentences to check. Activity 3: Communication Part 5- P34 III. Communication. - Ss work in pairs to role-play. They ask 5. Role-play in pairs. Student A is a and answer about their favourite festival. reporter. Student B is a secondary Ask some pairs to act out the role-play. school student. Continue the Other Ss comment and vote for the best conversation below. conversation. Reporter: I’m a reporter from Culture - Teacher finds out any difficult and weak Magazine. Can I ask you some areas from students. questions about your favorite festivals? Finished ! - Ask Ss to complete the self-assessment. Student: Yes, of course. I Identify any difficulties and weak areas like……….best. and provide further practice. Reporter: Where’s the festival held? Activity 4: Production

244

IV. Project What? Who? Where? When? How often? Why? How?

FF IC IA L

- T guides Ss how to prepare the project at home - Think of the festival they would like to visit. - Complete the following table with all information about this festival. - Draw pictures of this festival or cut relevant pictures from magazines. - Present your festival to the class.

4. Consolidation: - Sum up the main content of the lesson. 5. Homework: - Redo all the exercises above and do exercises in the workbook. - Prepare: REVIEW 3- Textbook. Ngày 04 tháng 03 năm 2019

Pre: 04/ 03/ 2019 Te: ...../ 03/ 2019

WEEK 27

Period 76- REVIEW 3

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to revise the language they have studied and the skills they have practiced from unit 7 to unit 9. - Vocabulary: Revise the vocabulary they have learnt from unit 7 to unit 9. - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words related to the theme “Our world”. - Grammar: + Used to + -ed and -ing adjectives + H/Wh- questions + Adverbial phrases + Connectors: although, despite/in spite of, however, nevertherless. 2. Skills: + Speaking: Pronounce the sounds they’ve learnt, use everyday English fluently. + Writing: Use used to, -ed/ing adjectives, connectors: although, despite/in spite of, however, nevertherless to make sentences 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to revise the language from unit 7 to unit 9 and practice with them. - Ss participate actively in the lesson.

ẠY D

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÝ DUYỆT

245

FF IC IA L

4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Doing exercises on pronunciation, vocabulary, grammar and everyday English related to the theme “Our world” - Ss love the subject and be aware of revision to prepare well for the written test 3. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work, situations, translation, discussion, and examples. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbooks, visual aids. + Equipment: No 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Teacher checks students’ homework. - Collect some Ss’ writing to mark. 3. New lesson A- warm- up: *Chatting: - Ask Ss some questions with H/Wh- questions + Which festival do you like most? + When is it celebrated? Where? + How often does it take place? B- Presentation: TEACHER AND SS’ ACTIVITIES.

MAIN CONTENTS.

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Language

246

I. Language 1. Pronunciation. Ex 1:Odd one out Key: 1. B 2. C 3. C 4. A 5. B

Ex2: Complete the two words verbs with two-syllable words according to the stress pattern. Suggested answers: - O’bey: receive, polite, perform - ‘Dancer: beauty, copy, teacher

FF IC IA L

Ex 1- P36: - Ss do this exercise individually then share their answers with a partner before giving T the answers. - Write the correct answers on the board. Have some Ss read out the words. Ex 2- P36: - Organize this as a game. - Ss do this exercise in pairs. Which pair adds the most words will go to the board and write their answers. Other pairs may want to add more words. - Write other words on the board.

2. Vocabulary Ex 3: Write the phrases from the box under the road signs. Key: 1. Ahead only 2. No crossing 3. No U-turn 4. Right turn only 5. Railway crossing Ex 4- P36: - Ask Ss what kind of word can be filled Ex 4: Complete the description of in each blank (i.e. noun, verb, etc). Elicit Diwali. the answers. Key: - Ss do this exercise individually. 1. celebrations 2. cultural - Two Ss write their answers on the 3. performances 4. parades 5. festive board. - Confirm the correct answers. Ex 5- P36: Ex 5: Solve the crossword puzzle. - This can be done as a small Key: competition game. The student who 1. documentary 2. hilarious solves the crossword the fastest is the 3. boring 4. thriller winner 5. moved 6. animation - Have Ss do the task individually. - Give feedback. 3. Grammar. Ex 6- P36: Ex 6: Match the questions with the - Elicit the kinds of H/Wh- question. Ss answers. do this exercise individually. Check Ss Key: answers and write the correct answers on 1. c 2. f 3. a the board. 4. b 5. d 6. e Ex 7- P36: Ex 7: Rewrite the sentences so that they 1.Transfering the learning task: have the same meaning as the original - Run through the sentences then guide ones. Ss how to do the task. Key: - Ask Ss to do the task in pairs. 1. It’s about 1,877 kilometres from Ha Noi to Can Tho. 2. Doing the task:

ẠY

KÈ

Ex 3- P36: - Ss do this individually and then share their answers with a partner. - Check Ss’ answers then give feedback.

247

FF IC IA L

- Ss do this in pairs and then compare 2. How far is it from Hue to Da Nang? their answers with others. 3. There didn’t use to be many traffic jams when I was young. 3. Reporting the task result and 4. In spite of being tired/their tiredness, discuss: - Ask Ss to go to the board and write they wanted to watch the film./ They wanted to watch the film in spite of being their answers. - Call some Ss to go to the board to write tired/their tiredness. 5. Although the festival took place in a their sentences. remote area, a lot of people attended it./ - Other Ss comment. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the A lot of people attended the festival although it took place in a remote area. task: - Check Ss' answers. 4. Everyday English - Confirm the correct sentences. Ex 8: Put the lines of the dialogue in Ex 8- P37: the correct order. - Ss do this in pairs. After checking their Key: answers, ask one or two pairs to act out 6–7–1–4–5–2–8–3 the conversation.

- Some pair practice aloud before class.

KÈ

4.Consolidation - Correct the ex. if necessary. 5.Homework - Prepare SKILLS - Do the test yourself/ p 25- 28 in workbook. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pre: 06/ 03/ 2019 Te: ...../ 03/ 2019

Period 77- REVIEW 3 (Cont)

ẠY

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to revise the languages Ss have learnt and the skills they have practised since Unit 7 to unit 9.Do some exercises about four skills. - Vocabulary: Revise the vocabulary they have learnt from unit 7 to unit 9. - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words related to the theme “Our world”. - Grammar: + Used to + -ed and -ing adjectives + Connectors: although, despite/in spite of, however, nevertherless. + H/Wh- questions + Adverbial phrases 248

KÈ

FF IC IA L

2. Skills: + Speaking: Discuss the questions about the actor or actress who have been awarded an Oscar. + Writing: Write a reply to your friends about means of transport who are going to attend a festival 10 km away. + Listening: Listen to the conversation between Mi and Nick and complete the tasks + Reading: Read the passage and know some information about The Oscars. 3. Attitude: - Know the importance of revision and need to study harder. - Ss participate actively in the lesson. 4. Ability needed: - Communicative approach. - Doing exercises on reading, speaking, writing and listening. - Ss love the subject and be aware of revision to prepare well for the written test 3. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work, situations, translation, discussion, and examples. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbooks, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - During the lesson 3. New lesson A- warm- up: *Chatting: - Ask Ss some questions with H/Wh- questions + Which festival do you like most? + When is it celebrated? Where? + How often does it take place? B- Presentation: TEACHER AND SS’ ACTIVITIES.

Activity 1: Skills II. Skills: Part 1- P37: 1. Reading - Ask Ss to read the text quickly and match Ex 1: Read the passage. Match the the headings with the paragraphs. headings in the box with the - Ss read the text quickly and match the paragraphs. headings with the paragraphs. Ss compare Key: their answers with a partner before giving A. 2 What are The Oscars? the teacher the answers. B. 3 The Oscar statuette - T checks Ss’ answers then correct. C. 1 Different awards in The Oscars.

ẠY D

MAIN CONTENTS.

249

Ex 2: Answer the questions

FF IC IA L

Key: 1. They were first organised in 1929. 2. They are named after the Oscar statuette. 3. He is the person who designed/ He designed the Oscar statuette 4. Emil Jannings received the first Oscar statuette 5. It is the prize for/ given to the best film.

2. Speaking Ex 3: Work in groups. Discuss the following questions. 1. Which actors and actresses you know have been awarded an Oscar? 2. Why do you think The Oscars are important to actors and actresses?

ẠY

KÈ

- Confirm the correct answers. Part 2- P37: 1. Transferring the learning task. - Ask Ss to read the text again then answer the questions. 2. Doing the task. - Ss do these exercises individually, check their answers with a partner before giving the answers to T. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Call on some Ss to give answers before class. -Some Ss give the answers while two Ss go to the board and write their answers if time allows. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Collect Ss’ answers then correct. - Give feedback. Part 3- P37: - Ss work in groups and discussed the questions. - Have Ss take notes and report it to the class. - Ss report their group’s answers to the class. - Summarize Ss’ideas. Part 4- P37: - Play the recording for the first time. - Ss listen and decide if the statements are true or false. - Elicit the answers from Ss and write them on the board. - Have Ss give answers then correct and feedback.

Part 5- P37: - Ss listen to the recording again and answer the questions. Ss compare their answers before giving T their answers. Write their answers on the board. Now play the recording again to check the answers to exercise 4 and 5. 250

3. Listening Ex 4: Mi and Nick visit Ms Hoa at home. Listen to their conversation. Write T or F Key: 1. F (Because Mrs Hoa said: It’s the first time you’ve come to my house, isn’t it?) 2. F (Because the photos are on the wall) 3. T 4. T 5. T Ex 5: Listen again. Do did the following things? Key: Ms Hoa

Nick

1.tried Dutch foods and drinks 2. watched traditional Dutch dancing

٧ ٧

3. watched parades

FF IC IA L

٧ ٧

5. Writing Ex 6: Imagine that you and two friends are going to attend a festival 10 kilometers away. You are discussing what means of transport to use: bus, bicycle or taxi. Read the e-mail from one of your friends, Mai and write reply.

Part 6- P37: - Ss read Mai’s email to understand the context. Ss write their email individually. Ask one S to write the email on the board. Other Ss and T comment on the email on board. Collect some emails to correct at home.

4. listened to folk music 5. was interested in the festival

Pre: 06/ 03/ 2019 Te: ...../ 03/ 2019

4.Consolidation - Correct the ex. if necessary. 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbooks. - Prepare for the net lesson: Written test 3. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Period 78: WRITTEN TEST 3

ẠY

KÈ

I. Objectives. 1. Knowledge: - To test Ss’ knowledge in the three units 7- 9 to know how progressive the Ss are and find out their strength and weakness of learning English so that teacher can give them more suitable method of teaching. - Vocabulary: related to the theme “Our World”: - Phonetics: The sounds: /e/, /ei/, /t/, /d/ and /id/, and stress in two syllable words. - Grammar: + Used to + -ed and -ing adjectives + Connectors: although, despite/in spite of, however, nevertherless. + H/Wh- questions + Adverbial phrases 2. Skills: - To check Ss’ listening, reading and writing skills. 3. Attitude: 251

ẠY

KÈ

A- Matrix:

FF IC IA L

- Teach Ss to be strict and honest. 4. Ability needed: - Being able todo the exercises well. - Ss love the subject and be aware of revising to do well for the test. II. Teaching methods and techniques. - Written test. III. Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: test papers. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: No. IV. Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Check the preparation of Ss. 3. New lesson

B- QUESTIONS:

NO 1: A. LISTENING ( 1.5 pts)

I. Listen to a music festival and tick ( ) true (T) or false (F). (1.5pts) 252

1. The Isle of Wight is the most famous festival in the country 2. This music festival takes place every August 3. About 60,000 people attended the festival last year 4. Nick and his family stayed at a hotel near the campsite 5. Jon Bon Jovi is Nick’s father’s favourite singer 6. Jon Bon Jovi’s band performed for nearly 3 hours

FF IC IA L

B. LANGUAGE FOCUS (4.5pts)

ẠY

KÈ

I. Choose the word which has underlined part pronounced differently from others.(1.0pt) 1. A. played B. frightened C. excited D. bored 2. A. watched B. attended C. decided D. fitted 3. A. healthy B. ahead C. bread D. seatbelt 4. A. looked B. wicked C. booked D. walked II. Choose the word that has a different stress pattern from the others.(0.5 pt) 1. A. traffic B. agree C. noisy D. student 2. A. listen B. visit C. differ D. obey III. Choose the best option to complete these sentences. (2.5pt) 1. Give a ___________ before you turn left or right. A. sign B. turn C. signal D. sound 2. You should look right and left when you go _________ the road. A. down B. across C. up D. along 3. The play was so boring. ________, An saw it from beginning to end. A. Therefore B. Despite C. However D. Although 4. She’s sure that they will find the film_________. A. entertaining B. entertain C. entertainment D. entertained 5. ____________ being frightened by the images, Lan still liked the film so much. A. In spite B. Despite C. Although D. Nevertheless 6. ____________ is La Tomatina celebrated? – Every August. A. Where B. Why C. When D. Which 7. My father liked the ____________ of that singer. A. perform B. performer C. performance D. performing 8. Although they spent a lot of money on the film, it wasn’t a big ________. A. success B. failure C. performance D. show 9. Traffic accidents can be prevented if people __________ the rules. A. remember B. obey C. go after D. take care of 10. I ___________ go on foot when I was in primary school A. have to B. can C. used to D. may IV. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentences (0.5 pt) 1. The Christmas season is also called the ______________ season. (festival) 2. I love the ____________ of folk songs. (perform) C. READING.(2.5pts) I. Read the following passage and choose the best answer for each blank (1.25 pt) 253

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

When you are in Singapore, you can go about (1) ................... taxi, by bus, or by underground. I myself prefer the underground (2) .................. it is fast, easy and cheap. There are (3) ..................... buses and taxis in Singapore and one cannot drive along the road (4) ..................... and without many stops, especially on the Monday morning. The underground is therefore usually quicker (5) .................. taxis or buses. 1. A. at B. in C. by D. on 2. A. but B. so C. when D. because 3. A. many B. a lot C. few D. much 4. A. quick B. quickly C. quicker D. more quick 5. A. so B. like C. than D. as II. Read the passage and choose the best answer. (1.25 pts) Yesterday, on the way home from school, I saw an accident. A boy was run over by a taxi when he was riding his bicycle. The boy’s leg was broken and it was bleeding badly. Someone there tried to stop the bleeding. They put pressure on it and held it tight. A man used his mobile phone to call the emergency service. Some minutes later, an ambulance arrived and sent the boy to the hospital. Two policemen came to the scene immediately. Some people told the police that the taxi was driving at a very high speed when the accident happened. Some others began talking about the traffic accidents these days and blamed the increasing number of accidents on the roads for careless driving and drunk drivers. 1. What did the writer see yesterday? A. a fire B. an accident C. a fighting D. a crash 2. The accident happened between a taxi and……………. A. a bus B. a car C. a bicycle D. a motorbike 3. The boy was sent to the hospital by……………. A. a police B. a car C. an ambulance D. a passenger 4. What part of his body was hurt? – His……………….. A. arm B. leg C. head D. shoulder 5. How was the driver driving when the accident happened? – Very……………. A. slowly B. well C. carefully D. fast D. WRITING. (1,5pts) I. Rewrite the following sentences in such a way that they mean the same as the original sentence (1.0 pts) 1. What is the distance between your house and your school? -> How……………………………………..………………………………….? 2. I often walked to school when I was a student. -> I used………………………………………………………………………… 3. Although they are short, they still love playing sports. -> In spite of ………………………………………….………………………… 4. The distance from her house to the city center is about 10 kilometres. -> It’s about ……………………………………………………………………. II. Make questions for the underlined parts in each following sentence. (0.5pt) 1. It’s about 5 km from my house to the market. ->………………………………..………………………………………………. 2. I bought this T-shirt for my father in Sydney 254

FF IC IA L

->………………………………..………………………………………………. NO 2: A. LISTENING ( 1.5 pts) I. Listen to a music festival and tick ( ) true (T) or false (F). (1.5pts) T F 1. The Isle of Wight is the most famous festival in the country 2. This music festival takes place every August 3. About 60,000 people attended the festival last year 4. Nick and his family stayed at a hotel near the campsite 5. Jon Bon Jovi is Nick’s father’s favourite singer 6. Jon Bon Jovi’s band performed for nearly 3 hours B. LANGUAGE FOCUS (4.5pts)

ẠY

KÈ

I. Choose the word which has underlined part pronounced differently from others.(1.0pt) B. disappointed C.amazed D. terrified 1. A. frightened 2. A. watched B. attended C. decided D. excited 3. A. healthy B. ahead C. bread D. seatbelt 4. A. looked B. walked C. booked D. naked II. Choose the word that has a different stress pattern from the others.(0.5 pt) 1. A. discuss B. gather C. perform D. attend 2. A. return B. happen C. differ D. visit III. Choose the best option to complete these sentences. (2.5pt) 1. Nam used to ________ morning exercise when he got up early. A. did B. does C. doing D. do 2. ____________ being frightened by the images, Lan still liked the film so much. A. In spite B. Despite C. Although D. Nevertheless 3. Traffic accidents can be prevented if people __________ the rules. A. remember B. obey C. go after D. take care of 4. __________ is not very far from here to the supermarket. A. There B. This C. It D. That 5. It must be ___________ to see elephants racing. A. amaze B. amazed C. amazing D. amazement 6. You should look right and left when you go _________ the road. A. down B. across C. up D. along 7. The play was so boring. ________, An saw it from beginning to end. A. Therefore B. Despite C. However D. Although 8. ____________ is La Tomatina celebrated? – Every August. A. Where B. Why C. When D. Which 9. Give a ___________ before you turn left or right. A. signal B. turn C. sign D. sound 10. Although they spent a lot of money on the film, it wasn’t a big ________. A. success B. failure C. performance D. show 255

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

IV. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentences (0.5 pt) 1. The Christmas season is also called the ______________ season. (festival) 2. I love the ____________ of folk songs. (perform) C. READING.(2.5pts) I. Read the following passage and choose the best answer for each blank (1.25 pt) When you are in Singapore, you can go about (1) ................... taxi, by bus, or by underground. I myself prefer the underground (2) .................. it is fast, easy and cheap. There are (3) ..................... buses and taxis in Singapore and one cannot drive along the road (4) ..................... and without many stops, especially on the Monday morning. The underground is therefore usually quicker (5) .................. taxis or buses. 1. A. at B. in C. by D. on 2. A. but B. so C. when D. because 3. A. many B. a lot C. few D. much 4. A. quick B. quickly C. quicker D. more quick 5. A. so B. like C. than D. as II. Read the passage and choose the best answer. (1.25 pts) Yesterday, on the way home from school, I saw an accident. A boy was run over by a taxi when he was riding his bicycle. The boy’s leg was broken and it was bleeding badly. Someone there tried to stop the bleeding. They put pressure on it and held it tight. A man used his mobile phone to call the emergency service. Some minutes later, an ambulance arrived and sent the boy to the hospital. Two policemen came to the scene immediately. Some people told the police that the taxi was driving at a very high speed when the accident happened. Some others began talking about the traffic accidents these days and blamed the increasing number of accidents on the roads for careless driving and drunk drivers. 1. What did the writer see yesterday? A. a fire B. an accident C. a fighting D. a crash 2. The accident happened between a taxi and……………. A. a bus B. a car C. a bicycle D. a motorbike 3. The boy was sent to the hospital by……………. A. a police B. a car C. an ambulance D. a passenger 4. What part of his body was hurt? – His……………….. A. arm B. leg C. head D. shoulder 5. How was the driver driving when the accident happened? – Very……………. A. slowly B. fast C. carefully D. well D. WRITING. (1,5pts) I. Rewrite the following sentences in such a way that they mean the same as the original sentence (1.0 pts) 1. What is the distance between your house and your school? -> How……………………………………..………………………………….? 2. I often walked to school when I was a student. -> I used………………………………………………………………………… 3. The distance from her house to the city center is about 10 kilometres. -> It’s about ……………………………………………………………………. 4. Although he is so young, he performs excellently. -> Despite ………………………………………….…………………………… 256

II. Make questions for the underlined parts in each following sentence. (0.5pt) 1. It’s about 3 km from my school to the park. ->………………………………..………………………………………………. 2. We went to the Flower Festival in Da Lat last year. ->………………………………..………………………………………………. C- ANSWERS AND MARK:

FF IC IA L

A. LISTENING ( 1.5 pts)

ẠY

KÈ

I. Listen to a music festival and tick ( ) true (T) or false (F). (1.5pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 6 = 1.5 ®iÓm 1- F 2- F 3- T 4- F 5- T 6- T Tapescript: Last summer holiday my family went back to the UK and we went to a music festival on the Isle of Wight. It is one of the most famous music festivals in our country, which takes place every June. When we got there, I was impressed by the huge number of people. You know about sixty thousand people went to the event. We didn’t stay at a hotel but put up a tent in the campsite. It was lots of fun. We listened to a lot of songs by many bands such as The Killers and The Stone Roses. Guess what? We met Jon Bon Jovi! He’s my dad’s favourite singer. He and his band stirred up the crowd in nearly three hours with the hit songs. We also went to the Bohemian Woods, a beautiful woodland down by the river. There we enjoyed a mix of good music from around the world and escaped the busy and noisy festival for a while. B. LANGUAGE FOCUS (4.5pts) I. Choose the word which has underlined part pronounced differently from others.(1.0pt)Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0.25 ®iÓm x 4 = 1.0 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- C 2- A 3- D 4- B NO 2: 1- B 2- A3- D 4- D II. Choose the word that has a different stress pattern from the others.(0.5 pt) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0.25 ®iÓm x 2 = 0.5 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- B 2- D NO 2: 1- B 2- A III. Choose the best option to complete these sentences. (2.5pt) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0.25 ®iÓm x 10 = 2.5 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- C 2- B3- C 4- A 5-B 6- C 7- C 8- A 9- B 10- C NO 2: 1- D 2- B3- B 4- C 5-C 6- B 7- C 8- C 9- A 10- A IV. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentences (0.5 pt) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0.25 ®iÓm x 2 = 0.5 ®iÓm 1- festive 2- performance C. READING.(2.5pts) I. Read the following passage and choose the best answer for each blank (1.25 pt) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0.25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1.25 ®iÓm 5-C 1- C 2- D 3- A 4- B II. Read the passage and choose the best answer. (1.25 pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0.25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1.25 ®iÓm 1- B2- C 3- C 4- B 5- D 257

D. WRITING. (1.5pts)

Ngày 11 tháng 03 năm 2019

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÝ DUYỆT

FF IC IA L

I. Rewrite the following sentences in such a way that they mean the same as the original sentence (1.0 pts) Mçi câu ®óng ®−îc 0.25 ®iÓm x 4 = 1.0 ®iÓm NO 1:1, How far is it from your house to school? 2, I used to walk to school when I was a student. 3, In spite of being short, they still love playing sports. 4. It’s about 10 kilometres from her house to the city center. NO 2:1, How far is it from your house to school? 2, I used to walk to school when I was a student. 3. It’s about 10 kilometres from her house to the city center. 4, Despite being so young, he performs excellently. II. Make questions for the underlined parts in each following sentence. (0.5pt) Mçi câu ®óng ®−îc 0.25 ®iÓm x 2 = 0.5 ®iÓm NO 1:1, How far is it from your house to the market? 2, Where did you buy this T-shirt for your father? NO 2:1, How far is it from your school to the park? 2, When did you go to the Flower Festival in Da Lat? 4. Consolidation. - Collect Ss’ papers and remark if any. 5. Homework. - Prepare for next period: Unit 10- Getting started.

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

KÈ

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ẠY

WEEK 28: Pre: 12/ 03/ 2019 Te: ...../ 03/ 2019

Period 79: UNIT 10: SOURCES OF ENERGY. Lesson 1: Getting started

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: 258

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to have some information about energy sources and talk about the different types of energy sources. - Vocabulary: Types of energy sources, words to describe energy sources:energy source, renewable, non-renewable, last, use up, run out,… - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:Tenses revision. 2. Skills: +Listening: listening to the dialogue and complete the tasks +Speaking: work in pair to ask and answer the questions about renewable and nonrenewable sources. + Reading: read the conversation and answer the questions. + Writing: complete the network. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to have responsibility for protecting sources of energy. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Identifying types and sources of energy. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about energy. Have civic duty to save energy. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - During the lesson. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Net words: - Have Ss play games related to the topic - Have Ss read the words 3 times in chorus - Ask Ss to describe the picture (Who, where, what ….. ?) - Asking some questions: a, What types of energy do you know ? b, Where do they come from ? (renewable & non-renewable)

259

Gas

Solar

FF IC IA L

ENERGY

Oil

- Set the sense then lead to the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Presentation * Teaching new vocabulary: I. Vocabulary - Elicit some new words from the - energy source = source of energy: nguồn pictures and situations, realia ….. năng lượng -T: reads new words. - negative effect (n): hiệu ứng tiêu cực/ xấu - T: writes new words on the board. - carbon footprint (n): dấu chân các-bon - SS: listen and repeat in individual - coal (n): than đá first then the whole class. - solar pannel (n): pin mặt trời - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words - renewable (a): có thể tái tạo again. >< non-renewable (a): * Checking vocab: slap the board. - run out (v): cạn kiệt - use up (v): dùng hết - last forever (v): kéo dài mãi mãi Activity 2: Practice - Tsets the scene by asking Ss about II. Practice. 1. Listen and read. carbon footprint. +) What is it about? Why is it well- a. Read the conservation again and known? How can it be reduced? answer the questions. -Play the recording. Ss listen and read. Key: Part 1a- P39 1, It’s about the negative effects we 1. Transferring the learning task. have on the environment. -Ask Ss to read the conversation in pairs 2, “Non-renewable energy” means that and answer the questions. it will run out if we use it up. 2. Doing the task. 3, Sunlight is a renewable energy - Ss read the conversation ten answer the because we can’t use it all up or it questions in pairs will last forever. - Have Ss compare the answers in groups. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. 4, Mai thinks she has a small carbon - Call on some Ss to give answers before footprint because she recycles the products she uses and she goes class. - Ss practice asking and answering the everywhere by bike. 5, The products that we use are bad for 260

FF IC IA L

the environment or the energy that we use produces carbon dioxide might create a big carbon footprint. b. Complete the network below using the information from the conservation. Key: +renewable sources: wind, hydro, solar +non-renewable sources: coal, natural gas, oil 2. Listen and repeat the words or phrases.

3. Put the words into the correct groups below. Key:

Renewable sources Wind, coal, hydro, nuclear, ……

Non-renewable sources Natural gas, biogas, oil, solar ……

Natural gas Nuclear Hydro Solar

Wind Coal Biogas oil

questions in pairs loudly 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T corrects and gives the right answers Part 1b- P39 - T tells Ss to read the conversation again and find the appropriation information to complete the network. -Ask Ss to work in group to do the task. - Ask some groups to present their work before the class. - T remarks and corrects if any. Part 2- P39 - T asks Ss to look at the table, listen and repeat the words. - Ask some Ss to read aloud the words. - T corrects pronunciation and lets Ss add more words. Part 3- P39 -Ask Ss to do Ex3 (individually) - Ss do the task individually. - Have some Ss write the words in two columns on the board. - Give feedback and confirm correct answers.

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 3: Production - Divide the class into 6 groups III. Further practice - In group, ask Ss to ask and answer 3. Ask and answer the questions about questions about renewable and nonrenewable and non-renewable renewable sources. Let Ss use the resources. suggested questions and answers in the Example: example and the words in 2/3. A: What type of energy source is wind? - Have Ss make up the dialogues then B: It’s a renewable source of energy. role-play A: What type of energy source is coal? - The groups take turns to present their B: It’s a non-renewable source of dialogue energy. -T Listens and feedback A: ……………………………………..

4. Consolidation. - Let Ss talk about some information about energy SOURCES 5. Homework. - Learn new words by heart. - Read the conversation again. - Do exercises: B1-B2 (workbook)+ Translate the conversation in Getting started into Vietnamese. 261

- Prepare: UNIT 10:A closer look 1/ Page 40- textbook. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pre: 12/ 03/ 2019 Te: ...../ 03/ 2019

FF IC IA L

Period 80: UNIT 10: SOURCES OF ENERGY. Lesson 2: A closer look 1

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to talk about types of energy sources: Advantages & Disadvantages of energy. Know to pronounce the stress in the threesyllable words correctly. - Vocabulary: Types of energy sources, words to describe energy sources:Advantage unlimited, available, abundant, convenient,… - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson, stress in three-syllable words. 2. Skills: + Speaking: use the complete table to compare the answer with a partner + Writing: Look at the pictures and use the words to complete the sentences. + Listening: Listen to the tape and put the words in the correct columns. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to have responsibility for protecting our environment. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about advantages and disadvantages of each type of energy resources. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about energy. Have civic duty to save energy. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: goes to the board to write new words - S2: answers the questions about the Temple of Literature – the Imperial Academy 1. Where is it? 2. When was it founded? 3. What is the Imperial Academy considered? 3. New lesson 262

A. Warm- up: * play games Benefits of renewable energy source safe, clean, cheap …………………………………. B. Presentation:

Effects of non-renewable energy source dangerous, harmful, expensive ………………………………...

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary *Pre- teach vocabulary: expression/ I. Vocabulary pictures translation/ situation 1. New words - T says out the word by word while - abundant (a) /əˈbʌndənt/ = plentiful (a): Ss listen and repeat after. dồi dào, nhiều - T: writes new words on the board. - convenient (a) /kənˈviːniənt/: thuận tiện - Ss: listen and repeat in individual - exhausted (a)/ɪɡˈzɔːstɪd/: cạn kiệt first then the whole class. - exhaustible (a): có thể làm cạn kiệt - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. - enormous (a) /ɪˈnɔːməs/: to lớn - Ss copy the new words in their - limited (a): hạn chế><unlimited (a) notebooks. - harmful (a): có hại *Checking: rub out and remember - Advantage (n) = benefit (n): lợi, lợi thế ><disadvantage (n): bất lợi Ex 1: Put the words below into the table Ex 1- P 40: to describe the types of energy. 1. Transferring the learning task. -Have Ss read the words given in task Key: Sources of energy Wind Water / hydro Solar

ẠY

KÈ

1- P40 silently. -Guide Ss how to do the task. - Let Ss work in pairs to put the words in the column. -Ask Ss to do in 5 minutes 2. Doing the task. - Ss work in pairs to do the task. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Call on some Ss to give answers before class. - Some Ss write the answers on the board while others give remarks 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Check and confirm the answers as a class. - Give feedback. Ex 2- P 40: - Let Ss read the example. Have them look at the table in 1 and share their ideas in pairs. - Have Ss work in pairs to do Ex2

Biogas

Nuclear Coal, oil , natural gas …

Advantages Abundant, unlimited Clean, safe Renewable, plentiful, available, clean, safe Renewable, plentiful, clean, safe Renewable, clean, safe Abundant

Disadvantages Not available Expensive, not available Expensive

Abundant, cheap Expensive, dangerous Harmful, exhausted, polluting

Ex 2: Compare your answers with your partner. Example: A: I think biogas is renewable. 263

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- T notices the way to read the sounds. B: Me, too. I also think it is abundant - Call on some pairs to practice before and cheap. class. …………………………………….. - T gives remarks and feedback Ex 3- P 40: Ex 3: Look at the pictures and complete -Have Ss do Ex3 on the text book. these sentences, using the words in1. -Guide how to do Key: - Have Ss work in groups. 1. solar – clean / safe - Ss discuss and give their answers. 2. non-renewable Some Ss may write the words on the board. T checks. 3. wind – clean - Provide the keys 4. expensive – dangerous - Ask Ss to write down on the notebooks Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation II. Pronunciation. * How to stress in three-syllable Nouns and -Guide Ss how to stress the nouns Adjectives. and the adjectives with three Rule1 : Ooo When Sylablel 2 &3 are short syllables vowels. (very popular) Eg : excellent , difficult , president , plentiful , energy accident , dangerous - Give examples Rule2 : oOo When Syllable 2 is a long vowel - Explain the rules or a dipthong and Syllable3 is a short vowel or - Have Ss practice in chorus dipthong /ou/. ( popular) Eg: disaster , potato , enormous, expensive, convenient, advantage,... Ex 4: Listen and repeat. Which words are Ex 4- P 40: - Play the recording. Ask Ss to stressed on the first syllable and which ones listen and repeat the words, are stressed on the second syllable? Put them paying attention to the correct in the correct columns. stress in three-syllable words. Key: Pause the recording to drill Ooo oOo difficult words. - dangerous - expensive - Ask Ss to do Ex 4 to distinguish - plentiful - abundant the two ways of stressing three- limited - convenient syllable words - easily - enormous - Have some Ss practice aloud. - energy - advantage Ex 5- P 40: Ex 5: Read the following sentences and mark - Have Ss read the sentences and the stressed syllable in the underlined words. mark the stressed syllable in the Then listen, check and repeat. underlined words. Key: - Ss do the task individually. 1. Coal will be replaced by another renewable - T confirmsthe correct answers. resource. 264

- Some individuals practice in front of the class.

FF IC IA L

2. Wind power is convenient and abundant. 3. Natural gas is limited and it is harmful to the environment. 4. Solar energy is plentiful and it can be replaced easily. Nuclear power is expensive and dangerous.

4. Consolidation. - Retell the main content of the lesson: Advantages & Disadvantages of energy, how to pronounce the stress in the three-syllable words correctly 5. Homework. - Learn by heart the new words - Do Ex A1, A2/ page 36- workbook - Prepare UNIT 10: A CLOSER LOOK 2/ p 41, 42 - textbook ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pre: 12/ 03/ 2019 Te: ...../ 03/ 2019

Period 81: UNIT 10: SOURCES OF ENERGY. Lesson 3: A closer look 2

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able toknow the future continuous tense and the simple future passive and talk about ENERGY SOURCES. - Vocabulary: Types of energy sources, words to describe energy sources:Solar panel, install, escape, crack, store, solve,… - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: The future continuous and the future simple passive. 2. Skills: + Speaking: tell your partner what you will be doing at the points of time in the future + Writing: complete the sentences using the future continuous tense and the simple future passive. 3. Attitude: - To teach SS to have responsibility for protecting our environment. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about advantages and disadvantages of each type of energy resources. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about energy. Have civic duty to save energy. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 265

FF IC IA L

2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: goes to the board to write new words - S2: goes to the board to mark the main stress of these words. Difficult/ disaster/ favourite/ potato/ excellent/ beautiful/ exhausted/ polluting/ dangerous/ convenient 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Chatting: Review simple future tense - T asks Ss some questions related to the lesson and review the simple future tense. What will it be tomorrow? Where will you go for this summer vacation? When will you have a party for your next birthday? How will the world change if we use up all the non-renewable energy sources? - Lead to the new lesson. B. Presentation:

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary *Pre- teach vocabulary: expression/ I. Vocabulary pictures translation/ situation - Solar panel (n): ăng lượng mặt trời - T says out the word by word while Ss - to install: gắn - to escape: thoát listen and repeat after. - developing country (n): nước đang - T: writes new words on the board. - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first then phát triển - crack (n): chỗ nứt the whole class. - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. - to store: lưu giữ - Ss copy the new words in their notebooks. - to solve: giải quyết *Checking: rub out and remember - Shortage (n): sự thiếu hụt Activity 2: Teaching grammar II. Grammar: *Teaching the future continuous 1/ The future continuous tense. - Give examples * Examples: - Teacher explain how “Will + be - At 8.00 tomorrow morning, I will be +V-ing” is used and how it is learningMath at school. formed. - This time next summer , we will be - Ss listen and take note visitingParis - Get Ss to study the grammar box. =>We used will + be + V-ing to talk about T explains what students don’t actions in progress at a definite point of time understand. - Ss study the Grammar box on p41 in the future. Form: then copy down. 266

(+) S + will be + V-ing (-) S + will not be + V-ing - T helps Ss to recognize the tense (?) Will + S + be + V-ing? by giving some Adverbs of time Note: The future continuous often company with a definite point of time in the future (Adverbs of time) such as: On Sunday next week , At 8.00 tomorrow morning This time next summer At this time tomorrow By 2020,…………… Ex 1- P41 Ex 1: Complete the sentences using the - Guide Ss how to do the task then future continuous form of the verbs let Ss work in pairs. inbrackets. - Ss do the ex in pairs Key: - Call some Ss to say out their 1, will be putting 2, will be taking answers separately. 3, will be installing 4, will be spending - Write out the answer on the board 5, will be using Ex 2:Write what these students will be doing Ex 2- P41 tomorrow afternoon. 1.Transfering the learning task: - Have them read the cues given Key: and look at the pictures 1, Jenny will be giving a talk about saving -Ask Ss to work individually to energy. write what these students will be 2, Helen will be putting solar panels in the doing tomorrow afternoon. playground. 2. Doing the task: 3, Susan will be checking cracks in the - Ss do this exercise individually, water pipes thencompare their answers with a 4, Jack will be putting low energy light classmate. bulbs in the classrooms. 3. Reporting the task result and 5, Kate will be showing a film on types of discuss: renewable energy sources. - Call on some Ss to write their questions on the board. - Other Ss give comments and T gives corrections. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: Ex 3: Complete the conversation with the -T remarks and confirms the correct verbs in brackets (simple future or future answers. continuous tense) Ex 3- P41 Key: - Individual work. 1, will watch 2, will we put - Ss complete the task individually. 3, will be having 4, will travel - Compare the answers in pairs. 5, will walk or cycle - Check Ss’ answers and write the 6, will be cycling 7, will be going

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- Give the form

267

FF IC IA L

- Let Ss look at the table and discuss how the future simple passive is formed and used. - Give examples - Explain other uses of the passive voice. - T gives out the form - Ss listen and take note the use and form of the future simple passive.

Ex 4: Work in pairs. Tell your partner what you will be doing at the following point of time. Eg: This time tomorrow I will be learning English this time tomorrow Or This time tomorrow, I will be learning English 2/ The future simple passive form. * Form (+) S + will be + V-pp (by O) (-) S + will be + V-pp (by O) (?) Will + S + be + V-pp (by O) ? Example: -Solar panels will be put on the roof of the houses. - The exercises will be finished tomorrow. - Low energy light bulbs will be used widely. NOTE 1:Passive form is used when…. - the doer is not known and not important - the object is not important NOTE 2:If the doer is definite and still important, we can add “by + O” at the end of the sentence. Ex5; Complete the magazine article with the passive form of the verbs in the table. Key: 1, be provided 2, be used 3, be placed 4, be stored 5, be solved Ex 6: Change these sentences into the passive voice. Key: 1. Waves will be used as an environmentally friendly energy source 2. A network of wind turbines will be installed to make electricity. 3. In the countryside, plants will be burnt to produce heat. 4. Energy consumption will be reduced as much as possible. 5. Alternative sources of energy will be developed.

correct answers on the board. Ex 4 - P41 - Have Ss study the example to understand how the future continuous is used. Let Ss do the exercise in pairs. - Ask some pairs to give the answers as a class. *Teaching the future simple passive form.

ẠY

KÈ

Ex 5 - P42 - Ask Ss to do Ex 5 by completing the magazine article with the passive form of the verbs in the table - Ss do the task independently - Ss share the answers with a partner. - Correct and feedback. Ex 6 - P42 - Ask Ss to change the sentences in Ex 6- P42 into the passive voice. - Ss do the task in pairs. - Ss share the answers with a partner. - Have some Ss give their answers aloud - Check the answer as a class.

268

FF IC IA L

6. Solar energy will be used to solve the problem of the shortage of energy. Activity 3: Production III. Further practice Ex 7 - P42 Ex 7: Look at the pictures and write what will be - Have Ss discuss in pairs done in the future. what will be done in the * Suggestions future. Write their answers 1. A hydro power station will be built in the independently. region to increase the electricity. - Ss discuss in pairs then some 2. Solar panels will be put / installed on the roof Ss write on the board. of the buildings. - T checks and corrects if any 3. A network of wind turbines will be installed to generate electricity. 4. Bicycles will be used to travel in the city

4. Consolidation. - Ask Ss summarize the lesson: future continuous tense and the simple future passive. 5. Homework. - Learn by heart the structures + new words - Redo all exercises (B3, B4, B5) page 31- 32 workbbok - Prepare UNIT 10: COMMUNICATION/ page 43- textbook

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÝ DUYỆT

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Ngày 18 tháng 03 năm 2019

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

Period 82- Test correction

ẠY

KÈ

WEEK 29 Pre: 19 / 03 / 2019. Te: ....../ 03 / 2019.

I/ Objectives. 1. Knowledge: - After the lesson, Ss will be able toread the test again and find out their mistakes and correct themselves and T can evaluate Ss’ knowledge. - Vocabulary: Words related to the themes: Our world. - Phonetics: The ways to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: Present simple, present perfect, simple past, superlatives of long adjs, and imperratives. 269

FF IC IA L

2. Skills: - To check Ss’ language focus, reading and writing skills. 3. Attitude: - Teach Ss to be strict and honest. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Being able todo the exercises well. - Ss love the subject and be aware of the mistakes they made then correct them and study harder. II/ Preparations. 1. Teacher’s: - Materials: Paper tests. - Equipment: sub - board. 2. Students’: No. III/ Teaching process. 1- Class Organization

- Attendance: 7A: ...../ 37 - Absence: ............................................................................... 7B: ...../ 33…........................................................................... 7C: ...../ 35…........................................................................... 2- Oral test - During the lesson. 3- New lesson A. Warm- up:*Chatting: - Ask Ss some questions about energy sources B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

1. Test correction A. LISTENING ( 1.5 pts) I. Listen to a music festival and tick ( ) true (T) or false (F). (1.5pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 6 = 1.5 ®iÓm 1- F 2- F 3- T 4- F 5- T 6- T Tapescript: Last summer holiday my family went back to the UK and we went to a music festival on the Isle of Wight. It is one of the most famous music festivals in our country, which takes place every June. When we got there, I was impressed by the huge number of people. You know about sixty thousand people went to the event. We didn’t stay at a hotel but put up a tent in the campsite. It was lots of fun. We listened to a lot of songs by many bands such as The Killers and The Stone Roses. Guess what? We met Jon Bon Jovi! He’s my dad’s favourite singer. He and his band stirred up the crowd in nearly three hours with the hit songs. We also went to the Bohemian Woods, a beautiful woodland down by

* Give the paper test back and correct the test.

MAIN CONTENTS

KÈ

- Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

ẠY

- Ss give the answers in turn.

- T: explains if it is necessary.

- Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

270

- Ss give the answers in turn.

the river. There we enjoyed a mix of good music from around the world and escaped the busy and noisy festival for a while.

- T: explains if it is necessary.

B. LANGUAGE FOCUS (4.5pts)

- Ss write the answers on the board in turn.

FF IC IA L

- Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

I. Choose the word which has underlined part pronounced differently from others.(1.0pt)Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0.25 ®iÓm x 4 = 1.0 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- C 2- A 3- D 4- B NO 2: 1- B 2- A3- D 4- D II. Choose the word that has a different stress pattern from the others.(0.5 pt) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0.25 ®iÓm x 2 = 0.5 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- B 2- D NO 2: 1- B 2- A III. Choose the best option to complete these sentences. (2.5pt) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0.25 ®iÓm x 10 = 2.5 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- C 2- B3- C 4- A 5-B 6- C 7- C 8- A 9- B 10- C NO 2: 1- D 2- B 3- B 4- C 5-C 6- B 7- C 8- C 9- A 10- A IV. Give the correct form of the word given to complete the sentences (0.5 pt) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0.25 ®iÓm x 2 = 0.5 ®iÓm 1- festive 2- performance

- Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

- T: explains if it is necessary.

C. READING. (2.5pts)

I. Read the following passage and choose the best answer for each blank (1.25 pt) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0.25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1.25 ®iÓm 1- C 2- D 3- A 4- B 5-C II. Read the passage and choose the best answer. (1.25 pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0.25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1.25 ®iÓm 1- B2- C 3- C 4- B 5- D

- Ss give the answers in turn.

KÈ

- T: explains if it is necessary.

ẠY

- Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

- Ss give the answers in turn.

- T: explains if it is necessary.

D. WRITING. (1.5pts)

FF IC IA L

2. Remark *The result. - Class 7A:…./ 37 from 5 7B:…./ 33 7C:…./ 35

* Give the general remarks -T gives general remarks of good and bad points. - T gives compliments to the excellent students and points out the limits of some week Ss. - T collects Ss’ marks

- T: explains if it is necessary.

- Ss write the answers on the board in turn.

- Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

NO 2: 1, How far is it from your house to school? 2, I used to walk to school when I was a student. 3. It’s about 10 kilometres from her house to the city center. 4, Despite being so young, he performs excellently. II. Make questions for the underlined parts in each following sentence. (0.5pt) Mçi câu ®óng ®−îc 0.25 ®iÓm x 2 = 0.5 ®iÓm NO 1: 1, How far is it from your house to the market? 2, Where did you buy this T-shirt for your father? NO 2: 1, How far is it from your school to the park? 2, When did you go to the Flower Festival in Da Lat?

4. Consolidation - Retell the main content of the lesson: new words and grammar from unit 1 to unit 6 5. Homework - Review all grammar and new words. - Prepare: Unit 10:Communication / Page 43- Textbook. Pre: 19/ 03/ 2019 Te: ...../ 03/ 2019

KÈ

Period 83: UNIT 10: SOURCES OF ENERGY. Lesson 4: Communication

ẠY

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to talk about their carbon footprint, types and source of energy as well as the ways how to save energy in life. - Vocabulary: The lexical items related to the topic “Energy sources”. - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. 2. Skills: + Speaking: take a survey about how big their carbon footprint is and then explain how well their partner saves energy. + Reading:read the text and do the matching and answer the questions. 3. Attitude: 272

How to save energy?

FF IC IA L

- To teach Ss to have responsibility for saving energy and protecting our environment 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about how to save energy and protect our environment. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about energy. Have civic duty to save energy. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S2: does B3- p 31- workbook - S3: does B4- p 31- workbook 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Brainstorming: use bikes

+) Suggested answers: - take a shower /- ride a bike /- use public transport /- use a hand-fan - use low energy light bulbs /- turn off electricity things / - use biogas B. Presentation: MAIN CONTENTS

KÈ

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

ẠY

Activity 1: Presentation - Have Ss read each item in 1 HOW BIG IS YOUR CARBON FOOTPRINT? independently and write the Ex 1: Answer the questions below with a number (from 1 to 4) in the boxes number from 1 to 4. 2= often in accordance with what they 1= always 4= never always, often, sometimes or never 3= sometimes Do you ………? do. 1, take showers... - Ss work individually to do the exercise. 2, walk or ride... - Ask Ss to mark each other’s 3, use public transport…… answers in pairs. After adding up 4, use a handfan the marks, ask Ss to write the score 5, use low energy in the total score box. 273

- T checks and corrects if any.

6, turn off the …. 7, only use as much water as… 8, only use a little electricity 9, use biogas …. 10, go to school by bike

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 2: Practice Ex 2: Work in pairs. Add up each other’s - Explain how to do the task then answers, and look up the score below. Then ask Ss to work in pairs to add up explain how well your partner saves energy. each other’s answers and then explain how well they save energy. Keys: - Ss do the task in pairs. 10- 20: Your footprint is small. You are - Have Ss explain in pairs how well really environmentally friendly they save energy, using the three 21- 30: Your footprint is quite small. levels of scores in 2. Remember to care about, and respect the - Collect Ss’ result and show them world around us. how well they save energy 31- 40: Your footprint is quite big. You do “Look up the score and answer the something to save energy, but there’s following question:What is your always room for improvement. total score?” Activity 3: Production 1.Transfering the learning task: Ex 3: Talk about your - Have Ss talk about your partners’ carbon partner’s carbon footprint to footprint in groups, using the prompts in 3 and your group. the ideas in 1. 2. Doing the task: Example: - Ss work in group of 6. My partner’s carbon footprint - Ss talk about their partner’s carbon footprint to is big. He is considerate the member of the group. because he rides his bike to 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: travel short distance. He could - Call on some Ss to talk aloud. try harder to use showers - Other Ss give comments and T gives instead of baths. By reducing corrections. the baths, he can help to save 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: energy in the future. -T remarks and valuate Ss’ working

4. Consolidation - Talk about their carbon footprint as well as the ways how to save energy in life. 5. Homework - Do B6 + C1 + C2 / page 32, 33 in the workbook. - Prepare:UNIT 10: SKILL 1/ page 44- textbook. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pre: 19/ 03/ 2019 Te: ...../ 03/ 2019 274

Period 84: UNIT 10: SOURCES OF ENERGY. Lesson 5: Skills 1

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to read for specific information about houses in the future and future appliance as well as well will be able to talk about their advantages and disadvantages. - Vocabulary: The lexical items related to the topic “Energy sources”: create, replace, turn, convert, value,… - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. 2. Skills: + Reading:read the questions and give the answers + Speaking: How to make a speech about advantages and disadvantages of energy. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to have responsibility for saving energy and protecting our environment 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about advantages and disadvantages of each type of energy resources in the future. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about saving energy. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test -S1: writes new words - S2: answers the questions: What do you do to have small footprint? 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Networks:

275

wind

sun

water

nuclear

B. Presentation:

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

FF IC IA L

Names of energy

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Reading Part 1- P44: I. Reading: - Have Ss work in pairs to discuss. 1. Discuss the following questions. - Ss discuss the questions in the 1, What are the main sources of energy in textbook. Viet Nam? Coal, oil, hydro power,… - T moves around and gives help if 2, What types of energy sources will be necessary. used in the future? (solar energy, wind energy…) 2. Read the text below and check your Part 2- P44: ideas. - Ask Ss to read the text silently and *New words: check their answers. - Fossil fuel (n): nhiên liệu hóa thạch - T supplies some new words to help - to create = to produce = to generate: Ss understand the text clearly. tạo ra - Ss write down the new words on - to replace: thay thế their notebooks then read the text in - to turn (turbines): xoay turbin silence and check the answers - to convert into:chuyển hóa thành - Ss give out their answers. - to value: xem trọng - T checks and corrects if any. - alternative (a): thay thế - a great deal of = a lot of: 3. Read the text then answer the Part 3a- P44: questions. - Guide Ss the way how to do Ex3a a. Match the verbs with the nouns. - Give examples Keys: - Ask Ss to work individually 1 – c. create energy - Call some Ss to the black-board - T checks then provides the correct 2 – a. drive machinery answers 3 – e. generate electricity 4 – b. turn turbines 5 – d. heat houses. Part 3b- P44: b. Answer the questions. 1.Transfering the learning task: - Guide Ss the way how to do Ex 3b Keys: - Ask Ss to read the text again and 1. Two. They are renewable and nonrenewable. answer the questions in pairs. 2. Hydro power is limited because dams 2. Doing the task: 276

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- Ss do this exercise in pairs, cannot be built in certain areas, and thencompare their answers with nuclear energy is dangerous. others. 3. Because the wind can turn turbines to 3. Reporting the task result and make electricity. Solar energy can be discuss: changed into electricity or cab be used - Have some pairs ask and answer the to heat or cool our houses. questions as a classand other Ss to 4. We use hydro power most. We think write their answers on the board. Viet Nam will use the wind and the - Other Ss give comments. sun as alternative sources of energy in 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the future. the task: -T remarks and confirms the correct answers. Activity 2: Speaking Part 4- P44: II. Speaking. - Ask Ss to read the example and 4. Ask and answer questions about the do the task in pairs. advantages and disadvantages of each type - Ss work in pairs. of energy source. - Have some pairs role play as a Example : class. A: What type of energy is oil? - Call some pairs to role-play B: It is non-renewable source of energy, before the class because it cannot easily be replaced. - Cross-check A: What are its advantages and - Feedback disadvantages? B: It can be used to drive machinery, but it also pollutes the environment. ……………………………….. Part 5- P44: - Divide the class into 4 groups 5. Talk about the advantages and - Have Ss make a speech about the disadvantages of each type of energy source. advantages and disadvantages of Example : each type of energy source. Hydro power is a renewable source of energy - T observe because it comes from water. It is cheap and - call some groups to represent their plentiful. Unfortunately, dams can only be work built in certain areas. - Feedback

4. Consolidation - Teacher summarizes the lesson. 5. Homework - Ask Ss to learn new words by heart. - Do exercises in workbook. - Prepare: UNIT 10: Skill 2/ Page 45- textbook. Ngày 25 tháng 03 năm 2019

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÝ DUYỆT 277

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

WEEK 30 Pre: 26/ 03/ 2019 Te: ...../ 04/ 2019

FF IC IA L

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

KÈ

Period 85: UNIT 10: SOURCES OF ENERGY. Lesson 6: Skills 2

ẠY

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to listen to a passage of a new source of energy and write a short passage about how to save energy. - Vocabulary: The lexical items related to the topic “Energy sources” - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. 2. Skills: + Listening: Listen to the passage, do true/ false exercise and complete the sentences + Writing:Write a passage about energy and the ways to save energy in life. 3. Attitude: 278

FF IC IA L

- To teach Ss to have responsibility for saving energy and protecting our environment 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Discussing about how to save energy. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about saving energy. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Write new words - Read the passage (Professor Galton’s speech) and answer some questions. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Discussing: - T asks Ss to discuss the following question: What should we do to save energy? - Ss work in groups of three or four to discuss the question. - T collects Ss’ ideas and remarks if any. Suggested ideas: + Using electricity more efficiently + Reducing the use of fossil fuel. + Turning off the lights before going to bed. + Using bike for the short trip. B. Presentation: MAIN CONTENTS

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Listening Part 1- P45: I. Listening - Ask Ss to look at the picture and 1. Look at the pictures. Discuss the answer the questions in pairs. followings. - Ss discuss the questions in pairs 1, What do you think is unusual about - Set the sense this means of transport? - Lead to the new lesson 2, Have you seen any transport like this? 3, What should we do to save energy in our life? Part 2- P45: 2. Listen to the passage and tick true or - T asks Ss to read the task 2 in their false to the statements. book. Have Ss guess the answers first. *New words - Call on some Ss to talk about their to lead to: dẫn đến 279

to protect: bảo vệ to invest: đầu tư to increase: gia tăng >< to reduce: làm giảm to avoid (doing st): tránh làm gì *Keys: 1, T 2,T 3,T 4, F 5, T

FF IC IA L

guess as a class. - T can give some words before Ss listen. - T plays the recording twice. - T asks Ss to listen and do the task. - Ss listen again and check their answers - T corrects their answers - Ss copy in notebook

ẠY

KÈ

Part 3- P45: 3. Listen to the passage again and 1.Transfering the learning task: complete the sentences - T asks Ss listen and do the task Keys: individually. 1, mountainous 2. Doing the task: 2, Cooking and heating - Ss do this exercise individually 3, air pollution thencompare their answers with others. 4, on the increase - Ss check their answers with each 5, wind and the sun other. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss: - T calls Ss to give their answer to the class and correct the mistakes where necessary. - Other Ss give comments. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task: -T remarks and confirms the correct answers. Activity 2: Writing Part 4- P45: II. Writing - Ask Ss to complete the article 4. Complete the article. Use the phrases independently, using the phrases (A-E). below. Have Ss read the complete article, paying Keys: attention to the problems and solutions of 1 -E 2 -D 3 -A how to save energy. 4-B 5-C - T checks and confirms the correct answers. 5. Discuss the following ways to save Part 5- P45: energy. Decide on the 5 most - Divide the class into 6 groups important, then write them in the box. - Have Ss practice in groups - Have Ss look at the prompts and discuss What should you do to save energy? the ways to save energy. - Call one student to give the answers to 1. Reduce our electricity the class. 2. Use public transport - Check and confirm the correct answers. 3. Reduce the use of fossil fuel. 280

- Present their works on the sub-boards

4. Increase the tax on petrol. 5. Use low energy light bulbs. 6. Write a short passage about what we should do to save energy. ( maybe at home) Example writing: Every day, we use too much energy at home. What should we do to save energy? I think we should use electricity more efficiently to reduce our electricity bills. We can do this by turning off the light before going to bed and using low energy light bulbs.We should avoid using cars or motorbikes for short trips….

FF IC IA L

Part 6- P45: - T observe - T checks the writing of students and gives Ss help if necessary. - Feedback - Ask Ss to read aloud their writing.

Pre: 26/ 03/ 2019 Te: ...../ 04/ 2019

4. Consolidation - Ask some Ss to read aloud their writing. Teacher and other students listen and give remarks. 5. Homework - Do exercises: E1+ E2 workbook. - Complete the writing on the notebook. - Prepare: UNIT 10:Looking back + project/ Page 46, 47- textbook. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Period 86: UNIT 10: SOURCES OF ENERGY. Lesson 7: Looking back & Project

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to revise what they have learnt about ENERGY SOURCESin the previous lessons as well as make their own products slogans about how to save energy. - Vocabulary: The lexical items related to the topic “Energy sources” - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. 2. Skills: + Reading: Read and complete the dialogue + Writing:Complete the sentences using the future continuous tense and the future passive voice. + Speaking: Work in groups and answer the question about how to save energy. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to have responsibility for saving energy and protecting our environment 281

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about how to save energy and protect our environment. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about saving energy. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Write new words - Read the passage (Professor Galton’s speech) and answer some questions. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Revision (Ex 2- P46): - Have Ss put the words into the correct groups to recall some new words in Ex 2- P46 part vocabulary. - Ss work in groups to do the task. * Put the words into the correct groups. Sources of energy Advantages Disadvantages Biogas Clean Polluted Solar energy Cheap Expensive Gas Plentiful Limited Nuclear energy Available Exhausted/ dangerous Water power unlimited harmful - Read 3 times in chorus - Checking remembering by games - Guide how to play - Observe & feedback B. Presentation:

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

*Presentation - Review briefly the usages and forms of the future continuous tense and the simple future passive voice.

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Grammar I. Grammar: (Review) 1, The future continuous tense. =>expressing an action in progress at a definite point of time in the future. *Form:S + will be + V-ing 282

2, The future simple passive form. Passive form is used in some cases: - when the doer of the action is not known /not important - Explain the uses and the - when the object of a sentence is not important form again *Form:S + will be + Vpp ( by O ). NOTE: If the doer is definite and still important, we can add “by + O” at the end of the sentence. II. Practice: *Practice 2. Complete the sentences using the verbs in Ex 2- P46 - Ss complete this task brackets in the future continuous. individually. Key: - Have Ss compare the 1, will be wearing 2, will be lying answers in pairs. 3, will be working 4, will be studying - Check and confirm correct 5, will be building answers. 3. Change the following sentences into the passive Ex 3- P46 voice. - Ss complete this task Key: individually. 1. A lot of money will be spent on heating next year. - Have Ss compare the 2. Biogas will be used for fuel in homes and for answers in pairs. transport. - Call someone to represent their answers. 3. Renewable energy like wind and solar energy will be used to solve the problems of pollution. - Provide the keys 4. The use of electricity will be reduced to save - Ask Ss to write down their energy. answers on their notebooks 5. A hydro power station will be built in this area Ex 4- P46 next year. - Ask Ss to complete the 4. Complete the dialogue, using the future dialogue by using the future continuous form of the verbs. continuous form of the verbs. - Ss do the task individually Key: 1, will be earning 2, will be doing - Call some Ss to give their 3, will be doing 4, will be hosting own answers 5, will be doing - Feedback and correct mistakes if necessary Activity 2: Communication Ex 5- P46: 5. Look at the pictures and answer the 1.Transfering the learning task: question below -Have Ss look at the pictures and What should you do to save energy? discuss in groups what they Suggested answers: should do to save energy. - We should turn off the fire when the kettle is 2. Doing the task: boiling. - Ss discuss in groups to answers - We should turn off the faucet when the tub is the question. full of water.

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- Give examples

283

FF IC IA L

3. Reporting the task result and - We should close the refrigerator’s door when discuss: we do not use it. - T calls Ss to give their answer to - We should turn off the fan when we do not the class. use it. - Other Ss give comments. - We should turn off the lights when there is no 4. Giving the remarks to their one in the room. doing the task: - We should turn off the gas-stoves when we -T remarks and confirms the do not cook. correct answers. Activity 3: Project - Have Ss discuss the slogans 1. Look at the slogans and - Ask Ss to look at the two sample slogans at the answer the questions below. bottom and discuss the answers to the two - How are they used? questions. - Why are they important “Slogans should be short and effective. They 2. Write simple slogans in your should have message and attract attention” groups about how to save - Have Ss work in groups to draw slogans about energy. how to save energy. ( maybe do at home ) - Call some groups to present their products

(exhibition) - T observes then feedback.

4. Consolidation - Retell the main content of the lesson. 5. Homework - Redo all the exercises above and do exercises in the workbook. - Prepare: UNIT 11: Getting started/ P48- text book. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pre: 27/ 03/ 2019 Te: ...../ 04/ 2019

KÈ

Period 87: UNIT 11: TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE. Lesson 1: Getting started

ẠY

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able touse lexical items related to future means of transport and movement, understand the difference between facts and opinions. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “Travelling in the future”:flying car, jet pack, teleporter, driverless car, helicopter,… - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:Will for future prediction. 2. Skills: + Reading: read the conversation and answer the questions. + Listening: listen and read the conversation. + Speaking: practice giving opinion 284

Future means of transport

FF IC IA L

3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to behave politely when they are on the road. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Distinguishing facts and opinions. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about means of transport and problems solving. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - During the lesson. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Brain storming: - Ask Ss how people in Viet Nam will travel around in year 2100. car plane

ẠY

KÈ

- Set the sense then lead to the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS Activity 1: Presentation *Pre- teach vocabulary: expression/ I. Vocabulary pictures translation/ situation -Flying car (n): ô tô bay - T says out the word by word while Ss listen -Jet pack (n) : động cơ phản lực mini and repeat after. -Teleporter (n): dịch chuyển tức thời - T: writes new words on the board. -Driverless car (n): ô tô không người - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first then lái the whole class. -Crash (v) (n): đâm, va chạm - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. -Avoid (v): tránh - Ss copy the new words in their notebooks. -Helicopter (n) : máy bay trực thăng *Checking: What and where -Imaginative(a) : giàu trí tưởng - Let Ss predict how people travel in the tượng future,then write some of the students’ answers on the board. 285

Activity 2: Practice - T uses the picture in the book on page 48 and II. Practice asks students to look at it then answer the 1/ Listen and read questions: + What can you see in the picture?

a. Choose the correct answer. Key 1. a 2. b 3. c 4. a

+ What do you think is on the screen? What topic are they talking about? - Ss listen to the dialogue. - Ss read the dialogue in silent. Part 1a- P49: - Ask Ss to do exercise a - Ss work individually then compare in pairs. - T corrects and gives the right answers Look out T emphasizes “-less is added to a noun to form an adjective which means without the thing mentioned” - Ask Ss to give more examples. Part 1b- P49: 1. Transferring the learning task. -Ask Ss to read the conversation in pairs and answer the questions. 2. Doing the task. - Ss read the conversation then answer the questions in pairs - Have Ss compare the answers in groups. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Call some pairs to ask and answer for the class to listen. For a more advanced class, questions 2 &3 can be used as a team-based class debate. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T corrects and gives the right answers Part 2- P49: - T explains what a fact is, what an opinion is. (Remember box) - Give more examples if necessary and ask Ss to identify which are facts and which are opinions. - Ask Ss to work in pairs to tick the F (Facts)orO (Opinions) box. -Ask for Ss answers as a class. - Ask Ss to explain their decisions before giving the keys. For question 5, tell Ss that a prediction is always an opinion. - Ask Ss to explain before giving your own

FF IC IA L

+ What are the people doing? What makes you think so?

ẠY

KÈ

b. Answer the questions Key 1. If there are too many flying cars, there will be traffic jams in the sky. Some means of transport will not be convenient in bad weather (e.g. jet pack). Future means of transport may use a lot of fuel which will make pollution worse. 2&3: Open answers from Ss.

286

2/ Facts or opinion? Remember! *A fact is something which can be proved (to be true or false) *An opinion is something which you believe or feel. Key: 1. F 4. O

2. O 5. O

3. F

FF IC IA L

explanation. 3a/ Find future means of Part 3a- P49: transport from the - Ss work individually to come up with the means conversation of transport mentioned in the conversation. Key: - Ss give answers then T corrects and gives - flying car feedback. - driverless car Part 3b- P49: - T makes an example by giving a combination, 3b/ Combine the adjective e.g. an electric car. and nouns. - Ask Ss to say how they think an electric car works. Then Ss work individually to make a list of the combined words. Activity 3: Production Part 3c- P49: III. Further practice - Tell Ss how to do this task by looking at the 3c/ Choose your three most example given. Then ask Ss to work in pairs. interesting means of transport. After the discussion, ask the class how many Then share them with your combined words they have. Elicit the words on partner. the board. Then ask Ss to pick up one favourite Example: combination from their list. - Call on several pairs and have them to A: I think a space car sounds great. explain why they choose that means of B: Oh. I don’t. I think an transport as their favourite one. underwater bus is better.

KÈ

4. Consolidation - Lexical items related to future means of transport and movement, understand the difference between facts and opinions 5. Homework - Learn new words by heart. - Read the conversation again. - Do exercises: B1, B2 (workbook)+ Translate the conversation in Getting started into Vietnamese. - Prepare: UNIT 11:A closer look 1/ textbook.

ẠY

Ngày 01 tháng 04năm 2019

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÝ DUYỆT

Trần Thị Thanh Trà ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------287

FF IC IA L O Ơ

WEEK 31 Pre: 02/ 04/ 2019 Te: ...../ 04/ 2019

Period 88: UNIT 11: TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 2: A closer look 1

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to appropriately use rising and falling intonation for Yes-No and Wh-questions & use lexical items related to future means of transport and movement. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to future means of transport and movement:Pedal, float, heated, tram, bullet train,… - Phonetics: The way to rise and fall intonation for questions. - Grammar:(to) drive/ ride + means of transport; in/ on + means of transport. 2. Skills: - Speaking: practice raising and falling intonation for questions. -Writing: use in/ on to complete the sentences. -Listening: Listen and practice the questions 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to behave politely when they are on the road. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about types of transportation and movement words. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about means of transport and problems solving. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. 288

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

FF IC IA L

- Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: goes to the board to write new words - S2+ S3: Read the conversation in Listen and read and then answer some questions. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Guessing game: The class can be started with a game. Write the verbs: drive, ride, fly, sail, pedal on pieces of paper. Ask one S at a time to volunteer to perform the action looking at the verb and the class guesses what action the S is doing. After each correct guess, write the verb on the board. Ask Ss to add means of transport they know that go with that verb. Explain that there may be a means of transport that is not suitable for particular verbs. B. Presentation: MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary * Teaching some new words: I. Vocabulary - T: writes new words on the board. Pedal (v), (n): đạp (xe), bàn đạp - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first then Float (v): nổi the whole class. Heated (adj): nóng - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. Hot air balloon (n): kinh khí cầu * Checking: rub out and remember. Tram (n): tàu điện Bullet train (n): tàu hỏa siêu tốc, (tàu viên đạn) Part 1- P50: -Let Ss work in pairs to do activity 1 then 1/ Cross out the means of elicit the answers. transport that DOESN’T go with - After having the keys, Ss work in pairs the verbs. again to say the correct phrases. Key: Eg: drive a train, drive a car, drive a bus. a. a motorbike (explain when ride

Part 2- P50: - Ask Ss to underline the most important key words in the thinking bubbles. Do the first item with Ss as an example. Ss then work individually and compare their answers in pairs. 289

is used and drive is used) b. a car c. a train d. a bus e. a plane 2/ Match the students with the transport. Key: a. a ship b. a bus

c. a hot air balloon d. a bicycle e. a plane f. motorbikes

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Part 3- P50: 3/ IN or ON? Complete the 1. Transferring the learning task. - Explain the use of in and on in Remember sentences. Key: box. 2. on - Ask Ss to complete the sentences in task 3- 1. in P50 individually 3. on 4. in 2. Doing the task. 5. in; on - Ss work individually then compare with partner. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Have some Ss give their own answers then others remark 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T checks and corrects if any - Give feedback Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation Part 4- P51: II. Pronunciation -Write two questions on the board: one Y/ N 4/ Listen and tick the correct question and one Wh- question. Tell Ss to say box the questions aloud and ask them to notice how Key: the two questions are said in different ways. - Tell Ss to look at the rules in the LOOK OUT 1. falling 2. rising box. 3. falling 4. rising - Have them ask some questions and have more practice. - Play the recording. Ss work individually and tick the appropriate box. Part 5- P51: 5/ Repeat the questions: - Ss practise saying the questions individually 1. What will be next? then as a class. 2. Do you think you can use it in - Have some Ss repeat aloud before class bad weather? 3. How much fuel will these means of transport use? 4. Will pollution be much worse? Part 6- P51: 6/ Practice these questions. - Ss practise saying the questions individually Work out whether they have and decide if they are spoken with rising or rising or falling intonation? falling voices. Do not give the keys at this point. Then listen and repeat - Play the recording for Ss to check their answers, then confirm their correct answers. Part 7- P51: - Ask Ss to parctice asking and answering the questions in part 6 in pairs. 290

7/ In pairs, ask and answer the questions in 6. A: Have you ever heard of bullet

- Some pairs practice in front of the class. - T remarks and corrects if any.

train? B: Yes, I have/ No, I haven’t

FF IC IA L

4. Consolidation - Repeat the ways to rise and fall intonation for Yes-No and Wh-questions & use lexical items related to future means of transport and movement. 5. Homework - Learn by heart the new words - Do ex A1, A2/ p36- workbook - Prepare UNIT 11: A CLOSER LOOK 2/ P51, 52- textbook ------------------------------------------------------------------------Pre: 02/ 04/ 2019 Te: ...../ 04/ 2019

Period 89: UNIT 11: TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 3: A closer look 2

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use will for future prediction & use possessive pronouns. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “Travelling in the future”: - Phonetics: The way to rise and fall intonation for questions. - Grammar:Will for future prediction and possessive pronouns. 2. Skills: - Speaking: make sentences using possessive pronouns. -Writing: complete the sentences using WILL and possessive pronouns. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to behave politely when they are on the road. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about types of transportation in the future. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about means of transport and problems solving. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 291

FF IC IA L

7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: goes to the board to write new words - S2: goes to the board to mark the main stress of these words. Difficult disaster favourite potato excellent beautiful exhausted polluting dangerous convenient 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Guessing game: - Set up the situation to lead into the lesson: T- Ss exchange: T: How do you go to school everyday? Ss: I go to school by….. (bike). T: What color is your bike? Ss: My bike/ It is red/….. T: Mine is white. And how will you travel when you are 25? Ss: I will …….. - Lead into the objectives of the lesson is to use will for future prediction and use possessive pronouns. B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

KÈ

Activity 1: Presentation * Will for future prediction I Grammar: -Remind Ss of Phuc, Veronica, and Mai * Will for future prediction and the group’s project in Getting 1. Complete the rule box. Stated. Ask Ss if they are talking about Key: We often use will to make a the past, the present, or the future. prediction about the future. - Ask Ss to cover the text to listen Form carefully to pick up any Affirmative S + will + V phrases/sentences that contain will. -Go through the example with Ss. Say Negative S + will not + V the two sentences have the same (won’t) meaning. Interrogative Will + S + V?

ẠY

* Possessive pronouns -Highlight the changes in the possessive in the two sentences. 1. This is your pen. 2. This pen is yours. -Explain that we use possessive pronouns to avoid repeating information. - Explain the use of possessive adjective and possessive pronoun. -Draw Ss’ attention to the table: The personal pronouns:I, you, she, he, it, we, they, correspond the respective

* Possessive pronouns Example: - This is your pen. ‘your’ is a possessive adjective and it is put before the noun. - This pen is yours. ‘yours’ is a possessive pronouns and stands alone. * We use a possessive pronoun instead of a phrase. Example: Phuc’s bike is red. Mine is blue.

292

possessive adjectives my, your, his, her, its, our, their, and the respective possessive pronouns mine, yours, his, hers, its, ours, theirs.

(mine = my bike) *A possessive adjective comes before a noun. Example: Their garden is so beautiful.

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 2: Practice Part2- P52: II. Practice 1. Transferring the learning task. 2. Rearrange the words to make - Ask Ss to do Ex 2 individually then sentences. compare with partner Key: 1. People won’t use flying cars until 2. Doing the task. - Ss work individually then compare their the year 2050. answers with each other. 2. Do you think the fuel price will 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. increase next month? - Have some Ss write the answers on the 3. The mail won’t arrive until next board. week. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the 4. I don’t think he will take the new position. task. 5. We will use more solar energy in the - T checks and corrects if any future. - Give feedback. Part3- P52: -Write ‘fortune teller’ on the board. Ask 3. Complete the sentences with the Ss why people want to visit a fortune correct form of WILL teller, and what the fortune teller is Key: expected to talk about. 1. Will I be 2. will be - Ask Ss if they have ever talked with a 3. Will I be4. will be fortune teller about the future,and if the 5. Will I be6. won’t be predictions have become true or not. 7. will travel -Ss work in pairs to complete the task. Then T gives feedback to Ss as a class. -If time allows, ask Ss to play roles to predict the future of each other. 4. Complete the sentences with Part4- P52: possessive pronouns. -Ss work individually to complete task 4. Key: - Ss do the task individually. 1. This computer is theirs. - T calls on some Ss to write the answers 2. The black bike is mine on the board and gives feedback. 3. These shoes are his. 4. The cat is Veronica’s 5. The picture is ours Activity 3: Production -Have Ss work in groups of 4 or 5. Each III. Further practice group member writes 5 sentences 5. GAME: Choose any five things individually, then the group get together to you can see in the classroom. Make see how many sentences they have. The sentences about them. group that has the most correct sentences Example: wins. - This classroom is ours. 293

-Have the groups write in 3 minutes as many - It will be rebuilt in the future. sentences as possible. The group that has the - It will be repainted yellow. most correct sentences wins. ……………………………….

Lesson 4: Communication

FF IC IA L

4. Consolidation - Ask Ss summarize the lesson: will for future prediction & use possessive pronouns. 5. Homework - Learn by heart the structures + new words - Redo all exercises B3, B4, B5/P37, 38- workbbok. - Prepare UNIT 11: COMMUNICATION/ P53- textbook. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pre: 04/ 04/ 2019 Te: ...../ 04/ 2019 Period 90: UNIT 11: TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to talk about traffic problems and give solutions. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “Travelling in the future”: - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words of the lesson. - Grammar:Will for future prediction and possessive pronouns. 2. Skills: -Speaking: talk about traffic problems and solutions. -Writing: complete the table. - Reading: read and underline the problems. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to save energy and protect the environment. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about traffic problems and solutions. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about means of transport and problems solving. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 294

FF IC IA L

2. Oral test - S1: writes personal pronouns/ possessive pronouns and adjective pronouns - S2: does B3- workbook =>T gives remarks and marks 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Chatting: - Start the lesson by telling the class one bad experience of yours about using a particular means of transport. Write the key words of the story on the board. - Ask Ss if they have similar experience. You can also bring in one or two photos about transport problems where you live and discuss them with the class. - Ss work in pairs to do this task. T then calls on some pairs to share their list with the class. B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Presentation * Teaching some new words: I. New words - Metro (n): tàu ngầm (đi trong thành phố) - T: writes new words on the board. - Ss: listen and repeat in individual - Skytrain (n): tàu trên không first then the whole class. - Gridlocked (n): kẹt cứng, tắc nghẽn giao - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. thông * Checking: What and where - Face (v): đối mặt với

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 2: Practice Part 1- P53: II. Practice - Tell the class one bad experience about 1. Discussion using a particular means of transport. What problems with transport do you - Ss read the two texts individually and have? underline the problems mentioned. As a class, elicit their answers on the board. - Ask if they have similar problems where they live. - Ss work in groups and discuss. 2. Read, underline the problems Suggested answers: Part 2- P53: + biggest city without a metro or 1. Transferring the learning task. - Ask Ss to do Ex 2 individually then skytrain + the city is getting gridlocked compare with partner + too many cars 2. Doing the task. - Ss work individually then compare their + serious pollution + fewer buses answers with each other. + it takes too long to drive in the city 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Have some Ss write the answers on the board. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the 3. Think of a future means of task. - T checks and corrects if any transport that will help people in - Give feedback. Wonderland. 295

What kind of energy will it use?

What will it look like?

Means of transport How many people can it transport?

Where can people use it?

FF IC IA L

Part 3- P53: - Ss work in groups of 4 or 5 to design a future means of transport that will help people in Wonderland, using the prompt web provided. If possible, provide Ss with posters (A0 sized paper) and marker pens.

Activity 3: Production Part 4- P53: 4. Present your solutions to the class. As - Prepare the evaluation form on A4 you listen to other groups, write your paper for each group to allow for comments in the table below. more writing space if possible. Explain they should listen carefully to Group Interesting Does it Favorite part? other groups in order to give name idea? (1-5) answer the (make a evaluation (as a group). (5 is the problems? note) highest score and 1 is the lowest score). After all groups have presented, T collects the evaluation and adds up the scores to find out the best presentation.

4. Consolidation - Talk about traffic problems and give solutions 5. Homework - Do C1 + C2 + B6 page in the workbook. - Prepare: UNIT 11: SKILL 1/ P54- textbook.

Ngày 08 tháng 04 năm 2019

ẠY

KÈ

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÝ DUYỆT

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

296

FF IC IA L

WEEK 32: Pre: 08/ 04/ 2019 Te: ...../ 04/ 2019

Period 91: UNIT 11: TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 5: Skills 1

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to read for specific information about the inventions of future means of transport. And give facts or opinions about transport. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “Travelling in the future”: - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words of the lesson. - Grammar:Will for future prediction and possessive pronouns. 2. Skills: - Speaking: talk about transport. -Reading:read for specific information about the inventions of future means of transport. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to be hard- working and be self- confident. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Distinguishing facts and opinions. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about means of transport and problems solving. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 297

car

bike Means of transport

tram

train

B. Presentation:

FF IC IA L

7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test -S1: writes new words - S2: answers the questions: What do you do to have small footprint? 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Brainstorming:

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Reading I. Reading Part 1- P54: 1. Look at the pictures, what do you -Ask Ss to look at the pictures and describe think is the connection between what they see. them? - Help Ss to find out the connection Suggested answers: between the pictures by asking questions - These are all personal of transport. such as: How many people can travel on One person can travel on them. They them? Where are these vehicles used? How are all used for ground transport. can these people control the vehicles? Do People control them by using handle not give the names of the vehicles at this bars point. 2. Read the text below and find the Part 2- P54: names of the transport inventions - Ask Ss to read the text quickly and try to * New words identify the names of transport inventions -Flop (v): thất bại, rơi xuống in the text. -Hover scooter (n): xe trượt trên mặt - T corrects the mistakes. đất * Teaching some new words: -Monowheel (n): xe đạp một bánh - Elicit the new words. -Segway (n): segway (tên một loại - T: writes new words on the board. phương tiện giao thông có 2 bánh di - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first chuyển bằng sự di chuyển tay lái) then the whole class. -Pull (v): kéo>< push - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. -Handle bar (n): tay cầm; tay lái * Checking: ROR - Create (v) -> Creation (n) - weird (adj): kì lạ, khác thường 3. Can you find words in the text to Part 3- P54: match the definition below? - Ask Ss match the words with their Key: meaning. 298

- Ss work individually then compare the answers with their partners. - T observes and helps Ss when necessary

1. invention 2. flop 3. weird

FF IC IA L

Part 4- P54: 4.Answer the following questions 1. Transferring the learning task. Key: -Ask Ss to read the conversation in pairs 1. The Segway. and answer the questions. 2. Maybe because a personal hover 2. Doing the task. - Ss read the conversation then answer the scooter is expensive, and it may be difficult to park. questions in pairs 3. The monowheel. - Ss work in pairs to do the task. - Have Ss compare the answers in groups. 4. The Segway 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions aloud 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T corrects and gives the right answers - Ask Ss to write down on their notebooks Activity 2: Speaking II. Speaking Part 5- P54: - Explain the Study Skill box for opinion 5. Read the text again. Which statements are facts? Which are the signal words. writer’s opinion? - Ask Ss to use opinion signal words Key: where possible. 2. opinion - Remind Ss of the difference between a 1. fact fact and an opinion that they have learnt 3. opinion4. fact 5. opinion 6. fact in Getting Started. - Ss work in pairs to complete the task.

ẠY

KÈ

Part 6- P54: - Ss work in pair to prepare their presentation about the vehicle. Remind them to use statements about both facts and opinions. - Ss can add their own ideas where possible. - Call on some pairs to present it to the class. - T remarks and corrects if necessary.

6. Now in pairs, talk about the transport below. Use a mix of facts and opinions. Fact File Name: Sinclair C5 Description: Three wheels; small; electrical power Why flopped: bad in rain/ cold weather; slow; not safe.

4. Consolidation - Teacher summarizes the lesson. 5. Homework - Ask Ss to learn new words by heart. - Do exercises in workbook. 299

- Prepare: UNIT 11: Skill 2/ P55- textbook. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

FF IC IA L

Pre: 10/ 04/ 2019 Te: ...../ 04/ 2019

Period 92: UNIT 11: TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 6: Skills 2

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to get some more information about about a future means of transport and write a paragraph about future means of transport. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “Travelling in the future”: - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words of the lesson. - Grammar:Will for future prediction and possessive pronouns. 2. Skills: - Listening: Listen for specific information about a future means of transport. - Writing: write a paragraph about future means of transport. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to be hard- working and be self- confident. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about types of transport in the future. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about means of transport and problems solving. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Write new words - Read the passage and answer some questions. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: * Chatting: 300

- Ask Ss to talk about the transport in the future by answering the question: Which transport do you think of in the future? Suggested answers: flying car, driverless car, helicopter, … - Collect Ss’ answers and correct if necessary. - Lead to the new lesson. B. Presentation: MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Listening

I. Listening 1. Look at the picture. Which do you think are the correct options bellow? - Ss’ opinion

ẠY

KÈ

Part 1- P55: 1. Transferring the learning task. - Have Ss guess the answers first. Tell Ss that the questions ask about what they think, and not what is true about the vehicle. Remind them to use opinion signal words where possible. Do not give corrective feedback. 2. Doing the task. - Ss look at the picture and discuss the correct answers in pairs. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Have some Ss give the answers. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Accept all answers from Ss and ask them to explain why they think so. Part 2- P55: 1. Transferring the learning task. - Play the recording and ask Ss to check their answers in 1. 2. Doing the task. - Ss listen and check their answers in 1. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Have some Ss give the answers. - Ss give the answers in turn 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T checks and then gives feedback. Part 3- P55: 1. Transferring the learning task. - Ask Ss to listen again to answer the questions in 3. 2. Doing the task. - Ss work individually to answer the questions and compare the answers with their partners. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Have some Ss give the answers. - Ss give the answers in turn 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T corrects and gives the right answers

FF IC IA L

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

301

2. Now listen and check your answers. Key: 1. can 2. doesn’t 3. not easy 4. can’t 5. is

3. Listen again and answer the following questions. Key: 1. The vehicle is called TF-X 2. It can travel at 300 kph. 3. It was designed in 2013.

4. Tick the benefits of this vehicle that are mentioned

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- Ask Ss to write down on their notebooks. in the recording. Part 4- P55: 1. Transferring the learning task. Key: - Ask Ss to read the sentences given in part 4 and 1. It can avoid traffic. tick the benefits of this vehicle that mentioned in 2. It can avoid bad No inf the recording. weather. 2. Doing the task. 3. It travels fast. - Ss work in pairs to do the task. 4. You can invite three of your relatives or 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. friends to travel with - Have some Ss give the answers. you in this vehicle at - Ss give the answers in turn the same time. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. 5. Learning to drive - Give correct feedback and play the recording the car is simple. again if necessary. - Ss check and correct their answers. Activity 2: Writing Part 5- P55: II. Writing 1. Transferring the learning task. 5. Write a short paragraph about a -Ask Ss to refer to the text in Reading to future means of transport in this support Ss in this task. unit. Include both facts and your 2. Doing the task. opinions about the vehicle. - Ss refer to the text in Reading to cover the - name of means of transport. information given in 5. - how it looks - how its functions. - Ss write their paragraph individually based - What you think about it. on the suggestions in the book. - T goes around and gives help if any. 6. Swap your writing with your partner. Find which sentences are 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Have some Ss’ writings checked. facts, and which ones are 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. opinions. Do you agree or disagree - T checks and corrects some Ss’ writings with your friend’s opinions? Example writing: Part 6- P55: Many interesting means of 1. Transferring the learning task. - Have Ss swap their writing with each other. transports have been invented so Ask them to identify facts and opinions. far. In the future, I think there will be flying motorbikes. It will look a 2. Doing the task. bit different from motorbikes - Ss swap their writing with each other and identify facts and opinion. nowadays, but it can fly without wings. It will use electricity 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Ask Ss to read aloud their writing. transferred from solar energy. It 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. can travel fast and avoid bad - T collects some writing to correct at home. weather. It will be very useful and popular in the near future.

4. Consolidation - Ask some Ss to read aloud their writing. Teacher and other students listen and give remarks. 302

5. Homework - Do exercises: E1+ E2 workbook. - Complete the writing on the notebook. - Prepare: UNIT 11: Looking back + project/ P 56- textbook. Pre: 10/ 04/ 2019 Te: ...../ 04/ 2019

FF IC IA L

Period 93: UNIT 11: TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 7: Looking back & Project

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to revise and make the use of all the target knowledge in unit 11 and understand the use of possessive pronouns. - Vocabulary: Revise the lexical items related to the topic “Travelling in the future” - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words of the lesson. - Grammar:Will for future prediction and possessive pronouns. 2. Skills: -Writing:complete the table and write a description of the means of transport using

WILL/ WON’T.

ẠY

KÈ

- Speaking: do the matching then practice talking about their own future transportation. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to be hard- working and be self- confident. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about types of transport in the future. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about means of transport and problems solving. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Check Ss’ writing 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: * Chatting: 303

- Ask Ss to talk about their future means of transport. Example: In the future, I will have a flying car - Lead to the new lesson. B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Vocabulary Ex 1- p56: I- Vocabulary. 1. Transferring the learning task. 1. Use the clues in the two pictures to - Have Ss work individually to combine form a phrase. the pictures together to form a phrase 2. Doing the task. Key: - Ss work individually to do the task. a. environmentally friendly helicopter - Ask Ss to compare their answer with b.solar-powered taxi their partner c. driverless plane d. space car 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. e. underwater bus. - Ss give the answers while others remark 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T corrects and gives the feedback. Ex 2- p56: 2. Complete this table. 1. Transferring the learning task. Transport possibilities in the future. - Ask Ss to do the exercise individually Verb Energy Characteris then check the answers with their used tics partners. bicycle Ride, WindAutomated, 2. Doing the task. pedal powered high-speed - Ss first work individually, then work in car drive WaterFlying, groups to fill the table. powered driverless 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. train drive SolarUnderwater, - Have some Ss give their own answers. powered supersonic 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the airplane Fly, Solardriverless task. drive powered - T checks with the whole class Activity 2: Grammar Ex 3- p56: II-Grammar 1. Transferring the learning task. 3. Change the personal - Ask Ss to do the exercise individually then pronouns in brackets into check the answers with their partners. suitable possessive pronouns. 2. Doing the task. Key: - Ss work individually then compare their 1.mine 2. yours answers with each other. 3.theirs4. hers 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Have some Ss give their own answers. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T checks with the whole class 4. Look at the information Ex 4- p56: about skycyclingtubes. Then 1. Transferring the learning task. write a description of this means 304

of transport using will and won’t. Suggested answers: Skycycling tubes will be easy to drive. They will be slow. They will be healthy and environmentally friendly Skycycling tubes won’t be driverless. They won’t be cheap. They won’t travel at high speeds

Activity 3: Communication

FF IC IA L

- T guides Ss how to do the task then asks Ss to do it in pairs. 2. Doing the task. - Ss write the text in pairs and swap with each other for peer comments. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Have some Ss give their own writing. - Some Ss write their text on the board. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T remarks and gives the correction if any - Ask Ss to write down on their notebooks.

ẠY

KÈ

Ex 5- p56: 5. Match the sentences 1. Transferring the learning task. in A with those in B. - Ask Ss the sentences given in column A and B then try Key: to match them to make the full sentences. 1- c - Have Ss know that some sentences in A can be matched 2- e with more than one sentence in B. 2- b 2. Doing the task. 4- a - Ss work individually then compare their answers with 5- d each other. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Some Ss give their own answers aloud while others remark. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - Correct Ss’ answers then give feedback. Activity 4: Project - Encourage Ss to In group, brainstorm ideas for your future means of draw picturesor use transport. Think about the following: videos to illustrate - Where does it travel? Does it fly, float, drive or something their ideas. else? - They may use - How does it travel? Do you pedal it? Or is it electric? Is it posters or prepare a solar- powered or wind- powered? presentation using computer if possible - Who drives it? Is it driverless? - What does it look like? - What are its benefits? 4. Consolidation - Retell the main content of the lesson. 5. Homework - Redo all the exercises above and do exercises in the workbook. - Prepare for the next lesson: Written test 4. Ngày 16 tháng 04 năm 2019 T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÝ DUYỆT 305

Trần Thị Thanh Trà WEEK 33: Pre: 16/ 04/ 2019 Te: ...../ 04/ 2019

FF IC IA L

Period 94: WRITTEN TEST 4

ẠY

KÈ

I. Objectives. 1. Knowledge: - To test Ss’ knowledge in the two units 10,11 to know how progressive the Ss are and find out their strength and weakness of learning English so that teacher can give them more suitable method of teaching. - Vocabulary: related to the theme “Visions of the future” - Phonetics: word stress (three syllable) - Grammar: + The future continuous and future simple tenses. + Future simple passive. + Possessive pronouns. 2. Skills: - To check Ss’ listening, reading and writing skills. 3. Attitude: - Teach Ss to be strict and honest. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Ss love the subject and be aware of revising to do well for the test. - Being able todo the exercises well. II. Teaching methods and techniques. - Written test. III. Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: test papers. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: No. IV. Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence: .......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33 ........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Check the preparation of Ss. 3. New lesson A- Matrix:

306

B- Questions: NO 1: A. LISTENING ( 1,5 pts)

FF IC IA L

I. Listen and choose the best answer to complete the passage (1,5pt) 1. Non-renewable sources are being …………... A. used up B. gone up C. ended D. gone out 2. People in ………… areas have to gather wood to use as fuel. A. rural B. mountainous C. urban D. highland 3. Biogas is mainly used for ……………………. A. transport B. cooking C. heating D. both B and C 4. Biogas helps solve the problem of indoor ……………… pollution A. water B. air C. soil D. energy 5. The use of renewable energy sources in developing countries is …………………. A. on the increase B. on the decrease C. change rapidly D. not improved 6. In the future, …………and the sun will be used as the main environmentally friendly sources. A. the sun B. the water C. the wind D. the solar B. LANGUAGE FOCUS (4,5 pts)

ẠY

KÈ

I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. (0,5 pts) 1. A. biogas B. hydro C. solar D. monowheel B. natural C. carbon 2. A. large D. hard II. Find the word which has a different main stress. (0,5 pts) 1. A. another B. plentiful C. dangerous D. limited 2.A. expensive B. convenient C. abundant D. energy III. Choose the best option (A, B, C or D) to complete these sentences. (2,5 pts) 1. It will be ……….. to ride a jet pack in bad weather because itdoesn’t have a roof. A. comfortable B. pleasant C. unpleasant D. enjoyable 2. Which ……………….. of transport do you think will be used in the future? A. mean B. means C. meanings D. meaning 3.This is Linda’s hat, and those shoes are……………………. A. our B. hers C. her D. their 4. At this time next week, we……………………a wind turbine in our garden. A. install B. installed C. will installed D. will be installing 5. ……………………… is a renewable source. A. Coal B. Oil C. Wind D. Gas 6. We will use more ……………………… energy in the future. A. sun B. sunny C. solar D. sunlight 7. We believe that urban transport pods can travel ……………….. around 30kph. A. in B. at C. with D. on 8. ‘Sorry, I’m ……………………… the bus and will arrive in 5 minutes.’. A. on B. in C. by D. at 9. We try to make the future green by using vehicles or kinds of energy thatare ……. 307

C. READING. (2,5pts)

FF IC IA L

A. environmentally friendly B. environment friendly C. environmentally friendship D. environmental friendly 10. My brother and I often come to school ……………………. foot. A. at B. in C. by D. on IV. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in brackets.(1,0 pt) 1, This time tomorrow, he (play) ……………………….. badminton with his father. 2, People (not use) ………………………….. flyingcars until the year 2050. 3, A new hospital (build) …………………………. in our city next year. 4, They (have) ………………… a test tomorrow, we don’t want to disturb them. I. Complete the text using the suitable words in the box. (1,25 pts) energy

grow

fossil

source

are

KÈ

Almost all our (1) comes from oil, coal, and natural gas. We call them (2) fuels. The earth’s fossil fuels are running out. What will happen when there is no oil, coal, and gas on the earth? trying to find and use other alternative (4) of energy. We Scientists (3) can use energy from the sun, the wind, and the water. Solar energy is unlimited. The sun supplies all the energy used to (5 plants, to evaporate water for rain, and to maintain the temperature of the planet. All are necessary for human life. If we are able to collect solar energy, we will be sure to have this abundant source of power. II. Read the above passage again and answer the questions.(1,25 pts) 1. What are our main sources of energy? ………………………………………………………………………………………… 2. What are the alternative sources of energy? …..…………………………………………………………………………………….. 3. Is solar energy limited? …..…………………………………………………………………………………….. 4. What is the sun energy used for? …..…………………………………………………………………………………….. 5. Will you use solar energy in the future? ……………………………………………………………………..………………….. D. WRITING. (1,5pts)

ẠY

I. Rewrite the sentence use the given words without changing its meaning (1,0pt). 1. They will replace coal by another renewable source. -> Coal ……………………………………………………………………………… 2. We will use sources of energy more effectively for our future. ->Sources of energy ………………………………………………………………… 3. It is Julia’s thirteenth birthday next Friday. -> Julia ……………………………………………………………………………… 4. Those aren’t my friends. -> Those friends ……………………………………………………………………. II. Reorder the given words to make sentences. (0,5pt) 1.to save/ will reduce/ our energy/ the use of electricity/ We. -> …………………………………………………………………………………….. 308

2. biogas/ is/ cooking and heating/ I think/ for/ abundant and cheap. -> …………………………………………………………………………………….. NO 2: A. LISTENING ( 1,5 pts)

FF IC IA L

B. LANGUAGE FOCUS (4,5 pts)

2. A. electric

B. energy

I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. (0,5 pts) 1. A. biogas B. hydro C. solar D. monowheel C. renewable

KÈ

ẠY D

D. plentiful

II. Find the word which has a different main stress. (0,5 pts) 1, A. easily B. enormous C. dangerous D. plentiful 2, A. expensive B. convenient C. abundant D. energy III. Choose the best option (A, B, C or D) to complete these sentences. (2,5 pts) 1. By the year 2020, people in my village …………..…… energy from the sun. A. use B. are using C. will use D. will be using 2. A hydro power station ……………….. in the North of the country next year. A. was built B. were built C. will be built D. has been built 3. Which ……………….. of transport do you think will be used in the future? A. mean B. means C. meanings D. meaning 4.Nuclear power ...............................in the future. A. will replace B. replaced C. will be replaced D. replaces 5. He ………………..…. in a white sport car. A. drives B. walks C. takes D. pedals 6. We try to make the future green by using vehicles or kinds of energy thatare ……. A. environmentally friendly B. environment friendly C. environmentally friendship D. environmental friendly 7. The white cat is Helen’s, and the black cat is…………………….... A. I B. me C. mine D. my 8. My brother and I often come to school ……………………. foot. A. at B. in C. by D. on 9. We believe that urban transport pods can travel ……………….. around 30kph. A. in B. at C. with D. on 309

10. ………………….. is a renewable source. A. Coal B. Oil C. Wind D. Gas IV. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in brackets.(1,0 pt) 1, At 17 o’clock tomorrow, Mr Thanh (play) ………………. tennis with his friend. 2, People (not use) ………………………….. flyingcars until the year 2050. 3, The festival (celebrate)………………….. next month. 4, They (have) ………………… a test tomorrow, we don’t want to disturb them.

FF IC IA L

C. READING. (2,5pts)

I. Complete the text using the suitable words in the box. (1,25 pts) energy

fossil

source

are

grow

D. WRITING. (1,5pts)

ẠY

KÈ

I. Rewrite the sentence use the given words without changing its meaning (1,0pt). 1. It is Julia’s thirteenth birthday next Friday. -> Julia ……………………………………………………………………………… 2. They will replace coal by another renewable source. -> Coal ……………………………………………………………………………… 3. Those aren’t my friends. -> Those friends ……………………………………………………………………. 4. We will use sources of energy more effectively for our future. ->Sources of energy ………………………………………………………………… II. Reorder the given words to make sentences. (0,5pt) 1.to save/ will reduce/ our energy/ the use of electricity/ We. 2. biogas/ is/ cooking and heating/ I think/ for/ abundant and cheap. C- Answers and mark:

A. LISTENING ( 1,5 pts) I. I. Listen and choose the best answer to complete the passage (1,5pt)

Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 6 = 1,5 ®iÓm 1- A 2- B 3- D 4- B 5- A Tapescript: 310

6- C

1. Non-renewable sources are being used up 2. People in mountainousareas have to gather wood to use as fuel. 3. Biogas is mainly used for cooking and heating 4. Biogas helps solve the problem of indoor air pollution 5. The use of renewable energy sources in developing countries is on the increase. 6. In the future, the windand the sun will be used as the main environmentally friendly sources.

FF IC IA L

B. LANGUAGE FOCUS (4,5 pts)

I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. (0,5 pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 2 = 0,5 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- D 2- B NO 2: 1- D 2- C II. Find the word which has a different main stress. (0,5 pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 2 = 0,5 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- A 2- D NO 2: 1- B 2- D III. Choose the best option (A, B, C or D) to complete these sentences. (2,5 pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 10 = 2,5 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- C 2- B 3- B 4- D 5- C 6- C 7- B 8- A 9- A10- D NO 2: 1- D2- C 3- B 4- C 5- A 6- A 7- C 8- D 9- B10- C IV. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in brackets.(1,0 pt) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 4 = 1,0 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- will be playing 2- won’t use 3- will be built 4- will have NO 2: 1- will be playing 2- won’t use 3- will be celebrated 4- will have C. READING. (2,5pts)

ẠY

KÈ

I. Complete the text using the suitable words in the box. (1,25 pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1,25 ®iÓm 1- energy 2- fossil 3- are 4- source 5- grow II. Read the following passage and answer the questions. (1,25 pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1,25 ®iÓm 1. They are oil, coal, and natural gas 2. They are sun, wind and water. 3. No, it isn’t 4. It is used to grow plants, to evaporate water for rain, and to maintain the temperature of the planet. 5. Ss’ answers. (Yes, I will./ No, I won’t) D. WRITING. (1,5pts)

I. Rewrite the sentence use the given words without changing its meaning (1,0pt). Mçi câu ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 4 = 1,0 ®iÓm NO 1: 1. Coal will be replaced by another renewable source 311

FF IC IA L

2. Sources of energy will be used more effectively for our future. 3. Julia will be thirteen next Friday. 4. Those friendsaren’t mine. NO 2: 1. Julia will be thirteen next Friday. 2. Coal will be replaced by another renewable source 3. Those friendsaren’t mine. 4. Sources of energy will be used more effectively for our future. II. Reorder the given words to make sentences. (0,5pt) Mçi câu ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 2 = 0,5 ®iÓm 1.Wewill reducethe use of electricityto saveour energy. 2. I thinkbiogasisabundant and cheapforcooking and heating. 4. Consolidation. - Collect Ss’ papers and remark if any. 5. Homework. - Prepare Unit 12- Getting started & Listen and read./ Page 58- textbook -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 16/ 04/ 2019 Te: ...../ 04/ 2019

Period 95: UNIT 12: AN OVERCROWDED WORLD. Lesson 1: Getting started

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able touse the words to describe overcrowded places, words about the effects of overcrowding. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “An overcrowded world”:slum, overcrowded, peaceful, crime, healthcare, wealthy,… - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less, fewer. Tag- questions. 2. Skills: + Reading: read the conversation and answer the questions. + Listening: listen and read the conversation. + Speaking: practice giving opinion 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to be aware of the causes and effects of over population. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Distinguishing the causes and effects of over population. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about population growth. Have civic duty to reduce overpopulation. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 312

FF IC IA L

1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - During the lesson. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Brain storming: T: - Write the word ‘population’ on the board. Make sure Ss know the meaning of this word by either giving the equivalent Vietnamese word or writing: There are 5 million people in Ha Noi. → Ha Noi has a population of 5 million. - Ask Ss if they know the population of any area in the country or in the world. Once the Ss have done it, add the prefix “over” and elicit the meaning of this newly-formed word from Ss. - Set the sense then lead to the new lesson B. Presentation:

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

KÈ

Activity 1: Presentation * Teaching some new words: I.Vocabulary - T: writes new words on the board. - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first then Overcrowded (adj): đông nghịt Slum (n): Khu nhà ổ chuột the whole class. Peaceful (adj): thanh bình - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. * Checking: Rubout and remember Crime (n): tội phạm * Setting the scene: Healthcare (n): chăm sóc sức khỏe - Ask Ss to look at the title of the text and the Wealthy (adj): giàu có pictures and ask them to predict what the Spacious (adj): rộng rãi conversation is about by answering the questions: What is the conversation about? What do you think Brazil is like? Do you think Phuong likes Brazil? What can you find about Rio/Brazil in this conversation? - Ss guess the answers. Activity 2: Practice - Play the recording. Ss listen and read to check II. Practice 1/ Listen and read the prediction. a. Read the conversation again Part 1a- P59: and tick ( ) true (T) or false 1. Transferring the learning task. (F) - Ask Ss to work independentlyto read the

ẠY D

MAIN CONTENTS

313

KÈ

FF IC IA L

sentences and decide if they are true or false. Key: 1. T 2. T 2. Doing the task. - Ss read the text and tick true or false for the 3. F 4. T sentences given in ex 1a- P59 individually. 5. F - Ss compare answers with a partner. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Call on some Ss to give the answers - Have Ss correct the false sentences. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T remarks then writes the correct answers on the board. Part 1b- P59: b. Find a word or phrase to - Ask Ss to read the explanations in the exercise match the definitions and try to find the words without checking the Key: text. Then ask Ss to refer to the dialogue again 1. diverse 2. wealthy for the correct words. 3. major 4. slums - Correct the answers as a class. 5. crime Part 2- P59: - Make sure Ss know the meaning of the words in 2. Match the words in the box the box. Then Ss work independently to label the with the pictures. pictures. Key: - Have them compare their answers with a partner 1. a 2. c 3. b - Play the recording and have Ss repeat the 4. e 5. d words. - T gives correction if necessary. Activity 3: Production III. Further practice Part 3- P59: 3. Use some of the words in 2 to - Ss complete the exercise independently. describe a person or a place you - T calls some Ss to share their sentences with know: the class. Eg: I visit native village - T can choose some good sentences and write everyyear. I love the peaceful them on the board for other Ss to learn from. atmosphere there. Encourage Ss to make as many sentences as possible.

4. Work in groups.Make a list of the problems which they think - In groups, ask Ss to think of the problems and are connected to an overcrowded area. make a list of them. - Ss work in groups, make a list of the problems Example: which they think are connected to an There is not enough space to play in overcrowded area.

ẠY

Part 4- P59:

Part 5- P59: - Call on each group to share their list with the class. T helps write the problems on the board. Ask the class if they agree or not. - Encourage them to give an explanation for 314

5. Share your list with the class and see if they agree with you.

their answers. - Move on to the next group.

FF IC IA L

4. Consolidation. - Lexical items related to the causes and effects of over population. 5. Homework. - Learn new words and phrases - Do exercises: B1-B2 (workbook) + Translate the conversation in Getting started into Vietnamese. - Prepare for next lesson: A closer look 1/ P60- textbook. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pre: 17/ 04/ 2019 Te: ...../ 04/ 2019

Period 96: UNIT 12: AN OVERCROWDED WORLD. Lesson 2: A closer look 1

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to identify and pronounce word stress correctly. Practise some words about cause and effect of an overcrowded world.Improve their listening skill, writing skill and pronunciation. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the topic “An overcrowded world”:dense, shortage, nutrition, malnutrition, spread,… - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson, word stress. - Grammar:Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less, fewer. Tag- questions. 2. Skills: - Speaking: practice talking about the over population of some places. - Listening: listen and practice marking the stress in the words 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to be aware of the causes and effects of over population. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about the causes and effects of over population. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about population growth. Have civic duty to reduce overpopulation. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 315

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: goes to the board to write new words - S2+ S3: Read the conversation in Listen and read and then answer some questions. 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Brain storming: - Ask Ss if they can remember any new words they learn in Getting Started. Categorize them as positive (peaceful, wealthy…) and negative (poor, slums…). - Move on to this lesson which focuses on some problem as a result of overpopulation. B. Presentation: MAIN CONTENTS T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES Activity 1: Teaching vocabulary * Teaching some new words: I. Vocabulary - T: writes new words on the board. - dense (adj): dày đặc, đông đúc - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first then - shortage (n): sự thiếu hụt the whole class. - nutrition (n): dinh dưỡng - malnutrition (n): suy dinh dưỡng - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. - poverty (n): sự nghèo nàn * Checking: Listen and number (Ex 1- P60) - shortage (n): sự thiếu thốn Part 1- P60 - spread (v): lan tràn, phát tán - Ask Ss to listen to the recording and number 1. Listen and number the words in the words as they hear. the order you hear them. - Ss listen to the recording and number the Key: words. Ss listen again and repeat the words. 1. crime 2. malnutrition - T checks the understanding of the words 3. poverty 4. shortage bay asking questions like: ‘Do you think our 5. disease 6. space school has enough space?’; ‘What causes 7. dense 8. healthcare disease?’ Part 2- P60 2. Complete the sentences with - Ask Ss to do Ex2 individually then compare some of the words from 1. with partner. Key: - Ss work individually. T checks the answer 1. healthcare 2. crime as a class. Encourage Ss to explain why they 3. Disease 4. Malnutrition choose that word for the sentence. 5. poverty - Teacher gives feedback, play the recording again for Ss to listen and repeat. Part 3- P60 3. Match a cause with its effect - T can give an example of causes and effects. Example: Write the example on the board and ask Ss He drove a. He had an which one is the effect. fast accident. √ - Ss work in pairs to do the task. When they have finished, let them exchange their b. He felt hungry. answers with another pair. Key: - Teacher gives feedback. 1- b 2- a 3- f 316

FF IC IA L

4- d 5- c 6- e 4. Work in groups. Think of some problems for each place below and write them under place. Share your ideas with the class. Key: a. Lack of entertainment, few opportunities for employment, not enough services. b. Poverty, slums, disease, pollution, unemployment, poor healthcare. c. Noise/ air pollution, crime, overcrowded, shortage of accommodation.

Part 4- P60 1. Transferring the learning task. - Ask Ss to discuss which problems each place may have in groups of four. 2. Doing the task. - In groups, Ss discuss to find out which problems each place may have. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Call on some Ss to give the answers - T collects Ss’ answers and writes them on the board. - The whole class looks at the problems and discusses for agreement or disagreement. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T remarks then corrects and gives feedback.

Activity 2: Teaching pronunciation Part 5- P61 II. Pronunciation: WORD STRESS - Ask Ss to listen and mark the 5. Listen and mark(') the tress in the words stressed syllables. Key: - Ss do the task individually 'Spacious 'Poverty 'Hungry - T corrects the answers. Have Ss listen again and repeat the words In'crease 'Violence Di'sease - Ss listen again and repeat the words Po'llution 'Stressful Nu'trition aloud. Su'pport 'Shortage 'Healthcare

ẠY

KÈ

- Have Ss study the “Look out” box Look out: “Some two- syllable words can be a noun or On P61. - Ss study the “Look out” box and a verb. The tress changes when theuse of the take note about the way to find out word changes”. the stress in the two- syllable words Examples: - This 'record is great which are both nouns and verbs. - Can you re'cord this programme for me? - T gives out the general rules and examples. Exceptions: 'answers (n/v); 'visit (n/v) - Give some exceptions. pa'rade (n/v); com'ment (n/v) - Ss listen and take notes. Activity 3: Production:

Part 6- P61 - Ask Ss to read the words given then play the recording for Ss listen and repeat. - Have Ss listen and repeat the words - Ask Ss to mark (')the tress on the words in the table given.

6. Listen and repeat each pair. Mark (') the stress on the words in the table below Key: Words

As a noun

As a verb

record

'record

picture

'picture

317

- Have Ss give their answer then T checks and corrects. - Ss check and correct their answers if any.

answer

'answer

parade

pa'rade

support

su'pport

FF IC IA L

4. Consolidation. - Marking Word stress& use lexical items related to the causes and effects of over population 5. Homework. - Learn by heart all the new words - Do Ex A1, A2/ p43- workbook. - Prepare for next lesson: A closer look 2/ P61, 62- textbook. Ngày 22 tháng 04 năm 2019

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÝ DUYỆT

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

ẠY

KÈ

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WEEK 34 Pre: 22/ 04/ 2019 Te: ...../ 04/ 2019

Period 97: UNIT 12: AN OVERCROWDED WORLD. Lesson 3: A closer look 2

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: 318

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use more/less/fewer to talk about comparisons of quantifiers and learn about making tagquestions. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the overcrowded places. - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less, fewer. Tag- questions. 2. Skills: - Speaking: make sentences using comparisons of quantifiers, make tagquestions. -Writing: complete the sentences using comparisons of quantifiers, make tagquestions. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to be aware of the causes and effects of over population. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about the causes and effects of over population. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about population growth. Have civic duty to reduce overpopulation. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: goes to the board to write new words - S2: goes to the board to mark the main stress of these words. Difficult/ disaster/ favourite/ potato/ excellent/ beautiful/ exhausted/ polluting/ dangerous/ convenient 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Chatting: - Remind Ss of items they learnt in the previous lessons. + Words of quantifiers (many,a little…) + Countable and uncountable nouns. + Imperatives with “more”, “less”, and “fewer” and use possessive pronouns. - Elicit the meaning of this newly-formed word from Ss. - Set the sense then lead to the new lesson B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Teaching comparisons of quantifiers *Comparisons of quantifiers I. COMPARISONS OF QUANTIFIERS 319

FF IC IA L

2b. Read the comparisons of the two cities, and decide if they are true. If they are not, correct them. Key: 1. Correct 2. Incorrect. In Brumba, more people live in slums. 3. Incorrect. People in Crystal earn more per day. 4. Correct. 5. Correct. 3. Complete the sentences with more, less or fewer. Key: 1. fewer 2. more 3. more 4. fewer 5. less

Part 2a- P61: - Have Ss read the reading individually. Explain some new words if necessary. - Ss read the information about the two cities individually to catch the content. Part 2b- P62: - Ask Ss to answer true or false for the sentences given in Ex 2b- P62 - Ss do the exercise individually then compare with a partner. - T checks as a class.

1. Read the sentences. Examples: 1- Children in the slums have more diseases than those in wealthy areas. 2- The countryside has fewer problems than a big city *Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less/fewer - more + Nu/Ns + than… - less + Nu + than… - fewer + Ns + than…. 2a. Read the information about the two cities.

Part 1- P61: - T gives some examples then have Ss give the rules of using more, less/fewer. - Ss read the sentences and the rules in the table. Ss add more words to the table for each type of comparison. - Remind Ss of items they have learnt: + words for quantifiers (many, a little, a few,…) + countable and uncountable nouns + imperatives with more, less and fewer.

ẠY

KÈ

Part 3- P63: 1. Transferring the learning task. - Have Ss complete exercise 3 with more, less or fewerby referring to the tables. 2. Doing the task. - Ss do this exercise independently. Then they share their answers with a partner. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Have some Ss give their own answers 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T checks and writes the correct answers on the board. Activity 2: Teaching tagquestions *Tag- questions II- TAG-QUESTIONS. - Write 3 questions on the board Examples: Draw Ss’ attention to how these - Lan goes to school, doesn't she? three questions are formed: the first - The flowers are beautiful, aren't they? 320

FF IC IA L

two types Ss have already learnt and - You haven’t bought the ticket, have you? the new one, tag questions. Form: - Have Ss read the conversation 1. S + V, don't / doesn't / didn't + S? 2. S + tobe/tobe + not + S? - Ss read the three examples and 3. S + have/ has+ PP, have/ has+ not + S? focus on the ways to form the *Remember: A tag question is a short questions question. It follows a statement. It’s added at - Teach Ss how to make tag- the end, after a comma. questions. -A positive sentence has a negative tag - Ss listen and take note. -A negative sentence has a positive tag *Chú ý : Chủ ngữ (S) ở đuôi phải là một trong 7 đại từ nhân xưng (It, we, I, he, she,they, you). Part 4- P62: 4. Check if the tags are correct. If they are - Ask Ss to check if the tags are correct or not, if they are not, correct not, correct them. Key: them. 1. Incorrect….do you? – don’t you? - Ss do this exercise independently. 2. Incorrect…aren’t they?- don’t they? Then they share their answers with a 3. Correct partner. 4. Correct - T checks and writes the correct tags 5. Incorrect…can’t they?- can they? on the board. 5. Choose one of the question tags in the Part 5- P62: box to complete each blank in the - Have Ss do this exercise interview. independently. Key: - Ss do the task individually then 1. don’t they? 2. isn’t it? compare with a partner. 3. can’t we?4. is it? - T checks the answers as a class. - Have Ss role-play the conversation

ẠY

KÈ

4. Consolidation. - Ask Ss summarize the lesson: comparisons of quantifiers and make tag questions 5. Homework. - Learn the grammar rules and practice with them. - Prepare for next lesson: Communication/ P63- textbook. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pre: 24/ 04/ 2019. Te: ....../ 05/ 2019. Period 98: Test correction

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

FF IC IA L

- Grammar: + The future continuous and future simple tenses. + Future simple passive. + Possessive pronouns. 2. Skills: - To check Ss’ language focus, reading and writing skills. 3. Attitude: - Teach Ss to be strict and honest. 4. Ability needed: - Being able to do the exercises well. II/ Preparations. 1. Teacher’s: - Materials: Paper tests. - Equipment: sub - board. 2. Students’: No. III/ Teaching process. 1- Class Organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2- Oral test - During the lesson. 3- New lesson A. Warm- up:*Chatting: - How is your test? - Did you do it well? B. Presentation: MAIN CONTENTS

1. Test correction

ẠY

KÈ

* Give the paper test A. LISTENING ( 1,5 pts) back and correct the I. Listen and choose the best answer to complete the passage (1,5pt) test. Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 6 = 1,5 ®iÓm 1- A 2- B 3- D - Ask Ss to give the 4- B 5- A 6- C answers for the Tapescript: questions. 1. Non-renewable sources are being used up - Ss give the answers 2. People in mountainousareas have to gather wood to use as fuel. in turn. 3. Biogas is mainly used for cooking and heating 4. Biogas helps solve the problem of indoor air pollution 5. The use of renewable energy sources in developing countries is on the increase. 6. In the future, the windand the sun will be used as the main environmentally friendly sources. B. LANGUAGE FOCUS (4,5 pts)

- T: explains if it is necessary.

I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. (0,5 pts) 322

Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 2 = 0,5 ®iÓm NO 1: 1- D 2- B NO 2: 1- D 2- C II. Find the word which has a different main stress. (0,5 pts)Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 2 = 0,5 ®iÓm - Ss give the answers NO 1: 1- A 2- D in turn. NO 2: 1- B 2- D III. Choose the best option (A, B, C or D) to complete these sentences. (2,5 pts) - T: explains if it is Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 10 = 2,5 ®iÓm necessary. 3- B 4- D 5- C NO 1:1- C 2- B 6- C 7- B 8- A9- A10- D - Ask Ss to give the NO 2:1- D2- C3- B 4- C 5- A answers for the 6- A 7- C 8- D9- B10- C questions. IV. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in brackets.(1,0 pt) - Ss write the answers Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 4 = 1,0 ®iÓm on the board in turn. NO 1: 1- will be playing2- won’t use 3- will be built4- will have NO 2: 1- will be playing 2- won’t use3- will be - T: explains if it is celebrated 4- will have C. READING. (2,5pts) necessary. I. Complete the text using the suitable words in the box. (1,25pts)Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1,25 ®iÓm - Ask Ss to give the 1- energy 2- fossil 3- are answers for the 4- source 5- grow questions. II. Read the following passage and answer the questions. (1,25 pts) Mçi ®¸p ¸n ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 5 = 1,25 ®iÓm - Ss give the answers 1. They are oil, coal, and natural gas 2. They are sun, wind and water. in turn. 3. No, it isn’t 4. It is used to grow plants, to evaporate water for rain, and - T: explains if it is to maintain the temperature of the planet. necessary. 5. Ss’ answers. (Yes, I will./ No, I won’t) - Ask Ss to give the D. WRITING. (1,5pts) answers for the I. Rewrite the sentence use the given words without questions. changing its meaning (1,0pt). Mçi câu ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 4 = 1,0 ®iÓm NO 1: 1. Coal will be replaced by another renewable source - Ss give the answers 2. Sources of energy will be used more effectively for our in turn. future. 3. Julia will be thirteen next Friday. 4. Those friendsaren’t mine. NO 2: - T: explains if it is 1. Julia will be thirteen next Friday.

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- Ask Ss to give the answers for the questions.

323

necessary.

2. Coal will be replaced by another renewable source 3. Those friendsaren’t mine. 4. Sources of energy will be used more effectively for our future. II. Reorder the given words to make sentences. (0,5pt) Mçi câu ®óng ®−îc 0,25 ®iÓm x 2 = 0,5 ®iÓm 1.Wewill reducethe use of electricityto saveour energy. 2. I thinkbiogasisabundant and cheapforcooking and heating.

FF IC IA L

* Give the general remarks -T gives general remarks of good and bad points. - T gives compliments 2. Remark to the excellent Ss and *The result. points out the limits of - Class 7A:…./ 37 from 5 some week Ss. 7B:…./ 33 - T collects Ss’ marks 7C:…./ 35

4. Consolidation - Teacher reminds Ss to study harder, more carefully. 5. Homework - Review all grammar and new words. - Prepare: Unit 12:Communication / Page 63- Textbook. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pre: 24/ 04/ 2019 Te: ...../ 05/ 2019

Period 99: UNIT 12: AN OVERCROWDED WORLD. Lesson 4: Communication

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to use more/less/fewer to make comparison about two areas. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the overcrowded places. - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less, fewer. Tag- questions. 2. Skills: + Speaking: Say out the differences between two pictures given. + Writing: Match the words. + Reading: Read the information about the two places: Mauritania, the desert nation in Africa and Hong Kong. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to be aware of the causes and effects of over population. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. 324

FF IC IA L

- Talking about the differences between the two places. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about population growth. Have civic duty to reduce overpopulation. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - S1: makes tag questions. - S2: does B3- workbook 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Brainstorm: - Talking about the causes and effects of over population.

overpopulated

poverty - Set the sense then lead to the new lesson B. Presentation:

MAIN CONTENTS

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

hunger

ẠY

KÈ

Activity 1: Presentation * Teaching some new words: I. New words -densely populated(a): đông dân. - T says aloud word by word for Ss - density (n): độ dày, mật độ listening and repeating after thenT writes new words on the board. - physician (n): bác sĩ - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first (chuyên điều trị không dùng phẫu thuật) then the whole class. - slavery (n): cảnh nô lệ, sự nô lệ - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. * Checking: What and where Activity 2: Practice Part 1- P63: II. Practice - T shows 2 pictures and asks Ss to guess 1. Look at the picture and discuss. what places they are and how they are different? 1. What places they are? - Ask Ss to discuss the two questions in 2. How they are different? part 1 individually. Suggested answers: 325

Picture 1: clean water, good education, crime,…. Picture 2: poor healthcare, crime, hunger,…. 2.Match the words below with the places in 1. Suggested answers: Group 1: high living standards, clean water, densely-populated, good education, crime. Group 2: poor healthcare, crime, malnutrition, hunger.

FF IC IA L

- Ss look at the picture and discuss what places they are and how they are different. - Ss work individually then compare in pairs - Write the answer on the board. Part 2- P63: - Ask Ss to do the exercise independently to match the words with the right places in 1. - Ss match the words in the box with the places in 1 independently and then T asks them to explain their choices - Correct and give feedback.

Activity 3: Production Part 3- P63: 3. Read the information about the two - T can tell Ss that the readings provide the places same kinds of information. - Ask Ss to read the information about the Facts Mauritania Hong Kong two places: Mauritania andHong Kong. Area - T draws a table on the board then asks Ss Population to fill the table with the information after Density reading to check Ss’ understanding. Economy

ẠY

KÈ

Part 4- P63: 1. Transferring the learning task. - Encourage Ss to talk about the differences between the two places (the table on the board can help). 2. Doing the task. - Ss work in pairs to practice talking. - T goes around and gives help if necessary. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - T calls on some pairs to share their ideas with the class. - Some Ss say aloud before class while others remark. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T remarks and correctsSs’ answers if necessary. - Give feedback.

Healthcare Problems

Unusual fact

4. Work in pairs. Use the information in 3 to talk about the differences between the two places.

Example: The population of Mauritania is very small, only over three million people. Hong Kong is much larger. It has more than seven million people…

4. Consolidation - Talk about an overcrowded world and its solutions. 326

5. Homework - Do C1 + C2 + B6 page in the workbook. - Prepare: UNIT 12: SKILLS 1/ P63- textbook.

FF IC IA L

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ẠY

KÈ

WEEK 35: Pre: 30/ 04/ 2019 Te: ...../ 05/ 2019

Period 100: UNIT 12: AN OVERCROWDED WORLD. Lesson 5: Skills 1

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to read for specific information about the population explosion and talk about the disadvantages of being in an overcrowded place. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the overcrowded places. - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less, fewer. 327

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Tag- questions. 2. Skills: - Speaking: discuss some possible disadvantages that people using an overcrowded school/ bus/ block of flats may have. -Reading:read for specific information and find out the heading for each paragraph. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to be aware of the causes and effects of over population. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Distinguishing the heading for each paragraph. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about population growth. Have civic duty to reduce overpopulation. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test -S1: writes new words - S2: Can you give some disadvantages of population boom? 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Chatting: - Ask Ss to talk about some famous and big capital cities in the world. Example: London (England) Tokyo (Japan) Rio (Brazil) - Set the sense then lead to the new lesson B. Presentation:

ẠY

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

MAIN CONTENTS

Activity 1: Reading

* Teaching some new words: - Elicit the new words - T says aloud word by word for Ss listening and repeating after then T writes new words on the board. - Ss: listen and repeat in individual first then the whole class. - Call 3- 4 Ss to read the words again. * Checking: Rubout and remember 328

I. Reading * New words - megacity (n): siêu đô thị - growth (n): sự tăng trưởng - homelessness (n): vô gia cư - explosion (n): Sự bùng nổ - issue (n) = problem (n): vấn đề - block (v): làm tắc nghẽn

Part 1- P64: - T asks Ss to look at the list of cities discuss the question in pairs. - Ss discuss the question in pairs and then as a class. - Have some pairs practice before class for the whole class listening.

1. Look at the list of the cities below. Which do you think has the largest population? Share your ideas with your partner.

FF IC IA L

Example: A: I think London is number one, isn’t it? B: I don’t think so. I think Shanghai is the biggest.

ẠY

KÈ

Part 2- P64: 2. Read the passage below - Ask Ss to read the passage quickly and put the and check your answer. cities in the order of their population size. - Ss quickly read the passage for specific Key: 1. Tokyo 2. Shanghai information and put the cities in the order of their 3. Jakarta 4. Manila population size. 5. London - Teacher checks as a class Part 3- P64: 3. Read the passage again. - Ask Ss to read the passage again and choose the Choose the correct heading correct heading for each paragraph. for each paragraph. - Ss read each part of the passage and choose the Key: 1. B 2. D correct heading for it. Ask Ss to underline the 3. C 4. A words which help them make their decision. - Ss exchange their answers. Allow them some time to explain to one another about their choice. - T checks the answers as a class. 4. Read the passage again Part 4- P64: and choose the best answer 1. Transferring the learning task. A, B, C or D. -Ask Ss to read the passage again and do the exercise independently. Key: 2. Doing the task. 2. C 3. C -Ss read the passage again and do the exercise 1. C 4. C 5. B independently. - T may guide Ss to look for the key words which can help. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - T calls on some Ss to give their answers aloud. - Some Ss say aloud before class while others remark. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T remarks and correctsSs’ answers if necessary. - Give feedback. Activity 2: Speaking Part 5- P64: II. Speaking - Divide Ss into groups of five 5. Work in groups. Look at the places - Asks Ss to go through the list of below and discuss some possible different places and note down the disadvantages that people using them 329

may have. Suggested answers: 1. An overcrowded school: not enough playing ground, big classes, less individual care, not enough study aids … 2. An overcrowded bus: not enough seats for everybody, stuff y/ not enough fresh air, long wait at the bus stops … 3. An overcrowded block of flats: noise, shortage of water, little space …

FF IC IA L

problems they can think of for each place. - Ss work in groups of five and discuss - Monitor and help Ss with any new words they need. - Ask a representative to report their findings to the class. -Report to the class. - T remarks and corrects Ss’ answers if any.

4. Consolidation - Teacher summarizes the lesson. 5. Homework - Ask Ss to learn new words by heart. - Do exercises in workbook. - Prepare: UNIT 12: Skill 2/ P65 - textbook. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pre: 02/ 05/ 2019 Te: ...../ 05/ 2019

Period 101: UNIT 12: AN OVERCROWDED WORLD. Lesson 6: Skills 2

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to listen for specific information in a film review, then write a short passage about the population growth of an area. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the overcrowded places. - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less, fewer. Tag- questions. 2. Skills: - Listening: Listen for specific information about a film named “Slumdog millionare” - Writing: write a short paragraph describing the change of population growth in Ho Chi Minh city. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to be aware of the causes and effects of over population. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Writing paragraph based on the chart. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about population growth. Have civic duty to reduce overpopulation. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. 330

FF IC IA L

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

KÈ

Activity 1: Listening Part 1- P65: I. Listening -Ask Ss to look at the poster. Ask questions 1. Look at the film poster below. to get as much information from the poster as What do you think the film is possible. about? - Ss discuss the questions in pairs and then as + Have you ever seen this film? a class. + What is it about? + Who is the main character? + Where do you think the story happens? Part 2- P65: - Play the recording and ask Ss to listen to the 2.Listen to the film review and recording and check their answers in 1. check your idea. - Ss do the exercise individually then Key: compare their answer in pairs. => The film is about life in slums Part 3- P65: 3. Listen again and answer the questions. 1. Transferring the learning task. -Ask Ss to read the questions first to see what Key: information they need to answer the 1. The film is based on a book questions. called Q & A. - Play the recording as many times as 2. The main character of the film is necessary then ask Ss to answer the questions a boy from an Indian slum. given in 3. 3. He wins a lot of money on an Indian game show. 2. Doing the task. - Ss listen and answer the questions. They 4. Because he is a boy from the then compare their notes with a partner. slums. 5. The film looks beautiful, is full 3. Reporting the task result and discuss.

ẠY D

MAIN CONTENTS

331

KÈ

FF IC IA L

- T calls on some Ss to give their answers of emotion and is gripping aloud. - Some Ss give their own answers before class while others remark. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T checks and gives feedback. Activity 2: Writing Part 4- P65: II. Writing -Have Ss read the passage about 4. Read the passage about the slum featured Dharavi slum. in ‘Slumdog Millionaire’. Underline the - Ask Ss to underline the words/ words/ phrases to describe Dharavi slum phrases to describe Dharavi slum and to show the changes in its population. and to show the changes in its For examples: population. T can write these on the … one of the largest slums, board as a guide to Ss for the next That is much bigger thanin 1890. writing exercise. … In 1950, the population was around - Ss work individually to do the 100,000 people. Since then, Dharavi has task grown and grown! 5. Look at the chart below. It shows the Part 5- P65: population change in Ho Chi Minh City - Ask Ss to write a paragraph using over the past 30 years. Write a short the ideas they generated in part 4. paragraph describing the change. Use the - Ss write their paragraph passage in 4 to help you. individually based on the Suggested writing: suggestions in the book. Ho Chi Minh City is one of the largest cities in - T collects some writing to correct Viet Nam. According to the figures from the at home. population investigation committee, the - If there is not enough time to population of HCM City in 1979 was three write the paragraph in class, T can million four hundred and twenty thousand assign it for homework. people. But in 2009, its population was around - Ask Ss to read aloud their writing seven million one hundred and twenty-three if possible. thousand people. It was much bigger than that in 1979. It grew double after 30 years…..The population of HCM City has grown and grown. It is a population explosion.

ẠY

4. Consolidation - Ask some Ss to read aloud their writing. Teacher and other students listen and give remarks. 5. Homework - Do exercises: E1+ E2 workbook. - Complete the writing on the notebook. - Prepare: UNIT 12:Looking back + project/ P66, 67- textbook. ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pre: 05/ 05/ 2019 Te: ...../ 05/ 2019 332

Period 102: UNIT 12: AN OVERCROWDED WORLD. Lesson 7: Looking back & Project.

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to recycle the language from the previous sections and link with the topic “An overcrowded world” and use “more, less, fewer” to talk about effects. - Vocabulary: the lexical items related to the overcrowded places. - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar:Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less, fewer. Tag- questions. 2. Skills: -Writing:use the words to write full sentences. - Speaking: talk about their possible effects using the situations. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ssto have responsibility to protect our world. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Talking about over population and giving advice about how to reduce world population. - Ss love the subject, have the responsibility for themselves, for community and for the country about population growth. Have civic duty to reduce overpopulation. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbook, pictures, visual aids. + Equipment: No. 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Check Ss’ writing 3. New lesson A. Warm- up: *Matching: - T asks Ss to match the words with their definitions in Ex 1 (P66). - Ss read the words ten do the matching individually. - Have Ss give the answers then T corrects and gives feedback. Key: 1. E 2. B 3. C 4. D 5.A B. Presentation: T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES

AIN CONTENTS 333

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

Activity 1: Vocabulary Ex 2- P66: I- Vocabulary. - Encourage Ss to think creatively. 2. Write the sentence for each of the - Ss may get away from the content of following words. the unit about overpopulation and use Suggested answers: these words in a different context. 1/ Crime is a big problem in big cities. - Ss write some interesting sentences 2/ You will live longer if you have a good on the board. healthcare system. - Go around while Ss are writing and 3/ Disease is the thing that everyone help them with any difficult words. - Teacher checks and gives feedback. doesn’t want. 4/ Nobody wants to live in poverty. 5/ Our children need to get good education. Activity 2: Grammar Ex 3- P66: II-Grammar 1. Transferring the learning task. 3. Put an appropriate tag- Ask Ss to complete this task independently. question at the end of each 2. Doing the task. sentence. Then do the matching - Ss do the task independently. to their answers. - Ss check the answers with their partners. Key: 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. 1/ don’t we- a - Ask the Ss to work in pairs to give the 2/ didn’t you- e answers by practising speaking. 3/ won’t there- c - Some pairs practice before class while others 4/ shouldn’t we- d remark. 5/ don’t they- b 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T checks and gives feedback. 4. Complete the effects with Ex 4- P66: MORE and LESS. - Ask Ss to complete this task independently Key: - Ss do the task independently. 1/ more2/ more - Compare with a partner. 3/ More4/ less - T checks with the whole class then gives feedback. Activity 3: Communication Ex 5- P66: 5.Work in groups. Look at the - Ask Ss to use “I will” and “I can” to talk situations and talk about their possible about possible effects.Then Ask Ss to effects. work on situations 1 and 2 in groups of Key: four. Situation 1: - It’s the good - Ss read the example situation. entertainment for young people. -Ss work on situation 1 and situation 2 However, it’s too noisy because many independently. people come there. -Some Ss reports their ideas. Situation 2: - There are many things to buy. The atmosphere is so exciting. We can choose many beautiful clothes. Activity 4: Project 334

-T collects some pictures of under*Project: populated areas to the class and asks Ss to Talking about the under-populated look at the pictures and talk about what places. they can see. -Ss work in groups of three or four to answer the questions in the textbook.

FF IC IA L

4. Consolidation - Retell the main content of the lesson. 5. Homework - Redo all the exercises above and do exercises in the workbook. - Prepare: REVIEW 4: Language/ P68-textbook. Ngày 06 tháng 05 năm 2019

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÝ DUYỆT

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------WEEK 36: Pre: 07/ 05/ 2019 Te: ...../ 05/ 2019 Period 103: REVIEW 4

ẠY

KÈ

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to revise the language they have studied and the skills they have practiced in units 10 - 12.They can make sentences using them and do some exercises in the form/tense of the verbs, pronunciation, vocab, grammar from unit 10 to unit 12 - Vocabulary: Revise the vocabulary they have learnt from unit 10 to unit 12. - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: + The future continuous and the future simple passive. + WILL and possessive pronouns. + MORE/ LESS/ FEWER and tag questions. 2. Skills: Listening, speaking and writing skills and skills in doing exercises. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to revise the language from unit 10 to unit 12 and practice with them. - Know the importance of revision and need to study harder. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. 335

FF IC IA L

- Independent, self-confident, self- control, responsibility and discipline. - The ability to use English to solve problems in topics that they’ve learnt in unit 10, 11, 12.Doing exercises on pronunciation, vocabulary, grammar and everyday English. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work, situations, translation, discussion, and examples. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbooks, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Teacher checks students’ homework. - Collect some Ss’ writing to mark. 3. New lesson A- warm- up: *Brainstorming: -Have Ss work in 2 teams to list the main grammar points they’ve learn in units 1012. - Ss discuss in groups -Teacher checks with whole class.

The future continuous

What you have learnt in units 10-12?

Possessive pronouns

KÈ

Tag question

B- Presentation:

MAIN CONTENTS. LANGUAGE.

ẠY

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES.

Ex 1- P68 - Remind Ss of the rules for rising or falling intonation in a question. Play the recording for Ss listening. - Ss work individually. - T plays the recording again. Ss listen and repeat. Ex 2- P68 - Ask Ss to look at the sentences and 336

I. Pronunciation 1. Listen to the conversation and mark the rising or falling intonation for each question.

II.Vocabulary 2. Form of suitable word from the word stem to fill in the sentences.

Key: 1. solution 2. overcrowded/ crowded 3. driverless 4. inventions 5. healthier

FF IC IA L

3. Check A,B,C to complete sentences. Key: 1. A2. B 3. A4. B 5. A

III. Grammar 4. Use the verbs in brackets in the simple future active. or the simple future passive to complete the sentences.

decide what kind of word is needed for each sentence (a noun, a verb, an adjective…) - Have Ss look for clues. - Ss do the exercise independently. Ss then share their answer with a partner. - T checks and writes the answers on the board. Ex 3- P68 - T does a small revision of difficult vocabulary which appears in the exercise. - Ask Ss to do this exercise individually. - Ss do the task individually then give the answers. - T quickly checks students’ answers. Ex 4- P68 1. Transferring the learning task. - T elicits from Ss the form in active and passive of will. - Ask Ss to do the task individually. 2. Doing the task. - Ss do the task individually. - T goes around and gives help if any. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Call a student to do the exercise on the board. - One St write the answers on the board while others remarks. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. - T checks then gives feedback. Ex 5- P68 - Ask Ss to complete this task independently - Ss do the exercise independently. - T writes the order on the board. - Ask Ss to practice the conversation in pairs

ẠY

KÈ

Key: 1. will fly 2. will be used 3. will be demolished 4. will have 5. will invent

IV. Everyday English 5. Put the sentences in the right order to form a conversation. Key: 1. c 6. f

2. g 7. h

3. a 8. d

4. i 9. j

5. e 10. b

4. Consolidation - Correct the exercises if necessary. 5. Homework - Prepare Review 4: Skills/ P69- textbook - Do the test yourself in textbook -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pre: 08/ 05/ 2019 337

Te: ...../ 05/ 2019 Period 104: REVIEW 4 (cont)

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

I/ Objectives 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ss will be able to revise the languages Ss have learnt and the skills they have practised since Unit 10 to unit 12 then do some exercises about the four skills. - Vocabulary: Revise the vocabulary they have learnt from unit 10 to unit 12. - Phonetics: The way to pronounce the words in the lesson. - Grammar: + The future continuous and the future simple passive. + WILL and possessive pronouns. + MORE/ LESS/ FEWER and tag questions. 2. Skills: + Speaking: Play a game to find out the word. + Writing: Write a description of an ideal means of transport. + Listening: Listen to the conversation and complete the tasks + Reading: Read the passage about HUNGER and complete the tasks.. 3. Attitude: - To teach Ss to revise the skills from unit 10 to unit 12 and practice with them. - Know the importance of revision and need to study harder. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Communicative approach. - Independent, self-confident, self- control, responsibility and discipline. - The ability to use English to solve problems in topics that they’ve learnt in unit 10, 11, 12.Doing exercises on skills: reading, speaking, writing and listening. II/ Teaching methods and techniques. - In the classroom. - Eliciting, pair work, group work, situations, translation, discussion, and examples. III/ Preparation. 1. Teacher’s: + Materials: textbooks, visual aids. + Equipment: CD player 2. Students’: + Textbooks, notebooks. IV/ Teaching procedure. 1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - During the lesson 3. New lesson A- warm- up: *Chatting: - Ask Ss to talk about the problems of living in an overcrowded area - Have Ss work in 2 teams and list the problems they know. - Teacher checks with whole class. B- Presentation: 338

T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES.

MAIN CONTENTS.

FF IC IA L

SKILLS I. Reading 1. Which of the causes of hunger below do you think is the most serious in your country? Tick it.

2. Read the text and choose the best answer for each question.

Key: 1. A 2. B 3. B

II. Speaking 3. Game transport teleporter

hunger energy

sunlight pollute

ride coal

ẠY

KÈ

Ex 1- P69 - Ss do individually and check their answers with a partner before giving their answers to T. - T checks Ss’ answers, Ss may have different answers to this brainstorming questions T can make option 3 easier by giving them examples like drought, flood, hurricane..... Ex 2- P69 1. Transferring the learning task. - Ask Ss to read the text carefully and choose the best answer for each question. 2. Doing the task. - Ss read the passage and choose the best answer for each question independently. 3. Reporting the task result and discuss. - Ss give their own answers aloud - Have Ss explain where they find the clues to the answers. 4. Giving the remarks to their doing the task. -T checks Ss’ answers then confirms the correct answers Ex 3- P69 - Explain the rule to Ss - Divide Ss into pairs to play the games - Ss play the game in pairs. The pair who successfully complete the task in the shortest time will win the game. - When the game is finished, T can correct any wrong intonation of questions that Ss make during the competition. Ex 4- P69 - Ask Ss to listen and choose which is the closest in meaning to the word “footprint” - Ss listen and choose the correct answer. - T makes sure that Ss understand the meaning of the word “footprint” by asking them to give some examples. -T confirms the correct answer. Ex 5- P69 - Ask Ss to carefully read the questions first. - T plays the recording once for Ss to listen. Play the recording again for Ss to write 339

III. Listening 4. Which word A,B,C do you think is closest in meaning to the word “footprint”? Key: A 5. Listen to the conversation and answer the questions. Key: 1. He is searching for the meaning of “footprint” 2. No, it doesn’t. 3. Yes, he does. 4. There will be a lot of greenery around you. IV. Writing 6. Imagine an ideal means of

FF IC IA L

down their answers. Announce the answers transport for your area. Write a to Ss short description of it. - Ss listen and write the answers. Example writing: - T checks and gives feedback. We live in Ba Vi, a mountainous area to the north of Ha Noi. Our Ex 6- P69 - Set up the writing activity. road system is not very good so it - Ss brainstorm on the means and then used to be quite difficult to travel organise their ideas and write. around. Now we make it easier with - Encourage Ss to be imaginative and a new kind means of transport. We creative. call it Super Kite. It looks like a kite - T checks and corrects serious mistakes. but it has 3 wheels. It uses wind and If time does not allow, assign it as water… homework. 4. Consolidation - Correct the exercises if necessary. 5. Homework - Do exercises in workbooks and prepare for the 2nd test term. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

WEEK 37 Pre: 16/ 05/ 2019 Te: 16/ 05/ 2019

P105th: Test for the second term

ẠY

KÈ

I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - After the lesson, students will be able to check their knowledge by doing exercise and use language in situation correctly and fluently. - Teacher will be able to test students’ knowledge in language and language skills and then draw out the most suitable method for teaching and learning. 2. Skills: - To drill Ss’ skills in doing the written test. 3. Attitude: - Teach Ss to be strict and honest. 4. Qualities and abilities needed: - Being able todo the exercises well. - Ss love the subject and be aware of revising to do well for the final test. II. Teaching methods and techniques. - Checking Ss’ understanding. III. Preparation 1. Teacher’s: - Materials: Paper tests. - Equipment: No. 2. Students’: No. IV. Teaching procedure 340

1. Class organization - Attendance: 7A: ....../ 37 - Absence:.......................................................................... 7B: ....../ 33........................................................................... 7C: ....../ 35........................................................................... 2. Oral test - Check Ss’ preparation. 3. New lesson

FF IC IA L

A- QUESTIONS:

(Đề kiểm tra của Phòng giáo dục)

B- ANSWERS AND MARK:

4. Consolidation. - Collect Ss’ papers and remark if any. 5. Homework. - Redo these questions at home.

Ngày …… tháng 05 năm 2019.

KÈ

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÍ DUYỆT

ẠY

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

ĐỀ CHẴN

I. Chọn từ có phần gạch chân phát âm khác với các từ còn (1.0 pt) 1. A. worked B. listened C. played D. enjoyed 2. A. rest B. garden C. help D. identify 3. A. give B. game C. go D. large 4. A. stream B. cream C. leather D. dream 341

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

II. Chọn A, B, C hoặc D để hoàn thành các câu sau. (2.5 pts) 1. .................... do the buses run? - Every ten minutes A. How B. How many C. How often D. What time 2. ..................... is a renewable source of energy. A. Coal B. Oil C. Gas D. Wind 3. Newton ................... scientific books when he was a boy. A. used to read B. has read C. had read D. used to reading 4. ....................getting up early, I still missed the bus. A. Though B. Although C. In spite of D. Because of 5. At 7. 00 tomorrow, you ................... to school. A. cycle B. will cycle C. will be cycling D. will be cycled 6. The film was so boring. ........................., Jack saw it from beginning to end. A. Therefore B. However C. Although D. Despite 7. I’m sure you’ll find the film ...................... . A. amuse B. amusement C. amused D. amusing 8. We will go on holiday with some friends of .......................... . A. ours B. our C. us D. we 9. The University of Indochina .................. in Ha Noi in 1906. A. built B. has built C. was built D. has been built 10. I ……..playing boad games interesting because I can play them with my friends. A. think B. find C. say D. tell III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc (1.0pt) 1. At this time next week, we (1. study) ......................................... English grammar. 2. My father used (2. spend) .............................. a lot of time planting trees and flowers. 3. We (3. study ) .......................................... almost every lesson in this book so far. 4. Nuclear power (4. replace )………………........in the future . IV. Cho dạng đúng của từ in hoa để hoàn thành câu (0.5 pt) 1. There will be a ………………. of energy in the near future SHORT 2. Vesak Day is a …………. festival for thse who follow Buddhism. RELIGION IV. Tìm lỗi cần sửa trong số A, B, C hoặc D. ( Mỗi câu 1 lỗi) (1.0 pt) 1. They really enjoy the disco, do they ? A B C D 2. The meetingdoesn’t be heldtomorrow morning. A B C D 3. If John study hard, hewill pass the final exam. A B C D 4. Even though it rained heavily, however he could come to class on time. A B C D VI. Đọc đoạn văn và trả lời câu hỏi (2.0 pts) The Vietnamese people celebrate the New Year (Tet) on the first three days of the January according to the lunar calendar. On these days, they often paint and decorate their houses. They buy a lot of fruit, flowers and make many delicious dishes. They make sticky rice cakes because they are their traditional cakes. People who work a long distance away try to get home on these days. On the first day of Tet, people often offer these good fruit and food to their ancestors and after that the whole families enjoy the food. They also visit pagodas, temples, 342

FF IC IA L

their relatives and friends. Children are very happy to get lucky money from the adults. There are a lot of traditional games and contests at Tet such as rice-cooking, fight-making, waterfetching, buffalo-fighting, etc. They are really interesting. People are playing and enjoying themselves very much on this occasion. 1. When do the Vietnamese people celebrate the New Year (Tet)? 2. What do they often do on these days? 3. How do children feel when they get lucky money from the adults at Tet? 4. Name traditional games and contests at Tet. VII. Viết lại các câu sau sao cho nghĩa của câu không đổi (2.0pts) 1. We began studying English in 2016 . -> We have ................................................................................................... 2. Although she’s a girl, she plays football as well as any boy. (However) ->........................................................................................................................... 3. The Elephant Race Festival will be held in Don Village next year. (Make question for the underlined part) -> ............................................................................................................................... 4. They will use solar energy to protect the environment. -> Solar energy………………………………........……………..............

ĐỀ LẺ

ẠY

KÈ

I. Chọn từ có phần gạch chân khác với các từ còn (1.0 pt) 1. A. watched B. looked C. stopped D. carried 2. A. dance B. lake C. lane D. shake 3. A. thunder B. themselves C. thank D. think 4. A. head B. heavy C. weak D. bread II. Chọn A, B, C hoặc D để hoàn thành các câu sau. (2.5 pts) 1.The end of the film was so ................... A. moving B. moved C. move D. moveable 2. A friend of .................... is coming to stay with me next month. A. me B. my C. I D. mine 3. These old buildings .................. in this town in 1999. A. built B. has built C. were built D. was built 4. I ................... doing aerobics is good for our health. A. think B. find C. say D. tell 5. ....................... is La Tomatina celebrated? – Every August. A. Where B. Why C. When D. Which 6. ..................... is a renewable source of energy. A. Coal B. Oil C. Gas D. Wind 7. My brother ................... newspapers in English when he was at primary school. A. used to read B. has read C. had read D. used to reading 8. ................ the silly story, many people enjoyed the film. A. Although B. In spite of C. However D. Nevertheless 9. At 9.00 tomorrow, my mother ................... to Da Nang City. A. travel B. will travel C. will be traveled D. will be traveling 10. The film was so boring. ........................., Jack saw it from beginning to end. 343

KÈ

FF IC IA L

A. Therefore B. However C. Although D. Despite III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc (1.0pt) 1. How long you ( 1. learn ) ................................... English?. 2. Solar power (2. use )………………........in the future. 3. At this time next month, they (3. travel) ........................... to Ho Chi Minh City. 4. I usually (4. spend) .............................. two or three hours reading books. IV. Cho dạng đúng của từ in hoa để hoàn thành câu (0.5 pt) 1. Thomas Edison is one of the greatest ………………. in history. INVENT 2. I like travelling by motorbike, but it is …….…….. in bad weather PLEASE V. Tìm lỗi cần sửa trong số A, B, C hoặc D. ( Mỗi câu 1 lỗi) (1.0 pt) 1. If Lan don’t study hard, shewill fail her exam. A B C D 2. Even though his leg was broken, but he managed to get out of the car. A B C D 3. Miss Annadoesn’t like pop music, do she? A B C D 4. Many trees are planting around our school every year. A B C D VI. Đọc đoạn văn và trả lời câu hỏi (2.0 pts) The Vietnamese people celebrate the New Year (Tet) on the first three days of the January according to the lunar calendar. On these days, they often paint and decorate their houses. They buy a lot of fruit, flowers and make many delicious dishes. They make sticky rice cakes because they are their traditional cakes. People who work a long distance away try to get home on these days. On the first day of Tet, people often offer these good fruit and food to their ancestors and after that the whole families enjoy the food. They also visit pagodas, temples, their relatives and friends. Children are very happy to get lucky money from the adults. There are a lot of traditional games and contests at Tet such as rice-cooking, fight-making, waterfetching, buffalo-fighting, etc. They are really interesting. People are playing and enjoying themselves very much on this occasion. 1.When do the Vietnamese people celebrate the New Year (Tet)? 2. What do they often do on the first day of Tet? 3. How do children feel when they get lucky money from the adults at Tet? 4. Name traditional games and contests at Tet. VII. Viết lại các câu sau sao cho nghĩa của câu không đổi (2.0pts)

ẠY

1.People in the countryside will use much biogas in the future. -> Much ...................................................................................................... 2. They decorate their classroom with the slogans on saving energy. (Make a question) -> ………………………………………………………………............ 3. Tom was not feeling well. However, she went to school. ( Because ) ................................................................................................................ 4. They started working as workers in this factory two years ago. -> They have ................................................................................................... 344

B- ANSWERS AND MARK: ĐỀ CHẴN

I. Chọn từ có phần gạch chân khác với các từ còn (1.0 pt) 1. A 2. B 3. D

4. C

II. Chọn A, B, C hoặc D để hoàn thành các câu sau. (2.5 pts) 1. C 2. D 3. A 4. C 6. B 7. D 8. A 9. C

FF IC IA L

5. C 10. B

III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc (1.0pt) 1. will be studying 2. to spend 3. have studied

4.will be replaced

IV. Cho dạng đúng của từ in hoa để hoàn thành câu (0.5 pt) 1. shortage 2. religious V. Tìm lỗi sai trong số A, B, C hoặc D. ( Mỗi câu 1 lỗi) (1.0 pt) 1. D 2. B 3. A 4. B

VI. Đọc đoạn văn và trả lời câu hỏi (2.0 pts) 1. The Vietnamese people/ They celebrate the New Year (Tet on the first three days of the January according to the lunar calendar. 2. They often paint and decorate their houses, buy a lot of fruit, flowers and make many delicious dishes. 3. Children are very happy to get lucky money from the adults at Tet. 4. Traditional games and contests at Tet/ They are rice-cooking, fight-making, waterfetching, buffalo-fighting, etc... VII. Viết lại các câu sau sao cho nghĩa của câu không đổi (2.0pts) 1. ->We have studied English since 2016. 2. -> She’s a girl. However, she plays football as well as any boy. 3. ->Where will the Elephant Race Festival be held next year. 4. -> Solar energy will be used to protect the environment.

KÈ

ĐỀ LẺ

4. C

ẠY

I. Chọn từ có phần gạch chân khác với các từ còn (1.0 pt) 1. D 2. A 3. B II. Chọn A, B, C hoặc D để hoàn thành các câu sau. (2.5 pts) 1. A 2. D 3. C 4. B 6. D 7. A 8. B 9. D

III. Cho dạng đúng của động từ trong ngoặc (1.0pt) 3. will be traveling 1. have you learned/ learnt 2. will be used IV. Cho dạng đúng của từ in hoa để hoàn thành câu (0.5 pt) 1. inventors 2. unpleasant 345

5. C 10. B

4. spend

V. Tìm lỗi sai trong số A, B, C hoặc D. ( Mỗi câu 1 lỗi) (1.0 pt) 1. A 2. C 3. D 4. B

VII. Viết lại các câu sau sao cho nghĩa của câu không đổi (2.0pts)

FF IC IA L

1. -> Much biogas in the countryside will be used in the future. 2. -> What do they decorate their classroom on saving energy? 3. -> Because Tom was not feeling well, she went to school. 4.-> They have worked as workers in this factory for two years.

4. Consolidation. - Collect Ss’ papers and remark if any. 5. Homework. - Redo these questions at home.

Ngày …… tháng 05 năm 2018.

T.T CHUYÊN MÔN KÍ DUYỆT

Trần Thị Thanh Trà

ẠY

KÈ

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

346

KÈ ẠY D

Question No Mark Writing

Odd one out 2 0.5

Y U Q Choose the corect answer(s) Films/ festivals/ traffic

Language focus Vocabulary

FF IC IA L O

Cấp độ thấp TN TL

Tổng

Cấp độ cao TN TL

T/F? Films 4 1

Phonetics Question No Mark

Question No Mark

TL TN

Vận dụng

TN Listening

Matrix Thông hiểu

Nhận biết

Nội dung

8 2

4 1 1% Stress

2 0.5

4 1 10 %

Give the correct form of verbs: passive/ present perfect/ simple past/ present continuous 4 1 Rewrite the sentences 347

Give the form of words Films/ festiva ls/ traffic 4 1 Rewr ite

16 4 40%

Used to/ despite/ though/ question words

FF IC IA L

Question No Mark

the sente nces Used to/ despi te/ thou gh/ quest ion word s 1 0.5

Read the text then answer the questionsfestivals 4 2

4 20 20%

Question No Mark

13 4.0 40%

11 3 30%

Y U

12 3 30%

Total Q No Total marks Rate

I. Choose the correct answer(s)- 3pts 1. He didn’t ............................jogging in the evening. A. use to went B. used go C. used to go

D. use to go

KÈ

2. He thinks elephants are ...................animals.

ẠY

A. fascinated B. fascinating C. fascinates D. fascinate 3. Public ................... in my town is good and cheap. A.travel B. journey C. tour D. transport 4. When there is a traffic jam, it ................... me a very long time to go home. A. takes B. costs C.spends D. lasts 5.......................... they spent a lot of money on the film, it wasn’t a big success. A. Nevertheless B. However C. When D. Although 6. Mr.Bean’s Holiday is a...............film. I was laughing from beginning to the end. A. moving B. scary C. violent D. hilarious 7. ....................does the teacher say La Tomatina sounds unusual? - Because people throw tomatoes at each other for one hour at the festival. 348

4 2 20%

Reading

3 1.5

32 10 100

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

A. What B. When C. Why D. How 8. I went to the cinema with my friends yesterday ...................feeling very tired. A. although B. So C. In spite of D. but * Which word has different stress pattern: 9. A. succeed B. happen C. replace D.attend 10. A. invite B. discuss C.circle D.combine * Odd one out; 11. A. careful B. yard C.arm D. harbor 12. A. filled B.wanted C.played D. opened II. Give the correct form of the verbs (1pt) 1.They (not go)................................to the cinema last year. 2. I used to (stay)….................................. up late to watch football matches. 3. The festival of the Sun (celebrate)............................ every year. 4. She (listen ) .......................................... to music for a long time. 1.................................... 3.................................... 2.................................... 4.................................... III. Give the correct word form (1pt) 1. His speech was very long and very................................................. BORE 2. The Christmas season is also called the ………. season. FESTIVAL 3. Despite careful …., they had a lot of difficulties in making the film. PREPARE 4. I don’t think Stallone is a very good … although he was very good in the Rocky films. ACT 1.................................... 3.................................... 2.................................... 4.................................... IV. Rewrite these sentences (2 pt) 1. Linda doesn’t live with her parents anymore.(USED) ..................................................................................................................................... 2. The film begins with a terrible disaster. It has a happy ending. (DESPITE) ..................................................................................................................................... 3.I love music, so I go to the music festival almost every summer. (Make question for the undelined part) ..................................................................................................................................... 4.Althoughthey spent millions of dollars on making the film, it wasn’t as successful as expected. ( However) .....................................................................................................................................

V. Read the passage and answer the questions. (2pt) The Vietnamese people celebrate the New Year (Tet) on the first three days of the January according to the lunar calendar. On these days, they often paint and decorate their houses. They buy a lot of fruit, flowers and make many delicious dishes. They make sticky rice cakes because they are their traditional cakes. People who work a long distance away try to get home on these days. On the first day of Tet, people often offer these good fruit and food to their ancestors and after that the whole families enjoy the food. They also visit pagodas, temples, 349

FF IC IA L

their relatives and friends. Children are very happy to get money from the adults. There are a lot of traditional games and contests at Tet such as rice-cooking, fight-making, water-fetching, buffalo-fighting, etc. They are really interesting. People are playing and enjoying themselves very much on this occasion 1. When do the Vietnamese people celebrate the New Year (Tet)? 2. Do people often paint and decorate their houses after Tet? 3. What do people buy for Tet? 4.Do the adults give their children lucky money?

VII. Listen to the tape. Then do True/ False exercise. Correct the false sentences (1pt) Statements T/ F? Correct 1 Duong suggests watching a film tonight. ……… ………………… 2 Duong find cinema informationon the Internet. ……… ………………… 3 Mai doesn’t want to see White Sands. ……… ………………… 4 Mai and Duong decide to watchCrazy Coconut. ……… …………………

I. Choose the correct answer(s)- 3pts 1. Tung used.....................a horse when he was a child. A. ride B. to ride C. riding

D. was ride

KÈ

2. This is a....................movie. It makes me laugh a lot. A. hilarious B. boring C. disappointing D. frightening 3. Yesterday Rick and Peter ..................... round west lake. It took them an hour. A. cycle B.cycles C.cycling D.cycled 4. Let’s go to the Victor Cinema. I’m sure you’ll find the film ...................... A. excites B. excite C. excited D. exciting 5. I enjoy the film on TV yesterday evening ..................... nobody in my family liked it. A. so B. yet C. although D. in spite of

ẠY

6. ................................. is Burning Festival held? - It's held every year. A. Which B. Where C.What D. How often 7. A ..................... is a film that tries to make audiences laugh. A. sci-fi B. documentary C. comedy D. horror

8. I was.....................to learn that the director of that gripping film has won the first prize.

A. interest B. interests C. interested * Which word has different stress pattern: 9. A. reward B. country C.samba 10. A. succeed B. happen C. replace * Odd one out; 350

D. interesting D.music D.attend

FF IC IA L

11. A. acting B.actor C.address D. action 12. Liked B. Washed C. Loved D. Jumped A. II. Give the correct word form (1pt) 1. I'm …………………. Let's go out for drink somewhere.. BORE 2. A lot of ……… and artistic activities are held as part of the Flower Festival in Da Lat CULTURE 3. Mr Van used to ride his motorbike......................... DANGER 4. There were too many fights in the action film. It was too ………. VIOLENCE 1.................................... 3.................................... 2.................................... 4.................................... III. Give the correct form of the verbs (1pt) 1. They didn’t use to (go)………..................….. to the cinema every Sunday. 2. My mother (wash)......................... clothes by hand in the past 3. We must (obey) ……………….. traffic signals . 4. Listen! Someone ( sing )........................................an English song. 1.................................... 3.................................... 2.................................... 4.................................... IV. Rewrite these sentences (1pt) 1. We cycled to school two years ago. ( USED) ..................................................................................................................................... 2. They watched films on DVD all night. They had to work the next day. ( IN SPITE OF) .....................................................................................................................................

ẠY

KÈ

3. We went to the Flower Festival in Da Lat last year.( Make question for the undelined part) ..................................................................................................................................... 4.The film didn’t receive good reviews from critics. Nevertheless, many people went to see it. (ALTHOUGH) ..................................................................................................................................... V. Read the passage and answer the questions. (2pt) The Vietnamese people celebrate the New Year (Tet) on the first three days of the January according to the lunar calendar. On these days, they often paint and decorate their houses. They buy a lot of fruit, flowers and make many delicious dishes. They make sticky rice cakes because they are their traditional cakes. People who work a long distance away try to get home on these days. On the first day of Tet, people often offer these good fruit and food to their ancestors and after that the whole families enjoy the food. They also visit pagodas, temples, their relatives and friends. Children are very happy to get money from the adults. There are a lot of traditional games and contests at Tet such as rice-cooking, fight-making, water-fetching, buffalo-fighting, etc. They are really interesting. People are playing and enjoying themselves very much on this occasion 1 Do The Vietnamese people celebrate the New Year (Tet) on the first four days of the January according to the lunar calendar? 2. What do people often do with their houses ? 351

3. Do they often buy sticky rice cakes? 4. What do people often do on the first day of Tet?

4.Consolidation 5.Homework 4. Practice and consolidation: - T. collects the test papers and remarks the lesson 5. Subsequent activities: 4.Consolidation 5.Homework - Prepare the next lesson: UNIT 10: GETTING STARTED

FF IC IA L

VII. Listen to the tape. Then do True/ False exercise . Correct the false sentences. (1pt) Statements T/ Correct F? 1 Duong suggests staying at home tonight. ……. ………………… 2 Duong find cinema informationin a newspaper. ……. ………………… 3 Mai wants to see White Sands. ……. ………………… 4 Mai and Duong decide to watchWhite Sands. ……. …………………

TỔ TRƯỞNG DUYỆT GIÁO ÁN

Cao Thị Bích Liên

ẠY

KÈ

Đã KT, ngày 27 tháng 2 năm 2017

352

FF IC IA L

Lesson 82:TEST CORRECTION I. Objectives: After the lesson students need: Knowledge: know the mistakes they’ve made in the test and correct their mistakes. Skills: reading, writing,..... Attitude: Realize their mistakes and need to learn more carefully. Competences: know their good and weak points in each skill. II. Preparations: - Materials: Lesson plan, test paper. - Equipments: stereo, tape English 7. III. Teaching process: 1. Intended test and evaluation: (4 minutes) Homework correction 2. Warm-up: (2 minutes) STORE INSTALL Slap the board ESCAPE

CRACK

ẠY

KÈ

3. New lesson: (35 minutes) T AND SS’ ACTIVITIES MAIN CONTENTS Activity 1: Giving remarks ( 5 minutes) Aims: Advantages: Help SS to know the result of - Some Ss have good knowledge and know the ways the whole class and know their to do the test well. main weakness that they need to - The letters are written clearly, the tests are wellovercome. organized. Process: Limits: - T: gives the remarks of the - Some Ss are too lazy, do not get enough the main whole class and compares with new words and grammar. the other class in the same - The letters are too bad to read. grade. - T: gives outthe test paper to SS Conclusion: All SS can know the result of the other class as well as theirs. Activity 2: Listen (5 minutes) Aims: VI. Listen. Do True/ False. Correct To help SS to know their results of listening false sentences ( 1p) 0.25 for each and help them to correct their incorrect TEST 1A answer. 1. T 353

FF IC IA L

Process: 2. F (Internet->paper) - T plays the tape twice and asks SS to 3. T correct their wrong answer. 4. F( decide-> don’t decide) - T gives compliments to the excellent TEST 1B students and points out the limits of some 1. F( staying at home-> watching a weak Ss. film) Conclusion: 2. T Almost all the students can understand their 3. F (wants->doesn’t want) good and weak points. 4. F ( decide-> don’t decide) Activity 2: Check vocabulary / structures (10 minutes) Aims: TEST 1A To help SS to know their results I. Choose the correct answers ( 0.25 for each) of vocabulary and structures and 1.D 2.B 3. D 4. A 5. D 6. D help them to correct their 7.C 8.C 9.B 10.C 11.A 12.B incorrect answer. Process: II. Give the correct form - Ask SS to go to the board to of words( 0.25/each) give the answer. - T: explains if necessary. 1/ didn’t go 2/ stay 3/ is celebrated 4/ has listened III. Give the correct form of verbs. (0.25 for each) 1/ boring 2/ festive 3/ preparation 4/ actor

TEST 1B I. Choose the correct answer ( 0.25 for each) 1.B 2.A 3. D 4. D 5. C 6. D 7.C 8.C 9.A 10.B 11.C 12C

ẠY

KÈ

II. Give the correct form of word(0.25 for each) 1/ bored 2/ cutural 3/ dangerously 4/ violent Conclusion: Almost all the students can III.Give the correct form of verbs . (0.25 for each) 2/ washed understand their good and weak 1/ go 3/ obey 4/ is singing points. Activity 3: Check writing (10 minutes) Aims: IV. Rewrite these sentences: 0.5 for each. To help SS to know their results TEST 1A of writing and help them to 1, → Linda used to live with her parents. correct their incorrect answer. 2, → Despite beginning with terrible disaster, the Process: film has a happy ending. - Ask 2 SS to go to the board to 3, → How often do you go to the music festival? give the answer. 4, → They spent millions of dollars on making the - T: explains if necessary. film. However,it wasn’t as successful as expected. TEST 1B 354

FF IC IA L

1, → We used to cycle to school two years ago. 2,→ In spite of having to work the next day, they watched films on DVD all night. 3,→ When did you go to the Flower Festival in Da Conclusion: Almost all the students can Lat? understand their good and weak 4 → Athough the film didn’t receive good reviews points from critics, many people went to see it.

Activity 4: Check reading (5 minutes) Aims: V. Read the passage and answer the questions below To help SS to know their results ( 0.25 for each) of reading and help them to TEST 1A correct their incorrect answer. 1. The Vietnamese people celebrate the New Year Process: (Tet) on the first three days of the January according - Ask 2 SS to go to the board to to the lunar calendar. give the answer. 2. No, they don’t. - T: explains if necessary. 3. They buy a lot of fruit, flowers.

KÈ

4. Yes, they do. TEST 1B 1. No, they don’t. 2. They often paint and decorate their houses. 3. No, they don’t. 4. On the first day of Tet, people often offer these good fruit and food to their ancestors and after that the whole families enjoy the food.

ẠY

Conclusion: Almost all the students can understand their good and weak points.

4. Practice and consolidation: (3 minutes) - Teacher reminds Ss to study harder, more carefully. 5. Subsequent activities (2 minutes) - Prepare the new lesson : Unit 10: COMMUNICATION ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Preparation day: 8/ 3/ 2017 355

Class 7E

Teaching day

Attendance

Absence

ẠY

KÈ

FF IC IA L

THEME 4: VISIONS OF THE FUTURE

356